diff options
Diffstat (limited to '77820-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 77820-0.txt | 13146 |
1 files changed, 13146 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/77820-0.txt b/77820-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..085d27e --- /dev/null +++ b/77820-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,13146 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77820 *** +Transcriber’s Note: In keeping with the author’s note that “Such +misspellings as a Spanish scholar will readily recognize as the blunders +of the Spanish printer I have not thought it necessary to notice”, errors +in the Spanish parts of the text have been left as printed. Some evident +blunders of the English printer have, however, been corrected. + + + + + WORKS ISSUED BY + The Hakluyt Society. + + SELECT + LETTERS OF + CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS, + ETC. + + M.DCCC.LXX. + + + + +INSTRUCTIONS TO BINDER. + + +Portrait of S. Christopher to face Title. + +Herrera’s map and Bahama Islands, modern, opposite each other, between +pp. lx and lxi; the first at top, the second at bottom, both reading the +same way. + +Juan de la Cosa’s map to face page lxiii. + + + + +[Illustration] + + + + + SELECT + LETTERS + OF + CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS, + WITH OTHER ORIGINAL DOCUMENTS, + RELATING TO HIS + FOUR VOYAGES + TO + THE NEW WORLD. + + TRANSLATED AND EDITED BY + R. H. MAJOR, F.S.A., ETC., + KEEPER OF THE DEPARTMENT OF MAPS AND CHARTS IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM, + AND HON. SEC. OF THE ROYAL GEOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY. + + Second Edition. + + “Tu spiegherai, Colombo, a un novo polo + Lontane sì le fortunate antenne, + Ch’ a pena seguirà con gli occhi il volo + La Fama ch’ ha mille occhi e mille penne. + Canti ella Alcide e Bacco, e di te solo + Basti a’ posteri tuoi ch’alquanto accenne; + Chè quel poco darà lunga memoria + Di poema dignissima e d’ istoria.” + + _Tasso.—Gerusalemme Liberata._ Canto xv, 32. + + LONDON: + PRINTED FOR THE HAKLUYT SOCIETY. + M.DCCC.LXX. + + T. RICHARDS, 37, GREAT QUEEN STREET. + + + + +COUNCIL OF THE HAKLUYT SOCIETY. + + +SIR RODERICK IMPEY MURCHISON, BART., K.C.B., G.C.St.S., F.R.S., F.R.G.S., +D.C.L., Mem. Imp. Acad. Sc. St. Petersburgh, Corr. Mem. Inst. Fr. etc., +etc., PRESIDENT. + + REAR-ADMIRAL C. R. DRINKWATER BETHUNE, C.B., } VICE-PRESIDENTS. + THE RIGHT HON. SIR DAVID DUNDAS, } + REV. G. P. BADGER, F.R.G.S. + J. BARROW, ESQ., F.R.S. + E. H. BUNBURY, ESQ. + LORD ALFRED CHURCHILL. + REAR-ADMIRAL R. COLLINSON, C.B. + SIR WALTER ELLIOTT, K.S.I. + GENERAL C. FOX. + W. E. FRERE, ESQ. + CAPTAIN J. G. GOODENOUGH, R.N. + CHARLES GREY, ESQ. + EGERTON VERNON HARCOURT, ESQ. + JOHN WINTER JONES, ESQ., F.S.A. + R. H. MAJOR, ESQ., F.S.A. + SIR CHARLES NICHOLSON, BART. + SIR WILLIAM STIRLING MAXWELL, BART. + MAJOR-GENERAL SIR HENRY C. RAWLINSON, K.C.B. + THE LORD STANLEY OF ALDERLEY. + + CLEMENTS R. MARKHAM, ESQ., HONORARY SECRETARY. + + + + + TO + THE HONOURED AND BELOVED + MEMORY + OF HIS EXCELLENCY + THE COUNT DE LAVRADIO, + LATE + ENVOY EXTRAORDINARY AND MINISTER PLENIPOTENTIARY OF + HIS MOST FAITHFUL MAJESTY + AT THE COURT OF ST. JAMES’S, + ETC., ETC., ETC., + A WARM APPRECIATOR OF + THE EXALTED MERITS OF + COLUMBUS, + THE FOLLOWING PAGES + ARE REVERENTLY INSCRIBED BY + THE EDITOR. + + + + +PREFACE. + + +It has been thought desirable by some of the leading members of our +Council that I should avail myself of the opportunity offered by this +second Edition of the _Select Letters of Columbus_, to lay before the +Society a correspondence in which I have endeavoured to vindicate the +character of the Society’s early productions, and especially the first +edition of this work, from a most unjustifiable attack made upon them by +Mr. Froude in the _Westminster Review_ in 1852, and _repeated_ in the +second volume of that gentleman’s _Short Studies on Great Subjects_, +printed in 1867, and _reprinted_ in a popular edition in the same year. +The letters themselves will convey to the reader the whole of the facts, +minus only the bitterness and ferocity of Mr. Froude’s attack. + +_The Athenæum, July 13th, 1867._ + + “British Museum, July 3rd, 1867. + + “Will you allow me to appeal against a wrong done to the + Hakluyt Society in general, and to myself in particular, in a + work now very extensively read? + + “In the second volume of Mr. Froude’s _Short Studies on + Great Subjects_, at page 102, is an article on ‘England’s + Forgotten Worthies,’ in which the author makes an attack on + the Hakluyt Society, the bitter expressions of which need not + be repeated here. It is headed by the titles of three of the + Society’s early publications, and the first he states to be + _The Observations of Sir Richard Hawkins, Knt., in his Voyage + in the South Sea in 1593_. Reprinted from the edition of 1622, + and _edited by R. H. Major, Esq., of the British Museum_; + whereas I had nothing to do with the editing of that work. + This done, at page 108, Mr. Froude says: ‘_The Editor of the + Letters of Columbus_ (which I did edit in 1847) _apologizes + for the rudeness of the old seaman’s phraseology. Columbus, he + tells us, was not so great a master of the pen as of the art of + navigation. We are to make excuses for him. We are put on our + guard, and, warned not to be offended, before we are introduced + to the sublime record of sufferings under which a man of the + highest order was staggering towards the end of his earthly + calamities; although the inarticulate fragments in which his + thought breaks out from him, are strokes of natural art, by + the side of which literary pathos is poor and meaningless._’ + I warmly deny that I apologized for Columbus’s language. So + far from it, I repeatedly expressed my sympathy with and + admiration of his manly and touching record of his sufferings. + What I did apologize for was any mischievous result which might + possibly have accrued, though I do not think it did accrue, to + my own diction from that occasional want of connectedness in + the original which I had to contend with in translating. The + two things are manifestly different, and it is not pleasant + to find the reader’s highest sympathies appealed to in order + to bring down greater condemnation on me for a fault that I + had never committed. But I should not trouble you with such + a personal matter, were it not that, having fabricated this + handle for censure on me, Mr. Froude makes it a hook for the + following criticism on the Hakluyt Society: ‘_And even in + the subjects which they select, they are pursued by the same + curious fatality_,’ the selection blamed being that of _Drake’s + Last Voyage in 1595_, edited from the original MSS. Then, after + magisterially condemning this elsewhere unblamed selection as a + ‘_fatal_’ sin, Mr. Froude proceeds to say, at the foot of page + 109, ‘_But every bad has a worse below it, and more offensive + than all these is the Editor of “Hawkins’s Voyage to the South + Sea,”_’—and if the reader refers to the head of the article for + the name of _this most offensive editor_, he will, as I have + already said, find my name, who never had anything to do with + it. It is true that on page 110 the name of the real editor, + Admiral Bethune, occurs; but as Mr. Froude’s article is a + reprint from the _Westminster Review_ of 1852 (not 1853, as Mr. + Froude again blunders in saying), there has been time enough + for that gentleman to correct the injurious errors into which + he had fallen. Although naturally annoyed at this treatment of + my name, I left the offence unnoticed at the time; but now + that, after a lapse of fifteen years, it is reprinted, with all + faults in a widely-circulated publication, I call on Mr. Froude + to correct his mis-statements. + + “I am, happily, able to state, from the experience of twenty + years, that the estimate of the Hakluyt Society’s publications + by the literary world is far from supporting Mr. Froude in + his supercilious treatment of that Society. Whatever opinion, + however, those publications may deserve, it is the duty of a + critic to be correct, and the greater the severity, the greater + the need of correctness; but when a critic lashes not only + one’s self, but one’s friends, by means of misrepresentations + and blunders of his own making, what does that critic deserve? + + R. H. MAJOR.” + +_The Athenæum, July 20th, 1867._ + + “5, Onslow Gardens, July 15, 1867. + + “I am sorry to have given Mr. Major cause to complain of me. + Should my _Essays_ be reprinted, the mistake which he points + out shall be corrected; and I can only regret the injustice + which meanwhile is done to his name. At the same time the only + error which I can acknowledge is confined to the title of a + work which stands at the head of the article. In the article + itself the volumes criticised are assigned to their proper + editors. + + J. A. FROUDE.” + +_The Athenæum, July 27th, 1867._ + + “British Museum, July 23, 1867. + + “I beg to thank Mr. Froude for his courteous expression of + regret for what, I am quite sure, was done inadvertently, and + I would thankfully accept his promise of reparation if it + were extended to all the mischief that is being done to me. + Unfortunately for me, _two editions_ of Mr. Froude’s _Essays_ + have been issued this year, _the second this very month_, in + a _cheap and popular form_; thus diffusing and prolonging, in + the most effectual manner, an injustice to my name which has + existed for fifteen years, and postponing indefinitely the + chance of reparation in a future edition. + + “Under such circumstances, I read with regret that, while + acknowledging one error, Mr. Froude does not also acknowledge + what everyone else sees clearly and condemns, the injustice + of his censure on me with respect to Columbus, and which he + makes a ground for censure on the Hakluyt Society. That Society + stands too high to need any defence from its former Honorary + Secretary, but I may be excused for specially asking that this + censure may be expunged; for I have a letter from Mr. Bancroft, + who was Ambassador here at the time, in which he eulogizes, + in terms so warm that I may not repeat them, the spirit in + which I had written both of the sufferings of Columbus, and + of the touching language in which he had recorded them. This + is exactly the contrary of what Mr. Froude’s two editions are + telling everybody that I have done. + + R. H. MAJOR.” + +Now that, in revising my translation for this second edition, I have +again gone through the texts of Columbus’s letters, I uncompromisingly +repeat the expression which in 1847 I used _solely_ in exculpation of any +mischievous result to my own diction from the disconnectedness of the +original, viz., that “Columbus was not so great a master of the pen as +of the art of navigation.” Whether my judgment on this point be of more +or less weight than Mr. Froude’s is of no moment whatever; but it is of +moment that the mischievous effect of a savage criticism, built up on +the critic’s own blunders, should be neutralized as far as possible. The +reader has the realities of the whole case before him, and may judge for +himself. + + R. H. M. + + + + +INTRODUCTION. + + +Nearly three thousand years have passed since the wisest of men declared +that there was nothing new under the sun. The saying has held good to +the present day, for men are perpetually finding out that their recent +discoveries had been already made, but under circumstances which did +not reveal the full value of that which had been discovered. No greater +examples of this truth can be adduced than in the history of the +Atlantic, of America, and of Australia. Until the days of Prince Henry +the Navigator, the Atlantic was so unknown that it justly bore the name +of the “Sea of Darkness;” and yet, during the previous two thousand years +occasional glimpses of light had in fact been thrown upon the face of +that mysterious ocean. “Nil novi sub sole” was still an indisputable +proverb. In the researches into the Atlantic originated by Prince Henry, +Columbus took part, and hence, as we shall presently more fully see, +derived the idea of the great importance of explorations to the West. +Within one hundred years of the triumphant rounding by Prince Henry’s +navigators (in 1434) of Cape Bojador, which till then had been the limit +of Atlantic exploration, the Portuguese had discovered both the eastern +and western shores of the continental island of Australia. And yet till +recently men knew not that they owed the knowledge either of America or +of Australia[1] to the initiatory efforts of a Prince with whose name, in +fact, they were almost entirely unacquainted. + +Such facts show the great injustice done to the originators of great +explorations who, working with the smallest means, really deserve the +highest meed of honour. + +Yet in the estimate of merit it must be conceded that priority, immense +as are its claims, is not all-absorbent. Columbus, as we shall presently +see, was anticipated in the discovery of America, and yet such were +the special virtues brought to bear upon the execution of his great +achievement, that, as Humboldt has eloquently said, “the majesty of grand +recollections seems concentred” on his illustrious name. The peculiar +value of the following letters, descriptive of the four important voyages +of Columbus, is that the events described are from the pens of those to +whom the events occurred. In them we have laid before us, as it were from +Columbus’s own mouth, a clear statement of his opinions and conjectures +on what were to him great cosmical riddles—riddles which have since been +solved mainly through the light which his illustrious deeds have shed +upon the field of our observation. In these letters also we trace the +magnanimity with which Columbus could support an accumulated burthen +of undeserved affliction. It is impossible to read without the deepest +sympathy the occasional murmurings and half suppressed complaints which +are uttered in the course of his letter to Ferdinand and Isabella, +describing his fourth voyage. These murmurings and complaints were +wrung from his manly spirit by sickness and sorrow, and though reduced +almost to the brink of despair by the injustice of the king, yet do we +find nothing harsh or disrespectful in his language to the sovereign. A +curious contrast is presented to us. The gift of a world could not move +the monarch to gratitude; the infliction of chains, as a recompense for +that gift, could not provoke the subject to disloyalty. The same great +heart which through more than twenty wearisome years of disappointment +and chagrin gave him strength to beg and to buffet his way to glory, +still taught him to bear with majestic meekness the conversion of that +glory into unmerited shame. + +The translated documents are seven in number. Five of them are letters +from the hand of Columbus himself, describing respectively his first, +third, and fourth voyages. Another, describing the second voyage, is +by Dr. Chanca, the physician to the fleet during that expedition, and +the seventh document is an extract from the will of Diego Mendez, one +of Columbus’s officers during the fourth voyage, who gives a detailed +account of many most interesting adventures undertaken by himself, but +left undescribed by Columbus. + +I shall not pause here to enter into the important bibliography of +these documents, which has no charm for many readers, and is therefore +placed at the end of this introduction. A series of original documents +of such importance might appear to need but few words of introduction or +recommendation, since the entire history of civilisation presents us with +no event, with the exception perhaps of the art of printing, so momentous +as the discovery of the western world; and, independently of the lustre +which the grandeur of that event confers upon the discoverer, there is no +individual who has rendered himself, on the score of personal character +and conduct, more illustrious than Christopher Columbus. There have, +nevertheless, not been wanting those, who, from various motives, and on +grounds of various trustworthiness, have endeavoured to lessen his glory, +by impeaching his claim to the priority of discovery, or by arguing that +the discovery itself has proved a misfortune rather than advantage to +the world at large. By way, therefore, of vindicating the value of the +original documents here translated, a brief account of such pretensions +to prior discovery as have been at different times put forth, may not be +thought superfluous. + +The oldest story which seems possibly to bear reference to what we call +the “new world” is related by Theopompus. + +Theopompus lived in the fourth century before the Christian era; in +a fragment of his works preserved by Ælian is a conversation between +Silenus and Midas, King of Phrygia, in which the former says that +Europe, Asia, and Africa were surrounded by the sea, but that beyond this +known world was an island of immense extent, containing huge animals +and men of twice our stature, and long-lived in proportion. There were +in it many great cities whose inhabitants had laws and customs entirely +different from ours. Fabulous as the story is as a whole, we cannot +escape from the thought that it suggests, though vaguely, a notion of the +real existence of a great western country. This idea is strengthened by +the remarkable story related to Solon by a priest of Sais from the sacred +inscriptions in the temples, and presented to us by Plato in his Timæus +and Critias, wherein he speaks of an island called Atlantis, opposite the +Pillars of Hercules, larger than Africa and Asia united, but which in one +day and night was swallowed up by an earthquake and disappeared beneath +the waters. The result was that no one had since been able to navigate +or explore that sea on account of the slime which the submerged island +had produced. Many as have been the doubts and conjectures to which this +narrative has been subjected by the learned in ancient and modern times, +it is a remarkable fact that Crantor, in a commentary on Plato quoted by +Proclus, declares that he found this same account retained by the priests +of Sais three hundred years after the period of Solon, and that he was +shown the inscriptions in which it was embodied. It is also deserving of +notice that precisely in that part of the ocean described in the legend +we find the island groups of the Azores, Madeira, the Canaries, and a +host of other rocks and sand-banks, while the great bank of varec, or +floating seaweed, occupying the middle portion of the basin of the North +Atlantic, and covering, according to Humboldt, an area about six times +as large as Germany, has been reasonably regarded as explanatory of the +obstacle to navigation to which the tradition refers. + +Various have been the speculations respecting the original colonisation +of the western hemisphere. Athanasius Kircher, in his _Prodromus Coptus +and Œdipus Ægyptiacus_, gives the Egyptians the credit of colonising +America, as well as India, China, and Japan, grounding his argument +upon the religious worship of the sun, moon, stars, and animals. Edward +Brerewood, at pages 96 and 97 of his _Enquiries touching the Diversity +of Languages_, contends, and he is far from being alone in his opinion, +that the Americans are the progeny of the Tartars. Marc Lescarbot, in his +_Histoire de la Nouvelle France_, maintains that the Canaanites, when +routed by Joshua, were driven into America by storms, and that Noah was +born in America, and after the flood showed his descendants the way into +their paternal country, and assigned to some of them their places of +abode there; while Hornius, in his treatise _De originibus Americanis_, +after touching upon the various conjectures here quoted, animadverts on +the presumption and folly of Paracelsus, when he states that a second +Adam and Eve were created for the peopling of the western world. + +The first specific statement, however, of a supposed migration from the +shores of the old world to those of the new, is that which the elder De +Guignes presumes to be demonstrable from the relation given by a Chinese +historian, Li-Yen, who lived at the commencement of the seventh century. +(See _Mémoires de l’Académie des Inscriptions et Belles Lettres_, vol. +28, p. 504.) The said historian speaks of a country, named Fou-sang, +more than forty thousand _li_[2] to the East of China. He says that they +who went thither started from the province of Leaton, situated to the +north of Peking; that after having made twelve thousand li, they came +to Japan; that travelling seven thousand li northward from that place, +they arrived at the country of Venchin, and at five thousand li eastward +of the latter, they found the country of Tahan, whence they journeyed +to Fou-sang, which was twenty thousand li distant from Tahan. From this +account De Guignes endeavours, by a long chain of argument, to prove that +the Chinese had pushed their investigations into Jeso, Kamtschatka, and +into that part of America which is situated opposite the most eastern +coast of Asia. + +This surmise of De Guignes has been answered by Klaproth, in a paper +which appeared in the _Nouvelles Annales des Voyages_ (tom. 51, 2ᵉ serie, +p. 53). His arguments go to show that the country named Fou-sang is +Japan; and that the country of Tahan, situated to the west of Asiatic +Vinland, can only be the island of Saghalian. Humboldt observes upon +this subject, that the number of horses, the practice of writing, and the +manufacture of paper from the Fou-sang tree, mentioned in the account +given by the Chinese historian, ought to have shown De Guignes that the +country of which he spoke was not America. + +The presumed discovery of America which comes next in chronological +rotation, is that by the Scandinavians, the earliest _printed allusion_ +to which occurs in Adam of Bremen’s _Historia Ecclesiastica Ecclesiarum +Hamburgensis et Bremensis_, published at Copenhagen, 1579, 4to. The +Baron Von Humboldt has asserted that the merit of first recognising the +discovery of America by the Northmen, _belongs indisputably_ to Ortelius, +who, in his _Theatrum Orbis Terrarum_, with unjust severity says, that +Christopher Columbus had done nothing more than to place the new world +in a permanently useful and commercial relationship with Europe. The +ground upon which the priority is claimed for Ortelius, is that the +first edition of his work came out in 1570, although the reference which +Humboldt himself gives is to an edition of 1601 which was after the +death of Ortelius, and the earlier editions do not contain the chapter +on the Pacific Ocean in which the passage occurs. It is true that in +the _Bibliotheca Hulthemiana_ the edition of 1601 is said to have been +revised and augmented by Ortelius before his death in 1598, but, even if +the assertion was made by Ortelius, and not by the editor of his work +after his death, it still leaves perfectly unimpeached the claim to +priority of the Copenhagen edition of Adam of Bremen in 1579. Adam of +Bremen’s work was written soon after the middle of the eleventh century, +and was followed in the next half century by the _Historia Ecclesiastica_ +of Ordericus Vitalis, who also speaks of the country visited by the +Scandinavians. Abraham Mylius, in his _Treatise de Antiquitate Linguæ +Belgicæ_, Leyden, 1611, makes all Americans to be sprung from Celts; +stating that many Celtic words were to be found in use there; and with +more reasonable showing affirms that the coast of Labrador was visited +by wanderers from Iceland. Hugo Grotius, in his _Dissertatio de Origine +Gentium Americanarum_, (Paris, 1642, 8vo.), follows Mylius, and states +that America was colonised by a Norwegian race, who came thither from +Iceland, through Greenland, and passed through North America down to the +Isthmus. + +The earliest _printed detail_ of these discoveries is given by the +Norwegian historian, Thormodus Torfæus, in a work entitled _Historia +Vinlandiæ Antiquæ, ex Antiquitatibus Islandicis in lucem producta_, +(Hauniæ, 1705, 12mo.) But in the invaluable work by Professor Rafn, +published in 1837 by the Danish Royal Society of Antiquaries, under the +title of _Antiquitates Americanæ_, the manuscripts which record these +discoveries are given at length in the original, accompanied by a Latin +translation, and careful and learned geographical illustrations. The +following is a summary of the principal events recorded in this highly +interesting volume, and the geographical inferences are those supplied +by the professor himself. + +Irish Christians were the first Europeans, which we know from well +established history, to have migrated into and inhabited Iceland. Close +upon the end of the eighth century this island was visited by Irish +hermits; but the first discovery of it by the Northmen was made by a +Dane named Gardar, of Swedish origin, in the year 863. The regular +colonisation of the country was commenced in 874 by Ingolf, a Norwegian, +and was carried on continuously for the space of sixty years by some +of the most influential and civilised families of Scandinavia. In 877 +the mountainous coast of Greenland was for the first time seen by a man +named Gunnbiorn, but it was in 983 that this country was first visited +by Eric Rauda, or Eric the Red, son of Thorwald, a Norwegian noble, who +had been condemned to a banishment of three years for killing Eyolf +his neighbour. After three years absence, he returned to Iceland, and +in order to hold out an inducement to colonisation, named the newly +discovered country Greenland, intending by that name to express the +richness of the woods and meadows with which it abounded. Amongst those +who had accompanied Eric was a man named Heriulf Bardson, who established +himself at Heriulfsnes. Biarne, the son of the latter, finding, on his +return home from a trading voyage to Norway, that his father had quitted +Iceland, resolved upon following him, though he, as well as those who +had accompanied him, were quite unacquainted with the Greenland sea. +Soon after leaving Iceland they met with northerly winds and fogs, and +were carried they knew not whither: the weather clearing, they found +themselves near a flat woody country, which, not corresponding with +the descriptions of Greenland, they left to larboard. After five days’ +sailing with a south-west wind, they came to a mountainous country, +covered with glaciers, which they found to be an island; but as its +appearance was not inviting, they bore away from the island, and standing +out to sea with the same wind, after four days’ sailing with fresh gales, +they reached Heriulfsnes in Greenland. + +Some time after this, in the year 1000, Lief, son of Eric the Red, +equipped a ship with thirty-five men to make a voyage of discovery, +with the view of examining the new found lands more narrowly. They came +to a land were no grass was to be seen, but everywhere there were vast +glaciers, while the space intervening between these ice mountains and the +shore appeared as one uninterrupted plain of slate. This country they +named Helluland, _i. e._ Slate-land (Newfoundland). Thence they stood out +to sea again, and reached a level wooded country, with cliffs of white +sand. They called this country Markland, _i. e._ Woodland (Nova Scotia). +Again they put to sea, and after two days’ sail reached an island, to +the eastward of the mainland, and passed through the strait between this +island and the mainland. They sailed westward, and landed at a place +where a river, issuing from a lake, fell into the sea. Here they wintered +and built houses, which were afterwards called Leifsbuder (Leifsbooths.) +During their stay, one of their number, named Tyrker, a German, happened +to wander some distance from the settlement, and on his return reported +that he had found vines and grapes. These proving to be plentiful, +Lief named the country Vinland or Vineland (New England), and in the +ensuing spring returned to Greenland. In the year 1002, Thorwald, Lief’s +brother, being of opinion that the country had been too little explored, +borrowed his brother’s ship, and with the assistance of his advice and +instructions, set out on a new voyage. They arrived at Liefsbooths, in +Vinland, remained there for the winter, and, in the spring of 1003, +Thorwald sent a party in the ship’s long boat on a voyage of discovery +southwards. They found a beautiful and well-wooded country, with +extensive ranges of white sand, but no traces of men, except a wooden +shed which they found on an island lying to the westward. They returned +to Liefsbooths in the autumn. In the summer of 1004, Thorwald sailed +eastward and then northward, past a remarkable headland enclosing a bay, +and which was opposite to another headland. They called it Kialarnes +(Keel-Cape). Continuing along the east coast, they reached a beautiful +promontory, where they landed. Thorwald was so pleased with the place +that he exclaimed, “Here is a beautiful spot, and here I should like well +to fix my dwelling.” He had scarcely spoken before they encountered some +Skrellings (Esquimaux) with whom they fell to blows, and a sharp conflict +ensuing, Thorwald received a mortal wound in his arm from an arrow. +He died, and was buried by his own instructions on the spot which had +excited his admiring remark, the language of which appeared prophetic of +a longer stay there than he had at first contemplated. + +The most distinguished, however, of all the first American discoverers is +Thorfinn Karlsefne, an Icelander, whose genealogy is carried back in the +old northern annals to Danish, Swedish, Norwegian, Scottish, and Irish +ancestors, some of them of royal blood. In 1006 this chieftain visited +Greenland, and there married Gudrida, the widow of Thurstein (son of Eric +the Red), who had died the year before in an unsuccessful expedition to +Vinland. Accompanied by Snorre Thorbrandson, also a man of illustrious +lineage, Biarne Grimolfson of Breidefiord, and Thorhall Gamlason of +Austfiord, he set sail in the spring of 1007 with three ships for Vinland. + +They had in all one hundred and sixty men, and as they went with the +intention of colonising, they took with them a great variety and quantity +of live stock. They sailed, first, to the Tresterbyd, and afterwards +to Biarney (Disco); then to Helluland, where they found an abundance +of foxes; and thence to Markland, which was overgrown with wood, and +plentifully stocked with a variety of animals. Proceeding still in a +south-westerly direction, with the land on the right, they came to a +place where a frith penetrated far into the country; off the mouth of it +was an island, on which they found an immense number of eyder ducks, so +that it was scarcely possible to walk without treading on their eggs. +They called the island Straumey (Stream Isle) from the strong current +which ran past it, and the frith they called Straumfiordr (Stream Frith). +Here Thorhall and eight others left the party in quest of Vinland, but +were driven by westerly gales to the coast of Iceland, where some say +that they were beaten, and put into servitude. Karlsefne, however, with +the remaining one hundred and fifty men, sailed southwards, and reached +a place were a river falls into the sea from a lake; large islands were +situated opposite the mouth of the river; passing these, they steered +into the lake, and called the place Hop. The low grounds were covered +with wheat growing wild; and the rising grounds with vines. Here they +stayed till the beginning of the year 1008, when finding their lives in +constant jeopardy from the hostile attacks of the natives, they quitted +the place, and returned to Eric’s fiorde. In 1011 a ship arrived in +Greenland, from Norway, commanded by two Icelandic brothers named Helge +and Finnboge: to these men, Freydisa, a natural daughter of Eric the Red, +proposed a voyage to Vinland, stipulating that they should share equally +with her the profits of the voyage. To this they assented, and it was +agreed that each party should have thirty able-bodied men on board the +ship, besides women; but Freydisa secretly took with her five men in +addition to that number. They reached Liefsbooths in 1012, and wintered +there; when a discussion arising, Freydisa had the subtlety to prevail +on her husband to massacre the brothers and their followers; after the +perpetration of which base deed they returned to Greenland in the spring +of 1013. + +In his expedition to Vinland in 1007, Thorfinn Karlsefne had been +accompanied by his wife, Gudrida, who bore him a son, Snorre, who became +the founder of an illustrious family in Iceland, which gave that island +several of its first bishops. Among these may be mentioned the learned +Bishop Thorlak Runolfson, to whom we are principally indebted for the +oldest ecclesiastical code of Iceland, written in the year 1123. It is +also probable that the accounts of the voyages were originally compiled +by him. + +The notices given in these old Icelandic accounts, of the climate, +soil, and productions of the new country are very characteristic. It is +curious that Adam of Bremen, in the eleventh century, though himself not +a northman, states, on the authority of Svein Estridson, the King of +Denmark, a nephew of Canute the Great, that the country of Vinland got +its name from the vine growing wild there, and for the same reason the +English re-discoverers gave the name of Martha’s Vineyard to the large +island close off the coast. + +It is fortunate that in these ancient accounts they have preserved the +statement of the course steered and the distance sailed in a day. From +various ancient Icelandic geographical works it may be gathered that the +distance of a day’s sailing was estimated at from twenty-seven to thirty +geographical miles—German or Danish—of which fifteen are equal to a +degree, and are consequently equivalent to four English miles. From the +island of Helluland, afterwards called little Helluland, Biarne sailed to +Herjulfsnes (Ikigeit), in Greenland, with strong south-westerly winds, in +four days. The distance between that cape and Newfoundland is about one +hundred and fifty miles, which, if we allow for the strong south-westerly +gales, will correspond with Biarne’s voyage; while the well-known +barrenness of the flats of Newfoundland corresponds with the Hellue, or +slates, which suggested the name the Northmen gave to the island. + +Markland being described as three days’ sail south-west of Helluland, +appears to be Nova Scotia; and the low and level character of the +country, covered with woods, tallies precisely with the descriptions of +later writers. + +Vinland was stated to be two days’ sail to the south-west of Markland, +which would be from fifty-four to sixty miles. The distance from Cape +Sable to Cape Cod is reckoned at about two hundred and ten English miles, +which answers to about fifty-two Danish miles; and in the account given +by Biarne of their finding many shallows off the island to the eastward, +we recognize an accurate description of Nantucket, and Kialarnes must +consequently be Cape Cod. The Straumfiordr of the Northmen is supposed to +be Buzzard’s Bay, and Straumey, Martha’s Vineyard, though the account of +the many eggs found there, would seem to correspond more correctly with +Egg Island, which lies off the entrance of Vineyard Sound. + +Krossanes is probably Gurnet Point. The Hóp answers to Mount Hope’s +Bay, through which the Taunton river flows, and it was here that the +Leifsbooths were situated. + +The ancient documents likewise make mention of a country called +Huitramannaland (Whiteman’s Land), otherwise Irland it Mikla (Great +Ireland) supposed to be that part of the coast of North America, +including North and South Carolina, Georgia and Florida. There is a +tradition among the Shawanese Indians, who emigrated some years ago +from Florida and settled in Ohio, that Florida was once inhabited by +white people, who possessed iron instruments. The powerful chieftain, +Are Marson of Reykianes, in Iceland,—according to the account given +by his contemporary Rafn, surnamed the Limerick trader,—was driven to +Huitramannaland by storms in 983, and was baptised there. Are Frode +likewise (the first compiler of the Landnama, and a descendant in the +fourth degree from Are Marson) states that his uncle, Thorkell Gellerson, +had been informed by Icelanders that Are Marson had been recognised in +Huitramannaland, and was held in high respect there. This statement +therefore shows that there was an occasional intercourse in those days +between the Orkneys and Iceland, and this part of America. + +It is further recorded in the ancient MSS. that the Greenland bishop Eric +went over to Vinland in the year 1121; but nothing more than the fact +is stated, and it simply corroborates the supposition of intercourse +between the countries. Again, in the year 1266, a voyage of discovery +to the Arctic regions of America is said to have been performed, under +the auspices of some clergymen of the bishopric of Gardar in Greenland; +and from the recorded observations made by the explorers, would seem to +have been carried to regions whose geographical position has been more +accurately determined by our own navigators, Parry and the two Rosses. +The next recorded discovery was made by Adalbrand and Thorwald Helgason, +two Icelandic clergymen, in the year 1285. Contemporaneous accounts state +that they discovered a new land to the westward of Iceland, supposed +to have been Newfoundland. The last record preserved in the ancient +Icelandic MSS. relates a voyage from Greenland to Markland, performed +by a crew of seventeen men, in the year 1347. The account written by +a contemporary nine years after the event, induces the belief that +intercourse between Greenland and America had been maintained as late as +the period here mentioned, for he speaks of Markland as a country still +known and visited in those days. + +The obscurity of many portions of these narratives leaves much to +be cleared up with reference to this interesting subject; but their +general truthfulness being corroborated by the traces of the residence +and settlement of the ancient northmen exhibited in the inscriptions +discovered in Kinkigtorsoak, Greenland, and Massachusetts, no room is +left for disputing the main fact of the discovery. + +Between this period and the date of the first voyage of Columbus, the +coast of America is reported to have been visited by the Arabians of the +Spanish Peninsula, the Welsh, the Venetians, the Portuguese, and also by +a Pole in the service of Denmark. + +The Arabian expedition is described both by Edrisi and by Ibn-al-Wardi. +It appears to have been undertaken by eight persons of the same family, +called the Almagrurins or the Wandering Brothers, who having provided +themselves with everything requisite for a long voyage, swore they would +not return till they had penetrated to the extreme limits of the Sea of +Darkness. They sailed from the port of Aschbona or Lisbon, and steered +towards the south-west, and at the end of thirty-five days arrived at +the island of Gana or Sheep Island. The flesh of the sheep of this +island being too bitter for them to eat, they put to sea again, and +after sailing twelve days in a southerly direction, reached an island +inhabited by people of a red skin, lofty stature, and with hair of thin +growth but long and flowing over their shoulders. The inhabitants of this +island told them that persons had sailed twenty days to the west without +discovering land, and the Arabian brothers, diverted from the pursuit +of their hardy enterprise by this discouraging account, retraced their +course, and returned safely to Lisbon. From this description the elder de +Guignes inferred that the Arabs had either reached the eastern coast of +America, or at least one of the American islands; an opinion, however, +which appears to have as little to sanction it, as his above mentioned +conjecture that the Chinese had discovered the west coast of America +in the fifth century. The Baron von Humboldt concurs with the opinion +expressed by the learned orientalist Tychsen in his _Neue oriental und +exegetische Bibliothek_, and repeated by Malte Brun, that the island +reached by the Arab wanderers was one of the African islands. This +conclusion is drawn from the circumstance that the Guanches, the original +people of the Canary group, were a pastoral race, and also possessed the +same external characteristics as the islanders here described. Moreover, +the fact that the king of the island had an interpreter who spoke Arabic, +together with the circumstance that the red men had sailed westward for +a month without seeing land, strongly corroborates the opinion advanced. +The precise date of this voyage is unknown, but Humboldt presumes that it +must have been considerably anterior to the expulsion of the Arabs from +Lisbon in 1147; because Edrisi, whose work was finished in 1153, speaks +of the occurrence as if it were by no means recent. + +It is but upon a slight foundation, that the Welsh have pretended to +raise a claim to the discovery; but slight as it is, there is certainly +enough to render a decidedly negative assertion on the subject to the +full as presumptuous as one decidedly affirmative would be. But as we +have no concern with mere conjectures, we must in candour narrate, as +succinctly as possible, the grounds upon which these pretensions have +been founded. + +The first account of this discovery is found in Humphrey Llwyd’s +translation of the _History of Wales_, by Caradoc of Llancarvan, +published by Dr. Powell in 1584. According to him the occurrence took +place as follows:—On the death of Owen Gwynedd, prince of North Wales, +in 1169, a contention arose amongst his numerous sons respecting the +succession to the crown, when Madawe, or Madoc, one of their number, +seeing his native country was likely to be embroiled in a civil war, +deemed it more prudent to try his fortune abroad. In pursuance of this +object he sailed with a small fleet of ships to the westward, and +leaving Iceland on the north, came at length to an unknown country, +where everything appeared new and uncommon and the manner of the natives +different from all that he had ever seen. The country appearing to him, +from its fertility and beauty, to be very desirable for a settlement, he +left most of his own men behind him, (amounting, according to Sir Thomas +Herbert, to a hundred and twenty), and returning to Wales, persuaded +a considerable number of the Welsh to go out with him to the newly +discovered country, and so with ten ships he again departed, and bade a +final adieu to his native soil. This account of the historian Caradoc +of Llancarvan is the only affirmative written document the story has +upon which to ground its claim to authenticity, with the exception of +an ode, written by a Welsh bard, Meredyth ab Rhys, who died in 1477, +fifteen years before Columbus’s first expedition, in which an allusion +is made to the event.[3] A circumstance which would appear to confirm +the truth of Madoc’s voyages, is a peculiar resemblance that has been +found between some of the American dialects and the Welsh language; but, +as Dr. Robertson reasonably remarks, the affinity has been observed in +so few instances, and in some of these is so obscure or so fanciful, +that no conclusion can be drawn from the casual resemblance of a small +number of words. Dr. Williams adduces in confirmation of his favourite +idea the authorities of Lopez de Gomara, Hornius, and Peter Martyr, +pretending that they assert that traces of Christianity were found among +the Americans by the Spaniards, as well as that there was a tradition +among the Mexicans, that many years before a strange nation came amongst +them, and taught them a knowledge of God. His references however appear +entirely incorrect. + +Another pretension to an early discovery of America has been founded upon +an account given in a work published in Venice by Francesco Marcolini +in 1558, entitled “_Dello scoprimento dell’ Isole Frislanda, Eslanda, +Engrovelanda, Estotilanda, ed Icaria, fatto sotto il Polo Artico da +due fratelli Zeni, M. Nicolò il K. e M. Antonio_.” The substance of +the account is, that in 1380, Nicolò Zeno, a Venetian noble, fitted +out a vessel at his own cost, and made a voyage to the north, with the +intention of visiting England and Flanders, but was driven by a storm to +Friseland, now proved to be the Færoe Archipelago. Being rescued from the +attacks of the natives by Zichmni, a neighbouring prince, Zeno entered +into the service of the latter, and assisted him in conquering Friseland +and other northern islands. He shortly after dispatched a letter to his +brother Antonio, requesting him to find means to join him; whereupon the +latter purchased a vessel, and succeeded in reaching Friseland, where +he remained fourteen years. During his residence there he wrote to his +brother Carlo in Venice, and gave an account of a report brought by a +certain fisherman, about a land to the westward. This account stated +that about twenty-six years before, the fisherman, when out at sea with +four fishing boats, was overtaken by a tempest, which drove them about +for many days, and at length cast them on an island called Estotiland, +about a thousand miles from Friseland. The inhabitants conveyed them +to a fair and populous city, where the king sent for many interpreters +to converse with them, but none that they could understand, until a +man was found, who had likewise been cast away upon the coast, and who +spoke Latin. They remained several days upon the island, which was rich +and fruitful, abounding with all kinds of metals, and especially gold. +Though much given to navigation, they were ignorant of the use of the +compass, and finding the Friselanders acquainted with it, the king of +the place sent them with twelve barques to visit a country to the south, +called Drogeo. They had nearly perished in a storm, but were cast away +upon the coast of Drogeo. The fisherman described this Drogeo as a +country of vast extent, and that the inhabitants were naked and eaters +of human flesh. He remained many years in the country, and became rich +with trafficking between Estotiland and the main land, and subsequently +fitted out a vessel of his own, and made his way back to Friseland. His +narrative induced Zichmni to undertake a voyage thither, in which he was +accompanied by Antonio Zeno. It was unsuccessful: landing on an island +called Icaria, they were roughly treated by the inhabitants, and a storm +afterwards drove them on the coast of Greenland. + +This account was placed in the hands of Marcolini by Nicolò Zeno, a +descendant of the family of the explorers, but it had to be made from +fragments, he himself having, when a boy, from ignorance torn up a +considerable quantity of the original documents, which were letters +written by Antonio Zeno to Carlo his brother. In spite of a considerable +amount of fable and exaggeration, defects which enter into the majority +of early accounts of travel, it is scarcely to be believed that Nicolò +Zeno the younger invented this voyage. He was a man of the highest +reputation, as may be seen by the encomium passed on him by Francesco +Patrizio; see _Della Historia dieci Dialoghi di M. Francesco Patrizio_, +Venetia, 1560, 4to., p. 30 verso. It is well known that the Venetians had +made yearly voyages to the north of Europe for at least two centuries +before the period in question, and the most important part of Zeno’s +publication, viz., the map, the original of which is stated to have hung +up in his palace since the date of the discovery, bears evidence of a +knowledge, however imperfect, of Scandinavian geography. The graduation +of this map was inserted by Nicolò Zeno the younger himself, and although +inaccurate enough to cause much perplexity to geographers, there is no +doubt that Greenland was laid down on it with more correctness than +on any map preceding the date of its publication. No map before that +time shews the Island of Frisland with names thereon tallying with the +names of the Færoe islands. No map before 1558 shews the discoveries +of the Northmen in America, nor were any of the Sagas known to the +Venetians before that time; nor do any books previous to that period set +forth the geography of those parts from which Nicolò Zeno could have +stolen information. Moreover the correspondence of the Zeno map with +surveys much later, as in Davis’s Straits, is highly corroborative of +its genuineness. Mr. Kohl, in his most valuable _Documentary History +of Discovery of the East Coast of North America_, printed by the Maine +Historical Society, 1869, 8vo., suggests that Icaria is Helluland or +Newfoundland; Estotiland, Markland or Nova Scotia; and Drogeo, Vinland or +New England: and he further justly remarks that, assuming that the map is +genuine, “it is the first and oldest known to us on which some sections +of the continent of America have been laid down.” + +On an anonymous map in Weimar of the date of 1424, and on a map by +Andrea Bianco,[4] in the library of St. Mark, bearing the date of 1436, +is laid down a large extent of land, five or six hundred leagues west of +Gibraltar, above which is written the word “Antillia.” With reference to +this subject, Martin Behaim, on his globe of 1492, says, “In the year +734, after the conquest of Spain by the Mahometans, this island Antillia +was discovered and settled by an archbishop from Oporto, who fled to +it in ships with six other bishops and other Christian men and women. +They built there seven towns, from which circumstance it has also been +called Septem Citade, the island of the seven cities. In the year 1414 a +Spanish vessel came very near to it.” Of the island of S. Brandan also, +which is laid down on charts of the fourteenth century, Behaim says, “In +the year 565, Saint Brandan, an Irish bishop, arrived with his vessel on +this island, saw there most wonderful things, and returned afterwards +to his country.” Another of these fancied islands in the Atlantic was +the island of Brazil. So strong was the belief in the existence of these +islands, that we find it stated by Pedro de Ayala, a Spanish envoy in +England writing to the sovereigns in 1498, that the Bristol men had sent +out every year from 1491 (before Columbus’s first great discovery) to +1497, two, three, or four caravels every year in search of the islands of +Brazil and the seven cities, at the instigation of John Cabot. + +The following passage occurs in Sir John Barrow’s _Chronological History +of Voyages in the Arctic Regions_, which, if it stated a defensible +truth, would present another claim, anterior to that of Columbus, to the +discovery of America. The passage is headed “Cortereals, 1500”;— + +“The Portuguese, not content with having discovered a route to India, by +sailing round the tempestuous extremity to Africa, soon after engaged +in an equally dangerous enterprise: that of finding a route to India +and the Spice Islands, by sailing westward round the northern extremity +of America. This bold undertaking was reserved for the CORTEREALS, the +enlightened disciples of the school of Sagres. The first navigator of the +name of Cortereal, who engaged in this enterprise, was John Vaz Costa +Cortereal, a gentleman of the household of the infant Dom Fernando, who, +accompanied by Alvaro Martens Homem, explored the northern seas, by order +of king Affonso the Fifth, and discovered the _Terra de Baccalhaos_ +(the land of cod fish), afterwards called Newfoundland. This voyage is +mentioned by Cordeiro,[5] but he does not state the exact date, which +however is ascertained to have been in 1463 or 1464; for, in their return +from the discovery of Newfoundland, or Terra Nova, they touched at the +island of Terceira, the captaincy of which island having become vacant by +the death of Jacomo Bruges, they solicited the appointment, and in reward +for their services the request was granted, their patent commission +being dated in Evora, 2nd April, 1464.” + +It will be seen by the wording of this passage, that Sir John Barrow has +fallen into the inaccuracy of asserting that, in 1463 or 1464, Cortereal +was engaged in the enterprise of finding a route to India and the Spice +Islands by sailing westward round the northern extremities of America. +We must presume that the Portuguese were aware of the existence of the +American continent, before they could conceive the idea of sailing +westward round its northern extremity. The patent commission of the +appointment of Cortereal and Homem to the government of Terceira does +not specify that the service for which it was granted, was the discovery +of Newfoundland; and, moreover, at the end of Faria y Sousa’s _Asia +Portuguesa_, there is a list of all the armadas which sailed from Lisbon +on voyages of discovery between 1412 and 1640, and this expedition is +passed by in silence; so that the validity of the whole statement hangs +on the authority of Cordeiro: but the account is altogether so extremely +improbable, from the very silence of Portuguese writers of the time on +so important a subject, as to leave Cortereal but small chance of a +successful rivalry with Sebastian Cabot.[6] + +The last on the list of those who have been said to precede Columbus in +the discovery of America is a Polish pilot, named John Szkolny, whose +name has been erroneously Latinized by Hornius, Zurla, Malte Brun, +Wytfliet, and Pontanus, “Scolvus,” or “Sciolvus.” He was in the service +of Christian II of Denmark in the year 1476. He is said to have landed +on the coast of Labrador, after having passed along Norway, Greenland, +and the Friseland of the Zeni. Upon this subject Von Humboldt thus +expresses himself: “I cannot hazard any opinion upon the statement made +to this effect by Wytfliet, Pontanus, and Horn. A country seen _after_ +Greenland may, from the direction indicated, have been Labrador. I am, +however, surprised to find that Gomara, who published his _Historia de +las Indias_ at Saragossa, in 1553, was cognizant even at that time of +this Polish pilot. It is possible that when the codfishery began to bring +the seamen of southern Europe into more frequent connexion with those +of the north, a suspicion may have arisen that the land seen by Szkolny +must have been the same as that visited by John Sebastian Cabot in 1497, +and by Gaspar Cortereal in 1500. Gomara says what is in other respects +not quite correct, _that the English took much pleasure in frequenting +the coast of Labrador, for they found the latitude and climate the same +as that of their native land, and the men of Norway have been there with +the pilot, John Scolvo, as well as the English with Sebastian Cabot_. +Let us not forget that Gomara makes no mention of the Polish pilot with +reference to the question of the predecessors of Columbus, though he is +malignant enough to assert that it is in fact impossible to say to whom +the discovery of the New Indies is due.”[7] + +In the American Philosophical Transactions for 1786, is a letter +addressed to Dr. Franklin by Mr. Otto of New York, in which he not only +asserts that the illustrious cosmographer Martin Behaim discovered +the Azores, but quotes a passage, from what he calls an authentic +record, preserved in the archives of Nuremberg, the tenor of which is +as follows:—“Martin Behem, traversing the Atlantic Ocean for several +years, examined the American Islands, and discovered the strait which +bears the name of Magellan, before either Christopher Columbus or +Magellan navigated those seas; and even mathematically delineated on +a geographical chart for the king of Lusitania, the situation of the +coast around every part of that famous and renowned strait.” He also +quotes passages from the _Nuremberg Chronicle_, and from Cellarius, +in confirmation of this statement. Don Cristóbal Cladera, in his +_Investigaciones Historicas_, says that, in order to refute these +statements, he procured from Nuremberg a description of Behaim’s globe, +together with historical notes on the life and family of that geographer, +and upon examining these and the unpublished works of the Academia de +las Ciencias de Lisboa, he became convinced that the observations of +Mr. Otto were totally unfounded; and De Murr, who has well investigated +the question, assures us that the passage quoted by Mr. Otto from the +_Nuremberg Chronicle_ was not to be found in the German translation of +that work by George Alt in 1493. Moreover, the real globe of Behaim, +made in 1492, does not contain any of the islands or shores of the New +World; a fact which sets at rest the two questions of Behaim’s earlier +discovery, or of Columbus gaining his information from Behaim.[8] + +From the series of evidences contained in the preceding accounts, the +fact that America had been visited by European adventurers before the +time of Columbus is rendered too certain to admit of contradiction even +from the most sanguine advocate of the glory of the great discoverer. +But, on the other side, it cannot be denied that the discovery of +Columbus, however much later in date, deserves the meed of highest +honour, as being the result of sagacity, judgment and indomitable +perseverance, and as having been carried on with an energetic endeavour +to bring into active operation the incalculable advantages which it +opened up to the world at large. To vindicate the correctness of this +statement, it will be well to give a brief sketch of his eventful life, +and to pourtray as briefly as we may the high qualities to which, far +more than to accidental circumstances, the glory of this great discovery +is due. The retrospect of his history will at the same time shew, that +while every previous discovery was attributable to accident, the greater +portion of the accidental or uncontrollable circumstances in the life of +Columbus were such as, instead of assisting him, tended to thwart him at +every step of his painful career. + +It is generally agreed that his father was a wool weaver or carder. There +is reason, however, to presume that though his parentage was humble, he +was descended from a family of consideration. On this subject his son, +Don Ferdinand, denies[9] with great indignation an assertion which occurs +in a curious life of the admiral, inserted in the “_Psaltertium Octuplex +Augustin Justiniani_,” Genoa, 1516, folio, under the comments on the +nineteenth psalm, that he was “vilibus ortus parentibus,” and complains +that he is falsely called a mechanic. + +The date of his birth is a “vexata quæstio,” which it would be well +that we should here examine. For settling a disputed question of the +kind no process seems so sure as the comparing of statements made by +the same individual, if he be a good authority, at different times and +under different circumstances. The following are two statements made +by Columbus himself at entirely different periods and in an entirely +different shape, and yet both having the same result. They are recorded +by his son, Fernando, in the Biography of his father, and are as follows: +“In his book of his first voyage [1492] he says, ‘I was upon the sea +twenty-three years without being off it any time worth the speaking +of, and I saw all the East and all the West, and may say towards the +North or England, and have been at Guinea. Yet I never saw harbours for +goodness like those of the West Indies,’ and a little further he says, +‘That he took to the sea at fourteen years of age and ever after followed +it.’” Now we know for certain that he escaped from Lisbon and came to +Andalusia at the close of 1484; that during his stay in Portugal he had +made many voyages to Guinea, but that from 1484 until his first great +voyage in 1492 he was engaged, not at sea, but in endeavouring to secure +the interest of the Spanish sovereigns in his important project. If then +we add his twenty-three years of almost constant sea-going to fourteen, +his age when he first went to sea, we have thirty-seven years to deduct +from 1484, and we find 1447 to be the date of his birth. Again in 1501, +many years later, he writes to the Spanish sovereigns as follows: “I +went to sea very young and have continued it to this day; ... it is +now forty years that I have been sailing to all those parts at present +frequented.” What “very young” meant he had already told us; viz., 14, +which added to 40 makes 54; and this total deducted from 1501, the date +at which he writes, leaves the same date for his birth as that resulting +from his former statement, viz., 1447. But for the sake of attaining as +near to accuracy as possible, we must not overlook another statement made +in 1503 by Columbus himself in his letter to Ferdinand and Isabella, +describing his fourth voyage. He there says “I was twenty-eight years +old when I came into Your Highnesses service, and now I have not a hair +upon me that is not grey.” It was in 1484 that he went to Spain, and +then, as we have seen, terminated those three-and-twenty years of almost +uninterrupted sea-faring life of which he speaks. Now, if he were then +only eight-and-twenty, he must have first gone to sea at the age of +five instead of fourteen, as he himself informs us. Moreover, by that +reckoning he would have been only fifty when he died, in 1506, an age +entirely incompatible with the statement of Bernaldez, the Cura de los +Palacios, who knew Columbus so well, that he died _in senectute bonâ_, at +the age of seventy, more or less. It is intelligible that such a remark +should be made of a man of sixty, who had passed through hardships so +exhausting to the mind and body as those which had marked the life of +Columbus, but scarcely even of him at the age of fifty. It is clear, +then, that a mistake has been made in this number 28, but if for it we +write 38, it will make the date of Columbus’s birth to be 1446. We have, +however, to bear in mind that the two statements previously made by him +were of a very general character, in which no month or part of a year was +specified. It would therefore seem that, on his own showing, we shall +be safe in placing the date of his birth 1446-47, which agrees with the +inference of the learned and judicious Muñoz, who places it “por los años +1446,” although he does not show the process by which he arrives at his +conclusion. + +With respect to the birthplace of our illustrious navigator, were we +to enter into the complex discussions of those who, with different +arguments of more or less plausibility, place it in Genoa, Nervi, Savona, +Pradello, Cogoleto, Quinto, Bogliasco, Albisola, Chiavara, Oneglia, or +the castle of Cuccaro in Monferrato,—we should but launch upon a sea of +difficulties, with little hope of a successful voyage. It is difficult to +withhold credence from the strong assertion made twice by Columbus in his +will, dated 22nd February 1498, that he was born in the city of Genoa; +namely,—“I, being a native of Genoa”; and “I desire my said son Diego, +or the person who may succeed to the said inheritance, always to keep +and maintain one person of our lineage in the city of Genoa ... because +from thence I came, and there I was born.”[10] But in like manner we know +that Leonardo, who was born at Vinci, persisted in calling himself a +Florentine. + +Having early evinced a strong inclination for the study of geography, +geometry, and astronomy, Columbus found at the college of Pavia an +excellent opportunity of gaining a more than superficial acquaintance +with the principles of those sciences, and at the same time acquired +considerable proficiency in the Latin language. The maritime position +and commercial engagements of his native city doubtless suggested and +fostered much of that propensity for a nautical life, that he exhibited +at so early an age; and although it appears from several historians +that for a short time he worked at his father’s trade, yet this must +have been simply during his earliest boyhood, for by his own account he +commenced the life of a mariner at fourteen years of age. The piratical +character of the sea-faring life of those days necessarily exposed its +followers to unceasing hardships and dangers, and the severity of this +early discipline must have most materially tended to render available and +permanent those distinguished qualities which have subsequently gained +for him the admiration of the world: indeed, no career could have been +better calculated to develope his peculiar genius, or add fuel to those +enthusiastic aspirations which characterised him to the close of his life. + +From the period of his going to sea, which was about the year 1460 until +the year 1472, we meet with no distinct mention of his name; although +in a letter written by him to their Majesties, in 1495, he says: “_It +happened to me that king Réné (whom God has taken to himself) sent me to +Tunis to capture the galley Fernandina, and on arriving at the island +of San Pedro, in Sardinia, I learned that there were two ships and a +caracca with the galley, which so alarmed the crew that they resolved +to proceed no further, but to return to Marseilles for another vessel +and more people; upon which, being unable to force their inclination, +I yielded to their wish, and having first changed the points of the +compass, spread all sail, for it was evening, and at daybreak we were +within the cape of Carthagena, while all believed for a certainty that +they were going to Marseilles._” The date of this occurrence is unknown, +but the expedient of Columbus to alter the point of the needle, reminds +us of his subsequent stratagem, of altering his reckoning, to appease his +discontented crew during his first great voyage of discovery. + +In the year 1472, however, we have evidence of his having been in Savona, +from the fact of his signature having been found appended to the will +of one Nicolò Monleone, under date of the 20th March of that year. The +document is preserved in Savona, among the notarial archives. + +In 1474 we find his name mentioned in a letter addressed by Ferdinand +king of Sicily to Louis king of France, the title of which runs thus: +“_Literæ à Ferdinando Rege Siciliæ ad Ludovicum XI, Galliæ Regem, per +Fæcialem missæ, quibus quæritur, quod Christophorus Columbus triremes +suas deprædatus sit, postulatque sibi ablata restitui. Datum in Terra +Fogiæ die 8 Decembr. 1474._” Then follows a letter in five lengthy +clauses, in which it is stated that the said vessels were attacked and +taken:—“_A Columbo, qui quibusdam navibus præest, Majestatis vestræ +subdito._” + +The title of Louis’s reply runs thus: “_Responsio Ludovici XI quibus +promittit restitutionem, excusat tamen Columbum, quod jus sit in Oceano +capere naves ab hostilibus terris venientes et saltem bona hostium +inde auferre._” These letters are given by Leibnitz, in his _Codex +Juris Gentium Diplomaticus, Prodromus_, art. 16 and 17; but on the +correction of Nicolas Toinard, he acknowledges, in the preface to his +_Mantissa Codicis_, that he had erroneously inserted the Christian name +“Christophorus.” + +Toinard’s correction went to shew that Leibnitz had confounded the name +of Guillaume de Caseneuve, surnamed Coulomp, Coulon, or Colon, as the +Spaniards called him, with that of the illustrious discoverer. This +acknowledgment by Leibnitz of his error might seem to render useless any +reference to the letters in question; but as Christopher Columbus is +stated by his son, Don Ferdinand, to have been of the same family as the +pirate here mentioned, and also to have been engaged at sea with him and +his nephew, it becomes interesting to examine what record exists of these +illustrious pirates, and to see how far the assertion of Don Ferdinand +bears the semblance of correctness. This Caseneuve, or Colon, is called +by Duclos, in speaking of the very circumstance which occasioned these +letters, in his _Histoire de Louis XI_, “_Vice-Amiral de France, et le +plus grand homme de mer de son temps._” And Zurita, in his _Libro 19 de +los Anales de Aragon_, calls him, “_Colon, capitan de la Armada del Rey +de Francia_.” Garnier, in his _Histoire de France_, thus relates the +circumstance: “_Guillaume de Casenove, Vice-Amiral de Normandie, connu +dans notre histoire sous le nom d’Amiral Coulon, s’était rendu formidable +sur toutes les mers de l’Europe, où il exerçait le métier d’armateur: +dans une de ses courses il s’empara de deux riches frégates chargées +pour le compte des plus riches négocians de Naples, de Florence, et de +plusieurs autres villes d’Italie, qui tout sollicitèrent vivement la +restitution de cette importante prise._” + +Another exploit, in which this Colon was successfully engaged, was the +taking of eighty Dutch ships returning from the herring fishery, in +the Baltic, in 1479. Again, another sea-fight related by Marc Antonio +Sabelico, in the eighth book of his tenth Decade, is quoted by Don +Fernando, where Columbus the younger (described by Sabelico as the +nephew, but by Zurita as Francis, the son of the famous corsair), +intercepted, between Lisbon and Cape St. Vincent, four richly laden +Venetian galleys, on their return from Flanders. Fernando further asserts +that his father (Christopher) was present in this engagement, and that +after a desperate contest, which lasted from morning till evening, +the hand-grenades and other fiery missiles used in the battle, caused +a general conflagration among the vessels, which having been lashed +together with iron grapplings, could not be separated, and the crews +were compelled to leap into the water to escape the fire. He then goes +on to say that “his father, who was a good swimmer, finding himself at +the distance of two leagues from the land, seized an oar, and by its aid +succeeded in reaching the shore. Whereupon, learning that he was not +far from Lisbon, where he knew he should find many natives of Genoa, +he went thither, and meeting with a gratifying reception, took up his +abode in that city.” The engagement here described is shown by various +French historians to have taken place in 1485, and as it is certain +that Columbus was in Lisbon prior to 1474 (for in that year he has a +letter addressed to him in that city by Paolo Toscanelli, in reply to one +written by himself from the same place), this relation by Don Ferdinand +assumes a very apocryphal aspect. + +With respect to his other statement, that his father was of the same name +and family as these two renowned corsairs, it is to be remarked that +neither he nor any of the subsequent historians who have claimed this +needless honour for the great discoverer, appears to have been acquainted +with the real name of the pirates; and as Caseneuve was the strict family +name of the latter, and Coulon merely a superadded surname, we may fairly +conclude that the claim to consanguinity has no other foundation than +the identity in the Spanish language of Columbus’s patronymic with the +distinguishing surname of the French vice-admiral. + +In the _Chronique Scandaleuse_ (folio 109) this Caseneuve is said to have +had a very handsome mansion, named Gaillart-Bois, in the neighbourhood +of Notre Dame d’Escouys, in Normandy, at which Louis XI made a stay of +two or three days in the month of June 1475, and returned thither also +in the following month and stayed there some time. Spotorno suggests +that his name of Coulon may have been derived from a place so called in +the province of Berri; so that, in addition to the evidence that he was +not of the same name or family with Christopher Columbus, there arises +strong reason to believe that he was in reality a Frenchman:[11] in +which case it becomes probable that an event which has been generally +attributed to him, or to his still more renowned relative François +Caseneuve, would be with greater correctness ascribed to the Genoese +navigator, Christopher Columbus. It appears that, in a letter dated Terra +d’Otranto, 2nd October, 1476 (preserved, according to Bossi, in the royal +archives at Milan), addressed to the Duke of Milan by two illustrious +gentlemen of that city,—the one Guid’Antonio Arcimboldo, and the other +Giovanni Giacomo Trivulzio—the following story is related. It says that +the captain of the Venetian fleet, when stationed off Cyprus to defend +the island, had twice encountered a _Genoese_ ship, called the “Nave +Palavisina,” which he had taken to be a Turkish caracca; and in these +two engagements one hundred and twenty of the Turks and Genoese had been +killed, and in the Venetian squadron thirty had been killed, and two +hundred wounded. The captain appears to have had doubts whether he might +not have done wrong, and caused offence to the duke of Milan, who might +perhaps be an ally of the Genoese: he therefore goes on to say that his +only desire had been to meet with his enemies (the Turks) and plunder +them; and adds, in confirmation of that assertion, that “a year before +he had met with three times as many galleys, who spoke no evil of his +good name, and that he found Columbus with ships and galleys, and had +cheerfully let him pass by, upon which the cry was raised of ‘Viva San +Georgio,’ and nothing further passed between them.” The Columbus here +mentioned is shewn, by the cry of “Viva San Georgio,” and by the general +tenour of the Venetian captain’s letter, to have been a Genoese, and +with a Genoese crew; and as it appears probable that the Caseneuves were +Frenchmen, and would in all probability sail with French crews, it leaves +strong reason to presume that the Genoese captain here mentioned was +Christopher Columbus, who is allowed by all his early historians to have +been engaged in the Mediterranean about the period referred to. + +His son, Ferdinand Columbus, distinctly states that, “it was in Portugal +that the admiral began to surmise, that, if the Portuguese sailed so far +south, one might also sail westward, and find lands in that direction.” + +The period of Christopher Columbus’s sojourn in Portugal was from 1470 to +the close of 1484, during which time he made several voyages to the coast +of Guinea in the Portuguese service. While at Lisbon he married Felipa +Moñiz de Perestrello, daughter of that Bartollomeu Perestrello to whom +Prince Henry had granted the commandership of the island of Porto Santo. +For some time Columbus and his wife lived at Porto Santo with the widow +of Perestrello, who, observing the interest he took in nautical matters, +spoke much to him of her husband’s expedition, and handed over to him the +papers, journals, maps, and nautical instruments, which Perestrello had +left behind him.[12] + +“It was not only,” says Ferdinand Columbus (see _Vida_, cap. 8), “this +opinion of certain philosophers, that the greatest part of our globe +is dry land, that stimulated the admiral; he learned, also, from many +pilots, experienced in the western voyages to the Azores and the Island +of Madeira, facts and signs which convinced him that there was an unknown +land towards the west.” Martin Vicente, pilot of the King of Portugal, +told him that at a distance of four hundred and fifty leagues from Cape +St. Vincent, he had taken from the water a piece of wood sculptured +very artistically, but not with an iron instrument. This wood had been +driven across by the west wind, which made the sailors believe, that +certainly there were on that side some islands not yet discovered. Pedro +Correa, the brother-in-law of Columbus, told him, that near the island +of Madeira he had found a similar piece of sculptured wood, and coming +from the same western direction. He also said that the King of Portugal +had received information of large canes having been taken up from the +water in these parts, which between one knot and another would hold nine +bottles of wine; and Herrera (Dec. 1, lib. 1, cap. 2) declares that the +king had preserved these canes, and caused them to be shown to Columbus. +The colonists of the Azores related, that when the wind blew from the +west, the sea threw up, especially in the islands of Graciosa and Fayal, +pines of a foreign species. Others related, that in the island of Flores +they found one day on the shore two corpses of men, whose physiognomy and +features differed entirely from those of our coasts. Herrera, perhaps +from the MSS. of Las Casas, says, that the corpses had broad faces, +different from those of Christians. The transport of these objects was +attributed to the action of the west winds. The true cause, however, was +the great current of the Gulf or Florida stream. The west and north-west +winds only increase the ordinary rapidity of the ocean current, prolong +its action towards the east, as far as the Bay of Biscay, and mix the +waters of the Gulf stream with those of the currents of Davis’ Straits +and of North Africa. The same eastward oceanic movement, which in the +fifteenth century carried bamboos and pines upon the shores of the Azores +and Porto Santo, deposits annually on Ireland, the Hebrides, and Norway, +the seeds of tropical plants, and the remains of cargoes of ships which +had been wrecked in the West Indies.[13] + +While availing himself of these sources of information, Columbus studied +with deep and careful attention the works of such geographical authors +as supplied suggestions of the feasibility of a short western passage +to India. Amongst these, the _Imago Mundi_ of Cardinal Pierre d’Ailly +(Petrus de Aliaco) was his favourite, and it is probable that from it +he culled all he knew of the opinions of Aristotle, Strabo, and Seneca, +respecting the facility of reaching India by a western route. Columbus’s +own copy of this work is now in the cathedral of Seville, and forms one +of the most precious items in the valuable library, originally collected +by his son Ferdinand, and bequeathed to the cathedral on condition of +its being constantly preserved for public use. It contains many marginal +notes in his own handwriting, but of comparatively little importance. + +The fondness of Columbus for the works of Pierre d’Ailly, a Frenchman, +has caused a recent French writer, M. Margry, to put forth the empty +pretension that the discovery of America was due to the influence of +French teaching, whereas, not only was the _Imago Mundi_ itself a +compilation from ancient authors, but the first edition was not printed +till many years after Columbus had devoted himself to the purpose +which ended in his great discovery, for his famous correspondence +with Toscanelli, of which I shall presently speak, occurred in 1474. +M. Margry, indeed, _asserts_, but without giving his authority, +that in the Columbian Library at Seville are D’Ailly’s treatises +_printed at Nuremberg in 1472_. This is in contravention of all the +bibliographers—Panzer, Ebert, Hain, Serna Santander, Lambinet, and Jean +de Launoy. + +The earliest date assigned to the first edition of the _Imago Mundi_, +is _about_ 1480 by Serna Santander, 1483 (?) by Lambinet, while Jean +de Launoy, in his _Regii Navarræ Gymnasii Parisiensis Historia_, +Parisiis, 1677, tom. ii, page 478, distinctly gives it the date of +1490. Humboldt, who had Columbus’s copy in his hands, and who, as the +subject was especially his own, cannot be suspected of sleeping over +such an important point, adopts De Launoy’s date of 1490, while Lambinet +gives the queried date of 1483 from actual collation with another work +printed in that year, at Louvain, in the very identical type, by John of +Westphalia. In the recently published second volume of the _Ensayo de +una bibliotheca de libros españoles raros_, por Don Bartolomé Gallardo, +is a list of the books in the Columbian Library, but D’Ailly’s _Imago +Mundi_ is not therein mentioned, although his _Quæstiones_, printed much +later by Jean Petit at Paris, a far less important book, is inserted. The +omission is to be regretted, as we might have hoped for some illustrative +comments from the author. + +But perhaps it may be suggested that Columbus may have possessed, or +seen, a _manuscript_ copy of Pierre d’Ailly at a yet earlier period. +We will willingly suppose it for the sake of the argument; but even +then the reasoning will fail, for I find that the very portion of the +_Imago Mundi_, written in 1410, which is assumed to have supplied the +inspiration for the discovery of America, and which Columbus quoted in +his letter to Ferdinand and Isabella from Haiti in 1498, is _taken by +Pierre d’Ailly, without acknowledgment, almost word for word, from the +“Opus Majus,” of Roger Bacon_, written in 1267, a hundred and forty-three +years before, as will be seen at page 183 of that work, printed Londini, +1733, fol. See Humboldt, _Examen Critique_, tom. i, pp. 64-70. + +Unfortunately Roger Bacon was not a Frenchman, but there remains for +M. Margry the consolatory fact that no Englishman is likely to avail +himself of the circumstance which I have just enunciated, to claim +for his countrymen the honour of having inspired Columbus with the +idea which led to the discovery of America, although, by M. Margry’s +process of reasoning, he might do so if he would. True, Roger Bacon +had been a student in the University of Paris; but this fact did not +communicate the character of French inspiration to the ancient authors +whose statements he quotes. True also (but this is a circumstance either +unknown to or unnoticed by M. Margry), Ferdinand Columbus tells us that +his father was principally influenced in his belief of the smallness of +the space between Spain and Asia, by the opinion of the Arab astronomer, +Al Fergani, or Alfragan, to that effect; and it is further true that +Alfragan is further treated of by Pierre d’Ailly, in his _Mappa Mundi_. +This is a separate work from the _Imago Mundi_, although it happens +to have been printed with it, at a period which we have shown to be +posterior to Columbus’s correspondence with Toscanelli, in 1474. + +It follows, therefore, that either: 1st, the great explorer obtained +his knowledge of Alfragan’s opinion through one of the Arabo-Latin +translations, to which he seems to have had recourse during his +cosmographical studies in Portugal and Spain (see Humboldt, _Examen +Critique_, tom. i, p. 83), in which case French influence is eliminated; +or 2ndly, he derived it from a manuscript of Pierre d’Ailly before +1474, which there is no evidence to show; or 3rdly, he derived it +from the printed copy of Pierre d’Ailly, in which case the influence +of Alfragan on his mind could not have been primarily suggestive, but +only corroborative of conclusions to which he had come several years +before that book was printed. And in either of the two latter cases, the +information supplied by Alfragan would not become French because adduced +by a Frenchman, unless we introduce into serious history a principle +analogous to the old conventional English blunder of giving to the toys +manufactured in Nuremberg the name of “Dutch toys,” because imported +through Holland. + +The suggestions derived from these works were corroborated by the +narratives of Marco Polo and Sir John Mandeville, whose reports of the +vast extent of Asia eastward led to the reasonable inference, that the +western passage to the eastern confines of that continent could not +demand any considerable length of time. The natural tendency of his +thoughts to nautical enterprise being thus fostered by the works that he +studied, and by the animating accounts of recent adventurers, as well as +by the glorious prospects which the broad expanse of the unknown world +opened up to his view, we find that in the year 1474 his ideas had formed +for themselves a determined channel, and his grand project of discovery +was established in his mind as a thing to be done, and done by himself. +The combined enthusiasm and tenacity of purpose which distinguished +his character, caused him to regard his theory, when once formed, as +a matter of such undeniable certainty, that no doubts, opposition, or +disappointment, could divert him from the pursuit of it. It so happened +that while Columbus was at Lisbon a correspondence was being carried on +between Fernam Martins, a prebendary of that place, and the learned Paolo +Toscanelli, of Florence, respecting the commerce of the Portuguese to +the coast of Guinea, and the navigation of the ocean to the Westward. +This came to the knowledge of Columbus, who forthwith despatched by an +Italian, then at his house, a letter to Toscanelli, informing him of his +project. He received an answer in Latin, in which, to demonstrate his +approbation of the design of Columbus, Toscanelli sent him a copy of a +letter which he had written to Martins a few days before, accompanied by +a chart, the most important features of which were laid down from the +descriptions of Marco Polo. The coasts of Asia were drawn at a moderate +distance from the opposite coasts of Europe and Africa, and the islands +of Cipango, Antilla, etc., of whose riches such astonishing accounts had +been given by this traveller, were placed at convenient spaces between +the two continents. + +While all these exciting accounts must have conspired to fan the flame +of his ambition, one of the noblest points in the character of Columbus +had to be put to the test by the difficulty of carrying his project into +effect. The political position of Portugal, engrossed as it was with its +wars with Spain, rendered the thoughts of an application for an expensive +fleet of discovery worse than useless, and several years elapsed before a +convenient opportunity presented itself for making the proposition. + +Meanwhile Columbus was not idle. In the year 1477, he tells us, in a +letter quoted by his son, Don Ferdinand, that “_he sailed a hundred +leagues beyond the island of Thule, the southern part of which is distant +from the equinoctial line seventy-three degrees, and not sixty-three, +as some assert; neither does it lie within the line which includes the +west of Ptolemy, but is much more westerly. To this island, which is as +large as England, the English, especially those from Bristol, go with +their merchandize. At the time that I was there the sea was not frozen, +but the tides were so great as to rise and fall twenty-six fathoms. It +is true that the Thule of which Ptolemy makes mention lies where he says +it does, and by the moderns it is called Frislanda._” Whether the Færoe +islands [see ante, page xxiii], or Iceland, was alluded to is uncertain, +for nothing more is known of the voyage than is contained in this letter. +It is moreover supposed by his son, as has been already stated, that he +passed a considerable portion of his time at sea, with one or both of the +famous pirates of the same name, who were so many years engaged in the +Levant; but upon the whole of this portion of his history there rests an +impenetrable cloud of obscurity. + +About the year 1480, by the joint labours of the celebrated Martin +Behaim and the prince’s two physicians, Roderigo and Josef, who were the +most able geographers and astronomers in the kingdom, the astrolabe was +rendered serviceable for the purposes of navigation, as by its use the +seaman was enabled to ascertain his distance from the equator by the +altitude of the sun. + +Shortly after this invaluable invention Columbus submitted to the king +of Portugal his proposition of a voyage of discovery, and succeeded in +obtaining an audience to advocate his cause. He explained his views with +respect to the facility of the undertaking, from the form of the earth, +and the comparatively small space that intervened between Europe and +the eastern shores of Asia, and proposed, if the king would supply him +with ships and men, to take the direct western route to India across +the Atlantic. His application was received at first discouragingly, +but the king was at length induced, by the excellent arguments of +Columbus, to make a conditional concession, and the result was that the +proposition was referred to a council of men supposed to be learned +in maritime affairs. This council, consisting of the above-mentioned +geographers, Roderigo and Josef, and Cazadilla, bishop of Ceuta, the +king’s confessor, treated the question as an extravagant absurdity. The +king, not satisfied with their judgment, then convoked a second council, +consisting of a considerable number of the most learned men in the +kingdom; but the result of their deliberations was only confirmative of +the verdict of the first junta, and a general sentence of condemnation +was passed upon the proposition. As the king still manifested an +inclination to make a trial of the scheme of Columbus, and expressed a +proportionate dissatisfaction with the decisions of these two juntas, +some of his councillors, who were inimical to Columbus, and at the same +time unwilling to offend the king, suggested a process which coincided +with their own views, but which was at once short-sighted, impolitic, and +ungenerous. Their plan was to procure from Columbus a detailed account +of his design under the pretence of subjecting it to the examination of +the council, and then to dispatch a caravel on the voyage of discovery +under the false pretext of conveying provision to the Cape Verde Islands. +King John, contrary to his general character for prudence and generosity, +yielded to their insidious advice, and their plan was acted upon, but the +caravel which was sent out, after keeping on its westward course for some +days, encountered a storm, and the crew, possessing none of the lofty +motives of Columbus to support their resolution, returned to Lisbon, +ridiculing the scheme in excuse of their own cowardice. So indignant was +Columbus at this unworthy manœuvre, that he resolved to leave Portugal +and offer his services to some other country, and towards the end of 1484 +he left Lisbon secretly with his son Diego. The learned and careful Muñoz +states his opinion that he went immediately to Genoa, and made a personal +proposition to that government, but met with a contemptuous refusal; at +any rate, we are positively informed by Fernando Columbus that his father +went to Spain at the close of 1484. A curious surmise is expressed in a +note to Sharon Turner’s _History of England in the Middle Ages_, in which +the supposition is propounded of the possible identity of Christopher +Columbus with a person named Christofre Colyns, who is recorded in +some grants in the Harleian MSS. to have been military commandant of +Queenborough castle, in the isle of Sheppy, in 1484 and 1485. This man +is distinctly stated in the same grants to have held that post in April +1485, and it may be reasonably conjectured that the cessation of his +office would not take place till the accession of Henry VII, in August +in that year, which leaves but little time for his making his way to +Genoa, and subsequently reaching Spain, so as to make his application +to that court. Moreover, the impoverished condition in which Columbus +presented himself at the convent de la Rabida was very incompatible with +the probable pecuniary position of a person, who is described by the +grants in question not only to have held the prominent station already +mentioned, but to have had a ship given him, with an annuity of £100, +and an especial grant of money to enable him to supply himself with +habiliments of war. These considerations, combined with the statement of +Fernando Columbus just referred to, show that the supposition proposed by +Mr. Turner cannot be regarded as tenable. + +The interesting story of Columbus’s visit to the Franciscan convent of +Santa Maria de Rabida forms the first incident that we find recorded of +him after his arrival in Spain. It is well known that the lively interest +which the worthy prior of that convent, Fray Juan Perez de Marchena, took +in his guest, was the means, through the anticipated influence of his +friend Fernando de Talavera, of first leading Columbus to the Spanish +court, under the hope of obtaining the patronage of the king and queen. +Talavera, who was prior of the monastery of Prado, and confessor to the +queen, possessed great political interest. Juan Perez took advantage +of this influential position of his friend, and addressed him a letter +by the hands of Columbus, strongly recommending the project of the +latter to his favourable consideration, and requesting his advocacy of +it before the sovereigns. It was in the spring of 1486 that Columbus +first ventured to the Spanish court in the hope of gaining a favourable +audience. On reaching Cordova, however, he had the mortification to +find that Talavera, upon whose influence he mainly relied, regarded +his design as unreasonable and preposterous. The court also was at +that time so engrossed with the war at Granada, as to place any hope +of gaining attention to his novel and expensive proposition out of +the question. At length, at the close of 1486, the theory of Columbus, +backed as it was by his forcible arguments and earnest manner, gained +weight with the most important personage at court next to the sovereigns +themselves. This was Mendoza, archbishop of Toledo, and grand cardinal +of Spain; who, pleased with the grandeur of the scheme and the fervent +but clear-headed reasoning of Columbus, adopted his cause, and became +his staunch protector and friend. Through his means an audience was +procured with the sovereigns, and the result of the interview was the +expression of a favourable opinion, qualified by the necessity of an +appeal to the judgment of the literati of the country. But here again +Columbus found himself in a painful predicament, which it required all +his knowledge and prudence to escape from with safety. He was examined +at Salamanca by a council of ecclesiastics, and had to propound opinions +which appeared to be at variance with the descriptions contained in +the sacred Scriptures, and that at a period when the expression of any +sentiment approaching to heresy exposed its owner to the persecution of +the newly established Inquisition. The ignorance of cosmography, and the +blind conclusions drawn from various misinterpreted texts of Scripture, +formed mighty impediments to the pleadings of Columbus, and he began +to find himself in danger of being convicted not only of error, but of +heresy. One learned man of the number, however, Diego de Deza, tutor +to prince John, and afterwards archbishop of Seville, appreciated the +eloquent and lucid reasonings of the adventurer, and aiding him with his +own powers of language and erudition, not only gained for him a hearing, +but won upon the judgments of some of the most learned of the council. +Nevertheless, so important a question could not be hastily decided; +and the result of the united pedantry and sluggish superstition of the +learned body, was to expose the question to protracted argumentation or +neglect, while Talavera, who was at its head, and from whom Columbus had +hoped to receive the greatest assistance, was too busied with political +matters to bring it to a conclusion. At length, in the early part of +1487, the deliberations of the council were brought to a stand-still by +the departure of the court to Cordova, and were not resumed till the +winter of 1491. During this wearisome period the bustle and excitement +of the memorable campaign against the Moors, with its alternations of +triumphant festivity, together with the marriage of the princess Isabella +to the prince Alonzo, heir apparent of Portugal, were far too engrossing +to admit of much attention being given to the schemes of Columbus.[14] +At the close, however, of the year 1491, the learned conclave appears to +have recommenced its consultations; but upon being called upon by the +sovereigns for a decision, a report was returned to Talavera that the +scheme was considered by the general vote of the junta too groundless to +be recommended. Accordingly Talavera was commanded to inform Columbus +that the cares and expenses of the war precluded the possibility of +their highnesses engaging in any new enterprises, but that when it was +concluded, there would be both the will and the opportunity to give the +subject further consideration. Regarding this as nothing better than a +courteous evasion of his application, he retired wearied and disappointed +from the court, and, but for an attachment which he had formed at Cordova +which made him reluctant to leave Spain, he would in all probability have +repaired to France, under the encouragement of a favourable letter which +he had received from that quarter. + +The ensuing period till 1492 was spent in a succession of vexatious +appeals to the Spanish court, during which he had to contend with every +obstacle that ignorance, envy, or a pusillanimous economy could suggest. + +At length having overcome all difficulties, he set sail with a fleet of +three ships on the 3rd of August 1492, on his unprecedented and perilous +voyage. The ordinary difficulties which might be expected to occur in +so novel and precarious an adventure were seriously aggravated by the +alarming discovery of the variation of the needle, as well as by the +mutinous behaviour of his crew; and his life was upon the point of being +sacrificed to their impatience, when the fortunate appearance of land, +on the morning of the 12th of October, converted their indignation into +compunction, and their despondency into unbounded joy. + +With reference to the identity of the first landing place of Columbus +in America, I too readily adopted in 1847 the conclusions of Navarrete +that the Great Turk, the northernmost of the Turk islands, was the +true landfall. I did so under the following process of reasoning. My +predecessors in the consideration of the subject had been the learned +Juan Bautista Muñoz in 1793, Navarrete in 1825, Washington Irving in +1828, and the Baron Alexander von Humboldt in 1837. It was the opinion +of Muñoz that Guanahani was Watling’s Island. Navarrete, as just shown, +placed it in the Grand Turk, far to the east, while Washington Irving +and Humboldt made it to be Cat Island to the west. Such different +conclusions, formed by thoughtful men from an examination of the diary +of Columbus and other early documents, caused me to set a great value +upon any modern reconnaissance of the locality which might throw a fuller +light upon these documents and perhaps show which of the conclusions +was correct. Now, it so happened that a communication made a short time +previously to the New York Historical Society by Mr. Gibbs, a resident on +Turk’s Island, presented several points of evidence strongly confirmative +of the correctness of Navarrete’s deductions. The most important of Mr. +Gibbs’s arguments were the following. Columbus states in his journal +that there were several islands in sight from Guanahani. From the +island now called San Salvador, Mr. Gibbs found no land visible. The +journal speaks of soundings to the eastward of Guanahani: there were +none to the eastward of San Salvador. All the marks wanting at San +Salvador were found at Turk’s Island. The journal describes Guanahani +as well wooded, and having much water; a large lake in the centre, and +two several running streams flowing into the sea. Turk’s Island has +about one-third of its surface covered with lakes of salt and fresh +water; and a few years before vessels had sailed into one of the ponds. +Although the island was now without trees, Mr. Gibbs recollected some +remains of a forest existing in his youth. Moreover the journal makes +no allusion to the Great Bahama Bank, which must have been passed in +approaching San Salvador.[15] As Mr. Gibbs’s personal observation thus +appeared to corroborate the deductions of Señor de Navarrete, I yielded +to this combination of evidence and so submitted it to the reader. Since +that time, however, we have seen other arguments advanced, in which +local investigation, as well as the examination of the early documents, +have resulted in conclusions as divergent as those which preceded them. +Captain Becher, R.N., of our own Hydrographic Office, in his _Landfall of +Columbus_, published London, 1856, examining the question from a seaman’s +point of view, fell in with the opinion formed by Muñoz in 1793, that +Guanahani was Watling’s Island, while Señor de Varnhagen, in his _La +verdadera Guanahani de Colon_, published at Santiago, 1864, maintains +the unique opinion that it was the island of Mayaguana. + +Under these circumstances it has become a duty in me to revise my old +opinion; and while the process to which I shall resort will, as I hope, +finally settle this much vexed question, it is happily one which will not +lay me open to the charge of presumption in giving a judicial verdict +where men of such high renown have differed. I congratulate myself on +having found a means of enabling the reader to judge for himself by a +very simple mode of examination. Annexed is a fac-simile of Herrera’s +map of the Bahama Islands, as laid down from the original documents +in the handwriting of Columbus and his contemporaries, to which, as +official historiographer of the Indies in the sixteenth century, Herrera +had exclusive access; and side by side with it is a map, reduced from +the Admiralty survey, showing those islands as now known, and with +their modern names. I indulge the hope that no one will contest the +identification[16] of the respective islands laid down in the old map +with those which I have set forth as their correlatives in the modern +one, and if so, the Guanahani of Columbus will be plainly seen to be +Watling’s Island. The correctness of this identification is not only +confirmed, but made easily perceptible, by the fact that certain islands +of the series have retained their ancient names without change from +the beginning, thus affording stations for comparison which reduce the +chances of error to a minimum. This map of Herrera’s is of especial value +for the purpose, because while it embodies the information contained in +the map of the pilot Juan de la Cosa, who was with Columbus in his second +voyage (1493-96); it has the advantage over the latter in having been +made nearly a century later, and so contains the entire chain of islands, +many of which had not been explored at the time when De la Cosa laid down +his map in 1500. For the satisfaction of the reader, however, a reduction +of that part of De la Cosa’s map which shows these islands is here given. + +[Illustration: BAHAMA ISLANDS + +ANTONIO DE HERRERA + +1601.] + +[Illustration: BAHAMA ISLANDS + +MODERN] + + Herrera Modern + + _Bahama_ _Gᵗ. Bahama Iᵈ._ + _Bimini_ } _Andros Iˢ._ + _Habacoa_ } + _Cabeça de los Martires_ _Cay Sal Bank_ + _Yucayoneque_ _Gᵗ. Abaco Iᵈ._ + _Cigateo_ _Eleuthera_ + _Curateo_ _Little S. Salvador_ + _Guanima_ _S. Salvador or Cat Iᵈ._ + _Anonymous between Habacoa & Yuma_ _Great Exuma_ + _Guanihana_ _Watlings Iᵈ._ + _Yuma_ _Yuma_ + _Samana_ _Samana_ + _Xumeto_ _Crooked Iᵈ._ + _Yabaque_ _Acklin’s Iᵈ._ + _Mayaguana_ _Mariguana_ + _Caycos_ } _The Caycos Group_ + _Amana_ } + _Canciba_ _Turks Iˢ._ + _Abreojo_ _Mouchoir Carré_ + _Canaman_ _Silver Plate Bank_ + _Macarey_ _Navidad or Ship B._ + _Mira por vos_ _Miraporvos_ + _Ynagua_ _Gᵗ. Inagua_ + _La Tortuga_ _Tortuga_ + +But while it is hoped that the identity of Guanahani with Watling’s +Island will be admitted to be authoritatively established by this +comparison, it would be wanting in respect to those who have put forth +other claims not to show, I will not say the ground on which these claims +were advanced, but rather, for brevity’s sake, the points at which their +arguments fail. I adopt this plan on the principle that a chain is no +stronger than its weakest link. Of all these I fear none occupies so +disadvantageous a position as His Excellency Senhor de Varnhagen; for +having unfortunately adopted for his _protégée_ an island (Mayaguana), +which is represented _together with_ the island of Guanahani both on +De la Cosa’s and Herrera’s maps, I regret to say that he seems to me +to be _ipso facto_ put out of court, since no reasoning whatever could +by any possibility make identical two islands so markedly distinct +that several other islands are shown to lie between them. Washington +Irving, in advocating Cat Island, or the island at present called St. +Salvador, as the genuine Guanahani, adduces an examination of the route +of Columbus by Commander Alexander Slidell Mackenzie of the U.S. navy, +but which being principally addressed to the disproval of Navarrete’s +Turk’s Island, fails to establish Cat Island as the real landfall in +contradistinction to Watling’s Island. In examining this route I observe +a startling inaccuracy, which underlies the whole question. It is stated +that Columbus describes the island as _very large_. On referring to +Columbus’s logbook in Navarrete, I find it, on the contrary, called an +“isleta,” or islet, _i. e._ _small_ island, a term which could scarcely +be applied to an island forty-two miles long and the loftiest of the +Bahamas, which Cat Island is, whereas it would be correctly applied to +Watling’s Island, which is only twelve miles long, cut up by salt water +lagoons, separated from each other by small woody hills. At the close, +reference is made to the identity preserved to Cat Island as San Salvador +with that given by Columbus, and a remonstrance against disturbing the +ancient landmarks. But this is a _petitio principii_, inasmuch as at +the period when the name of San Salvador was first continuously applied +to Cat Island, viz., the middle of the seventeenth century, both map +makers and sailors were possessed of no better materials, nor even so +good, as ourselves, for coming to an accurate determination. Humboldt, +in accepting the conclusions of Commander Mackenzie as adopted by +Irving, thinks them confirmed by the map of Juan de la Cosa, of which I +have given an extract. But here I would observe that the attention of +the illustrious philosopher was bent on the point to which Mackenzie’s +paper was directed, viz., the disproval of Turk’s Island, and not to +a discrimination between Cat Island and Watling’s Island for the true +landfall. A glance will show that the imperfectness of the Bahama group +in Juan de la Cosa’s map renders it perfectly inadequate for settling so +minute a question. + +[Illustration: JUAN DE LA COSA + +1500.] + +It is needless to dwell here upon the events which followed this +discovery, as they are for the most part described in the letter here +translated. The main result of the voyage was the discovery of the +islands of St. Salvador, Santa Maria de la Concepcion, Exuma, Isabella, +Cuba, Bohio, the Archipelago off the south coast of Cuba (which he names +the Jardin del Rey, or King’s Garden), the islands of St. Catherine and +Hispaniola, on which latter Columbus erected the fortress of La Navidad, +and established a colony. Finally, on the 16th of January, he began to +steer his course for Spain, and he was already near the Azores when, on +the 12th February, the wind came on to blow violently, with a heavy +sea, and on the following day a frightful tempest broke upon them, which +obliged them to scud under bare poles. The storm continuing with unabated +violence, on the night of the 14th of February the two caravels parted +company, each following the course where the fury of the tempest drove +them. The sailors, giving themselves up for lost, offered up prayers and +vows; while the admiral, full of gloomy apprehensions that, after all, +his discovery might turn to nought, and his two sons be left destitute, +wrote upon parchment the account of the voyage, addressed it to the +king of Spain, with a promise, written outside, of one thousand ducats +to whomsoever would deliver it unopened. He then wrapped the packet up +in waxed cloth, and put it into the middle of a cake of wax, and after +inclosing it in a barrel well hooped and stopped up, he threw it into the +sea. He also placed on the poop of his own vessel a similar barrel, with +the same account enclosed, in order that if the ship went to the bottom +the barrel might float, and the narrative be saved. During this period +Columbus passed three days and nights without sleep, and with scanty and +bad food, so that when, on the 18th, he arrived at St. Mary’s, one of +the Azores, he felt his limbs quite crippled with exposure to the cold +and wet. There was a small church there, in a solitary place, dedicated +to the Virgin. Columbus, with the view of discharging the vows made +during the storm, sent half of his people on shore to the church, but +the Portuguese Governor of the island took them all prisoners, seized +their boat, and would have attacked Columbus’s own vessel, by orders, +as he said, received from his court, but for the firmness with which +the latter confronted him. Columbus indignantly asserted his own rank +and office, showed his letters patent sealed with the royal seal, and +threatened the Governor with the vengeance of the Castilian government. +After a few days, during which Columbus was driven from his anchorage +and had to beat about in great danger, the Governor, who in the interval +had thought better of the matter, liberated the prisoners and allowed +the caravel to proceed on her course. The state of the weather was most +terrible; the sea ran mountains high; the lightnings rent the clouds, +and the violence of the winds was such that the vessel was obliged to +scud under bare poles, in which state she arrived, at last, in the Tagus, +near Lisbon, on the 4th of March. Columbus immediately wrote a letter +to the King of Portugal, then at Valparaiso, informing him that he was +not come from Guinea but from the Indies, and requesting protection +for his caravel, and permission to bring it up to Lisbon. Not only was +this granted, but Columbus was immediately invited to Valparaiso and +was received by the monarch and his courtiers with the highest honours. +There were not wanting, however, some who would gladly have slain him to +prevent his going to Castile as the bearer of such great and glorious +news. The magnanimity of the king prevented this injustice, and leaving +Portugal in safety, on the 13th of March, Columbus arrived on the 15th +at the little port of Palos, from whence he had sailed on the 3rd of +August in the preceding year. Meanwhile Pinzon, the captain of the other +caravel, who in the late storm had been driven into Galicia, wished to +anticipate the admiral, but an express order from the court, forbidding +him to come without Columbus, made him actually die of spite and chagrin. +The reception of Columbus in Spain was such as the grandeur and dignity +of his unrivalled achievement deserved, and his entrance into Barcelona +was scarcely inferior to a Roman triumph.[17] + +Very shortly after his arrival the papal bull was obtained, which fixed +the famous line of demarcation, determining the right of the Spanish and +Portuguese to discovered lands. This line was drawn from the north to the +south pole, at a hundred leagues west of the Azores and Cape de Verde +islands; the discoveries to the westward were to belong to Spain, and +those to the eastward to Portugal. + +The seductive adulation of the court and the people did not, however, +divert the thoughts of Columbus from the preparations for a second +expedition. A stay of five months sufficed to make all ready for this +purpose; but these preparations gave rise to a malignant feeling towards +him on the part of Juan Rodriguez Fonseca, Bishop of Badajos, which +eventually led to such disgraceful ill-usage of the admiral as will +remain a stain upon the character of Spain while the name of Columbus +exists in the memory of man. + +On the 25th September 1493, Columbus took his departure from Cadiz, with +a fleet of three large ships of heavy burthen, and fourteen caravels, +and after a pleasant voyage reached the island of Dominica on the 3rd of +November. The letter of Dr. Chanca, here translated, gives an interesting +description of a considerable portion of the events of this voyage, but +it is to be regretted that his account terminates so abruptly, and the +“memorial” of Columbus to the sovereigns adds but few incidents of moment +to the narrative. We should be straining the necessary limits of a mere +introduction to these translated documents, were we to undertake to lead +the reader through the various history of this eventful period of the +life of Columbus. Such a task has been rendered perfectly unnecessary +by the much admired work of Washington Irving. Suffice it that we +state, that the principal geographical information supplied by this +voyage consists in the discovery of the Caribbee Islands, Jamaica, an +Archipelago (named by Columbus the Queen’s Gardens, supposed to be the +Morant Keys), Evangelista, or the Isle of Pines; and the island of Mona. + +He sailed with his fleet finally for Spain on the 28th of April, 1496, +and after nearly two months’ struggle against the trade-winds (during +which provisions became so reduced, that there was talk of killing, +and even eating the Indian prisoners), reached the bay of Cadiz on the +11th of June. The emaciated state of the crew when they disembarked, +presenting so mournful a contrast with the joyous and triumphant +appearance which they were expected to make, produced a very discouraging +impression upon the opinions of the public, and reflected a corresponding +depression upon the spirits of Columbus himself. He was reassured, +however, by the receipt of a gracious letter from the sovereigns inviting +him to the court, which was the more gratifying to him that he had feared +he had fallen into disgrace. He was received with distinguished favour, +and had a verbal concession of his request to be furnished with eight +ships for a third voyage. He was doomed, however, to have his patience +severely tried by the delay which occurred in the performance of this +promise, which was partly attributable to the engrossing character of +the public events of the day, and partly to the machinations of his +inveterate enemy, the bishop Fonseca. + +It was not till the 30th of May 1498, that he set sail from San Lucar, +with six of the eight vessels promised, the other two having been +despatched to Hispaniola, with provisions, in the beginning of the +year. When off Ferro he despatched three of his six vessels to the same +island, with a store of fresh supplies for the colony, while with his +remaining three he steered for the Cape Verde Islands, which he reached +on the 27th of June. On the 5th of July he left Boavista, and proceeded +southward and westward. In the course of this voyage the crews suffered +intensely from the heat, having at one time reached the fifth degree of +north latitude, but at length land was descried on the 31st of July,—a +most providential occurrence, as but one cask of water remained in the +ship. The island they came to formed an addition to his discoveries; and +as the first land which appeared consisted of three mountains, united +at their base, he christened the island, from the name of the Trinity, +La Trinidad. It was in this voyage that he discovered terra firma,[18] +and the islands of Margarita and Cubagua. His supposition that Paria had +formed the original abode of our first parents, is curiously described +in our translated letter; and to a careful observer the sagacity of his +mode of reasoning is perceptible even in a speculation so fanciful as +this. On reaching Hispaniola (to which he was drawn by his anxiety on +account of the infant colony), he had the mortification to find that his +authority had suffered considerable diminution, and that the colony was +in a state of organized rebellion. He had scarcely, by his active and at +the same time politic conduct, brought matters to a state of comparative +tranquillity, when a new storm gathered round him from the quarter of +the Spanish court. The hatred of his ancient enemies availed itself of +the clamour raised against him by some of the rebels who had recently +returned to Spain, and charges of tyranny, cruelty, and ambition were +heaped unsparingly upon him. The king and queen, wearied with reiterated +complaints, at length resolved to send out a judge, to inquire into his +conduct,—injudiciously authorizing him to seize the governorship in the +place of Columbus, should the accusations brought against him prove +to be valid. The person chosen was Don Francisco de Bobadilla, whose +character and qualifications for the office are best demonstrated by +the fact, that, on the day after his arrival in Hispaniola, he seized +upon the government before he had investigated the conduct of Columbus, +who was then absent; he also took up his residence in his house, and +took possession of all his property, public and private, even to his +most secret papers. A summons to appear before the new governor was +despatched to Columbus, who was at Fort Concepcion; and in the interval +between the despatch of the summons and his arrival, his brother, Don +Diego, was seized, thrown into irons, and confined on board of a caravel, +without any reason being assigned for his imprisonment. No sooner did +the admiral himself arrive, than he likewise was put in chains, and +thrown into confinement. The habitual reverence due to his venerable +person and exalted character, made each bystander shrink from the task of +fixing the fetters on him, till one of his own domestics, described by +Las Casas as “a graceless and shameless cook,” filled up the measure of +ingratitude that he seemed doomed to experience, by riveting the irons, +not merely with apathy, but with manifest alacrity. In this shackled +condition he was conveyed, in the early part of October, from prison to +the ship that was to convey him home; and when Andreas Martin, the master +of the caravel, touched with respect for Columbus, and deeply moved at +this unworthy treatment, proposed to take off his irons, he declined +the offered benefit, with the following magnanimous reply: “Since the +king has commanded that I should obey his governor, he shall find me as +obedient in this as I have been to all his other orders; nothing but +his command shall release me. If twelve years’ hardship and fatigue; +if continual dangers and frequent famine; if the ocean first opened, +and five times passed and repassed, to add a new world, abounding with +wealth, to the Spanish monarchy; and if an infirm and premature old age, +brought on by these services, deserve these chains as a reward, it is +very fit I should wear them to Spain, and keep them by me as memorials to +the end of my life.” This in truth he did; for he always kept them hung +on the walls of his chamber, and desired that when he died they might be +buried with him. + +His arrival in Spain in this painful and degraded condition produced +so general a sensation of indignation and astonishment, that a warm +manifestation in his favour was the immediate consequence. A letter (here +translated), written by him to Doña Juana de la Torre, a lady of the +court, detailing the wrongs he had suffered, was read to queen Isabella, +whose generous mind was filled with sympathy and indignation at the +recital. The sovereigns hastened to order him to be set at liberty, +and ordered two thousand ducats to be advanced, for the purpose of +bringing him to court with all distinction and an honourable retinue. +His reception at the Alhambra was gracious and flattering in the highest +degree; the strongest indignation was expressed against Bobadilla, with +an assurance that he should be immediately dismissed from his command, +while ample restitution and reward were promised to Columbus, and he had +every sanction for indulging the fondest hopes of returning in honour and +triumph to St. Domingo. But here a grievous disappointment awaited him; +his re-appointment was postponed from time to time with various plausible +excuses. Though Bobadilla was dismissed, it was deemed desirable to +refill his place for two years, by some prudent and talented officer, +who should be able to put a stop to all remaining faction in the colony, +and thus prepare the way for Columbus to enjoy the rights and dignities +of his government both peacefully and beneficially to the crown. The +newly-selected governor was Nicolas de Ovando, who, though described by +Las Casas as a man of prudence, justice, and humanity, certainly betrayed +a want both of generosity and justice in his subsequent transactions with +Columbus. It is possible that the delay manifested by the sovereigns +in redeeming their promise might have continued until the death of +Columbus, had not a fresh stimulant to the cupidity of Ferdinand been +suggested by a new project of discovering a strait, of the existence of +which Columbus felt persuaded from his own observations, and which would +connect the New World which he had discovered with the wealthy shores +of the east. His enthusiasm on the subject was heightened by an emulous +consideration of the recent achievements of Vasco da Gama and Cabral, the +former of whom had, in 1497, found a maritime passage to India by the +Cape, and the latter, in 1500, had discovered for Portugal the vast and +opulent empire of Brazil. The prospect of a more direct and safe route +to India than that discovered by da Gama, at length gained for Columbus +the accomplishment of his wish for another armament; and, finally, on the +9th of May, 1502, he sailed from Cadiz on his fourth and last voyage of +discovery. + +It is painful to contrast the splendour of the fleet with which Ovando +left Spain to assume the government of Hispaniola, with the slender and +inexpensive armament granted to Columbus for the purpose of exploring an +unknown strait into an unknown ocean, the traversing of whose unmeasured +breadth would complete the circumnavigation of the globe. Ovando’s fleet +consisted of thirty sail, five of them from ninety to one hundred and +fifty tons burden, twenty-four caravels of from thirty to ninety tons, +and one bark of twenty-five tons; and the number of souls amounted to +about two thousand five hundred. The heroic and injured man, to whose +unparalleled combination of noble qualities, the very dignity which +called for all this state was indebted for its existence, had now in +the decline of his years and strength, and stripped both of honour and +emolument, to venture forth with four caravels,—the largest of seventy, +and the smallest of fifty tons burthen—accompanied by one hundred and +fifty men, on one of the most toilsome and perilous enterprises of which +the mind can form a conception. + +On the 20th of May he reached the Grand Canary, and starting from thence +on the 25th, took his departure for the west. Favoured by the trade +winds, he made’a gentle and easy passage, and reached one of the Caribbee +Islands, called by the natives Matinino (Martinique), on the 15th of +June. After staying three days at this island, he steered northwards, +and touched at Dominica, and from thence directed his course, contrary +to his own original intention and the commands of the sovereigns, to +St. Domingo. His reason was that his principal vessel sailed so ill +as to delay the progress of the fleet, which he feared might be an +obstacle to the safety and success of the enterprise, and he held this +as a sufficient motive for infringing the orders he had received. On +his arrival at San Domingo, he found the ships which had brought out +Ovando ready to put to sea on their return to Spain. He immediately +sent to the governor to explain that his intention in calling at the +island was to procure a vessel in exchange for one of his caravels, +which was very defective; and further begged permission for his squadron +to take shelter in the harbour, from a hurricane, which, from his +acquaintance with the prognostics of the weather, he had foreseen was +rapidly approaching. This request was ungraciously refused; upon which +Columbus, though denied shelter for himself, endeavoured to avert the +danger of the fleet, which was about to sail, and sent back immediately +to the governor to entreat that he would not allow it to put to sea +for some days. His predictions and requests were treated with equal +contempt, and Columbus had not only to suffer these insulting refusals +and the risk of life for himself and squadron, but the loud murmurings +of his own crew that they had sailed with a commander whose position +exposed them to such treatment. All he could do was to draw his ships +up as close as possible to the shore, and seek the securest anchorage +that chance might present him with. Meanwhile the weather appeared fair +and tranquil, and the fleet of Bobadilla put boldly out to sea. The +predicted storm came on the next night with terrific fury, and all the +ships belonging to the governor’s fleet, with the exception of one, +were either lost, or put back to San Domingo in a shattered condition. +The only vessel that escaped was the one which had been freighted with +some four thousand gold pieces, rescued from the pillage of Columbus’s +fortune. Bobadilla, Roldan, and a number of the most inveterate enemies +of the admiral, perished in this tremendous hurricane, while his own +fleet, though separated and considerably damaged by the storm, all +arrived safe at last at Port Hermoso, on the south of San Domingo. He +repaired his vessels at Port Hermoso, but had scarcely left the harbour +before another storm drove him into Port Brazil, more to the westward. +On the 14th of July he left this port, steering for terra firma, and +on the 30th discovered the small island of Guanaga or Bonacca, a few +leagues east of the bay of Honduras. He continued an eastern course, +and discovered the cape now known as Cape Honduras. While moving along +this coast, he experienced one of those frightful tempests to which the +tropics are liable, and of which he gives so impressive a description in +the letter we have translated. At length, after forty days’ struggle to +make as much as seventy leagues from the cape of Honduras, he reached a +cape, by doubling which he found a direct southward course open, offering +at the same time an unobstructed navigation and a favourable wind. To +commemorate this sudden relief from toil and danger, Columbus named this +point Cape _Gracias a Dios_, or “Thanks to God.” A melancholy occurrence +took place on the 16th of September, while they were anchored off this +coast. The boats had been sent up a large river to procure supplies of +wood and water, when, on returning, the encounter of the sea with the +rapid current of the river caused so violent and sudden a commotion, that +one of the boats was swallowed up, and all on board perished. On the +25th of September he reached Cariay, or Cariari, where he stayed till +the 5th of October. The next point was the Bay of Carumbaru, which was +the first place on that coast where he met with specimens of pure gold. +Leaving this bay on the 17th of October, he sailed along the coast of +Veragua, and here he was informed by the Indians of the wealthy country +of Ciguare, which he supposed to be some province belonging to the Grand +Khan, and also of a river ten days’ journey beyond Ciguare, which he +conceived to be the Ganges. On the 2nd of November he discovered Puerto +Bello, in which harbour he was detained till the 9th by stormy weather; +when, continuing his course eastward, he reached, near the end of the +month, a small harbour, to which he gave the name of El Retrete, or the +Cabinet. It was here that a continuance of stormy weather, in addition +to the murmurs of his crew at-being compelled to prosecute an indefinite +search, with worm-eaten ships, against opposing currents, determined +Columbus on relinquishing his eastward voyage for the present, and to +return in search of the gold mines of Veragua. But on altering his +course to the westward, he had the mortification to find the wind for +which he had long been wishing, come now, as if in direct opposition +to his adopted course, and for nine days he was exposed to so terrible +a storm that it was a marvel how his crazy vessels could outlive it. +At length, after a month’s anxiety and suffering, they anchored, on +the day of the Epiphany, at the mouth of a river called by the natives +Yebra, but which Columbus named Belem, or Bethlehem. Here a settlement +was formed, and here occurred the sad disasters and conflicts with the +natives, which he describes in his letter from Jamaica, and in which +the faithful and zealous Diego Mendez proved an eminently efficient +assistant to his much loved master. The history of this unhappy voyage, +the toils and perils of which were aggravated to Columbus by extreme +bodily suffering, closes by his reaching Jamaica, where he would in +all probability have perished, but for the devotedness and activity of +Mendez. The highly interesting description of that brave man’s exploits +on behalf of Columbus, has been quoted by Navarrete from his will, and is +here translated. When at length, through the agency of Mendez, two ships +arrived from Hispaniola to the assistance of the admiral, he was enabled, +on the 28th of June, 1504, to leave his wrecked vessels behind him, and +start with revived hopes for San Domingo, which he reached on the 13th of +August. His sojourn there was not, as may be judged, calculated to afford +him satisfaction or pleasure. The overstrained courtesy of the governor +offered but a poor alleviation to the rush of rankling feelings which the +past associations and present desolation of the place summoned up to his +mind. + +On the 12th of September he set sail for Spain, and the same tempestuous +weather which had all along tended to make this his last voyage the most +disastrous, did not forsake him now. The ship in which he came home +sprung her mainmast in four places in one tempest, and in a subsequent +storm the foremast was sprung, and finally, on the 7th of November, he +arrived, in a vessel as shattered as his own broken and care-worn frame, +in the welcome harbour of San Lucar. + +The two years which intervened between this period and his death +present a picture of black ingratitude on the part of the crown to this +distinguished benefactor of the kingdom, which it is truly painful to +contemplate. We behold an extraordinary man, the discoverer of a second +hemisphere, reduced by his very success to so low a state of poverty +that, in his prematurely infirm old age, he is compelled to subsist by +borrowing, and to plead, in the apologetic language of a culprit, for the +rights of which the very sovereign whom he has benefited has deprived +him. The death of the benignant and high-minded Isabella, in 1505, gave +a finishing blow to his hope of obtaining redress, and we find him thus +writing subsequently to this period to his old and faithful friend Diego +de Deza:—“It appears that his majesty does not think fit to fulfil that +which he, with the queen, who is now in glory, promised me by word and +seal. For me to contend for the contrary, would be to contend with the +wind. I have done all that I could do: I leave the rest to God, whom I +have ever found propitious to me in my necessities.” The selfish and +cold-hearted Ferdinand beheld his illustrious and loyal servant sink, +without relief, under bodily infirmity, and the palsying sickness of +hope deferred; and at length, on the 20th of May 1506, the generous +heart which had done so much without reward and suffered so much without +upbraiding, found rest in a world where neither gratitude nor justice is +either asked or withheld. + +His body was in the first instance buried at Valladolid, in the parish +church of Santa Maria de la Antigua, but was transferred, in 1513, to +the Cartuja de las Cuevas, near Seville, where a monument was erected +over his grave with the memorable inscription,— + + A CASTILLA Y A LEON + NUEVO MUNDO DIÓ COLON. + +In the year 1536, both his body, and that of his son Diego, who had been +likewise buried in the Cartuja, were transported to St. Domingo, and +deposited in the cathedral of that city. From hence they were removed to +Havannah in 1795, on the cession of Hispaniola to the French, and the +ashes of the immortal discoverer now quietly repose in the cathedral +church of that city.[19] + +But injustice, unhappily, was not buried with Columbus in the tomb. It +was but one twelvemonth after his death that an attempt was made, and +only too successfully, to name the new world which he had discovered, +after another, who was not only his inferior, but his pupil in the +school of maritime enterprise. In an obscure corner of Lorraine, at the +little cathedral town of St. Dié, a cluster of learned priests, who had +there established a printing-press under the auspices of René II, Duke +of Lorraine, suggested to give to the newly discovered continent the +name of the Florentine, Amerigo Vespucci, whose nautical career did not +commence till after Columbus had returned from his second voyage to the +western hemisphere. The first time that the name of Amerigo came into +notice was in the year 1504, when Johann Ottmar published at Augsburg the +_Mundus Novus_, a description of Vespucci’s third voyage, now extremely +rare, embodied in a letter addressed by Vespucci himself to Lorenzo di +Pier Francesco de’ Medici. In this voyage, which occupied from May 1501 +to September 1502, he was in the service of Portugal, and explored the +coasts of South America as far as beyond the fifty-second degree. But +it was not till May, 1507, when Columbus had been a twelvemonth dead, +that the world was informed of four voyages professed to have been made +by Vespucci, of which the one just mentioned was only the third, the +two former having been made, as he states, in the service of Spain. As +the first of these was asserted to have taken place between May 20th, +1497, and October, 1499 [say 1498], and, if correct, would involve the +discovery by him not only of the north coasts of South America, but a +large extent of the coast of North America also, and that in priority of +the claims both of Cabot and Columbus as regards the discovery of the +American continent, it has been a matter of keen interest to many to +examine minutely the correctness of Vespucci’s claim to having made this +voyage. + +It would be out of place here to enter into the complicated arguments +in which this question is involved; but I have elsewhere shown[20] on +how frail a tenure the claim in question is founded. In the same place +I have also traced in detail the mode adopted for giving to the New +World the name of Vespucci instead of that of Columbus, who, by the +exercise of such transcendently superior qualities had earned for himself +that honour. I will here sketch it in brief. Vespucci was an intimate +friend of the Giocondi family, one of whom, the celebrated architect, +Fra Giovanni Giocondi, who built the bridge of Nôtre Dame at Paris, +was the translator into Latin of Vespucci’s letter to Lorenzo di Pier +Francesco de’ Medici describing his third voyage. A young Alsatian, +named Mathias Ringmann, who was at this time pursuing his studies in +Paris, appears to have made the acquaintance of this Giocondi and to +have carried back with him into Alsace an admiration for Vespucci and +his achievements, which showed itself in his editing at Strasbourg in +1505, Giocondi’s translation of Vespucci’s letter, accompanied by some +laudatory verses in Latin by himself. Now in the neighbouring province of +Lorraine, one of the canons of the cathedral at St. Dié, Walter Lud, who +was secretary to René II, Duke of Lorraine, had already for many years +established a gymnasium or college under the duke’s auspices, and also a +printing-press. Ringmann, better known in literature by the pseudonym of +Philesius, became professor of Latin at the college and corrector of the +press in the printing-office. On the 25th of April, 1507, _a year after +the death of Columbus_, one of the members of this little clique, named +Martin Waldseemüller, otherwise known as Hylacomylus, produced from this +press a small work entitled _Cosmographiæ Introductio_, to which was +appended a Latin translation of Vespucci’s four voyages, as described by +himself and addressed to Duke René II, although it can be shown by the +contents to have been really intended for Pietro Soderini, Gonfaloniere +of Florence, who had been Vespucci’s schoolfellow. In my _Life of +Prince Henry the Navigator_, I have ventured to suggest the process +by which these letters, intended for another, came to be addressed to +Duke René, and that suggestion supplies the solution of some riddles, +there treated of, which it would be out of place to speak of here. We +have seen the connection of the Giocondi with Vespucci. We have seen, +also, the connection of Ringmann with the work of Fra Giovanni Giocondi +and his interest in the glory of Vespucci. This interest he infuses +into the little circle of St. Dié, and we can imagine their pleasure at +having the opportunity of blazoning forth to the world, from their own +printing-press, a story which would throw so bright a reflection on the +obscurity of their secluded valley. But in the little book thus issued, +not only were printed for the first time four voyages of Vespucci, but +also a suggestion was made that from his name, Amerigo, should be given +the name of “Amerige” or “America” to the newly-discovered western world. +In September of the same year, 1507, appeared a re-issue of the same +book; and in 1509 a new edition of it was issued from the printing-press +of Johann Grüninger of Strasburg. In this same year, 1509, three years +before the death of Vespucci, the name of America appears, as if it were +already accepted as a well-known denomination, in an anonymous work +entitled _Globus Mundi_, printed also at Strasburg. But although this +work is anonymous, it was my good fortune to detect from the colophon, +in which occur the words “Adelpho Castigatore,” that the source of the +suggestion of the name of America in the one case, and of the adoption of +the suggestion in the other, are either identical or in close proximity, +inasmuch as the already mentioned re-issue of the _Cosmographiæ +Introductio_ in 1509, has in the colophon, “Johanne Adelpho Mulicho +Argentinensi Castigatore.” Now, Mulicho merely means native of Muhlingen, +near Strasburg, and this Adelphus, so named, was a physician established +in that city, and reviser of both the one work and the other. + +The first place in which we find the name of America used a little +further a-field, is in a letter dated Vienna, 1512, from Joachim Vadianus +to Rudolphus Agricola, and inserted in the _Pomponius Mela_ of 1518, +edited by the former. The expression used is “America discovered by +Vesputius.”[21] But although this Vadianus, whose real name was Joachim +Watt, writes from Vienna in 1512, I find that he was a native of St. +Gall, whence in 1508, being then twenty-four years old, he went to the +High School of Vienna. His learned disputations and verses gained him +the chair of the professorship of the liberal arts at that school, and +he subsequently studied medicine, of which faculty he obtained the +doctorate. This attachment to the study of medicine recalls to my mind a +fact which awakens a suspicion that he may have been a personal friend of +John Adelphus, just referred to, and if so, of the little confraternity +of St. Dié. Before Adelphus established himself in Strasburg, he had +practised as a physician at Schaffhausen, and this at the time when +Joachim Watt was a young man, still resident at St. Gall, which is +distant from Schaffhausen seventy English miles, a distance which would +offer very little hindrance to Swiss intercommunication. Whether this +suspicion be worth anything or no, I advance it as a possible clue to +yet further researches which may show the process by which this spurious +appellation of America became adopted, through the efforts of a small +cluster of men in an obscure corner of France. + +The earliest engraved map of the new world yet known as bearing the name +of America, is a mappe-monde by Appianus, bearing the date of 1520, +annexed to the edition by Camers of the Polyhistoria of Julius Solinus +(_Viennæ Austr._, 1520), and a second time to the edition of _Pomponius +Mela_ by Vadianus, printed at Basle in 1522. The earliest manuscript +map hitherto found bearing that name, is in a most precious collection +of drawings by the hand of Leonardo da Vinci, now in Her Majesty’s +collections at Windsor, to which, from an examination of its contents, I +have assigned the date of 1513-14.[22] + +I have thus endeavoured to unravel the intricate story of a great +and irreparable injustice. No one can deny to Vespucci the credit of +possessing courage, perseverance, and a practical acquaintance with the +art of navigation; but he had never been the commander of an expedition, +and had it not been for the great initiatory achievement of Columbus, we +have no reason to suppose that we should ever have heard his name. + +“To say the truth,” as has been well remarked by the illustrious Baron +von Humboldt, “Vespucci shone only by reflection from an age of glory. +When compared with Columbus, Sebastian Cabot, Bartolomé Dias, and Da +Gama, his place is an inferior one. The majesty of great memories seems +concentrated in the name of Christopher Columbus. It is the originality +of his vast idea, the largeness and fertility of his genius, and the +courage which bore up against a long series of misfortunes, which have +exalted the Admiral high above all his contemporaries.” + +A tardy tribute has been at length paid to his memory by his +fellow-citizens of Genoa, and the first stone of a monument in +commemoration of his achievements was laid in that city on the 27th of +September, 1846, and completed in 1862. There is now serious talk of his +canonization. + +Among the many so-called portraits of Columbus, too numerous to be +detailed here, but for elaborate notices of which the reader is referred +to the works mentioned at foot,[23] there is not one that can be regarded +as unquestionably authentic. It was at the suggestion of my friend +M. Ferdinand Denis, the distinguished Librarian of the Ste. Geneviève +in Paris, that I have inserted as the frontispiece to this volume a +chromolithograph fac-simile of the St. Christopher on the famous map +of Juan de la Cosa, Columbus’s pilot, made in 1500. My friend most +reasonably suggests that, in this case, St. Christopher represented +Christopher Columbus carrying the Christian faith across the Atlantic, +and that the face would be a portrait. In corroboration of his idea, +I may quote the words of Herrera, whose possession of the Columbian +documents enabled him to speak with accuracy. He says, “Columbus was +tall of stature, with a long and imposing visage. His nose was aquiline; +his eyes blue; his complexion clear, and having a tendency to a glowing +red; the beard and hair red in his youth, but his fatigues early turned +them white.” The cap and costume seem also less those of the saint than +of the sailor. It is to my late revered and dear friend, His Excellency +the Count de Lavradio, that I am indebted for procuring the coloured +photograph from the original map on his visit to Madrid in 1869. The +chromolithograph has been prepared in Berlin. + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[1] The Society possesses, in my _Early Voyages to Terra Australis_, +printed in 1859, the evidence of these discoveries; and in my _Prince +Henry the Navigator_, published in 1868, will be seen the procession of +these discoveries from the Prince’s efforts. + +[2] The _li_ is about one-tenth of the common league. + +[3] The most strenuous advocate for the truth of the tradition that +America was discovered by Prince Madoc, was Dr. John Williams of +Sydenham, who wrote two tracts on the subject in the year 1791 and 1792, +which, if betraying a little of the bias of prejudice, yet manifest a +degree of research that does great credit to his industry and zeal. + +[4] A copy of this map is given in the second vol. of Sastre’s _Mercurio +Italico_, Lond. 1789, 8vo., and a photograph of it was published in +Venice in 1869 by H. F. and M. Münster. + +[5] The work quoted is Cordeyro’s _Historia Insulana das Ilhas a Portugal +sugeytas no Oceano Occidental_, Lisbon 1717. + +[6] For a demonstration that the discovery of the east coast of North +America was made by Sebastian Cabot in 1497, a year before Columbus +reached the terra firma, I must refer the reader to a paper of mine read +before the Society of Antiquaries on May 5, 1870, and now being printed +for the _Archæologia_. + +[7] Humboldt has fallen into an error in saying that Joachim Lelewel, +in his _Pisma pomniejsze geogr. historyczné_, 1814, has recently called +up fresh attention to this Polish pilot. The editor has examined the +work carefully from beginning to end, and does not find the name even +once mentioned, although the page to which reference is made contains +allusions to early discoveries. + +[8] A copy of this globe is given in Dr. F. W. Ghillany’s _Geschichte des +Seefahrers Ritter Martin Behaim_, Nürnberg, 1853, 4to. + +[9] _Historie del S. D. Fernando Colombo_, cap. iv. + +[10] “_Siendo yo nacido en Genova”; and “mando al dicho Don Diego, mi +hijo, a la persona que heredare el dicho mayorazgo que tenga y sostenga +siempre en la Ciudad de Genova una persona de nuestro linage ... pues que +della salí y en ella nací._” + +[11] Another Caseneuve, probably of this family, is said by De Bry to +have been captain of the fourth expedition of the French to Mexico, in +the year 1567. + +[12] Las Casas, in his _History of the Indies_, tells us distinctly that +Columbus derived much information from Perestrello’s maps and papers, +and adds that “in order to acquaint himself practically with the method +pursued by the Portuguese in navigating to the coast of Guinea, he sailed +several times with them as if he had been one of them.” Las Casas says +that he learned this from the admiral’s son Diego, adding that “some time +before his famous voyage Columbus resided in Madeira, where news of fresh +discoveries was constantly arriving, and this,” he says, “appeared to +have been the occasion of Christopher Columbus coming to Spain, and the +beginning of the discovery of this great world” (America). + +[13] Humboldt, _Examen Critique_, vol. ii, p. 246-251. + +[14] It was shortly after this period that Bartholomew Columbus was +sent by his brother to king Henry VII, to offer his services in a +voyage of navigation; the king is said to have received the offer “con +allegro volto”—“with a cheerful countenance”; but his acceptance of the +proposition was rendered null by Columbus having in the interim attached +himself to the service of queen Isabella. + +[15] Vide _Athenæum_ for 1846, page 1274. + +[16] While agreeing with Captain Becher in the identification of +Guanahani with Watling’s Island, I find that officer entirely at issue +with the Diary of Columbus in making him anchor near the N.E. end of +the island, and then sail round its northern point. In a detailed Paper +on this subject, read by me on the 16th of September of this year, at +the Meeting of the Geographical Section of the British Association at +Liverpool, I had the honour of proving for the first time that the +first anchorage of Columbus in the New World was off the S.E. point +of Watling’s Island, a position which entirely tallies with all his +movements as mentioned in the Diary. + +[17] The following remark by Mr. George Sumner was kindly supplied to me +by that gentleman in 1847, as an interesting item connected with this +period of the history of Columbus:— + +From the brilliant description given by Irving and Prescott of the +arrival of Columbus at Barcelona, and of his reception there by the +Catholic sovereigns, it seemed to me as probable that some contemporary +account of this arrival and reception, as well as of the sojourn of +Columbus, might be found at Barcelona; and, while there in the spring +of 1844, I searched the admirably arranged archives of Aragon, and also +those of the city of Barcelona, for such notice, but without any success. +I could not so much as find a mention of the name of Columbus. + +The _Dietaria_, or day book, of Barcelona, notices the arrival of +ambassadors, the movements of the king and queen, and even records +incidents of as trifling note as those which in our day serve to fill the +columns of a court journal; yet not a word appears in regard to Columbus. + +How account for this silence? Is it another evidence of the old feeling +of jealousy between the Aragonese and Castilians, of which the student of +Spanish history meets so many proofs? Such was the opinion to which I was +forced, and such I found also was the interpretation given to it by the +intelligent Archevero, who had himself gone over this ground a few years +since at the request of Navarrete. The voyage of Columbus was undertaken +at the expense and for the benefit of the crown of Castile. It was not to +Aragon, but to Castilla and Leon, that Columbus gave a new world, and as +the Aragonese did not profit directly by this gift, they saw fit to treat +it and its donor with scornful silence. + +In one of the notes to the great work of Capmany,—_Memorias sobre la +ciudad de Barcelona_, 1789—he gives a list of distinguished men who have +enjoyed the hospitality of the city, and among them places the name of +Columbus, making no allusion however to any contemporary account of his +sojourn there. + +In the _Dietaria_ of Barcelona, under date 15th November 1492, is the +following entry:—“The king, queen, and primogenito, entered to-day the +city, and lodged in the palace of the bishop of Urgil in the Calle +Ancha.” This is followed by a description of the festivities which +followed. “1493, 4th February.—King and queen went to Alserrat. 14th—King +and queen returned to Barcelona.” + +As there appears no notice of the king having changed his abode after +taking possession of the palace in the Calle Ancha, it was probably there +that Columbus recounted to Isabella his adventures and his success. The +American pilgrim may still, in the beautiful Alcazar of the Moorish +kings, recall the figure of the discoverer of his land, standing in the +presence of the Catholic sovereigns of Spain;—in the cotton-spinning town +of Barcelona the besom of modern improvement has long since swept away +the palace of the bishop of Urgil. + +[18] It is well known that Columbus was preceded in the discovery of +terra firma by John Cabot in 1497. + +[19] I am indebted to Mr. George Sumner for the following copy of the +inscription on the tomb of Fernando Columbus, in the pavement of the +cathedral of Seville, and for the note which accompanies it:— + +“Aqui yaze el M. Magnifico S. D. Hernando Colon, el qual aplicó y gastó +toda su vida y hazienda en aumento de las letras, y juntar y perpetuar +en esta ciudad todos sus libros de todas las ciencias, que en su tiempo +halló y en reducirlo a quatro libros. Falleció en esta ciudad a 12 de +Julio de 1539 de edad de 50 años 9 meses y 14 dias, fue hijo del valeroso +y memorable S. D. Christ. Colon primero Almirante que descubrió las +Yndias y nuevo mundo en vida de los Cat. R. D. Fernando y D. Ysabel de +gloriosa memoria a 11 de Oct. de 1492 con tres galeras y 90 personas, y +partió del puerto de Palos a descubrirlas a 3 de Agosto antes, y Bolvió +a Castilla con victoria a 7 de Maio del Año Siguiente y tornó despues +otras dos veces ā poblar lo que descubrió. Falleció en Valladolid à 20 de +Agosto de 1506 años. + + “ROGAD A DIOS POR ELLOS.” + +Beneath this is described, in a circle, a globe, presenting the western +and part of the eastern hemispheres, surmounted by a pair of compasses. +Within the border of the circle is the same inscription as that which was +placed over Columbus himself at the Cartuja, with the exception of the +word “mundo” being placed before, instead of after, the word “nuevo”. + +Throughout all Spain I know of no other inscription to the memory of +Columbus. At Valladolid, where he died, and where his body lay for some +years, there is none that I could discover, neither is there any trace +of any at the Cartuja, near Seville, to which his body was afterwards +transferred, and in which his brother was buried. + +It is a striking confirmation of the reproach of negligence, in regard to +the memory of this great man, that in this solitary inscription in old +Spain, the date of his death should be inaccurately given. + + G. S. + +[20] See _Life of Prince Henry the Navigator_, pp. 367 to 379. + +[21] “Americam a Vespuccio repertam.” + +[22] See _Archæologia_, vol. xl, 1866. + +[23] Carderera (Valentin): Informe sobre los retratos de Cristóbal Colon, +su trage y escudo de Armas. Imprenta de la Real Academia de la historia. +Madrid. 1851. Small 4to. + +Feuillet de Conches (F). “Portraits de Christophe Colomb,” extrait de +la Revue contemporaine, T. xxv, 95ᵐᵉ livraison in 8ᵒ, and in the “Revue +Archéologique,” an article by Mr. Isidore de Lœwenstern, on the Mémoires +of MM. Jomard et Carderera respecting the portraits of Columbus. + + + + +A POEM + +COMPOSED BY GIULIANO DATI IN 1493, + +[FROM COLUMBUS’S FIRST LETTER,] + +And sung in Florence to announce the discovery of the New World. + + +LA LETTERA DELLISOLE CHE HA TROVATO NUOVAMENTE IL RE DISPAGNA. + + Omnipotente idio, che tucto regge, + donami gratia chio possa cantare + allaude tua & di tu sancta legge, + cosa che piaccia achi stara ascoltare + maxim al popol tuo & alla tua grege, + el qual nō resta mai magnificare, + como al ꝕsēte ha fatto nella Spagna, + delle isole trovate cosa magna. + + Io ho gia lecto degli antichi regi + & principi signori stanti in terra, + del re della soria & facti egregi, + & lebactaglie loro & la gran guerra, + & delle giostre gli acquistati pregi + di Bello lessi & selmio dir nō erra, + de persi, medi, & degli ateniensi, + Dāfinione & gli altri egregi immēsi. + + Et de lacedemoni le grandi entrate, + di Labores di Oreste & daltri assai, + del Principe Gisippo cose late, + come si legge so che inteso lhai, + di Tholomeo piu cose smisurate, + & del gran Faraone come saprai. + di judici & de regi de giudei, + che afaccia parlavano con lei. + + Et de latini lessi, & degli albani, + & di quel fiesolano Re Atalante, + de regi & consolati de romani, + & de tribuni lessi cose tante, + dedeci viri electi tanti humani, + & degli īmperadori potrei dir quāte + cose chi tengo nel mio pecto fisse. + ꝓ che sarian nel dir troppo plisse. + + che sio volesse tucti efacti dire + disopra nominati & altri assai, + certo farei latua mente stupire + maximi alcuni che nō ludiron mai, + q̃ste cose alte degne magne et mire + che se tu leggi tu letroverrai + invernacula lingua & ī latino, + si come narra un decto dagostino. + + Ma chi potessi leggere nel futuro + duno Alexādro magno papa sexto, + della sua creatione il modo puro, + grato a ciascūo anessū mai molesto, + & del primanno suo il magno muro, + che nō glipuo nessuno esser infesto + sesto alexādro pappa borgia ispano, + justo nel giudicare & tucto humano. + + Et chi leggesi poi del sua Ferrādo + christianissimo rege xꝕiani + che lisabella tiene al suo comādo, + unica sposa sua, che nelle mani + tanti reami indota allui donando, + gliha dati ītendi ben cō pēsier sani, + che glie re della spagna & di castella + & di leon tolecto villa bella. + + Simile re di cordube chiamato, + & poi dimutia re mipar che sia + & digalitia re incoronato, + dalgarbe re & tienla in sua balia, + re digranata sai che conquistato + diragona signor & divalēzia pia + conte mipar che sia dibarzalona, + & disicilia re isola buona. + + Di quāta altura principe mipare + & disardigna tien la signoria, + & di corsica sifa simil chiamare, + di q̃lla parte che glha in sua balia + & conte di serdeina appellare, + & dirosello conte par che sia + simile re mi pare che dimaiorica, + l’altro reame e poi della minorica. + + Et poi signor dibiscaia & molina, + delalsesiras signor chiamato, + dellasturias terra peregrina, + ꝓ tucto il mondo q̃sto e nominato, + tucto fedele della legge divina, + chi altro crede e mal dallui trattato + come sivede che nō e mai satio, + dimarrani giudei far ogni stratio. + + Pero il signore lha semꝕ īvicto facto, + che si puo uno agusto nominare, + ogni sua lega triegua legge o pacto, + mai nō sividde dallui maculare + lui nō derise mai savio ne macto + limosine per dio sempre fa fare + della chiesa zeloso a tucte lhore + come fedel, xꝕiano, & pio signore. + + Come mōstra lamagna ābascieria, + che glha mandato adar lubidiēza + al suo sesto Alexādro anima pia + che mai sivide tal magnificenza + in tucte cose la sua signoria + dimōstrā aver fra gli altri grā potēza + ī q̃sti magni ābascidor sispechi + chi nol credessi nōcti ꝕsti orecchi. + + Se io volessi e sua titoli dire, + o auditore io ti potrei tediare, + de sua reame io ti farei stupire, + sol que che lisabelela volse dare + indota a q̃sto Re o questo sire, + quando luso ꝓ marito pigliare + q̃sta isabella e dispagna Regina, + honesta doña savia & peregrina. + + Hor vo tornar almio primo tractato + dellisole trovate incognite a te + in q̃sto anno presente q̃sto e stato + nel millequatrocento novātatre, + uno che xꝕofan colōbo chiamato, + che e stato in corte del prefato Re + ha molte volte questo stimolato, + el Re ch’cerchi acrescere il suo stato. + + Dicendo, signor mio, io vo cercare + ꝓ che comprēdo che ce molta terra + che nostri antichi nō seppō trovare + & spero dacquistarle senza guerra, + se vostra signoria si vuol degnare + ajuto darmi che so que non erra + lamente mia spera nel signore + chimbrieve cidara rengo & honore. + + Voi mectetē la roba io la persona + non sara vostra signoria disfacta, + ispesse volte la fortuna dona + ꝓ picol prezo assai & non e macta + che sua sperāza tucto il mōdo sprona + savio e colui che dicercar sadacta + ꝑ che dice elvāgelio ī legge nuova + che chicercādo va spesso truova. + + Hō poi ch’ lebbe ilre piu volte udito + & facto carisposta sorridendo + xꝕofano ripigliando come ardito + q̃sto āno il re secōdo ch’ io cōprēdo + prese di dargli aiuto per partito + & disse il tuo sperare oggi cōmēdo + piglia una nave cō due carovelle + di q̃ste mie armate le piu belle. + + Et comādo de poi che gli sia dato + danari & roba q̃l che fa mestiero, + & poi dimolta gēte acompagnato + divotamente & cō buō pensiero, + al sommo dio che fu racomandato, + & alla madre sua & sancto piero, + & prese q̃ste cose, & poi licentia + dalre & laregina & sua clementia. + + Et navico piu giorni per perduto, + cō pena, con affanni & grāde stento, + pensa che na in mare no e mai tuto, + ma semꝕ cōbactēdo ī acqua & uēto + ꝓdesi spesso elguadagno eltrebuto, + & nōgli gioua dire io menepento + ma come piacqꝫ adio ch’ mai nōerra + in trentatre giornate pose in terra. + + Et messe dua desua huomini armati + a cercar ꝑle terre che han trouate, + seforce siscoprissin qualche aguati, + ma caminaron ben per tre giornate + che nōsi furon mai indrieto uolti, + & nō trouaron mai uille o brigate, + si che simarauiglia che camina + & piu chi e restato alla marina. + + Ma niēte di manco quella terra + era di uari fructi molto ornata, + se chi ha scripto i qua neldir nōerra, + mōtagne e ue daltura ismisurata, + & molti fiumi lacircūda & serra, + doue trouorun poi molta brigata, + sēza pāni, uestite, o arme, o scudi + ma tucti emēbri loro si erano nudi. + + Saluo chalcuna donna che coperte + tiene leparte genitale immonde, + cō bambagia tessuta, & di po certe + lhauen coperte con diuerse frōde, + & come uidon questi lediserte + forte fuggendo ciascun fina scōde, + & questi dua in drieto si tornauano, + & axꝕofano lo facto racontauano. + + Et xꝕofano & glialtri dismontati + armati tucti il paese cercando + isole molte & huomini trouati + come tu intenderai qui ascoltando + & glistendardi del Re ha rizati, + & a ciascuno il suo nome mutando, + come dira questa pistola magna, + da xꝕofano scripta al Re di spagna. + + Perchio so, signor mio, ch’ grā piacer̃ + hara la uostra magna signoria + quando potra intendere o sapere, + delle cose che io presi in mia balia, + ꝑ uirtu del signore & suo potere, + & simil della madre sua maria, + dal partir mio a trētatre giornate, + molte isole & grā gēte iho trouate. + + Lisola prima chio trouai, signore, + io lho ꝑ nome facta nominare + isola magna di san Saluadore, + & la seconda poi feci chiamare + conceptio Marie a suo honore, + di poi laterza feci baptezare + per uostra signoria ch’ tāto ornata + isola ferrandina lho nominata, + + Et la quarta Isabella fo chiamare, + ꝑ la Regina che tānto honorata, + & alla quinta il nome uolsi dare + che lisola Giouanna fia chiamata, + & la festa dun nome uolsi ornare + che cōgruo miparse a q̃lla fiata, + che Laspagnuola qlla sichiamasse, + per che mipar che cosi meritasse. + + Enomi son dellisole trouate + nel india, signor mio, como uiscriuo, + & questa & laltre sopra nominate + notitia auoi nedo signor mio diuo + trecēto uc̄tun miglio ho caminate, + & peruenuto alfin colsancto uliuo + dalla giouāna alla spagnuola elmar̃ + cīquātaquattro miglia largo apare. + + Et per septentrione lanauicai + cinquantaquattro miglia dimarina, + doue che alla spagna io arriuai, + inuerso loriente sauicina, + & per lalinea recta io caminai + da onde la spagnuola li confina + son c̄iquecēsessantaquattro miglia, + e lalargheza che q̄sta isola piglia. + + Et q̄sta & tucte laltre e molto forte, + ma q̄sta sopra laltre par fortissima, + potresi inanzi dare a tucte morte + ch’ una parte sacquisti piccolissima, + certo questo eildestino qsto e lesorte, + ch’ uostra signoria fan felicissima, + e dotata di fructi molte & uarie, + & liti, & porti, & cose necessarie, + + Et molti fiumi, & maxime mōtagne, + che son dalteza molto smisurate, + arbori, fonte, uccegli, & cose magne, + chauostri tempi no san mai trouate, + certo lamente mia signor ne piagne, + per lalegreza delle cose ornate, + di tucte cose cie se io non erro, + saluo ch’ nōsi truoua acciaio o ferro. + + Sonci di septe o uer docto ragioni + di palme che mifan marauigliare, + & se alzando gliocchi poni + pini uison che laria par toccare, + passere lusignuoli & altri doni, + che nonsi potre mai tucto narrare, + della bambagia un pondo ce infinito + & daltre cose assai ce inquesto lito. + + Arbori cison duna ragion fioriti + del mese di novembre chenoi siano + come ī ispagna, & ne suo degno liti, + liarberi sō elmagio, elmōte, elpiano, + si che no altri stiano tucti stupiti + ꝑ labōdantia che trouata habbiano, + sonci gli arberi uerdi & and lelor foglie, + chi credo che nō pdā mai lespoglie. + + Di reubarbaro ce tanta abōdantia, + & dicenamo daltra spetieria, + loro & largento, el metallo ciauāza, + maxime un fiume che per q̃sta uia, + che nō puo questa terra farne senza, + doue ho trouato cō mia fantasia, + che dimoltoro e piena quella rena, + sicome lacqua di quel fiume mena. + + Simil, signore, io uiuoglio auisare, + che inq̄stisola ce molta pianura, + doue difizi molti sipuon fare, + & castelle cipta cō magne mura, + che nō bisogna poi di dubitare, + ne dhauer chi cista nulla paura, + molte terre cison da feminare, + & depascer lebestie & nutricare. + + Ho po trouati certi fiumicelli, + ch’ tucti menano oro & nō gia poco, + & molti porti grādi & da far belli, + che abōdanza ce dacqua diloco, + lherbe & leselue facte co pennelli + nō son si belle & nō cisusa foco, + glhuomini sono affabile formati, + timidi semꝕ & alfuggir parati. + + Sonci assai uille ma son picoolecte, + dhuomini & dōne son tucte calcate, + glihabitacoli qui son capānecte + semplici sono & credule brigate, + & ben che sieno nudi stāno necte, + si che signor dibuona uoglia state, + & credon che no siā di cielo ī terra, + mādati per cāpargli dogni guerra. + + Portano alcun certe cāne appuntate, + socto lebraccia come noi lespade, + archi cō frecce dicanne tagliate, + & uāno īsieme assai come lesquadr̃ + di capegli & di barbe molto ornate, + nō son micidial persone o ladre, + ma tucto q̃l ch’ glhiāno ī lor potere + celodarebbon ꝓ farci piacere. + + Et parmi che cifia grā diferenza + da questa isola a q̃lla di Giouāna + darbori, fructi, and dherbe & diꝕsēza, + nōci manca senon la sancta māna, + doro ce tanto cha uostra potenza + chi guerra far sipensa ī uan safāna + oltre alla roba acquistate lhonore, + tucti son prōti acreder al signore. + + Questi popoli grādi & infiniti, + come ꝑ segni ciāno dimōstrato, + ledōne & lor figluoli & lor mariti + ciascuno spera desser baptezato, + priego il signor iesu che puo glīuiti + apossedere el suo regno beato + di quāto ben cagion signor sarete + coluostro auxilio che dato mhauete. + + Iho menati qui certi indiani + ch’ cōprēdā di q̃sta alcun līguaggio + tal che parlando con cēni dimani + q̃lcū diq̃sti ch’e piu sperto & saggio + dicon di farsi a noi tucti xꝕiani + tal chiho ꝕso signor mio uātaggio + & di legname una bastia fo fare + & lagente uimecto per guardare. + + Et forniti glilascio per uno anno + darme diuectouaglia ben chi spero + che nō haranno molestia ne dāno + ꝑ che gli lascio cō un buon pensiero, + humili mansueti tucti stanno, + sich’ auxilio iluostro signor chiero, + mandimi uostra signoria piacente + allaude del signore omnipotente. + + Chi nō uede signor lisole degne, + & lericheze o nobil creatura, + & lauarieta darbori & legne, + & deglhuomini & dōne lor figura, + nō sa ch’ sia delmōdo lesue ī segne, + chi nō esce delcerchio di sua mura, + nō puo perfectamente idio laudare + chi nō gusta lecose che sa fare. + + Signor mio dolce, lapiaceuoleza + di q̃sta gente io non saprei narrare, + per una stringa che poco sipreza + uolson tanto oro aun diquesti dare + ch’ tre ducati & mezo o che richeza + hare potuto inqueste parte fare, + ma io ho comādato alla mia gente + che ciascun doni & nō pigli niēte. + + Per far lor grata uostra signoria + dimolta roba io ho facto donare + di quella dimie gente & della mia, + come scodelle & piacti damāgiare, + & uetri & pauni chera in mia balia, + senza riserbo alcuno per me fare + ꝓ chio glho conosciuti tante grati, + iglho come fedeli & buō tractati. + + Vero e ch’ sono assai prōti alfugire + per che non sono usati di uedere + gente che usin panni da uestire, + ma per che uegan noi tucto sapere, + ciascun diloro ciadora come sire, + & lalor roba da mangiare o bere, + nō ho ueduto fare ne tuo ne mio, + ma lauita comune alparer mio. + + Volsano ancora ꝓ una bocte trista, + & per un pezo darco che nō uale, + tre once doro darmi & similmista, + tanta bambagia che mezo quintale, + ma poi chi hebbi questa cosa uista + parsemi dipigliar niente male, + & ho cōmesso aciaschedun de mia + chedipigliare niente ardito sia. + + Nō e fra loro alcuna briga o secta, + ma pacifici tucti insieme stanno, + di parole & ni facti mai saspecta, + di far uēdecta alcūa īgiuria o dāno, + beato a q̃llo che seguir sidilecta, + acompagnati abraccio semꝕ uāno, + io glho uisti si buoni recti & grati, + che abuō fine idio glhara chiamati. + + Nō e fra loro idolatria nessuna, + tucti lemani al ciel tengono alzate, + nō adoran pianeti, o sole, o luna, + ma lelor mente al ciel tucte leuate. + dicon la gloria ī ciel esser sol una, + dellaqual patria credon ch’ mādate + lenostre barche siano & noi ī terra, + a far pace colciel dogni lor guerra. + + Io nho cō meco semꝕ alcū menato + equali feci per forza pigliare, + q̃ndo alprīcipio ī terra fui smōtato, + non potendo inaltra forma fare + pelueloce fuggir mai ascoltato + nō era lemie uoci olmio parlare, + & q̃sti che per forza allhor pigliai, + son per amor uenuti sempre mai. + + Semꝕ mangiare, o bere, & adormire, + acanto a me io glho si ben tractati, + ch’ gliaferman ꝑ certo & usan dire + ch’ dalregno del ciel no siā mādati, + uanocci inanzi gridando uenire, + debba ciascuno auedere ebeati, + si chalpresente ognū corre auedere + & portan tucti damāgîare & bere. + + Da luna isola allaltra q̃sti uāno + cō certe barche che inquesta isola e, + lequal dun legno solo facte stanno, + & son chiamate queste canoe, + sō lūghe strecte & par quasi uolādo + andare achiunche messo dētro ce, + bench’ sien grossamente lauorate + cō sassi & legni & ossi son cauate. + + Et hōne uista alcuna tāto grāde + che octanta persone cista dentro, + & ciascūo hal suo remo & leumāde + nauica q̃sti & con buon sētimeto + la roba luno allaltro li sispande + q̃l chio uscriuo signor nulla mēto + & uanno baractando tucti quāti + come sefussin quasi mercatanti. + + Inqueste isole tucte nominate + nō ho ueduta nulla differenza + dincarnati diuisi o dibrigate, + ma tucti quasi son duna presenza + & dun cōstume tucti cōstumate + huomini & dōne sō pie dicremēza, + tucti hāno una loquela & un parlar̃ + che uifarē, signor, marauigliare. + + Che par che util cosa questa sia + acōuerrirgli a nostra sancta fede. + che come scriuo auostra signoria + ciascun disposto ce, & gia lacrede + dique che han uista lapresenza mia + no glho tucti ueduti de siuede + ch’glie margior giouāna senza sotia + che nōe linghilterra con lascotia. + + Son duo ꝓuincie chio nō ho certate, + secondo che q̄sti altri decto hāno, + una cene la qual queste brigate. + dican che quelle gente che uistāno + son con le code tucte quante nate + & Anaan elnome posto lehanno, + poi caminai ꝓ la spagnuola ciglia + ꝑ cinquecēsessantoquattro miglia. + + Doue e lauilla laqual io pigliai, + doue io feci larocca o uer bastia + che la piu bella che io uedessi mai, + come iho scripto a uostra signoria + non miricorda se adir uimandai + inquesta brieue epistolecta mia + elnōe ch’ io lho posto & forse auisto + natiuita del nostro Iesus Xꝕo. + + In queste isole tucti questi stāno + contenti duna dōna ciascheduno, + ma q̄sti principali tucti mhanno + uēti lequal son date lor per uno. + & luno allaltro mai torto nō fanno, + che a cio far nō ce pronto nessuno, + & nelle cose tucte da mangiare + nulla diuision uiueggo fare. + + Et ben che i q̄ste parti caldo sia, + lastate eluerno ce digran freddura, + ma ꝑ che mangiā molta spetieria + lacarne loro alfreddo molto dura + inquesta parte nulla cosa ria, + sitruoua diche questi habbin paura, + saluo che ce unisola allentrare + dellindia per uoler qui arriuare. + + In nella quale sta gente uillana + da q̄sti nō mipar che siano amati, + ꝑ ch’ dice māgiā carne humana, + pero nō son da questi qui prezati, + hanno assai legni q̄sta gente strana, + da nauicare & hanno gia rubati, + aquesti di scorrendo dogni banna + cō archi ī mano & cō frecce dicāna. + + Non e da q̄sti a quegli differenza, + senō innecapegli che q̄gli hanno + lunghi come ledōne & dipresenza + son come q̄sti & fāno molto dāno, + aq̄ste ch’ son ꝑpro essa clemenza, + si che ingelosia sempre nestanno, + ma spero che lauosira signoria + sapra purgare una tal maltaia. + + Una isola cie decta mactanino, + nella qual le donne sole stanno, + & questo iniquo popol glie uicino, + & ausar con q̄ste spesso uanno, + ma q̄sto popol tucto feminino + exercitio di dōne mai nō fanno, + ma cō gliarchi trahēdo tuctauia, + che par per cerbo una grā fantasia. + + Et uanno queste ben tucte coperte, + nō gia di pāni lini, o lani, o ueli, + ma derbe & giūchi, & q̄ste cose certe + son che di qua nq̃e lēzuoli o teli + unaltra isola poi legente offerte, + femine & maschi nascō senza peli, + manzi uoglia cōfuso esser nel dire + chi uoglia alcuna cosa preterire. + + Et dove q̄sti senza peli sono, + piu oro cie chihabbia ācor trouata + di q̄l chi scriuo o parlando ragiono, + signore, io ne son ben giustificato + auostra signoria un magno dono + iho per portar meco preparato + di tucti q̄sti luoghi iuo menare + gente che possin cio testificare. + + Pero, giusto signor, di Spagna degno, + stia uostra signoria dibuona uoglia + chīho cresciuto tāto iluostro regno, + ch’ chi ua īuida po crepar didoglia + doro & dargento passarete el segno + tel ch’ trarra elnimico di sua soglia, + ma q̃l chi so ch’ molto piu prezate + son queste gēte a xꝕo preparate. + + Reubarbero assai & aloe, + Mastice, cinamono, & spetierie, + tanta richeza, signor mio, qui e + che discaccia da me leuoglie rie, + piu allegreza, signor mio, fare, + si fussi certo che per tucte uie + q̃sta scripta uenissi asaluamento + nel mōdo no sare huom piu-cōtēto. + + Nō miacascaltro degno mio signore + scriuere auostra magna signoria, + raccomandomi a q̃lla a tucte lhore, + laqual cōserui ilfigluol di Maria + parato semꝕmai per uostro amore + amecter q̃sta breue uita mia + aquindici de febraio q̃sta sife + nel mille quattrocento nouāta tre. + + Magnifici & discreti circūstanti + q̃sta e gran cosa certo da pensare, + ch’l nostro redēptor̃ cō tucti esancti + nō resta mai legratie sue mandare + douerebbon di q̃sto tucti quanti + ebaptizati a x̃po festa fare, + chi ue chi uimādo & chi ue andato + prepari dio alsuo regno beato. + + Questa ha cōposto de dati Giuliano + apreghiera del magno caualiere + messer Giouanphilippo ciciliano, + che fu di Sixto quarto suo scudiere + & commessario suo & capitano, + a q̄lle cose che fur di mestiere + allaude del signor sicanta & dice + che ciconduca al suo regno felice. + +¶ FINIS LAUS DEO. + + ¶ Finita lastoria della īuētione delle nuoue isole dicānaria + īdiane tracte duna pistola dixꝕofano colōbo, & ꝓmesser + Giuliano dati tradocta dilatino ī uersi uulgari allaude + della christiana religione & aꝕghiera delmagnifico + caualiere messer Giouāfilippo del ignamine + domestico familiare dello illustrissimo + Redispagna xꝕianissimo a + di. xxvi. doctobre. + 14.93. + + _Florentie._ + + + + +BIBLIOGRAPHY. + + +In this bibliographical notice I do not propose to deal with any editions +of the first letter of Columbus beyond the “Incunabula,” which I arrange +in the order of their publication, as ascertained from an examination of +the documents themselves. + + 1. ¶ Epistola Christofori Colom: cui etas nostra multū + debet: de | Insulis Indie supra Gangem nuper inuētis. Ad + quas perqꝫren- | das octauo antea mense auspiciis & ere + invictissimor’ Fernādi & | Helisabet Hispaniar’ Regū missus + fuerat: ad magnificum dñm | Gabrielem Sanchis eorundē + serenissimor’ Regum Tesaurariū | missa: quā nobilis ac + litteratus vir Leander de Cosco ab Hispa | no ideomate in + latinum cōuertit tertio kal’s Maii m.cccc.xciii | Pontificatus + Alexandri Sexti Anno primo. + +Small 4to. This edition, which, as I shall presently show, is the _editio +princeps_, was printed by Stephen Plannck at Rome in 1493. It consists +of four leaves, printed in gothic type, and has 33 lines in a full page. +Copies are in the Grenville and King’s Libraries in the British Museum. + + 2. ¶ Epistola Christofori Colom: cui etas nostra multum + debet: de | Insulis Indie supra Gangem nuper inuētis. Ad + quas perquiren | das octauo antea mense auspiciis & ere + inuictissimorum Fernandi | ac Helisabet Hispaniar’ Regū missus + fuerat: ad Magnificū dñm | Gabrielem Sanches: eorundem + serenissimorum Regum Tesau | rariū missa: Quā generosus + ac litteratus vir Leander de Cosco ab | Hispano idiomate + in latinū cōuertit: tertio Kalen’ Maij M.cccc. | xc.iij. + Pontificatus Alexandri Sexti Anno Primo. | 4to. + + End:—¶ Impressit Rome Eucharius Argenteus [Silber] Anno dñi. + M.ccccxciij. + +Three leaves, printed in gothic letter. 40 lines in a page. A copy is in +the Grenville Library. + + 3. ¶ Epistola Christofori Colom: cui etas nostra multū debet: + de | Insulis Indie supra Gangem nuper inuentis. Ad quas perqui + | rendas octauo antea mense auspicijs & ere invictissimi Fernan + | di Hispaniarum Regis missus fuerat: ad Magnificum dñum Ra | + phaelem Sanxis: eiusdem serenissimi Regis Tesaurariū missa: | + quam nobilis ac litteratus vir Aliander de Cosco ab Hispano | + ideomate in latinum conuertit: tertio kal’s Maij. M.cccc.xciij. + | Pontificatus Alexandri Sexti Anno Primo. + +Small 4to. Gothic letter; four leaves, 34 lines in a full page. This +edition is supposed to have been printed by Stephen Plannck at Rome, +about 1493. 3 or 4 copies are known; two are in the General Library and +Grenville Library, British Museum. + + 4. De Insulis inuentis | Epistola Cristoferi Colom (cui etas + nostra | multū debet: de Insulis in mari Indico nup’ | inuētis. + Ad quas perquirendas octauo antea | mense: auspicijs et ere + Invictissimi Fernandi | Hispaniarum Regis missus fuerat | ad + Magnificum dñm Raphaeleꝫ Sanxis: eiusdē sere | nissimi Regis + Thesaurariū missa. quam nobi | lis ac litterat’ vir Aliander đ + Cosco: ab His | pano ydeomate in latinū conuertit: tercio k’ls + | Maij. M.cccc.xciij. Pontificatus Alexandri | Sexti Anno Primo. + +Small 8vo. Gothic character; ten leaves, 26 and 27 lines in a page. The +title above given is preceded by a leaf bearing on the recto the arms of +Spain, “Regnū hyspanie”—on the verso the cut of the “Oceanica Classis”. +There are 6 woodcuts—the “Oceanica Classis”, being repeated. A copy is +in the Grenville Library. + + 5. Epistola de insulis de | nouo repertis. Impressa | parisius + in cāpo gaillardi. + +Small 4to. Gothic letter; four leaves, 39 lines in a full page. This +edition was printed by Guy Marchand about 1494. Brunet states that the +only copy known is that formerly belonging to M. Ternaux-Compans, now the +property of Mr. John Carter Brown. + +This edition was reprinted in 1865, “Lettre de Christophe Colomb sur la +découverte du Nouveau-Monde, publiée d’après la rarissime version latine +conservée à la Bibliothèque Impériale. Traduite en Français, commentée +et enrichie de notes puisées aux sources originales par Lucien de Rosny. +8vo., Paris, 1865.” + + 6. Epistola de Insulis noui | ter repertis. Impressa parisius + In campo gaillardi. + +Small 4to. Gothic letter; four leaves, 39 lines in a page. The above +title is in two lines, the first printed in a larger character. +Underneath is the device of the printer, “Guiot Marchant”—two cobblers at +work, one cutting the leather, the other making it up. This edition was +printed by Guy Marchand at Paris, about 1494. + +A copy is in the Bodleian Library. A fac-simile made by Mr. John Harris, +sen., is in the British Museum; the impression was limited to five copies. + +All the foregoing editions have at the end the Latin Epigram in eight +verses of R. L. de Corbatia, (a pseudonym for Leonardus de Carninis, +Bishop of Monte Peloso in Naples). In this edition, below the epigram, +on the same page, is a woodcut of the Angel appearing to the Shepherds. +Mr. Lenox has given a fac-simile of this in the Appendix to _Syllacius_. +The title on the recto of the following leaf (sig. a, ij) is the same +as in the Roman editions, having the name of Ferdinand without that of +Isabella. It ends with the words: “Vale. Ulisbone pridie Idus Marcij.” + +A “pictorial” edition of the Latin letter, in 4to., was printed in 1494. +It is appended to a work by Carolus Verardus, “In laudem Serenissimi +Ferdinandi Hispaniar’ regis.... Et de Insulis in mari Indico nuper +inuentis.” + +The work is printed on fifteen pages in Roman characters, and probably +at Basle, by B. de Olpe. The woodcuts are the same as those used in the +small 8vo. edition printed about 1493 (see No. 4). + +No sooner did this letter make its appearance in print in the year 1493, +than the narrative it contained was put forth in Italian ottava rima +by Giuliano Dati, one of the most popular poets of the day; and there +is reason to believe that it was sung about the streets to announce to +the Italians the astounding news of the discovery of a new world. (See +_ante_, p. xc.) + +The only copy of this curious and valuable poem known at the time of +the issue of the first edition of this work in 1847 is that which I now +reprint. + + ¶ La lettera dellisole che ha trouato nuovamente il Re dispagna. + + End: + + ¶ Finita lastoria della iuētione del | le nuoue isole dicānaria + īdiane trac | te duna pistola dixp̃ofano colōbo & | ꝑmesser + Giuliano dati tradocta di la | tino ī uersi uulgari allaude + della ce | lestiale corte & aconsolatione della | christiana + religione & ap̃ghiera del magnifico caualiere messer Giouā | + filippo del ignamine domestico fa | mīliare dello illustrissimo + Re dispa | gna xp̃ianīssimo a di. xxvi. docto | bre. 14.93. + Florentie. + +4to. Printed in Roman characters on four leaves, in double columns. The +poem consists of 68 stanzas in _ottava rima_. Beneath the single-line +title is a woodcut representing the landing of Columbus, and King +Ferdinand seated on his throne on the _opposite shore_. This is the only +copy known. + +Since 1847 another edition has been acquired by the British Museum, +bearing the following title:— + + ¶ Questa e la hystoria della inuentiōe delle diese Isole di + Cannaria In | diane extracte duna Epistola di Christofano + Colombo & per messer Giu | liano Dati traducta de latino in + uersi uulgari a laude e gloria della cele | stiale corte & a + consolatione della christiana religiōe & apreghiera del ma | + gnifico Caualier miser Giouanfilippo Delignamine domestico + familia | re dello Sacratissimo Re di spagna Christianissimo a + di. xxv. doctobre. | M.cccclxxxxiii. | + + End: FINIS + + Joannes dictus Florentinus. + +4to. Printed in gothic characters, in double columns, and, without doubt, +at Florence. A complete copy should contain four leaves. The copy in the +British Museum, the only one of this edition hitherto discovered, is, +unfortunately, deficient in two leaves—viz., the second and the third. +It is printed in a very rude type on coarse paper, and was evidently a +popular edition, sold at a very small price. This edition presents many +variations from the other, both in the orthography and language; _e.g._, +the opening stanza, which may be compared with that given in the present +edition. + + LOīpotente idio ch’l tulto regge + mi presti gr̃a chi possa cantare + allaude sua e di sua sancta legge + cosa che piaza achi stara ascoltare + maxime alpopul suo & a sua gregge + elqual non cessa mai magnificare + come al presente afacto nela spagna + delle isole trouate cosa magna. + +This edition omits the final stanza, which is little else than the +colophon of the other versified:— + + Questa ha cōposta de’ dati Giuliano + etc. etc. etc. + + Eyn schön hübsch lesen von etlichen insslen | dīe do in kurtzen + zyten funden synd durch dē | künig von hispania. vnd sagt vō + grossen wun | derlichen dingen die in dē selbē insslen synd. + + End: + + Getruckt zŭ strassburg vff gruneck vō meīster Bartlomess | + küstler ym iar. M.cccc.xcvij. vff sant Jeronymus tag.— + +Small 4to. Seven leaves, 30 lines in a page. Beneath the title is a +woodcut representing the apprehension of Christ in the garden; this is +repeated on the verso of the last leaf. This edition is very rare. A copy +is in the Grenville Library. + +Besides the foregoing we are in possession of a photo-zincographic +fac-simile published at Milan in 1866, by the Marquis Gerolamo d’Adda, +of an early printed edition of the Spanish original, in the Ambrosian +Library in that city. It bears no printer’s name or place or date of +publication, but it is unquestionably of the fifteenth century, and is +considered by bibliographers to be of the date of 1493. Señor Pascual +de Gayangos (in a valuable paper, entitled “La Carta de Cristóbal Colon +al Escribano Luis de Santangel”, printed in the Madrid Journal, _La +America_, under date of 13th April, 1867) suggests that it was printed in +Lisbon. + +We have also in Navarrete’s _Coleccion de Viages_, printed at Madrid +1825, vol. i, pp. 167-175, what professes to be an attested literal +rendering of a copy of Columbus’s letter in Spanish to the Escribano de +Racion (whom we know from Argensola’s _Anales de Aragon_ to be Luis de +Santangel), in the Archives at Simancas. + +And, further, we have a printed version of a copy of the first letter +in Spanish MS., discovered by His Excellency Senhor de Varnhagen in +Valencia, and published by him in that city in 1858, under the title of +_Primera Epistola del Almirante Don Christobal Colon ... a D. Gabriel +Sanchez Tesorero de Aragon_. As editor, Senhor de Varnhagen assumed +the pseudonym of D. Genaro H. de Volafan; and last year His Excellency +published at Vienna a little work, the nature and contents of which are +explained by its title, which is as follows:—“Carta de Cristóbal Colon +enviada de Lisboa a Barcelona en Marzo de 1493. Nueva Edicion Critica: +Conteniendo las variantes de los diferentes textos, juicio sobre estos, +reflexiones tendentes a mostrar a quien la Carta fue escrita, y varias +otras noticias, por el Seudónimo de Valencia.” + +Be it observed that in all these the _titles_ are supplied by the +respective editors, and consequently have no authority beyond the weight +of each editor’s individual opinion. I have carefully collated the three +documents, and the result is a certain conclusion that neither one nor +the other is a correct transcript of the original letter. The grounds +for this conclusion are, that while no two of them entirely agree _inter +se_, every one of them exhibits certain special errors which, as I +shall presently demonstrate, _could_ not have been in the original. The +apparent rashness of this assertion will disappear if the reader will +accompany me in my effort to detect which of the printed Latin editions +which we possess is to receive the distinction of _editio princeps_. +Various have been the opinions on this subject. Mr. Lenox, following +Brunet, has given the lead to the edition which I have ventured to place +_fourth_. Mr. Harrisse, in his elaborate _Notes on Columbus_, gives the +first place to that which stands _third_ in my series, and His Excellency +Senhor de Varnhagen assigns priority to the edition which I make to +be the _second_. That to which I assign the distinction of taking the +lead has the _second_ place given to it by Senhor de Varnhagen, and the +_third_ by Brunet, Mr. Lenox, and Mr. Harrisse. In offering a conclusion +so much at variance with my predecessors, my only means of escaping the +charge of presumption (but that I hope is an effectual one), is neither +to adopt the opinion of any one else nor to offer any opinion of my own, +but to reduce the matter to demonstration by facts either within or +connected with the documents themselves. + +On examination of the titles it will be seen that the six editions +resolve themselves by several very strongly marked features into two +distinct groups. One of these groups, embracing four of the editions, +is characterized by remarkable inaccuracy in three separate points—all +four exhibiting all these inaccuracies in common; while the remaining +two, being free from them, stand clearly defined into a distinct group by +themselves. + +Thus; the titles of the editions numbered 3, 4, 5, 6, all speak of +Columbus being sent out under the auspices and at the expense of +Ferdinand, King of Spain, without reference to the name of Queen +Isabella. They all describe the letter as addressed to the Treasurer +“Sanxis,” instead of “Sanchez,” whose Christian name they pervert from +“Gabriel” to “Raphael.” Furthermore, they all convert the Christian name +of the translator from “Leander” to “Aliander.” + +The titles of the editions numbered 1 and 2, on the contrary, give the +names of both the sovereigns, call the Treasurer in No. 2 Sanches, in No. +1 “Sanchis,” but not Sanxis, and rightly name the translator “Leander de +Cosco.” + +Now there is no difficulty in showing which of these groups has the merit +of correctness, or which the demerit of incorrectness. + +It is perfectly well known that in 1493 Ferdinand and Isabella held the +common title of _Reyes de España_. Whether “Sanches” or “Sanxis” should +be the correct form of spelling the name of a Spaniard who was treasurer +to the Spanish sovereigns, it would be waste of time to question, and +that his Christian name was Gabriel and not Raphael, we have clear +evidence from an independent document in the Archives of Simancas, dated +December 1495, for which the reader is referred to Navarrete’s _Coleccion +de Viages_, vol. iii, p. 76, line 16, where he is called “El tesorero +Gabriel Sanchez”. His name is also mentioned more than once by Zurita in +his _Anales de Aragon_. + +The question then arises whether the palm of priority is to be conceded +to the correct or to the incorrect form. Now all these six titles agree +in stating that the original Spanish letter of Columbus was _sent_ to +the Treasurer Royal. But for a letter to be sent, it must carry an +address, and if Columbus inserted in such address the Treasurer’s name, +he, who knew Spanish so well, would not have insulted that dignitary by +converting his surname of Sanchez into Sanxis, or his Christian name of +Gabriel into Raphael. But even if we suppose that he omitted the name +altogether, as is probable, and simply superscribed his letter with +the title of the Treasurer, the fact still remains that the translator +or editor of the first edition derived the information that the letter +was so sent, directly from the Treasurer himself, who at least knew his +own name and would not allow it to be transmitted for publication (if +Columbus had been guilty of the blunder) under the form of “Raphael +Sanxis.” Nor would he, holding a high official post, have been guilty of +the _maladresse_ of omitting the name of the queen in the description +of his own title. Now of our two groups of printed letters it is +indisputable that that one must take precedence which comes immediately +in connection with the original source, and as that source is at the same +time the head-quarters of correctness, it follows that correctness must +be the criterion of priority. + +We thus find our six candidates for the glory of “editio princeps” +reduced to two. Now these two issued from two different printing presses. +One of them is printed by Argenteus, _i.e._, Silber, and bears his name +with the imprint, “Rome, 1493.” The other is without printer’s name or +place or date of publication, but is indisputably from the printing +press of Stephanus Plannck, as may be seen by comparing it with a work +of Benedictus de Nursia of the same date, entitled _“Incipit libellus de +conservatione sanitatis secundum ordinem alphabeti distinctus per eximium +doctorem magistrum Benedictum compositus.” Impressum Rome per magistrum +Stephanum Planck, Anno Domini mccccxciii, quarto nōn Maii._ In this and +other works from the same press the form and type precisely correspond +with those of our letter. + +Now these two editions of Plannck and Silber were either printed +simultaneously or not. Instances of the same work being printed by two +different printers on the same day do occur. One example is before me of +this happening in this very year 1493. The work is entitled, “_Illustris +et Reverendi Domini Nicolai Mariæ Estensis Episcopi Hadriensis oratio +pro consanguineo suo inclyto Hercule Estensi Ferrariæ duce secundo_.” +One edition in Roman character bears the colophon, _Romæ impressa per +mgrm Plannck: Julio Campello Spoletino procurante. Anno Salvatoris +mcccclxxxxiii. Nonis Januariis._ The other, in Gothic character, bears +precisely the same title and the same colophon, with the difference +of the words, _impressa per magistrum Andream Fritag_. Both are small +quarto, of the size of our two editions of the letter of Columbus. + +But here it must be observed that there was apparently a special object +in resorting to this exceptional procedure, viz., the production +simultaneously of one edition in Roman and another in Gothic types, +to suit the tastes of purchasers. In the case before us, however, the +question of this motive does not arise, for both Plannck’s and Silber’s +editions are in Gothic type; and any way it is clear that, in a case of +the kind, the same text would be handed to each printer to set up, as any +patent discrepancies between the two would be to the self-stultification +of the editor. Now, in the case of the Columbus letter, such patent +discrepancies do occur; by which I mean no mere printer’s blunders, but +deliberate alterations of Latin expressions, as for example “ambularunt” +in Plannck is “ambulaverunt” in Silber; “serenissimos Reges nostros,” +correct Latin in Plannck, is “serenissimorum regum nostrorum,” making bad +grammar, in Silber. This fact of itself I contend disproves simultaneity +of production. But side by side with these discrepancies we observe the +repetition in the one, of eccentricities or inaccuracies occurring in +the other, as in the words “quom,” “benivolentia,” and “nanque.” The +former, though not incorrect, is quaint and unusual, but the two latter +are faulty peculiarities, and their occurrence, in both editions, side +by side with deliberate alterations, proves the one to be copied from +the other either by the hand of the transcriber or of the compositor. +This fact once established, I have to call attention to the following +remarkable difference between the two editions. In the Plannck edition +the distance sailed by Columbus along the north coast of Hispaniola is +stated as DLXIIII miles. In Silber’s the same figures occur minus the D, +and with no space left for the letter to have fallen out. Now it being +understood that one of these is a copy from the other, whether through +a transcriber’s or a compositor’s hand, if we suppose that the Silber +edition, which was minus the D, appeared first, we must perceive that +the error is one which no special knowledge could enable the editor or +printer of the other to suspect, much less to rectify, and yet in the +Plannck edition we should find it so rectified. Whereas if the Plannck +edition be supposed to be the first, we have no such difficulty to +encounter, but simply meet (in the Silber edition) with a negligent +omission of a letter, which may so easily happen. The next enquiry, of +course, is, which number is right, 564 or 64 miles? Fortunately we have +the means of answering this question with certainty, for as we possess +two copies, or copies of copies, of the original Spanish letter, we find +that the translator, Leander de Cosco, converted the leagues of the +Spanish original into miles by multiplying them, though ignorantly, by +three; and in one of these two copies, which can in other respects be +shown to be far more correct than its fellow, these leagues are stated +as 188, which correspond exactly with 564 miles. It must be clear, then, +that the edition containing the number 564 was derived from the original +accounts, while that which contained the number 64 had allowed the D to +be lost. The result I submit to be that Plannck’s edition must claim the +palm to priority. + +To this conclusion it has been objected by a friend that the argument +is not complete, inasmuch as Cosco the translator, may have sent his +translation to Rome, with instructions that a copy thereof should be +made, and that, as the work was of importance, two printers should at +once be employed in printing from the two copies; that the copyist +may have thought fit to make the alterations which appear between the +two, or, failing him, that these alterations may have been made by the +compositor of one of them. To which I reply that the deviations in the +Silber edition are all on the side of ignorance, and not such as could +have been made by an original translator. To take the most notable +example: in Plannck’s edition occurs this passage, already slightly +referred to, “quæ res perutilis est ad id quod Serenissimos Reges nostros +exoptare præcipue reor.” “Which thing is very useful for the object which +I think that our most serene Sovereigns principally desire.” Here we +find the right grammatical construction of the accusative before the +infinitive mood, just as the translator would write it. In Silber’s +edition the sentence stands thus: “quæ res perutilis est ad id quod +Serenissimorum regum nostrorum exoptare præcipue reor,” a change showing +such ignorance of grammatical construction that it could not have been +the work of the translator. I contend that, under such circumstances, +even if it should be assumed (though there is no warranty for such +assumption) that the two editions were printed simultaneously, Plannck’s +edition would justly take the lead on account of its more immediate +derivation from the original translation. + +But before I leave this subject I must call attention to a notable fact, +which opens up the question whether the real _editio princeps_ has +perished, or not as yet come to our knowledge. It happens that the length +of the north coast of Hispaniola is _twice_ stated by Columbus in this +letter. The _first_ mention of it is given correctly in Plannck’s edition +as “milliaria dlxiiii,” which I have already shown to be a right number, +while in Silber the “d” is lost, and the number stands “lxiiii.” The +_second_ mention of the length of the coast is given _alike incorrectly +by both_ as dxl. This fact, brought into combination with those +evolved by our comparison of the two texts, not only corroborates the +non-originality and secondary position of Silber’s edition, but it raises +a question as to whether Plannck’s was not preceded by another which has +never come to our knowledge, in which both numbers were correctly given. +It might be conjectured that Columbus himself wrote the second number +incorrectly, but here the different Spanish texts come valuably to our +aid, and the curious circumstance that the translator Cosco converted the +leagues of the Spanish into miles in the Latin, supplies a most welcome +means of solving the riddle. Another document, the contemporaneous +rhythmical version of the letter by Giuliano Dati, will also be of great +service in the examination of the subject. For the sake of clearness +I will tabulate them, and distinguish the correct numbers, where they +occur, by italics. + + +--------+--------------------+------------------+------------------+ + | | Ambrosian text. | Valencia MS. | Simancas MS. | + +--------+--------------------+------------------+------------------+ + | First | clxxviii leguas. |_ciento e ochenta | ciento e setenta | + |mention.| | y ocho leguas._ | y ocho leguas. | + | | | | | + | Second | _clxxxviii leguas._| ciento treinta | ciento treinta | + |mention.| | y ocho leguas. | y ocho leguas. | + +--------+--------------------+------------------+------------------+ + + +--------+--------------------+------------------+------------------+ + | | Plannck’s edition. | Silber’s edition.| Dati. | + +--------+--------------------+------------------+------------------+ + | First |milliaria _dlxiiii_.| miliaria lxiiii. |_cinquecensessanta| + |mention.| | | quattro miglia._ | + | | | | | + | Second | milliaria dxl. | miliaria dxl. |_cinquecensessanta| + |mention.| | | quattro miglia._ | + +--------+--------------------+------------------+------------------+ + +From this table it will be seen that the erroneous one hundred and +thirty-eight leagues do not tally with the erroneous five hundred and +forty miles; but the most striking fact that this table presents to +our notice is that the _Dati poem_ is the only one of these documents +that has the number right in both places; and it might at first sight +appear a very simple and easy thing for Dati to see that what was right +measurement in the one case must be the right measurement in the other, +even although the other copyists had failed to realise this fact. But not +so. Dati composed his poem from the Latin translation, and if the edition +from which he worked had been as faulty as that of Plannck, now under +notice, he could have had no means of deciding which number was right, +the dlxiiii of the first mention, or the dxl of the second. We have the +means of knowing, but only because we possess the various copies of the +Spanish, which state the distance in leagues. The necessary conclusion +then is that Dati worked from a copy either MS. or printed, in which the +number was right in both places; and this conclusion is corroborated +by the fact that, of the Spanish documents, the Valencia MS. shows the +number right in the first mention, and the Ambrosian text shows it right +in the second. Furthermore, I observe that Dati, who distinctly states +that his poem was “tradocta di latino,” gives the letter the date of Feb. +15th, a date which occurs in the Spanish, but not in the Latin texts +which we possess. It follows, therefore, that if he worked from a printed +text, that edition is lost to us. + +But there remains the alternative that he worked from the MS. Latin +translation, and that the latter had been fully rendered from the +original Spanish, but was afterwards modified by the compositor in +setting it up in type. That such was in reality the case the reader +will find proved beyond all dispute at the close of this disquisition. +It therefore remains that, while there is no reason to suppose that an +edition is lost, the edition by Plannck, consisting of four leaves, with +thirty-three lines to the page, must take the lead among those which are +known to us. + +But now we come to the very interesting subject of the original Spanish. +Columbus’s manuscript letter is lost, and the only representatives of it +with which we are acquainted are the manuscript copies already mentioned +at Simancas and Valencia, published respectively by Navarrete and Senhor +de Varnhagen, and the valuable printed text in the Ambrosian Library, for +the reproduction of which by photo-zincography all who are interested +in the subject are so deeply indebted to the enlightened liberality of +the Marquis d’Adda. The two former transcripts are confessedly made at +a much later date, while to the latter bibliographers give the credit +of the date of 1493. At the end of the Simancas copy is the expression: +“Esta carta envio Colon al Escribano de Racion de las islas halladas en +las Indias e otra de sus altezas.” This office of Escribano de Racion +was held by Luis de Santangel. The Valencia copy had no such sentence at +the end, but simply bore the title: “Carta del Almirante á D. Gabriel +Sanches.” The Ambrosian text photo-zincographed by the Marquis d’Adda +bore a similar expression at the end to that of the Simancas copy, +but with a difference; thus: “Esta carta embio Colon al Escrivano de +Racion de las Islas halladas en las Indias. Contenida a otra de sus +altezas.” Under these circumstances the Marquis d’Adda, accepting the +pre-supposed fact that Columbus had addressed two similar letters to the +two above-named officials, very naturally regarded the Ambrosian text as +derived from the Simancas MS. A collation of the three texts, _inter se_, +and with the Latin translation of Cosco, exhibits, however, the following +results:—the Valencia MS. addressed to Gabriel Sanchez is almost a +verbatim repetition of the Simancas text addressed to the Escribano +de Racion, while the Ambrosian text also addressed to the Escribano de +Racion agrees with the Latin text addressed to Gabriel Sanchez in certain +forms of expression, which are entirely different from those used in +common in the Valencia and Simancas MSS. to describe the same thing. +This perplexing result has been stated by Senhor de Varnhagen in the +little work published last year already referred to, and I can confirm +it by actual careful collation of all the four documents. The _prima +facie_ inference from this fact would, I think, be that the Escribano de +Racion and Gabriel Sanchez, either really were, or by some mistake had +been taken to be, identical. A very high authority on such a subject, +Senor de Gayangos, in the learned article already referred to, distinctly +maintains the dispatch of two letters to the said two officials, whereas +Senhor de Varnhagen not only limits the dispatch to one single address, +but goes so far as to conclude that the Spanish printed text, from which +he believes the Latin to be translated, is in fact the letter addressed +to the sovereigns, with the change only of “vuestras” into “sus.” But as +his Excellency has given much careful thought to this matter, and has, +under the guidance of a most judicious criticism, supplied an amended +text, derived from a collation of the different texts, it is but justice +to him and to the subject itself to give a literal translation of his +remarks. This is the more requisite as I shall have to submit some facts +which seem to me to lead to conclusions differing from some of those +arrived at by my learned friend. + +His Excellency says: “We hold it for certain that the said _primitive_ +edition (the Ambrosian) which we have had the opportunity of seeing in +Milan, _must have given origin_ to the text published in Rome the 25th +April[24] of that same year (1493) by Cozco, who perhaps from not being +able to transfer easily to the Latin the last part of it, cut it off. +The said fact is principally _shown_ by the mistake of the date of 14th +(instead of 4th) of March, which could not be in the letter of Columbus, +as he had left Lisbon before that day; nor would it be reasonable to +suppose that the error would be repeated in the same manner, if said +original had been kept in sight. Still less could the repetition of such +a mistake be conceived, if the original manuscript were different.” + +Now, before we proceed to an examination of this matter, the first thing +requisite is to lay before the reader a specific difference which exists +between the Spanish and the Latin texts. In the Spanish (I quote from +the Ambrosian text) the letter closes thus: “Esto segun el fecho asi en +breve. Fecha en la calavera sobre las Yslas de Canaria a xv de Febrero +mil et quatrocientos et noventa y tres años.” + +Then comes a + + “Nyma que venia dentro en la carta.” + +“Despues desta escripto y estando en mar de Castilla salyo tanto viento +conmigo sul y sueste que me ha fecho descargar la navios por cosi +(correr?) aqui en este puerto de Lysbona oy, que fue la mayor maravilla +del mundo. Adonde acordé escrivir a sus altezas. En todas las Yndias he +siempre hallado los tenporales como en Mayo, adonde yo fuy en xxxiii dias +et volvi en xxviii, salvo questas tormentas me han detenido xiiii dias +corriendo por esta mar. Dizen aqua todos los honbres de la mar que jamas +ovo tan mal yvierno no ni tantas perdidas de naves, fecha a xiiii dias de +marco. + +“Esta carta embio Colon al Escrivano de racion de las Islas halladas en +las Indias. Contenida a otra de sus altezas.” + +For those who need it, the translation will be found in our printed text +at page 18. + +The Latin translation ends very differently; thus: “Hæc ut gesta sunt sic +breviter enarrata. Vale. Ulisbone, pridie Idus Martii.” + +Now the reader will observe that in the above “nyma” or postscript, +Columbus states that on the day of his reaching Lisbon he resolved to +write to their Highnesses, and we know from his diaries that that day was +the 4th of March, and yet at the end the postscript is dated the 14th of +March, a day on which we know, from the said diaries, that he was off +Cape St. Vincent on his way from Lisbon to Spain, which he was then on +the point of reaching at the harbour of Palos. + +The Latin, it will be perceived, repeats this discrepancy in a more +distinct shape, by bringing the name of Lisbon immediately into +connection with the 14th of March, of which the words: “pridie Idus +Martii” are the equivalent. + +With these specialities in his mind, the reader will be able with +greater clearness to follow the following disquisition:— + +The perfectly sound piece of criticism by Senhor de Varnhagen, which we +have just read, is based upon the accepted premiss that it was on the +4th of March that Columbus dispatched to the King and Queen the letter +describing his voyage, with the nema attached. The words of the “nema” +itself make such an inference highly reasonable. It states that “el +viento me ha fecho descargar los navios por correr aqui en este puerto +de Lisbona _hoy_ ... adonde acordé de escribir a sus altezas.”—“The wind +made me unload the ships to run into this port of Lisbon to-day ... where +I resolved to write to their Highnesses.” The diary shows that this +day was the 4th of March, and hence, _prima facie_, the date of “14th +of March” in the nema would appear to be not written by Columbus, but +a blunder of the printer of the Ambrosian text. This natural inference +_appears_ confirmed, I find, by the distinct statement of Ferdinand +Columbus that on his father’s arrival in Lisbon on the 4th—“Subito espedì +un corriero a’ Re Catolici con la nuova della sua venuta”—“he immediately +dispatched a courier to the Catholic Sovereigns with the news of his +arrival.” + +Now, supposing, for I do not take it for granted, that this statement of +Fernando’s, written many years after, was correct, and that his father +carried out his intention of writing to the Sovereigns from Lisbon, that +statement does not tell us that he then _sent on the account of his +voyage_; and if we inquire a little further, we have good reason to +suppose that he did _not_ forward it on that day. There is no mention +in his Diary of his so doing, although the act would be of sufficient +importance to call for mention. He was in a country where his success in +the cause of Spain was regarded with intense animosity. He was ignorant +of the whereabouts of the Sovereigns, and in prospect of an early arrival +in Spain, when he both would gain the necessary information, and could +send on his precious missive in perfect safety. In harmony with these +suggestions of mine, I find that Herrera, the historiographer, who had +in his charge all the Columbian documents, states that on Wednesday, the +13th March, Columbus left Lisbon for Seville in his caravel. On Thursday, +the 14th, before daybreak, he was off Cape St. Vincent. On Friday, the +15th, at mid-day, he entered the port of Palos, whence he had sailed on +the 3rd of August of the previous year. _And having learned that the +Catholic Sovereigns were at Barcelona_, he at first thought of going +there in his caravel; but subsequently resolving not to go to Barcelona +by sea, he _announced his arrival to the Catholic Sovereigns, and sent +a summary of what had happened to him, reserving the more complete +narrative for their immediate presence_. The _reply_ reached him in +Seville, and contained expressions of joy at his safe arrival and at the +success of his voyage, offered him rewards and honours, and commanded +him to make haste to go to Barcelona. Now, it will be remembered that +Columbus’s narrative was already written, and dated February 15th or +18th, and only waiting to be despatched, and had attached to it the +nema, which Mr. Gayangos tells us was a piece of paper placed on the +outside of a letter like a padlock, and over which the seal was put. On +this nema, beyond all question, was the date of March 4th; and if, as I +gather from Herrera’s statement, Columbus dispatched this narrative of +his voyage, not from Lisbon on the 4th March, but from Palos on the 15th, +or the 16th, it is not unlikely that on the 14th, when he was nearing the +Spanish harbour from which he was looking forward to be able to dispatch +it in safety, he should have altered the remote date of the 4th, which +agreed with the wording of the nema at the time of writing it, into the +later date of the 14th, which was more in accordance with the date of +dispatch. We know that the letter to the Sovereigns was enclosed in the +letter to the Escribano de Racion; and the sentence printed at the end +of the Ambrosian text bears the aspect of an endorsement of the letter +by that officer’s secretary. The date of the Sovereigns’ reply from +Barcelona, March 30th, is in entire harmony, as regards lapse of time, +with the dispatch of Columbus’ letter from Palos on the 15th or 16th of +the month. The Latin translation was completed on the 29th April, a full +month after the arrival of the letter in Barcelona. There was plenty +of time, therefore, it is true, for the letter to have been printed in +Spanish, and for that Spanish to have served for the translation into +Latin; but if my suggestion, as derived from the above data, be correct, +that the alteration of 4 to 14 on the nema was made by Columbus himself, +my friend Senhor de Varnhagen’s conclusion that the Spanish printed text +_must_ have served for that translation becomes a _non sequitur_. Such +alteration by Columbus would naturally lead to the erroneous “ulisbone, +pridie idus Martii” in the Latin text, without the intervention of the +Spanish printed text, in which that alteration would of course also be +copied. + +I have stated these facts to show that the occurrence of March 14th both +in the Ambrosian text and the Latin translation, does not, as Senhor de +Varnhagen concluded, prove of necessity that the latter was derived from +the former, but from a common origin, to wit, in all probability the +original MS. of Columbus. But now that I have shown that the Latin _need +not_ have been derived from the Ambrosian, I proceed to show that it +_could not_ have been so. + +In the Ambrosian we find Guanahani spelt Guanaham; the island of Matinino +called Matremonio, etc., while in the Latin text we find the first name +correctly written Guanahani, Matinino is more nearly correctly written +Mateunin; and we have the name of an island, Charis, which is left out in +the Spanish altogether. But as the Latin translator possessed no special +knowledge by which he could make such corrections, it is clear that the +Ambrosian text could not have served as the basis for the Latin; whereas +if the two were derived from a common source, the errors of the Ambrosian +text would be those of its copyist, while the accurate rendering of +the corresponding passages in the Latin would be the result, not of +correction, as Senhor de Varnhagen suggests, but of attention to the +original. + +Upon this head Senhor de Varnhagen writes as follows:— + +“The Latin texts contain a correction of the words Guanahanin, Charis +(Caribes or Caraibes), and Mateunin (Matinino); but these corrections, +if perchance it should be proved that they were made at the time of the +first edition, and not afterwards (which we cannot here examine, not +having the different editions at hand), may have been pointed out by the +editor himself in sight of the original after the publication of the +printed text; or by Columbus himself, on receiving it on his road to +Barcelona, in order that some correct copies might be sent to Rome, by +way of communicating the news of the discovery that had been made, with +the view of obtaining the famous Bull from Alexander VI.” + +Now it is pretty clear that the Latin translation had nothing in the +world to do with the Papal bull. The name of _De_ Cosco indicates that +the translator was a Spaniard—and it is reasonable to assume that a +Spaniard would be selected to translate from Spanish into Latin—; +therefore we may fairly suppose that the translation was made in Spain. +It was not completed till the 29th of April—tertio kalendas maii—(not the +25th, an error of Navarrete’s, which Senhor de Varnhagen has adopted), +and the first bull was issued on the 3rd of May. The interval of four +days is scarcely sufficient to allow of the formal dispatch of the +document to Rome, its presentation and the drawing up of the bull, much +less if it had to undergo revision by Columbus, still less if it be a +question of correction of printed proofs set up in type at Rome in that +short interval. It is tolerably evident, then, that the Latin was sent to +Rome, not to the Pope, but only for printing. If, therefore, the missive +to the Pope was in Spanish, and included this letter, the corrections +by Columbus or by Sanchez, suggested by Senhor de Varnhagen, would have +been far better applied to the Spanish than to the Latin, instead of the +reverse, as suggested. + +It should, however, be borne in mind that in those days proofs were not +sent out for revision: but as a doubt may reasonably be entertained on +this point, on the score of the many imaginable possibilities that may +not have been foreseen or taken into consideration in this criticism, I +will now proceed to demonstrate that the Spanish and the Latin printed +texts certainly are derived from different, though similar, documents. +That they should be similar is natural, the one being written by Columbus +from the other, with such trivial changes as may have dropped from his +pen in transcribing. + +First: we have a Spanish text, the endorsement of which shows it to +have been sent to the Escribano de Racion. That this officer was Luis +de Santangel we know for certainty from Argensola’s _Anales de Aragon_, +lib. 1, cap. 10, p. 99, _et seq._, where he tells us that when the King +looked coldly on Columbus’s proposals, because the royal finances had +been drained by war, Isabella offered her jewels for the enterprise; but +this was rendered needless, as “Luis de Santangel, Escrivano de Racion +de Aragon, advanced seventeen thousand florins for the expenses of the +Armada.” This leaves no room for doubt that Columbus should immediately +send a copy of his letter to Santangel. In it was enclosed the copy +addressed to the Sovereigns.[25] This text sent to Santangel consisted of +a letter dated February 15th, and a postscript, announcing the arrival +off Lisbon on the 4th, subsequently altered to the 14th March. + +Secondly: we have a Latin text, distinctly stated to have been translated +from a letter addressed to the Royal Treasurer, Gabriel Sanchez. We have +thus clearly two letters addressed to two persons, but to annihilate +this duality Senhor de Varnhagen suggests “Why not suppose that this +last name, Gabriel Sanxis, which Cosco thought it necessary to announce, +was the result of his own verifications? He would inquire in Rome of the +Catholic delegates the name of the Escribano de Racion, and they would +give him that of the Treasurer General.” But this is inventing _one +surmise_ to fortify _another_, whereas Senhor de Varnhagen’s own zealous +research had provided evidence to prove a contrary _fact_. The Marquis +d’Adda has kindly sent me a photo-lithograph of a fragment of an Italian +version of this letter, of which His Excellency Senhor de Varnhagen had +found the title in the catalogue of the Ambrosian Library. This fragment +distinctly states it to have been a copy of one “sent by the Grand +Treasurer to his brother, Joane Sanxis.” + +Thus, beyond all question, it is proved that Columbus addressed these +two several letters to these two different persons, from one of which +the Spanish text was printed, and from the other the Latin translation +was made and subsequently printed. And having reached this point, we +see clearly that my suggestion of Columbus having altered the date of +4th March to 14th _must_ have been correct; and, furthermore, that he +copied the date of “14th,” on whichever of these two letters was written +last, because, while it stands March 14th _in totidem verbis_ in one, +it is rendered “pridie idus Martii” (which means the same thing) in the +translation from the other. We see in this date “Ulisbone, pridie idus +Martii,” a proof that the copy from which the Latin was made, consisted, +like the original of the Ambrosian Spanish text, of a complete letter +with the “nema” added, because the place Lisbon is derived from the +language at the beginning of the nema, and the date from Columbus’s +alteration at the end. Although the printer, Plannck, inserted nothing +of the “nema” beyond the said place and date, which he placed at the +end of the body of the letter in lieu of February 15th, we have a clear +proof that De Cosco had really translated the letter and nema as they +stand in the Spanish, for when we come to look into Dati’s poem, which +he distinctly states to be translated from the Latin, we find _the +date of February 15th retained, but no allusion to the contents of the +nema, which, being detached, had evidently not reached his hands_. This +fact, and others observable in his text, especially when examined in +combination with the Italian, which also came from the Sanchez original, +show that Dati worked from Cosco’s manuscript translation. As to whether +of the two printed texts, the Ambrosian Spanish or Plannck’s Latin, +can claim priority, we have no present means of deciding, but that the +preference is due to the Spanish under critical correction is manifest, +since it has been exposed to modifications from a compositor only, while +the Latin has passed through the two ordeals of a translation and a +compositor’s alterations. For this reason I have adopted the Spanish +in my text, observing that it replaces the very worst Latin text which +I could have adopted, viz., that taken by Navarrete from the _España +Illustrada_. The faults in the Ambrosian text are many and great, and +this has led Señor de Gayangos to suggest that it was printed, not in +Spain, but in Portugal, probably Lisbon. An opinion from one so eminent +has great weight, but while yielding to none in sincere respect for +the judgment of my distinguished friend, I confess I think that the +circumstances of the letter point, as Senhor de Varnhagen has stated, +to Barcelona for the place of printing. Mr. Winter Jones, the Principal +Librarian of the British Museum, and late Keeper of the Department of +Printed Books, whose bibliographical knowledge is so well known, tells +us that he recollects having seen the initial letter S, which commences +the Ambrosian text, but, in spite of great research, I have failed to +find it or the corresponding type in any work in our vast library. It +is here well to remark that no kind of _fac-simile_ is so baulking to +bibliographic comparison as the photographic. The respective sizes of +the letters are altered, and the outline is rendered broken and rotten. +A _fac-simile_ of this same letter, done by the hand, was published in +Milan in 1863, in the sixteenth volume of the _Biblioteca Rara_ of G. +Daelli, and gives the type a far firmer appearance than that in the +photograph. It is obvious that an opportunity is afforded of correcting +the mistakes in the Ambrosian text from the other texts which we possess. +This has been done with great skill and judgment by Senhor de Varnhagen +by collation with the Simancas, the Valencia, and the Latin texts; to +these aids I have added the Italian poem of Giuliano Dati, and the +Italian fragment, for which I have been indebted to the kindness of the +Marquis d’Adda. + +We possess no detailed description of the second voyage of Columbus from +his own hand. That which is here printed is the translation of a letter +addressed to the Chapter of Seville by Dr. Chanca, a native of that city, +who was physician to the fleet in this voyage, and was an eye-witness of +the events that he related. For this reason it is preferred to two other +accounts in Latin which are in existence, but which have both been made +up from hearsay. One of these occurs in the second book of the _Decades_ +of Peter Martyr of Anghiera, published first at Seville (Hispali) in +1511, and afterwards at Alcala de Henares (Compluti) in 1516, and often +subsequently printed. The other is a compilation by Nicolò Scillacio, +of Messina, who, while studying philosophy at Pavia in 1494 (?), and +living with Giovanni Antonio Biretta, received from Spain, from a certain +nobleman named Guglielmo Coma, a description of the recent discoveries +of Columbus. This, as Mr. Lenox tells us, he translated into Latin, +and inserted such other accounts as were then universally current, but +without changing or adding anything. Mr. James Lenox, of New York, who +is the possessor of one of the only two copies of this work known (the +other being in the possession of the Marquis Trivulzio of Milan), and who +states that it was first published in 1494, or early in 1495, reprinted +it in 1859, with a translation by the Rev. John Mulligan, giving as an +appendix my translation of Doctor Chanca’s letter, as printed in the +first edition of the present work in 1847. It is obvious that this work +of Scillacio’s, which is a pedantic compilation, cannot compare for +authenticity with the account of Dr. Chanca; while the latter contains +more incidents, and is more agreeably written than the narrative of Peter +Martyr. + +This letter by Dr. Chanca was copied by Navarrete (as he himself says at +the end of the letter in his work) from a manuscript in the possession +of the Royal Academy of History at Madrid, written in the middle of the +sixteenth century, and was amongst the collection of papers referring +to the West Indies, collected by Father Antonio de Aspa, a monk of the +order of St. Jerome, of the monastery of the Mejorada, near Olmedo.—This +document was unpublished previous to Navarrete’s compilation. A copy +was taken from the original by Don Manuel Avella, and deposited in +the collection of Don Juan Bautista Muñoz, and from that copy, after +collation with the original manuscript, the transfer was made by +Navarrete into his valuable work. This letter is followed by a Memorial +respecting the second voyage, addressed to the sovereigns by Columbus, +through the intervention of Antonio de Torres, governor of the city +of Isabella. At the close of each chapter or item is affixed their +highness’s reply. The document was taken by Navarrete from the Archives +of Seville. + +The two letters next in order in the present translation, are from the +hand of Columbus himself, and are descriptive of the events of the third +voyage. The first, addressed to the Sovereigns, was taken by Navarrete, +under careful collation by himself and Muñoz, from a manuscript in the +handwriting of the bishop Bartolomé de la Casas, found in the archives +of the duke del Infantado. The second, addressed to the nurse of Prince +John, is taken from a collection of manuscripts, relating to the West +Indies, made by Muñoz, and deposited in the Real Academia de la Historia +at Madrid. The text was collated by Navarrete with a copy inserted in the +Codice Colombo-Americano, said to have been written in the monastery of +Santa Maria de las Cuevas in Seville. + +The letter by Columbus, descriptive of his fourth voyage, was taken by +Navarrete from a manuscript in the king’s private library at Madrid, +written in the handwriting of the middle of the sixteenth century, +and probably the same copy as that which Pinelo, at page 61 of his +_Biblioteca Occidental_, 4to., 1629, describes as having been made by Don +Lorenzo Ramirez de Prado, from an edition in 4to., which does not appear +to be now in existence. It was translated into Italian by Constanzo +Bayuera of Brescia, and published at Venice in 1505, and, on account of +its extreme scarcity, was republished, with some learned comments, by +Morelli, the librarian of St. Mark’s at Venice, in 1810. + +That it had been printed in Spanish is asserted both by Pinelo and by +Fernando Columbus. + +It is presumed that the manuscript from which Navarrete made his copy was +that made by Ramirez de Prado, because it had been removed to the king’s +library, from the Colegio Mayor de Cuenca, in Salamanca, where the papers +of Ramirez had been deposited. + +I must not close this bibliographical notice without tendering my warmest +thanks to my friends, William Brenchley Rye, Esq., the learned Keeper of +the Printed Books in the British Museum; and Robert Edmund Graves, Esq., +one of the most accomplished of his Assistant-Librarians;—to the former +for most kindly making out the foregoing list of incunabula of the first +letter, and the latter for very valuable help in my search for collateral +texts by which to fortify my conclusions in the toilsome examination +which I have here brought to a termination. + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[24] It should be 29th. The mistake is copied from Navarrete. + +[25] In pursuance of his idea that not two, but only one letter, was +despatched to head-quarters, Senhor de Varnhagen has translated the +words of the endorsement “Contenida a otra de Sus Altezas.”—“Contenida +_en_ otra, etc.” and then, reasoning from the impossibility of Columbus +showing such familiarity with the Sovereigns, argues, that the letter +was in fact addressed to them only. With all respect I submit that the +natural rendering is “Contenida la otra de Sus Altezas”; Angl. “Contained +the other of their Highnesses”; or, as it would be clearer in French, “Y +contenue l’autre de Leurs Altesses;” and Santangel appropriately appears +as bearer of the missive to the Sovereigns. + + + + +SELECT LETTERS OF CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS. ETC. + +Transcriber’s Note: In the original, the English text was printed at the +top of each page with the Spanish text below. This is not practical to +reproduce in an e-text, so the English is given first, followed by the +Spanish. + + + + +FIRST VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS.[26] + + +_A Letter sent by Columbus to [Luis de Santangel] Chancellor of the +Exchequer [of Aragon], respecting the Islands found in the Indies, +enclosing another for their Highnesses._ + +SIR,—Believing that you will take pleasure in hearing of the great +success which our Lord has granted me in my voyage, I write you this +letter, whereby you will learn how in thirty-three days’[27] time I +reached the Indies with the fleet which the most illustrious King and +Queen, our Sovereigns, gave to me, where I found very many islands +thickly peopled, of all which I took possession without resistance, +for their Highnesses by proclamation made and with the royal standard +unfurled. To the first island that I found I gave the name of _San +Salvador_,[28] in remembrance of His High Majesty, who hath marvellously +brought all these things to pass; the Indians call it _Guanaham_. To +the second island I gave the name of _Santa-Maria de Concepcion_;[29] +the third I called _Fernandina_;[30] the fourth, _Isabella_;[31] the +fifth, _Juana_;[32] and so to each one I gave a new name. When I reached +_Juana_, I followed its coast to the westward, and found it so large +that I thought it must be the mainland,—the province of _Cathay_; and, +as I found neither towns nor villages on the sea-coast, but only a few +hamlets, with the inhabitants, of which I could not hold conversation, +because they all immediately fled, I kept on the same route, thinking +that I could not fail to light upon some large cities and towns. At +length, after the proceeding of many leagues, and finding that nothing +new presented itself, and that the coast was leading me northwards +(which I wished to avoid, because winter had already set in, and it +was my intention to move southwards; and because moreover the winds +were contrary), I resolved not to wait for a change in the weather, but +returned to a certain harbour which I had remarked, and from which I sent +two men ashore to ascertain whether there was any king or large cities +in that part. They journeyed for three days and found countless small +hamlets with numberless inhabitants, but with nothing like order; they +therefore returned. In the meantime I had learned from some other Indians +whom I had seized, that this land was certainly an island; accordingly, +I followed the coast eastward for a distance of one hundred and seven +leagues, where it ended in a cape. From this cape, I saw another island +to the eastward at a distance of eighteen leagues from the former, to +which I gave the name of _La Española_.[33] Thither I went, and followed +its northern coast to the eastward (just as I had done with the coast +of _Juana_), one hundred and seventy[34]-eight full leagues due east. +This island, like all the others, is extraordinarily large, and this one +extremely so. In it are many seaports with which none that I know in +Christendom can bear comparison, so good and capacious that it is wonder +to see. The lands are high, and there are many very lofty mountains with +which the island of _Cetefrey_ cannot be compared. They are all most +beautiful, of a thousand different shapes, accessible, and covered with +trees of a thousand kinds of such great height that they seemed to reach +the skies. I am told that the trees never lose their foliage, and I can +well understand it, for I observed that they were as green and luxuriant +as in Spain in the month of May. Some were in bloom, others bearing +fruit, and others otherwise according to their nature. The nightingale +was singing as well as other birds of a thousand different kinds; and +that, in November, the month in which I myself was roaming amongst them. +There are palm-trees of six or eight kinds, wonderful in their beautiful +variety; but this is the case with all the other trees and fruits and +grasses; trees, plants, or fruits filled us with admiration. It contains +extraordinary pine groves, and very extensive plains. There is also +honey, a great variety of birds, and many different kind of fruits. In +the interior there are many mines of metals and a population innumerable. +_Española_ is a wonder. Its mountains and plains, and meadows, and +fields, are so beautiful and rich for planting and sowing, and rearing +cattle of all kinds, and for building towns and villages. The harbours +on the coast, and the number and size and wholesomeness of the rivers, +most of them bearing gold, surpass anything that would be believed by one +who had not seen them. There is a great difference between the trees, +fruits, and plants of this island and those of _Juana_. In this island +there are many spices and extensive mines of gold and other metals. The +inhabitants of this and of all the other islands I have found or gained +intelligence of, both men and women, go as naked as they were born, with +the exception that some of the women cover one part only with a single +leaf of grass or with a piece of cotton, made for that purpose. They have +neither iron, nor steel, nor arms, nor are they competent to use them, +not that they are not well-formed and of handsome stature, but because +they are timid to a surprising degree. Their only arms are reeds cut in +the seeding time,[35] to which they fasten small sharpened sticks, and +even these they dare not use; for on several occasions it has happened +that I have sent ashore two or three men to some village to hold a +parley, and the people have come out in countless numbers, but, as soon +as they saw our men approach, would flee with such precipitation that +a father would not even stop to protect his son; and this not because +any harm had been done to any of them, for, from the first, wherever I +went and got speech with them, I gave them of all that I had, such as +cloth and many other things, without receiving anything in return, but +they are, as I have described, incurably timid. It is true that when +they are reassured and have thrown off this fear, they are guileless, +and so liberal of all they have that no one would believe it who had not +seen it. They never refuse anything that they possess when it is asked +of them; on the contrary, they offer it themselves, and they exhibit +so much loving kindness that they would even give their hearts; and, +whether it be something of value or of little worth that is offered +to them, they are satisfied. I forbade that worthless things, such as +pieces of broken porringers and broken glass, and ends of straps, should +be given to them; although, when they succeeded in obtaining them, they +thought they possessed the finest jewel in the world. It was ascertained +that a sailor received for a leather strap a piece of gold weighing two +_castellanos_[36] and a half, and others received for other objects of +far less value, much more. For new _blancas_[37] they would give all that +they had, whether it was two or three _castellanos_ in gold or one or +two arrobas[38] of spun cotton. They took even bits of the broken hoops +of the wine barrels, and gave, like fools, all that they possessed in +exchange, insomuch that I thought it was wrong, and forbade it. I gave +away a thousand good and pretty articles which I had brought with me +in order to win their affection; and that they might be led to become +Christians, and be well inclined to love and serve their Highnesses +and the whole Spanish nation, and that they might aid us by giving us +things of which we stand in need, but which they possess in abundance. +They are not acquainted with any kind of worship, and are not idolaters; +but believe that all power and, indeed, all good things are in heaven; +and they are firmly convinced that I, with my vessels and crews, came +from heaven, and with this belief received me at every place at which I +touched, after they had overcome their apprehension. And this does not +spring from ignorance, for they are very intelligent, and navigate all +these seas, and relate everything to us, so that it is astonishing what +a good account they are able to give of everything; but they have never +seen men with clothes on, nor vessels like ours. On my reaching the +Indies, I took by force, in the first island that I discovered, some of +these natives, that they might learn our language and give me information +in regard to what existed in these parts; and it so happened that they +soon understood us and we them, either by words or signs, and they have +been very serviceable to us. They are still with me, and, from repeated +conversations that I have had with them, I find that they still believe +that I come from heaven. And they were the first to say this wherever +I went, and the others ran from house to house and to the neighbouring +villages, crying with a loud voice: “Come, come, and see the people from +heaven!” And thus they all, men as well as women, after their minds were +at rest about us, came, both large and small, and brought us something +to eat and drink, which they gave us with extraordinary kindness. They +have in all these islands very many canoes like our row-boats: some +larger, some smaller, but most of them larger than a barge of eighteen +seats. They are not so wide, because they are made of one single piece +of timber, but a barge could not keep up with them in rowing, because +they go with incredible speed, and with these canoes they navigate among +these islands, which are innumerable, and carry on their traffic. I have +seen in some of these canoes seventy and eighty men, each with his oar. +In all these islands I did not notice much difference in the appearance +of the inhabitants, nor in their manners nor language, except that they +all understand each other, which is very singular, and leads me to hope +that their Highnesses will take means for their conversion to our holy +faith, towards which they are very well disposed. I have already said +how I had gone one hundred and seven leagues in following the sea-coast +of _Juana_ in a straight line from west to east: and from that survey I +can state that the island is larger than England and Scotland together, +because, beyond these one hundred and seven leagues, there lie to the +west two provinces which I have not yet visited, one of which is called +_Avan_, where the people are born with a tail. These two provinces cannot +be less in length than from fifty to sixty leagues, from what can be +learned from the Indians that I have with me, and who are acquainted with +all these islands. The other, _Española_, has a greater circumference +than all Spain, from Catalonia by the sea-coast to Fuenterabia in Biscay, +since on one of its four sides I made one hundred and eighty-eight great +leagues in a straight line from west to east. This is something to covet, +and when found not to be lost sight of. Although I have taken possession +of all these islands in the name of their Highnesses, and they are all +more abundant in wealth than I am able to express; and although I hold +them all for their Highnesses, so that they can dispose of them quite +as absolutely as they can of the kingdoms of Castile, yet there was one +large town in _Española_ of which especially I took possession, situated +in a locality well adapted for the working of the gold mines, and for +all kinds of commerce, either with the main land on this side, or with +that beyond which is the land of the great Khan, with which there will be +vast commerce and great profit. To that city I gave the name of _Villa de +Navidad_, and fortified it with a fortress, which by this time will be +quite completed, and I have left in it a sufficient number of men with +arms,[39] artillery, and provisions for more than a year, a barge, and a +sailing master skilful in the arts necessary for building others. I have +also established the greatest friendship with the king of that country, +so much so that he took pride in calling me his brother, and treating +me as such. Even should these people change their intentions towards us +and become hostile, they do not know what arms are, but, as I have said, +go naked, and are the most timid people in the world; so that the men I +have left could, alone, destroy the whole country, and this island has +no danger for them, if they only know how to conduct themselves. In all +those islands it seems to me that the men are content with one wife, +except their chief or king, to whom they give twenty. The women seem to +me to work more than the men. I have not been able to learn whether they +have any property of their own. It seemed to me that what one possessed +belonged to all, especially in the matter of eatables. I have not found +in those islands any monsters, as many imagined; but, on the contrary, +the whole race is very well-formed, nor are they black, as in Guinea, +but their hair is flowing, for they do not dwell in that part where the +force of the sun’s rays is too powerful. It is true that the sun has very +great power there, for the country is distant only twenty-six degrees +from the equinoctial line. In the islands where there are high mountains, +the cold this winter was very great, but they endure it, not only from +being habituated to it, but by eating meat with a variety of excessively +hot spices. As to savages, I did not even hear of any, except at an +island which lies the second in one’s way in coming to the Indies.[40] +It is inhabited by a race which is regarded throughout these islands +as extremely ferocious, and eaters of human flesh. These possess many +canoes, in which they visit all the Indian islands, and rob and plunder +whatever they can. They are no worse formed than the rest, except that +they are in the habit of wearing their hair long, like women, and use +bows and arrows made of reeds, with a small stick at the end, for want +of iron, which they do not possess. They are ferocious amongst these +exceedingly timid people; but I think no more of them than of the rest. +These are they which have intercourse with the women of Matenino,[41] +the first island one comes to on the way from Spain to the Indies, and +in which there are no men. These women employ themselves in no labour +suitable to their sex; but use bows and arrows made of reeds like those +above described, and arm and cover themselves with plates of copper, of +which metal they have a great quantity. They assure me that there is +another island larger than _Española_, in which the inhabitants have no +hair. It is extremely rich in gold; and I bring with me Indians taken +from these different islands, who will testify to all these things. +Finally, and speaking only of what has taken place in this voyage, which +has been so hasty, their Highnesses may see that I shall give them all +the gold they require, if they will give me but a very little assistance; +spices also, and cotton, as much as their Highnesses shall command to +be shipped; and mastic, hitherto found only in Greece, in the island of +Chios, and which the Signoria[42] sells at its own price, as much as +their Highnesses shall command to be shipped; lign aloes, as much as +their Highnesses shall command to be shipped; slaves, as many of these +idolators as their Highnesses shall command to be shipped. I think also +I have found rhubarb and cinnamon, and I shall find a thousand other +valuable things by means of the men that I have left behind me, for I +tarried at no point so long as the wind allowed me to proceed, except +in the town of _Navidad_, where I took the necessary precautions for the +security and settlement of the men I left there. Much more I would have +done if my vessels had been in as good a condition as by rights they +ought to have been. This is much, and praised be the eternal God, our +Lord, who gives to all those who walk in his ways victory over things +which seem impossible; of which this is signally one, for, although +others may have spoken or written concerning these countries, it was +all mere conjecture, as no one could say that he had seen them—it +amounting only to this, that those who heard listened the more, and +regarded the matter rather as a fable than anything else. But our +Redeemer hath granted this victory to our illustrious King and Queen and +their kingdoms, which have acquired great fame by an event of such high +importance, in which all Christendom ought to rejoice, and which it ought +to celebrate with great festivals and the offering of solemn thanks to +the Holy Trinity with many solemn prayers, both for the great exaltation +which may accrue to them in turning so many nations to our holy faith, +and also for the temporal benefits which will bring great refreshment and +gain, not only to Spain, but to all Christians. This, thus briefly, in +accordance with the events. + +Done on board the caravel, off the Canary Islands, on the fifteenth of +February, fourteen hundred and ninety-three. + +At your orders. + + THE ADMIRAL. + +After this letter was written, as I was in the sea of Castile, there +arose a south-west wind, which compelled me to lighten my vessels and run +this day into this port of Lisbon, an event which I consider the most +marvellous thing in the world, and whence I resolved to write to their +Highnesses. In all the Indies I have always found the weather like that +in the month of May. I reached them in thirty-three days, and returned in +twenty-eight, with the exception that these storms detained me fourteen +days knocking about in this sea. All seamen say that they have never seen +such a severe winter nor so many vessels lost. + +Done on the fourteenth day of March. + + +_Esta Carta embió Colon al Escrivano de Racion de las Islas halladas en +las Indias. Contenida la otra de Sus Altezas._ + +Señor, por que se que aureis[43] plazer de la grand victoria que nuestro +señor me ha dado en mi vyaie, vos escriuo esta por la qual sabreys commo +en xxxiij dias pase a las jndias[44] con la armada que los illustrissimos +Rey et reyna, nuestros señores, me dieron, donde yo falle muy muchas +Islas pobladas con gente syn numero. Y dellas todas he tomado posession +por sus altezas con pregon y vandera real estendida, y non me fue +contradicho. A la primera que yo falle puse nombre Sant Saluador, a +comemoracion de Su Alta Magestad, el qual marauillosamente todo esto +andado;[45] los jndios la llaman Guanaham. A la segunda puse nombre +la ylsa de santa Maria de Concepcion. A la tercera Ferrandina. A la +quarta la Ysabella. A la quinta la isla Juana, et asy a cada vna nombre +nueuo. Quando yo llegue a la Juana segui yo la costa della al poniente +y la falle tan grande que pense que seria tierra firma, la prouincia +de Catayo, y como no falle asi[46] villas y lugares en la costa de la +mar, salvo pequeñas poblaciones, conla gente de las quales non podia +hauer fabla, por que luego fuyan todos, andaua yo adelante por el dicho +camino, pensando de no errar grandes Ciudades o villas, y al cabo de +muchas leguas visto que no hauia innovacion y que la costa me leuaua al +setentrion, de adonde mi voluntad era contraria, por que el yuierno era +ya encarnado,[47] yo tenia proposito de hazer del[48] al austro y tanbien +el viento me dio adelante, determine de no aguardar otro tiempo, y bolui +atras fasta un señalado puerto da donde enbie dos hombres por la tierra +para saber si auia rey o grandes ciudades. Andouieron tres iornadas y +hallaron infinitas poblaciones pequeñas y gente sin numero, mas no cosa +de regimiento, por lo qual se boluieron. Yo entendia harta de otros +jndios que ya tenia tomados commo continuamente esta tierra era isla, et +asi segui la costa della al oriente ciento y siete leguas faste donde +fazia fin: del qual cabo vi[49] otra isla al oriente, distincta[50] de +esta diez o ocho leguas, a la qual luego puse nombre la Spañola, y fui +alli y segui la parte del setentrion asi commo de la Juana al oriente, +clxxviij[51] grandes leguas[52] por linia recta del oriente asi commo +de la Juana, la qual y todas las otras son fortissimas[53] en demasiado +grado, y esta en estremo; en ella ay muchos puertos enla costa dela +mar, sin comparacion de otros que yo sepa en christianos, y sartos, y +buenos, y grandes, que es marauilla. Las tierras della son altas y en +ella muy muchas sierras y montañas altissimas sin comparacion de ysla de +centre.[54] Son todas fermossimas de mill. fechuras y todas andabiles y +llenas de arboles de mil maneras y altas y pareçen que llegan al cielo; +y tengo por dicho que jamas pierden la foia, segun lo puede comprehender +que los vi tan verdes y tan hermosos commo son por Mayo en Spaña, y +dellos stavan floridos, dellos con fruto, y dellos en otro termino segun +es su calidad; y cantaua el ruiseñol[55] y otros paxaricos[56] de mil +maneras en el mes de nouienbre por alli donde yo andaua. Ay palmas de +seys[57] o de ocho maneras, que es admiracion verlas por la disformidad +fermosa dellas; mas asi commo los otros arboles y frutos et yeruas. En +ella ay pinares a marauilla, e ay canpiñas grandissimas et ay mjel, y de +muchas maneras, de aues y frutas muy diversas. En las tierras ay muchas +minas de metales et ay gente inestimable numero. La spañola es marauilla; +las sierras y las montañas y las uegas y las campiñas y las tierras +tan fermosas y gruesas para plantar et senbrar, para criar ganados de +todas suertes para hedificios de villas y lugares. Los puertos de la +mar aqui no hauria creancia sin vista, et delos rios muchos y grandes y +buenas aguas, los mas delos quales traen oro. En los arboles et frutos +et yeruas ay grandes diferencias de aquellas de la Juana. En esta ay +muchas specierias[58] y grandes minas de oro y d’otros metales. La gente +desta jsla et de todas las otras que he fallado y hauido,[59] in aya +hauido noticia, andan todos desnudos, hombres et mugeres, asi commo sus +madres los paren, avnque algunas mugeres se cobijan vn solo lugar con +vna sola foia de yerua o vna cosa[60] de algodon que para ellos fazen. +Ellos no tienen fierro ni azero ni armas, ni son para ello; no porque +no sea gente bien dispuesta et de fermosa estatura, saluo que son muy +temerosos a marauilla. No tienen otras armas saluo las armas de las +cañas, quando estan con la simiente, a la qual ponen al cabo vn palillo +agudo, et no osan usar de aquellas, que muchas vezes me ha acaescido +enbiar a tierra dos o tres honbres alguna villa para hauer fabla, y +salir a ellos dellos sin numero, et despues que los veyan llegar, fuyan +a no aguardar padre a hijo, y esto no porque a ninguno se aya fecho mal; +antes a toda cabo a donde yo ay estado et podido auer fabla, les he dado +de todo lo que tenia, asi paño commo otras cosas muchas, sin recebir +por ello cosa alguna; mas son asi temerosos sin remedio. Verdad es que +despues que aseguran y pierden esta miedo, ellos son tanto sin engaño y +tan liberales delo que tienen que no lo creerian sino el que lo viese. +Ellos de cosa que tengan pidiendo gela, iamas dizen de no; antes conuidan +la persona con ello, y muestran tanto amor que darian los coraçones, et +quieren sea cosa de valor quien sea de poco precio luego por qualquiera +cosica de qualquiera manera que sea que sele de por ello, sean contentos. +Yo defendi que no se les diesen cosas tan siuiles commo pedaços de +escudillas rotas, y pedaços de vidrio roto, y cabos de agugetas: aunque +quando ellos esto podran llegar,[61] los parescia auer la mejor joya del +mundo: que se açerto auer vn marinero por vna agugeta de oro de peso de +dos castellanos y medio, y otros de otras cosas que muy menos valian, +mucho mas. Ya por blancas nuevas dauan por ellas todo quanto tenian +auer que[62] fuesen dos ni tres castellanos de oro o vna arroua[63] o +dos de algodon fylado. Fasta los pedaços delos arcos rotos de las pipas +tomauan y dauan lo que tenian commo bestias, asy que me parescia mal. Yo +lo defendi y daua yo graciosas mil cosas buenas que yo leuaua, por que +tomen amor y allenda desto se faran[64] cristianos, que se jnclinan al +amor y servicio de sus altezas y de toda la nacion castellana, y procuran +de aiuntar[65] de nos dar de las cosas que tienen en abundancia que nos +son neçessarias. Y no conocian ninguna seta nin ydolatria, saluo que +todos creen que las fuerças y el bien es en el cielo. Y creyan muy firme +que yo con estos nauios y gente venia del cielo, y en tal catamiento me +recibian[66] en todo cabo despues de auer perdido el miedo. Y esto no +precede porque sean ygnorantes, saluo de muy sotil ingenio y hombres que +nauegan todas aquellas mares, que es marauilla la buena cuenta quellos +dan de todo, salvo porque nunca vieron gente vestida ny semejantes +nauios. Y luego que legue a las jndias en la primera ysla que halle, tome +por fuerça algunos dellos para que deprendiesen y me diesen notia delo +que auia en aquellas partes, et asy fue que luego entendiron, y nos a +ellos, quando por lengua o señas, y estos han aprouechado mucho. Oy en +dia los traygo que siempre estan de proposito que vengo del cielo por +mucha conuersacion que ayan auido conmigo, y estos eran los primeros a +pronunciarlo adonde yo llegaua; y los otros andauan corriendo de casa +en casa, y alas villas çercenas con bozes altas, venid, venid a ver la +gente del cielo. Asi todos, hombres commo mugeres, despues de auer el +coraçon seguro de nos, venian[67] que no quedauan grande ni pequeño, y +todos trayan algo de comer y de beuer que dauan con un amor marauilloso. +Ellos tienen todas las yslas muy muchas canoas a manera de fustes[68] +de remo, dellas maioras, dellas menores y algunas y muchas son mayoras +que vna fusta de diez et ocho bancos. No son tan anchas porque son de +vn solo madero, mas vna fusta no terna con ellas al remo porque van que +no es cosa de creer, y con estas nauegan todas aquellas yslas que son +jnnumerables, y traten sus mercaderias. Algunas destas canoas he visto +con. lxx. y lxxx. honbres en ella, y cada vno con su remo. En todas +estas yslas no vide mucha diuersidad de la fechura dela gente ni en las +costumbres ni en la lengua, saluo que todos se entienden, que es cosa +muy singular, para lo que espero que determinaren sus altezas para la +conversacion[69] dellos de nuestra santa fe a la qual son muy dispuestos. +Ya dixe commo yo hauia andada c. vij. leguas por la costa de la mar por +la derecha liña de ocidente a oriente por la ysla Juana, segun el qual +camino puedo desir que esta isla es mayor que inglaterra y escosia juntas +por que allen de destas c. vij. leguas, me queda de la parte de poniente +dos prouincias que yo no he andado; la vna de las quales llaman Auan,[70] +adonde nascen la gente con cola, las quales prouincias no pueden tener en +longura menos de l. o lx. leguas, segund puede[71] entender destos jndios +que yo tengo, los quales saben todas las yslas. Esta otra española en +cierco tiene mas que la españa toda desde colunya[72] por costa de mar +fasta fuente rauia en vi scaya pues en vna quadra anduue clxxxviij.[73] +grandes leguas por recta linia de occidente a oriente. Esta es para +desear, et vista, es para nunca dexar; enla qual puesto que de todas +tenga tomada possession por sus altezas, y todas sean mas abastadas +delo que yo se y puedo dezir, y todas las tengo por de sus altezas qual +dellas pueden disponer commo y tan complidamente commo delos Reynos de +castilla. En esta española en el lugar[74] mas conuenible y meyor comarca +para las minas del oro y de todo trato, asi dela tierra firme de aqua +commo de aquella de alla del grand can, adonde aura[75] grand trato et +grand ganança, he tomado possession de vna villa grande, ala qual puse +nombre la villa de Nauidad. Y en ella he fecho fuerça y fortaleza que +ya a estas horas estara del todo acabada, y he dexada en ella gente que +abasta para semejante fecho, con armas y artellarias et vituallas por +mas de un año; y fusta y maestro de la mar en todas artes para fazer +otras, y grande amistad con el rey de aquella tierra en tanto grado que +se preciaua de me llamar y tener por hermano; y aunque le mudasse[76] la +voluntad a offender esta gente, el ni los suyos no saben que sean armas +y andan desnudos commo ya he dicho: son los mas temerosos que ay en el +mundo, asi que solamente la gente que alla queda, es para destroir toda +aquella tierra, y es ysla syn peligro de sus personas sabiendo se regir. +En todas estas yslas me parece que todos los honbres sean contentos con +vna muger, y a su mayoral o rey dan fasta veynte. Las mugeres me parece +que trabaian mas que los honbres, ni he podido entender si tenien bienes +propios, que me parecio ver que aquello que vno tenia todos hazian +parte, en especial de las cosas comederas. En estas yslas fasta aqui no +he hallado honbres mostrudos, commo muchos pensauan; mas antes es toda +gente de muy lindo acatamiento, ny son negros commo en guinea, saluo con +sus cabellos corredios,[77] y no se crian adonde ay jnpeto[78] demasiado +delos rayos solares. Es verdad quel sol tiene alli grande fuerça, puesto +que es didistinta[79] dela linia inquinocial xxvi. grandes. En estas +islas adonde ay montañas, ay tenida[80] a fuerça el frio este yuierno, +mas ellos lo sufren por la costumbre que con la ayuda delas viandas +que comen con[81] especias muchas y muy calientes en demasia. Asy que +mostruos no he hallado jnnoticia,[82] saluo de una ysla[83] que es aqui +en la segunda a la entrada de las jndias, que es poblada de vna gente +que tienen en todas las yslas por muy ferozes, los quales comen carne +humana.[84] Estos tienen muchas canaos, con las quales corren todas las +yslas de jndia: roban y toman quanto pueden. Ellos no son mas difformes +que los otros, saluo que tienen en costumbre de traer los cabellos largos +commo mugeres, y vsan arcos y flechas de las mismas armas de cañas con +vn palillo al cabo, por defecto de fierro, que no tienen. Son feroses +entre estos otros pueblos que son en demasiado grado couardes, mas yo no +lo tengo a nada mas que a los otros. Estos son aquellos que tratan con +las mugeres de matremonio,[85] que es la primera ysla partiendo despaña +para las jndias que se falla, enla qual no ay honbre ninguno. Ellas no +vsan exercicio femenil, saluo arcos y flechas commo los sobredichos de +cañas, y se arman y cobijan con lamines de arambre, de que tienen mucho. +Otra ysla me seguran mayor que la española, en que las personas no tienen +ningun cabello. En esta ay oro sin cuenta, y desta y de las otras traigo +comigo jndios para testimonio. Y conclusion a fablar desto solamente que +sea fecho este viage, que fue si de corrida que pueden ver sus altezas +que yo les dare oro quanto ovieren[86] menester con muy poquita ajuda +que sus altezas me daran, agora specieria y algodon quanto sus altezas +mandaran cargar, y almastica[87] quanta mandaran cargar, et dela qual +fasta oy no se ha fallado, saluo en grecia enla ysla de xio, y el señorio +la vende commo quiere, y liguñaloe quanto mandaran cargar, y esclavos +quanto mandaran cargar et seran delos ydolatres.[88] Y creo auer hallado +ruybaruo y canela y otras mil cosas de sustancia fallare, que auran +fallado la gente que yo alla dexo, por que yo no me he detenido ningun +cabo, en quanto el viento me aya dado lugar de nauegar, solamente en la +villa de Nauidad en quanto dexe asegurado et bien asentado; y ala verdad +mucho mas ficiera si los nauios me siruieran commo razon demandaua. Esto +es harto[89] y eterno dios nuestro señor el qual da a todos aquellos +que andan su camino victoria de cosas que parecen inposibles: y esta +señaladamente fue la vna; porque avnque destas tierras ayan fallado +o escripto,[90] todo va por conlectura sin allegar devista, saluo +comprendiendo a tanto que los oyentes los mas escuchauan y juzgauan mas +por fabla que por poca[91] cosa dello. + +Asy que pues nuestro redentor dio victoria a nuestros illustrissimos +rey et reyna y a sus reynos famosos de tan alta cosa, adonde toda la +christianidad deve tomar alegria y fazer grandes fiestas, y dar gracias +solennes a la santa trinidad con muchas oraciones solennes por el tanto +enxalçamiento que auran, en tornandose[92] tantos pueblosa nuestra santa +fe, y despues por los bienes temporales; que no solamente a la españa +mas a todos los cristianos ternan aqui refrigerio y ganancia. Esto segun +el fecho asi en breue[93]. Fecha enla calauera[94] sobre las yslas de +canaria[95] a xv.[96] de febrero, Mill. y quatrocientos y nouenta y tres +años. + +Fara[97] lo que mandereys[98]. + + EL ALMIRANTE. + +Nyma[99] que venia dentro en la carta. + +Despues desta escripto:[100] y estando en mar de Castilla salyo tanto +viento conmigo sul y sueste que me ha fecho descargar los nauios por +cori[101] aqui en esto puerto de lysbona oy, que fue la mayor marauilla +del mundo. Adonde acorde escriuir a sus altezas. En todas las yndias +he siempre hallado los tenporales[102] commo en mayo. Adonde yo fuy en +xxxiij.[103] dias y bolui en xxviij.[104] salvo questas tormentas me han +detenido xiiij.[105] dias corriendo por esta mar. Dizen aqua todos los +honbres dela mar que jamas ouo tan mal yuierno, no ni tantas perdidas de +naues.[106] Fecha a. xiiij dias de marco. + +Esta carta embio Colon al escrivano Deracion delas Islas halladas en las +Indias. Contenida a otra[107] de sus Altezas. + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[26] The original spelling of the Ambrosian text, with all its faults, +is here preserved, with the exception of the separation of words fused +together, and the addition of punctuation and capitals for the sake of +clearness. Suggested corrections from the other texts will be placed at +the foot of each page, V. standing for Valencian text; S. for Simancas +text; I. for Italian text; L. for Latin; D. for Dati. Such misspellings +as a Spanish scholar will readily recognize as the blunders of the +Spanish printer I have not thought it necessary to notice. + +[27] From the 8th of September when Columbus sailed from the Canaries, to +the 11th of October when he first saw land, was thirty-three days. + +[28] Watling’s Island. + +[29] Long Island. + +[30] Great Exuma. + +[31] Saometo or Crooked Island. + +[32] Cuba. + +[33] Hispaniola or San Domingo. + +[34] It should be 188 leagues. See Bibliographical Notice. + +[35] These canes are probably the flowering stems of large grasses, +similar to the bamboo or to the arundinaria used by the natives of Guiana +for blowing arrows. + +[36] An old Spanish coin, equal to the fiftieth part of a mark of gold. + +[37] Small copper coins, equal to about the quarter of a farthing. + +[38] One _arroba_ weighs twenty-five pounds. + +[39] There appears to be a doubt as to the exact number of men left +by Columbus at Española, different accounts variously giving it as +thirty-seven, thirty-eight, thirty-nine, and forty. There is, however, a +list of their names included in one of the diplomatic documents printed +in Navarrete’s work, which makes the number amount to forty, independent +of the governor Diego de Arana, and his two lieutenants Pedro Gutierrez +and Rodrigo de Escobedo. All these men were Spaniards, with the exception +of two; one an Irishman named William Ires, a native of Galway, and one +an Englishman, whose name was given as Tallarte de Lajes, but whose +native designation it is difficult to guess at. The document in question, +was a proclamation to the effect that the heirs of those men should, +on presenting at the office of public business at Seville, sufficient +proof of their being the next of kin, receive payment in conformity with +the royal order to that purpose, issued at Burgos, on the twentieth of +December, 1507. + +[40] Dominica. + +[41] Martinique. + +[42] Of Genoa. The island of Chios belonged to the Genoese Republic from +1346 to 1566. + +[43] Habreis. + +[44] V. “pasé de las Islas de Canaria a las Indias.” + +[45] V. and S. “ha dado.” + +[46] V. “ahi.” + +[47] So in all the texts. Senhor de Varnhagen suggests “entrado” for +“encarnado.” + +[48] So in all the texts. Senhor de Varnhagen suggests “hacerme.” + +[49] V. and S. “habia otra isla;” L. “aliam insulam prospexi.” + +[50] V. and S. “distante.” + +[51] V. “ciento e ochenta y ocho.” S. “ciento e setenta y +ocho.” I. “cento otanta otto leghe.” L. “miliaria dlxiiii.” D. +“cinquecensessantaquattro miglia.” + +[52] V. “leguas la cual y todas.” S. “leguas por via reta del oriente asi +como de la Juana, la cual y todos.” I. “leghe por la dritta linea del +oriente cosi como de la Zouana.” + +[53] V. “fertilisimas.” S. “fortisimas.” I. “feralissime.” + +[54] V. “Teneryfe.” S. “Cetrefrey.” I. “Santaffer.” L. omitted. + +[55] V. and S. “ruiseñor.” + +[56] V. and S. “pajaros.” + +[57] V. and S. “seis.” I. “setto.” L. “septem.” D. “septe.” + +[58] V. and S. “especies.” + +[59] V. and S. “y ha havido.” I. “ho travado ho inteso.” + +[60] V. “cofia.” S. “cosa.” I. “cosa.” + +[61] V, “llevar.” + +[62] V. and S. “aunque.” + +[63] V. and S. omitted. + +[64] V. “façan.” + +[65] V. and S. “ayudar.” + +[66] V. and S. “reciben.” + +[67] V. and S. “venieron.” + +[68] “fustas.” + +[69] V. and S. “conversion.” L. “conversionem.” + +[70] V. “Nhan.” S. “Cibau.” L. “Anan.” + +[71] V. and S. “puedo.” + +[72] V. “Colibre.” S. “Colunia.” L. “Colonia.” Misread from an abridged +word in the original, which the sense of the passage would make +“Catalonia.” + +[73] V. and S. “ciento treinta y ocho.” L. “miliaria dxl.” D. +“cinquecensessantoquattro miglia.” + +[74] V. and S. “en lugar.” + +[75] V. and S. “habra.” + +[76] V. and S. “mudasen.” + +[77] V. and S. “correndios.” + +[78] V. “effeto.” S. “espeto.” Navarrete says that in old Spanish +“espeto” meant a “spit.” + +[79] V. and S. “distante.” + +[80] V. and S. “ahi tenia fuerza.” + +[81] V. and S. “como son.” L. “quibus vescuntur.” + +[82] V. and S. “ni noticia.” + +[83] V. “isla de Quarives.” L. “insula Charis nuncupata.” + +[84] V. and S. “viva.” L. “humana.” + +[85] V. “que tomaban las mugeres de Matinino.” S. “que trocaban las +mugeres de matrimonio.” L. “qui coeunt cum quibusdam feminis quæ insulam +Mateunim habitant.” D. “isola decta Matanino.” + +[86] V. and S. “hobieren.” + +[87] V. and S. “almasiga.” + +[88] In the corrupt edition of the Latin translation reprinted +by Navarrete from the _España Illustrada_, this word is rendered +“hydrophilatorum.” + +[89] V. and S. “cierto.” + +[90] V. and S. “fablado otros.” L. “scripserunt vel locuti sunt.” + +[91] V. and S. “otra.” L. “prope videbatur fabula.” + +[92] V. and S. “ayuntandose.” + +[93] V. and S. “esto segundo ha fecho ser muy breve.” L. “hæc ut gesta +sunt sic breviter enarrata.” + +[94] V. and S. “carabela.” + +[95] V. “la isla de Sa. Maria.” + +[96] V. “18.” This latter date is the only one which corresponds with the +fourteen days, mentioned in the postscript, during which Columbus was +detained at sea by the weather previously to his reaching Lisbon on the +4th of March. + +[97] V. “Para.” + +[98] V. “mandaredes.” + +[99] S. “Anima.” V. The entire nema wanting. The same in L. and D. + +[100] S. “escrita.” + +[101] S. “correr.” + +[102] S. “tiempos.” + +[103] S. “noventa y tres.” + +[104] S. “setenta y ocho.” Both are wrong. It should be forty-eight, from +January 16 to March 4. + +[105] S. “trece.” + +[106] S. “los quatro.” Columbus really arrived at Lisbon on the 4th of +March. For an explanation of this discrepancy, see Bibliographical Notice. + +[107] S. “Indias e otra.” + + + + +SECOND VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS. + + +_A Letter addressed to the Chapter of Seville by Dr. Chanca,[108] native +of that city, and physician to the fleet of Columbus, in his second +voyage to the West Indies, describing the principal events which occurred +during that voyage._ + +Most noble sir,—Since the occurrences which I relate in private letters +to other persons, are not of such general interest as those which are +contained in this epistle, I have resolved to give you a distinct +narrative of the events of our voyage, as well as to treat of the other +matters which form the subject of my petition to you. The news I have +to communicate are as follows: The expedition which their Catholic +Majesties sent, by Divine permission, from Spain to the Indies, under +the command of Christopher Columbus, admiral of the ocean, left Cadiz on +the twenty-fifth of September, of the year [109], with wind and weather +favourable for the voyage. This wind lasted two days, during which time +we managed to make nearly fifty leagues. The weather then changing, +we made little or no progress for the next two days; it pleased God, +however, after this, to restore us fine weather, so that in two days more +we reached the Great Canary. Here we put into harbour, which we were +obliged to do, to repair one of the ships which made a great deal of +water; we remained all that day, and on the following set sail again, but +were several times becalmed, so that we were four or five days before we +reached Gomera. We had to remain at Gomera one day to lay in our stores +of meat, wood, and as much water as we could stow, preparatory to the +long voyage which we expected to make without seeing land: thus through +the delay at these two ports, and being calmed the day after leaving +Gomera, we were nineteen or twenty days before we arrived at the Island +of Ferro. After this we had, by the goodness of God, a return of fine +weather, more continuous than any fleet ever enjoyed during so long a +voyage; so that leaving Ferro on the thirteenth of October, within twenty +days we came in sight of land: and we should have seen it in fourteen or +fifteen days, if the ship _Capitana_ had been as good a sailer as the +other vessels; for many times the others had to shorten sail, because +they were leaving us much behind. During all this time we had great +good fortune, for throughout the voyage we encountered no storm, with +the exception of one on St. Simon’s eve, which for four hours put us in +considerable jeopardy. + +On the first Sunday after All Saints, namely, the third of November, +about dawn, a pilot of the ship _Capitana_ cried out “The reward, I see +the land!” + +The joy of the people was so great, that it was wonderful to hear their +cries and exclamations of pleasure; and they had good reason to be +delighted, for they had become so wearied of bad living, and of working +the water out of the ships, that all sighed most anxiously for land. +The pilots of the fleet reckoned on that day, that between leaving Ferro +and first reaching land, we had made eight hundred leagues; others said +seven hundred and eighty (so that the difference was not great), and +three hundred more between Ferro and Cadiz, making in all eleven hundred +leagues; I do not therefore feel as one who had not seen enough of the +water. On the morning of the aforesaid Sunday, we saw lying before us +an island, and soon on the right hand another appeared: the first[110] +was high and mountainous, on the side nearest to us; the other[111] +flat, and very thickly wooded: as soon as it became lighter, other +islands began to appear on both sides; so that on that day, there were +six islands to be seen lying in different directions, and most of them +of considerable size. We directed our course towards that which we had +first seen, and reaching the coast, we proceeded more than a league in +search of a port where we might anchor, but without finding one: all +that part of the island which met our view, appeared mountainous, very +beautiful, and green even up to the water, which was delightful to see, +for at that season there is scarcely any thing green in our own country. +When we found that there was no harbour there,[112] the admiral decided +that we should go to the other island, which appeared on the right, and +which was at four or five leagues distance: one vessel however still +remained on the first island all that day seeking for a harbour, in case +it should be necessary to return thither. At length, having found a good +one, where they saw both people and dwellings, they returned that night +to the fleet, which had put into harbour at the other island,[113] and +there the admiral, accompanied by a great number of men, landed with the +royal banner in his hands, and took formal possession on behalf of their +Majesties. This island was filled with an astonishingly thick growth of +wood; the variety of unknown trees, some bearing fruit and some flowers, +was surprising, and indeed every spot was covered with verdure. We found +there a tree whose leaf had the finest smell of cloves that I have ever +met with; it was like a laurel leaf, but not so large: but I think it +was a species of laurel. There were wild fruits of various kinds, some +of which our men, not very prudently, tasted; and upon only touching +them with their tongues, their countenances became inflamed,[114] and +such great heat and pain followed, that they seemed to be mad, and +were obliged to resort to refrigerants to cure themselves. We found no +signs of any people in this island, and concluded it was uninhabited; +we remained only two hours, for it was very late when we landed, and +on the following morning we left for another very large island,[115] +situated below this at the distance of seven or eight leagues. We +approached it under the side of a great mountain, that seemed almost +to reach the skies, in the middle of which rose a peak higher than all +the rest of the mountain, whence many streams diverged into different +channels, especially towards the part at which we arrived. At three +leagues distance, we could see an immense fall of water, which looked +of the breadth of an ox, and discharged itself from such a height that +it appeared to fall from the sky; it was seen from so great a distance +that it occasioned many wagers to be laid on board the ships, some +maintaining that it was but a series of white rocks, and others that it +was water. When we came nearer to it, it showed itself distinctly, and it +was the most beautiful thing in the world to see from how great a height +and from what a small space so large a fall of water was discharged. As +soon as we neared the island the admiral ordered a light caravel to run +along the coast to search for a harbour; the captain put into land in a +boat, and seeing some houses, leapt on shore and went up to them, the +inhabitants fleeing at sight of our men; he then went into the houses +and there found various household articles that had been left unremoved, +from which he took two parrots, very large and quite different from any +we had before seen; he found a great quantity of cotton, both spun and +prepared for spinning, and articles of food, of all of which he brought +away a portion; besides these, he also brought away four or five bones +of human arms and legs. On seeing these we suspected that we were +amongst the Caribbee islands, whose inhabitants eat human flesh; for the +admiral, guided by the information respecting their situation which he +had received from the Indians of the islands discovered in his former +voyage, had directed his course with a view to their discovery, both +because they were the nearest to Spain, and because this was the direct +track for the island of Española, where he had left some of his people. +Thither, by the goodness of God and the wise management of the admiral, +we came in as straight a track as if we had sailed by a well known and +frequented route. This island is very large, and on the side where we +arrived it seemed to us to be twenty-five leagues in length. We sailed +more than two leagues along the shore in search of a harbour. On the part +towards which we moved appeared very high mountains, and on that which we +left extensive plains; on the sea coast there were a few small villages, +whose inhabitants fled as soon as they saw the sails. At length after +proceeding two leagues we found a port late in the evening. That night +the admiral resolved that some of the men should land at break of day in +order to confer with the natives, and learn what sort of people they +were; although it was suspected, from the appearance of those who had +fled at our approach, that they were naked, like those whom the admiral +had seen in his former voyage. In the morning several detachments under +their respective captains sallied forth; one of them returned at the +dinner hour, with a boy of about fourteen years of age, as it afterwards +appeared, who said that he was one of the prisoners taken by these +people. The others divided themselves, and one party took a little boy, +whom a man was leading by the hand, but who left him and fled; this boy +they sent on board immediately with some of our men; others remained, +and took certain women, natives of the island, together with other women +from among the captives who came of their own accord. One captain of this +last company, not knowing that any intelligence of the people had been +obtained, advanced farther into the island and lost himself, with the +six men who accompanied him: they could not find their way back until +after four days, when they lighted upon the sea shore, and following +the line of coast returned to the fleet.[116] We had already looked +upon them as killed and eaten by the people that are called Caribbees; +for we could not account for their long absence in any other way, since +they had among them some pilots who by their knowledge of the stars +could navigate either to or from Spain, so that we imagined that they +could not lose themselves in so small a space. On this first day of our +landing several men and women came on the beach up to the water’s edge, +and gazed at the ships in astonishment at so novel a sight; and when a +boat pushed on shore in order to speak with them, they cried out “tayno +tayno,” which is as much as to say, “good,” and waited for the landing +of the sailors, standing by the boat in such a manner that they might +escape when they pleased. The result was, that none of the men could be +persuaded to join us, and only two were taken by force, who were secured +and led away. More than twenty of the female captives were taken with +their own consent, and other women natives of the island were surprised +and carried off: several of the boys, who were captives, came to us +fleeing from the natives of the island who had taken them prisoners. +We remained eight days in this port in consequence of the loss of the +aforesaid captain, and went many times on shore, passing amongst the +dwellings and villages which were on the coast; we found a vast number of +human bones and skulls hung up about the houses, like vessels intended +for holding various things. There were very few men to be seen here, and +the women informed us that this was in consequence of ten canoes having +gone to make an attack upon other islands. These islanders appeared to us +to be more civilised than those that we had hitherto seen; for although +all the Indians have houses of straw, yet the houses of these people +are constructed in a much superior fashion, are better stocked with +provisions, and exhibit more evidences of industry, both on the part of +the men and the women. They had a considerable quantity of cotton, both +spun and prepared for spinning, and many cotton sheets, so well woven as +to be no way inferior to those of our country. We inquired of the women, +who were prisoners in the island, what people these islanders were: +they replied that they were Caribbees. As soon as they learned that we +abhorred such people, on account of their evil practice of eating human +flesh, they were much delighted; and, after that, if they brought forward +any woman or man of the Caribbees, they informed us (but secretly), that +they were such, still evincing by their dread of their conquerors, that +they belonged to a vanquished nation, though they knew them all to be in +our power. + +We were enabled to distinguish which of the women were natives, and +which were captives, by the Caribbees wearing on each leg two bands of +woven cotton, the one fastened round the knee, and the other round the +ankle; by this means they make the calves of their legs large, and the +above-mentioned parts very small, which I imagine that they regard as +a matter of prettiness: by this peculiarity we distinguished them. The +habits of these Caribbees are brutal. There are three islands: the one +called Turuqueira; the other, which was the first that we saw, is called +Ceyre;[117] the third is called Ayay: there is a resemblance among the +natives of all these, as if they were of one race, and they do no injury +to each other; but each and all of them wage war against the other +neighbouring islands, and for the purpose of attacking them, make voyages +of a hundred and fifty leagues at sea, with their numerous canoes, which +are a small kind of craft made out of a single trunk of a tree. Their +arms are arrows, in the place of iron weapons, and as they have no iron, +some of them point their arrows with tortoise-shell, and others make +their arrow heads of fish spines, which are naturally barbed like coarse +saws: these prove dangerous weapons to a naked people like the Indians, +and may cause death or severe injury, but to men of our nation they are +not very formidable. In their attacks upon the neighbouring islands, +these people capture as many of the women as they can, especially those +who are young and beautiful, and keep them as concubines; and so great +a number do they carry off, that in fifty houses no men were to be +seen; and out of the number of the captives, more than twenty were +young girls. These women also say that the Caribbees use them with such +cruelty as would scarcely be believed; and that they eat the children +which they bear to them, and only bring up those which they have by their +native wives. Such of their male enemies as they can take alive, they +bring to their houses to make a feast of them, and those who are killed +they devour at once. They say that man’s flesh is so good, that there +is nothing like it in the world; and this is pretty evident, for of the +bones which we found in their houses, they had gnawed everything that +could be gnawed, so that nothing remained of them but what was too tough +to be eaten: in one of the houses we found the neck of a man, undergoing +the process of cooking in a pot. When they take any boys prisoners, they +dismember them, and make use of them until they grow up to manhood, and +then when they wish to make a feast they kill and eat them, for they say +that the flesh of boys and women is not good to eat. Three of these boys +came fleeing to us thus mutilated. + +At the end of four days arrived the captain who had lost himself with +his companions, of whose return we had by this time given up all hope; +for other parties had been twice sent out to seek him, one of which +came back on the same day that he rejoined us, without having gained +any information respecting the wanderers: we rejoiced at their arrival, +regarding it as a new accession to our numbers. The captain and the men +who accompanied him brought back some women and boys, ten in number. +Neither this party, nor those who went out to seek them, had seen any of +the men of the island, which must have arisen either from their having +fled, or possibly from their being but very few men in that locality; +for, as the women informed us, ten canoes had gone away to make an attack +upon the neighbouring islands. The wanderers had returned from the +mountains in such an emaciated condition, that it was distressing to see +them. When we asked them how it was that they lost themselves, they said +that the trees were so thick and close that they could not see the sky. +Some of them who were mariners had climbed the trees to get a sight of +the stars, but could never see them, and if they had not found their way +to the sea coast, it would have been impossible to have returned to the +fleet. We left this island eight days after our arrival.[118] The next +day at noon we saw another island,[119] not very large, at about twelve +leagues distance from the one we were leaving. The greater part of the +first day of our departure we were kept close in to the coast of this +island by a calm, but as the Indian women whom we brought with us said +that it was not inhabited, but had been dispeopled by the Caribbees, we +made no stay in it. On that evening we saw another island:[120] and in +the night finding there were some sand-banks near, we dropped anchor, not +venturing to proceed until the morning. On the morrow another island[121] +appeared, of considerable size, but we touched at none of these because +we were anxious to convey consolation to our people who had been left +in Española; but it did not please God to grant us our desire, as will +hereafter appear. Another day at the dinner hour we arrived at an +island[122] which seemed worth the finding, for judging by the extent +of cultivation in it, it appeared very populous. We went thither and put +into harbour, when the admiral immediately sent on shore a well manned +barge to hold speech with the Indians, in order to ascertain what race +they were, and also because it was necessary to gain some information +respecting our course; although it afterwards plainly appeared that +the admiral, who had never made that passage before, had taken a very +correct route. But as matters of doubt should always be brought to as +great a certainty as possible by inquiry, he wished the natives to be +communicated with, and some of the men who went in the barge landed and +went up to a village, whence the inhabitants had already withdrawn and +hidden themselves. They took in this island five or six women and some +boys, most of whom were captives, like those in the other island; for, +as we learned from the women whom we had brought with us, the natives of +this place also were Caribbees. As this barge was about to return to the +ships with the capture which they had made, a canoe came along the coast +containing four men, two women, and a boy; and when they saw the fleet +they were so stupified with amazement, that for a good hour they remained +motionless at the distance of nearly two gunshots from the ships. In this +position they were seen by those who were in the barge and also by all +the fleet. Meanwhile those in the barge moved towards the canoe, but so +close in shore, that the Indians, in their perplexity and astonishment as +to what all this could mean, never saw them, until they were so near that +escape was impossible; for our men pressed on them so rapidly that they +could not get away, although they made considerable effort to do so. + +When the Caribbees saw that all attempt at flight was useless, they +most courageously took to their bows, both women and men; I say most +courageously, because they were only four men and two women, and our +people were twenty-five in number. Two of our men were wounded by the +Indians, one with two arrow-shots in his breast, and another with one in +his side, and if it had not happened that they carried shields and wooden +bucklers, and that they soon got near them with the barge and upset +their canoe, most of them would have been killed with their arrows. +After their canoe was upset, they remained in the water swimming and +occasionally wading (for there were shallows in that part), still using +their bows as much as they could, so that our men had enough to do to +take them: and after all there was one of them whom they were unable to +secure till he had received a mortal wound with a lance, and whom thus +wounded they took to the ships. The difference between these Caribbees +and the other Indians, with respect to dress, consists in their wearing +their hair very long, while the others have it clipt irregularly and +paint their heads with crosses and a hundred thousand different devices, +each according to his fancy; which they do with sharpened reeds. All +of them, both the Caribbees and the others, are beardless, so that +it is a rare thing to find a man with a beard: the Caribbees whom we +took had their eyes and eyebrows stained, which I imagine they do from +ostentation. It gave them a more formidable appearance. One of these +captives said, that in an island belonging to them called Cayre[123] +(which is the first that we saw, though we did not go to it), there is +a great quantity of gold; and that if we were to take them nails and +tools with which to make their canoes, we might bring away as much gold +as we liked. On the same day we left that island, having been there +no more than six or seven hours; and, steering for another point of +land[124] which appeared to lie in our intended course, we reached it +by night. On the morning of the following day we coasted along it, and +found it to be a large extent of country, but not continuous, for it was +divided into more than forty islets.[125] The land was very high and +most of it barren, an appearance which we have never observed in any of +the islands visited by us before or since: the surface of the ground +seemed to suggest the probability of its containing metals. None of us +went on shore here, but a small latteen caravel went up to one of the +islets and found in it some fishermen’s huts; the Indian women whom we +brought with us said they were not inhabited. We proceeded along the +coast the greater part of that day, and on the evening of the next we +discovered another island called Burenquen,[126] which we judged to be +thirty leagues in length, for we were coasting along it the whole of one +day. This island is very beautiful and apparently fertile: hither the +Caribbees come with the view of subduing the inhabitants, and often carry +away many of the people. These islanders have no boats nor any knowledge +of navigation; but, as our captives inform us, they use bows as well as +the Caribbees, and if by chance when they are attacked they succeed in +taking any of their invaders, they will eat them in like manner as the +Caribbees themselves in the contrary event would devour them. We remained +two days in this island, and a great number of our men went on shore, but +could never get speech of the natives, who had all fled, from fear of +the Caribbees. All the above-mentioned islands were discovered in this +voyage, the admiral having seen nothing of them in his former voyage. +They are all very beautiful and possess a most luxuriant soil, but this +last island appeared to exceed all the others in beauty. Here terminated +the islands, which on the side towards Spain had not been seen before +by the admiral, although we regard it as a matter of certainty that +there is land more than forty leagues beyond the foremost of these newly +discovered islands, on the side nearest to Spain. We believe this to be +the case, because, two days before we saw land, we observed some birds +called rabihorcados (or pelicans), marine birds of prey which do not sit +or sleep upon the water, making circumvolutions in the air at the close +of evening previous to taking their flight towards land for the night. +These birds could not be going to settle at more than twelve or fifteen +leagues distance, because it was late in the evening, and this was on +our right hand on the side towards Spain; from which we all judged that +there was land there still undiscovered; but we did not go in search of +it, because it would have taken us round out of our intended route. I +hope that in a few voyages it will be discovered. It was at dawn that +we left the before-mentioned island of Burenquen,[127] and on that day +before nightfall we caught sight of land, which though not recognized +by any of those who had come hither in the former voyage, we believed to +be Española, from the information given us by the Indian women whom we +had with us: and in this island we remain at present.[128] Between it and +Burenquen[129] another island appeared at a distance, but of no great +size. When we reached Española the land, at the part where we approached +it, was low and very flat,[130] on seeing which, a general doubt arose +as to its identity; for, neither the admiral nor his companions, on the +previous voyage, had seen it on this side. + +The island being large, is divided into provinces; the part which we +first touched at, is called Hayti; another province adjoining it, they +call Xamaná; and the next province is named Bohio, where we now are. +These provinces are again subdivided, for they are of great extent. +Those who have seen the length of its coast, state that it is two +hundred leagues long, and I, myself, should judge it not to be less +than a hundred and fifty leagues: as to its breadth, nothing is hitherto +known; it is now forty days since a caravel left us with the view of +circumnavigating it, and is not yet returned.[131] The country is very +remarkable, and contains a vast number of large rivers, and extensive +chains of mountains, with broad open valleys, and the mountains are very +high: it does not appear that the grass is ever cut throughout the year. +I do not think that they have any winter in this part, for at Christmas +were found many birds-nests, some containing the young birds, and others +containing eggs. No four-footed animal has ever been seen in this or any +of the other islands, except some dogs of various colours, as in our +own country, but in shape like large house-dogs; and also some little +animals, in colour, size, and fur, like a rabbit, with long tails, and +feet like those of a rat; these animals climb up the trees, and many who +have tasted them, say they are very good to eat:[132] there are not any +wild beasts. There are great numbers of small snakes, and some lizards, +but not many; for the Indians consider them as great a luxury as we do +pheasants: they are of the same size as ours, but different in shape. In +a small adjacent island[133] (close by a harbour called Monte Christo, +where we stayed several days), our men saw an enormous kind of lizard, +which they said was as large round as a calf,[134] with a tail as long as +a lance, which they often went out to kill: but bulky as it was, it got +into the sea, so that they could not catch it. There are, both in this +and the other islands, an infinite number of birds like those in our own +country, and many others such as we had never seen. No kind of domestic +fowl has been seen here, with the exception of some ducks in the houses +in Zuruquia; these ducks were larger than those of Spain, though smaller +than geese,—very pretty, with flat crests, most of them as white as snow, +but some black. + +We ran along the coast of this island nearly a hundred leagues, +concluding, that within this range we should find the spot where the +admiral had left some of his men, and which we supposed to be about the +middle of the coast. As we passed by the province called Xamaná, we sent +on shore one of the Indians, who had been taken in the previous voyage, +clothed, and carrying some trifles, which the admiral had ordered to +be given him. On that day died one of our sailors, a Biscayan, who had +been wounded in the affray with the Caribbees, when they were captured, +as I have already described, through their want of caution. As we were +proceeding along the coast, an opportunity was afforded for a boat to +go on shore to bury him, the boat being accompanied by two caravels to +protect it. When they reached the shore, a great number of Indians came +out to the boat, some of them wearing necklaces and ear-rings of gold, +and expressed a wish to accompany the Spaniards to the ships; but our +men refused to take them, because they had not received permission from +the admiral. When the Indians found that they would not take them, two +of them got into a small canoe, and went up to one of the caravels that +had put in to shore; they were received on board with great kindness, +and taken to the admiral’s ship, where, through the medium of an +interpreter, they related that a certain king had sent them to ascertain +who we were, and to invite us to land, adding that they had plenty of +gold, and also of provisions, to which we should be welcome. The admiral +desired that shirts, and caps, and other trifles, should be given to +each of them, and said that as he was going to the place where Guacamari +dwelt, he would not stop then, but that on a future day they would have +an opportunity of seeing him, and with that they departed. We continued +our route till we came to an harbour called Monte Cristi, where we +remained two days, in order to observe the position of the land; for the +admiral had an objection to the spot where his men had been left with +the view of forming a station. We went on shore therefore to observe +the formation of the land. There was a large river of excellent water +close by;[135] but the ground was inundated, and very ill-calculated for +habitation. As we went on making our observations on the river and the +land, some of our men found two dead bodies by the river’s side, one with +a rope round his neck, and the other with one round his foot: this was +on the first day of our landing. On the following day they found two +other corpses farther on, and one of these was observed to have a great +quantity of beard. This was regarded as a very suspicious circumstance +by many of our people, because, as I have already said, all the Indians +are beardless. This harbour is twelve leagues from the place where the +Spaniards had been left under the protection of Guacamari, the king of +that province, whom I suppose to be one of the chief men of the island. +After two days we set sail for that spot, but as it was late when we +arrived,[136] and there were some shoals, where the admiral’s ship had +been lost, we did not venture to put in close to the shore, but remained +that night at a little less than a league from the coast, waiting until +the morning, when we might enter securely. On that evening, a canoe, +containing five or six Indians, came out at a considerable distance +from where we were, and approached us with great celerity. The admiral +believing that he insured our safety by keeping the sails set, would +not wait for them; they, however, perseveringly rowed up to us within +gunshot, and then stopped to look at us; but when they saw that we did +not wait for them, they put back and went away. After we had anchored +that night at the spot in question,[137] the admiral ordered two guns to +be fired, to see if the Spaniards, who had remained with Guacamari, would +fire in return, for they also had guns with them; but when we received +no reply, and could not perceive any fires, nor the slightest symptom of +habitations on the spot, the spirits of our people became much depressed, +and they began to entertain the suspicion which the circumstances were +naturally calculated to excite. While all were in this desponding mood, +and when four or five hours of the night had passed away, the same canoe +which we had seen in the evening, came up, and the Indians with a loud +voice addressed the captain of the caravel which they first approached, +inquiring for the admiral; they were conducted to the admiral’s vessel, +but would not go on board till he had spoken to them, and they had asked +for a light, in order to assure themselves that it was he who conversed +with them. One of them was a cousin of Guacamari, who had been sent +by him once before: it appeared, that after they had turned back the +previous evening, they had been charged by Guacamari with two masks of +gold as a present; one for the admiral, the other for a captain who +had accompanied him on the former voyage. They remained on board for +three hours, talking with the admiral in the presence of all of us, he +showing much pleasure in their conversation, and inquiring respecting +the welfare of the Spaniards whom he had left behind. Guacamari’s cousin +replied, that those who remained were all well, but that some of them +had died of disease, and others had been killed in quarrels that had +arisen amongst them: he said also that the province had been invaded, +by two kings named Caonabó and Mayreni, who had burned the habitations +of the people; and that Guacamari was at some distance, lying ill of a +wound in his leg, which was the occasion of his not appearing, but that +he would come on the next day. The Indians then departed, saying they +would return on the following day with the said Guacamari, and left us +consoled for that night. Next morning we looked for Guacamari’s arrival; +and, meanwhile, some of our men landed by command of the admiral, and +went to the spot where the Spaniards had formerly been: they found the +building which they had inhabited, and which they had in some degree +fortified with a palisade, burnt and levelled with the ground; they +found also some rags and stuffs which the Indians had brought to throw +upon the house. They observed too that the Indians who were seen near +the spot, looked very shy, and dared not approach, but, on the contrary, +fled from them. This we thought did not look well; for the admiral had +told us that in the former voyage, when he arrived at this place, so many +came in canoes to see our people, that there was no keeping them off; +and as we now noticed that they were suspicious of us, it gave us a very +unfavourable impression. We threw trifles, such as buttons and beads, +towards them, in order to conciliate them, but only four, a relation +of Guacamari’s and three others, took courage to enter the boat, and +were rowed on board. When they were asked concerning the Spaniards, they +replied that all of them were dead: we had been told this already by one +of the Indians whom we had brought from Spain, and who had conversed +with the two Indians that on the former occasion came on board with +their canoe, but we had not believed it. Guacamari’s kinsman was asked +who had killed them: he replied that king Caonabó and king Mayreni had +made an attack upon them, and burnt the buildings on the spot, that many +were wounded in the affray, and among them Guacamari, who had received +a wound in his thigh, and had retired to some distance: he also stated +that he wished to go and fetch him; upon which some trifles were given to +him, and he took his departure for the place of Guacamari’s abode. All +that day we remained in expectation of them, and when we saw that they +did not come, many suspected that the Indians who had been on board the +night before, had been drowned; for they had had wine given them two or +three times, and they had come in a small canoe that might be easily +upset. The next morning the admiral went on shore, taking some of us +with him; we went to the spot where the settlement had been, and found +it utterly destroyed by fire, and the clothes of the Spaniards lying +about upon the grass, but on that occasion we saw no dead body. There +were many different opinions amongst us; some suspecting that Guacamari +himself was concerned in the betrayal and death of the Christians; others +thought not, because his own residence was burnt: so that it remained +a very doubtful question. The admiral ordered all the ground which had +been occupied by the fortifications of the Spaniards to be searched, +for he had left orders with them to bury all the gold that they might +get. While this was being done, the admiral wished to examine a spot at +about a league’s distance, which seemed to be suitable for building a +town, for there was yet time to do so;—and some of us went thither with +him, making our observations of the land as we went along the coast, +until we reached a village of seven or eight houses, which the Indians +forsook when they saw us approach, carrying away what they could, and +leaving the things which they could not remove, hidden amongst the +grass, around the houses. These people are so degraded that they have +not even the sense to select a fitting place to live in; those who dwell +on the shore, build for themselves the most miserable hovels that can +be imagined, and all the houses are so covered with grass and dampness, +that I wonder how they can contrive to exist. In these houses we found +many things belonging to the Spaniards, which it could not be supposed +they would have bartered; such as a very handsome Moorish mantle, which +had not been unfolded since it was brought from Spain, stockings and +pieces of cloth, also an anchor belonging to the ship which the admiral +had lost here on the previous voyage; with other articles, which the more +confirmed our suspicions. On examining some things which had been very +cautiously sewn up in a small basket, we found a man’s head wrapped up +with great care; this we judged might be the head of a father, or mother, +or of some person whom they much regarded: I have since heard that many +were found in the same state, which makes me believe that our first +impression was the true one. After this we returned. We went on the same +day to the site of the settlement; and when we arrived, we found many +Indians, who had regained their courage, bartering gold with our men: +they had bartered to the extent of a mark: we also learned that they had +shown where the bodies of eleven of the dead Spaniards were laid, which +were already covered with the grass that had grown over them; and they +all with one voice asserted that Caonabó and Mayreni had killed them; but +notwithstanding all this, we began to hear complaints that one of the +Spaniards had taken three women to himself, and another four, from whence +we drew the inference that jealousy was the cause of the misfortune that +had occurred. On the next morning, as no spot in that vicinity appeared +suitable for our making a settlement, the admiral ordered a caravel to go +in one direction to look for a convenient locality, while some of us went +with him another way. In the course of our explorations, we discovered a +harbour of great security; the neighbourhood of which, so far as regarded +the formation of the land, was excellent for habitation; but as it was +far from any mine of gold, the proximity of which was very desirable, the +admiral decided that we should settle in some spot which would give us +greater certainty of attaining that object, provided the position of the +land should prove equally convenient. On our return, we found the other +caravel arrived, in which Melchior and four or five other trustworthy +men had been exploring with a similar object. They reported that as they +went along the coast, a canoe came out to them containing two Indians, +one of whom was the brother of Guacamari, and was recognised by a pilot +who was in the caravel. When he questioned them as to their purpose, they +replied that Guacamari sent to beg the Spaniards to come on shore, as he +was residing near, with as many as fifty families around him. The chief +men of the party then went on shore in the boat, and proceeding to the +place where Guacamari was, found him stretched on his bed, complaining +of a severe wound. They conferred with him, and inquired respecting the +Spaniards; his reply was in accordance with the account already given by +the others, viz.—that they had been killed by Caonabó and Mayreni, who +also had wounded him in the thigh. In confirmation of his assertion, +he showed them the limb bound up, on seeing which, they concluded that +his statement was correct. At their departure he gave to each of them +a jewel of gold, according to his estimate of their respective merits. +The Indians beat the gold into very thin plates, in order to make masks +of it, and set it in a cement which they make for that purpose. Other +ornaments they make of it, to wear on the head and to hang in the ears +and nostrils, and for these also they require it to be thin. It is not +the costliness of the gold that they value in their ornaments, but its +showy appearance. Guacamari desired them by signs as well as he was able, +to tell the admiral that as he was thus wounded, he prayed him to have +the goodness to come to see him. The sailors told this to the admiral +when he arrived, and he resolved to go the next morning, for the spot +could be reached in three hours, being scarcely three leagues distance +from the place where we were; but as it would be the dinner-hour when we +arrived, we dined before we went on shore. After dinner, the admiral gave +orders that all the captains should come with their barges to proceed +to the shore, for already on that morning, previous to our departure, +the aforesaid brother of Guacamari had come to speak to the admiral +to urge his visit. Then the admiral went on shore accompanied by all +the principal officers, so richly dressed that they would have made a +distinguished appearance even in any of our chief cities: he took with +him some articles as presents, having already received from Guacamari a +certain quantity of gold, and it was reasonable that he should make a +commensurate response to his acts and expressions of good-will: Guacamari +had also provided himself with a present. When we arrived, we found him +stretched upon his bed, which was made of cotton net-work, and, according +to their custom, suspended.[138] He did not arise, but from his bed made +the best gesture of courtesy of which he was capable. He showed much +feeling; with tears in his eyes lamented the death of the Spaniards, and +began by explaining to the best of his power, how some died of disease, +others had gone to Caonabó in search of the mine of gold, and had there +been killed, and that the rest had been attacked and slain in their own +town. According to the appearance of the dead bodies, it was not two +months since this had happened. He then presented the admiral with eight +marks and a half of gold, five or six hundred pieces of jewellery of +various colours, and a cap with similar jewel-work, which I think they +must value very highly, because in it was a jewel which was presented +with great reverence. It appears to me that these people put more value +upon copper than gold. The surgeon of the fleet and myself being present, +the admiral told Guacamari that we were skilled in the treatment of +human disorders, and wished that he would shew us his wound. He replied +that he was willing; upon which I said it would be necessary that he +should, if possible, go out of the house, because we could not see well +on account of the place being darkened by the throng of people; to this +he consented, I think more from timidity than inclination, and left the +house leaning on the arm of the admiral. After he was seated, the surgeon +approached him and began to untie his bandage; then he told the admiral +that the wound was made with a _ciba_, by which he meant with a stone. +When the wound was uncovered, we went up to examine it: it is certain +that there was no more wound on that leg than on the other, although he +cunningly pretended that it pained him much. Ignorant as we were of the +facts, it was impossible to come to a definite conclusion. There were +certainly many proofs of an invasion by a hostile people, so that the +admiral was at a loss what to do. He with many others thought, however, +that for the present, and until they could ascertain the truth, they +ought to conceal their distrust; for, after ascertaining it, they would +be able to claim whatever indemnity they thought proper. That evening +Guacamari accompanied the admiral to the ships, and when they showed +him the horses and other objects of interest, their novelty struck him +with the greatest amazement: he took supper on board, and returned that +evening to his house. The admiral told him that he wished to settle there +and to build houses; to which he assented, but said that the place was +not wholesome, because it was very damp: and so it most certainly was. + +All this passed through the interpretation of two of the Indians who had +gone to Spain in the last voyage, and who were the sole survivors of +seven that had embarked with us; five died on the voyage, and these but +narrowly escaped. The next day we anchored in that port: Guacamari sent +to know when the admiral intended leaving, and was told that he should do +so on the morrow. The same day Guacamari’s brother, and others with him, +came on board, bringing gold to barter: on the day of our departure also +they bartered a great quantity of gold. There were ten women on board, +of those which had been taken in the Caribbee islands, principally from +Burenquen, and it was observed that the brother of Guacamari spoke with +them; we think that he told them to make an effort to escape that night; +for certainly during our first sleep they dropped themselves quietly into +the water, and went on shore, so that by the time they were missed they +had reached such a distance that only four could be taken by the boats +which went in pursuit, and these were secured when just leaving the +water: they had to swim considerably more than half a league. The next +morning the admiral sent to desire that Guacamari would cause search to +be made for the women who had escaped in the night, and that he would +send them back to the ships. When the messengers arrived they found the +place forsaken and not a soul there; this made many openly declare their +suspicions, but others said they might have removed to another village, +as was their custom. That day we remained quiet, because the weather was +unfavourable for our departure. On the next morning the admiral resolved +that as the wind was adverse, it would be well to go with the boats to +inspect a harbour on the coast at two leagues distance further up,[139] +to see if the formation of the land was favourable for a settlement; +and we went thither with all the ship’s boats, leaving the ships in the +harbour. As we moved along the coast the people manifested a sense of +insecurity, and when we reached the spot to which we were bound all the +natives had fled. While we were walking about this place we found an +Indian stretched on the hill-side, close by the houses, with a gaping +wound in his shoulder caused by a dart, so that he had been disabled from +fleeing any further. The natives of this island fight with sharp darts, +which they discharge from cross-bows in the same manner as boys in Spain +shoot their small arrows, and which they send with considerable skill to +a great distance; and certainly upon an unarmed people these weapons are +calculated to do serious injury. The man told us that Caonabó and his +people had wounded him and burnt the houses of Guacamari. Thus we are +still kept in uncertainty respecting the death of our people, on account +of the paucity of information on which to form an opinion, and the +conflicting and equivocal character of the evidence we have obtained. We +did not find the position of the land in this port favourable for healthy +habitation, and the admiral resolved upon returning along the upper coast +by which we had come from Spain, because we had had tidings of gold in +that direction. But the weather was so adverse that it cost more labour +to sail thirty leagues in a backward direction than the whole voyage +from Spain; so that, what with the contrary wind and the length of the +passage, three months had elapsed before we set foot on land. It pleased +God, however, that through the check upon our progress caused by contrary +winds, we succeeded in finding the best and most suitable spot that +we could have selected for a settlement, where there was an excellent +harbour[140] and abundance of fish, an article of which we stood in great +need from the scarcity of meat. The fish caught here are very singular +and more wholesome than those of Spain. The climate does not allow the +fish to be kept from one day to another, for all animal food speedily +becomes unwholesome, on account of the alternate heat and damp. + +The land is very rich for all purposes. Near the harbour there are two +rivers; one large,[141] and another of moderate breadth somewhat near +it: the water is of a very remarkable quality. On the bank of it is +being built a city called Marta,[142] one side of which is bounded by +the water with a ravine of cleft rock, so that at that part there is no +need of fortification; the other half is girt with a plantation of trees +so thick that a rabbit could scarcely pass through it; and so green +that fire will never be able to burn it. A channel has been commenced +for a branch of the river, which the managers say they will lead through +the middle of the settlement, and will place on it mills of all kinds +requiring to be worked by water. Great quantities of vegetables have been +planted, which certainly attain a more luxuriant growth here in eight +days than they would in Spain in twenty. We were frequently visited by +numbers of Indians, among whom were some of their caciques or chiefs, and +many women. They all came loaded with _ages_,[143] a sort of turnip, very +excellent for food, which we dressed in various ways. This food was so +nutritious as to prove a great support to all of us after the privations +we endured when at sea, which in truth were more severe than ever were +suffered by man; and as we could not tell what weather it would please +God to send us on our voyage, we were obliged to limit ourselves most +rigorously with regard to food, in order that, at all events, we might at +least have the means of supporting life: this _age_ the Caribbees call +_nabi_, and the Indians _hage_. The Indians barter gold, provisions, and +every thing they bring with them, for tags of laces, beads, and pins, and +pieces of porringers and dishes. They all, as I have said, go naked as +they were born, except the women of this island, who some of them wear a +covering of cotton, which they bind round their hips, while others use +grass and leaves of trees. When they wish to appear fulldressed, both men +and women paint themselves, some black, others white and various colours, +in so many devices that the effect is very laughable: they shave some +parts of their heads, and in others wear long tufts of matted hair, which +have an indescribably ridiculous appearance: in short, whatever would +be looked upon in our country as characteristic of a madman, is here +regarded by the highest of the Indians as a mark of distinction. + +In our present position, we are in the neighbourhood of many mines of +gold, not one of which, we are told, is more than twenty or twenty-five +leagues off: the Indians say that some of them are in Niti, in the +possession of Caonabó, who killed the Christians; the others are in +another place called Cibao, which, if it please God, we shall see with +our eyes before many days are over; indeed we should go there at once, +but that we have so many things to provide that we are not equal to it at +present. One third of our people have fallen sick within the last four +or five days, which I think has principally arisen from the toil and +privations of the journey; another cause has been the variableness of +the climate; but I hope in our Lord that all will be restored to health. +My idea of this people is, that if we could converse with them, they +would all become converted, for they do whatever they see us do, making +genuflections to the altars, and at the Ave Maria and the other parts of +the devotional service, and making the sign of the cross. They all say +that they wish to be Christians, although in truth they are idolaters, +for in their houses they have many kinds of figures: when asked what such +a figure was, they would reply it is a thing of _Turey_, by which they +meant “of Heaven.” I made a pretence of throwing them on the fire, which +grieved them so that they began to weep: they believe that everything +we bring comes from heaven, and therefore call it _Turey_, which, as I +have already said, means heaven in their language. The first day that I +went on shore to sleep, was the Lord’s day. The little time that we have +spent on land, has been so much occupied in seeking for a fitting spot +for the settlement, and in providing necessaries, that we have had little +opportunity of becoming acquainted with the productions of the soil, yet +although the time has been so short, many marvellous things have been +seen. We have met with trees bearing wool, of a sufficiently fine quality +(according to the opinion of those who are acquainted with the art) to +be woven into good cloth; there are so many of these trees that we might +load the caravels with wool, although it is troublesome to collect, for +the trees are very thorny,[144] but some means may be easily found of +overcoming this difficulty. There are also cotton trees as large as peach +trees, which produce cotton in the greatest abundance. We found trees +producing wax as good both in colour and smell as bees-wax and equally +useful for burning, indeed there is no great difference between them. +There are vast numbers of trees which yield surprisingly fine turpentine, +and a great abundance of tragacanth, also very good. We found other +trees which I think bear nutmegs, because the bark tastes and smells +like that spice, but at present there is no fruit on them;[145] I saw +one root of ginger, which an Indian wore hanging round his neck. There +were also aloes; not like those which we have hitherto seen in Spain, but +no doubt they are of the same kind as those used by our doctors.[146] A +sort of cinnamon also has been found; but, to speak the truth, it is not +so fine as that with which we are already acquainted in Spain. I do not +know whether this arises from ignorance of the proper season to gather +it, or whether the soil does not produce better. We have also seen some +yellow mirabolans; at this season they are all lying under the trees, and +have a bitter flavour, arising, I think, from the rottenness occasioned +by the moisture of the ground; but the taste of such parts as have +remained sound, is that of the genuine mirabolan. There is also very +good mastic. None of the natives of these islands, as far as we have yet +seen, possess any iron; they have, however, many tools, such as hatchets +and axes, made of stone, which are so handsome and well finished, that +it is wonderful how they contrive to make them without the use of iron. +Their food consists of bread, made of the roots of a vegetable which +is between a tree and a vegetable, and the _age_, which I have already +described as being like the turnip, and very good food; they use, to +season it, a spice called _agi_, which they also eat with fish and such +birds as they can catch of the many kinds which abound in the island. +They have, besides, a kind of grain like hazel-nuts, very good to eat. +They eat all the snakes, and lizards, and spiders, and worms, that they +find upon the ground; so that, to my fancy, their bestiality is greater +than that of any beast upon the face of the earth. The admiral had at +one time determined to leave the search for the mines until he had first +dispatched the ships which were to return to Spain[147] on account of +the great sickness which had prevailed among the men, but afterwards +he resolved upon sending two bands under the command of two captains, +the one to Cibao,[148] and the other to Niti, where, as I have already +said, Caonabó lived. These parties went, one of them returning on the +twentieth, and the other on the twenty-first of January. The party that +went to Cibao saw gold in so many places that one scarcely dares state +the fact, for in truth they found it in more than fifty streamlets and +rivers, as well as upon their banks; so that, the captain said they had +only to seek throughout that province, and they would find as much as +they wished. He brought specimens from the different parts, that is, from +the sand of the rivers and small springs. It is thought, that by digging +as we know how, it will be found in greater pieces, for the Indians +neither know how to dig nor have the means of digging more than a hand’s +depth. The other captain who went to Niti, returned also with news of +a great quantity of gold in three or four places; of which he likewise +brought specimens. + +Thus, surely, their Highnesses the King and Queen may henceforth regard +themselves as the most prosperous and wealthy Sovereigns in the world; +never yet, since the creation, has such a thing been seen or read of; +for on the return of the ships from their next voyage, they will be able +to carry back such a quantity of gold as will fill with amazement all +who hear of it. Here I think I shall do well to break off my narrative. +I think those who do not know me who hear these things may consider me +prolix, and somewhat an exaggerator, but God is my witness, that I have +not exceeded, by one tittle, the bounds of truth. + +The preceding is the translation of that part of Doctor Chanca’s letter, +which refers to intelligence respecting the Indies.[149] The remainder +of the letter does not bear upon the subject, but treats of private +matters, in which Doctor Chanca requests the interference and support +of the Chapter of Seville (of which city he was a native), in behalf of +his family and property, which he had left in the said city. This letter +reached Seville in the month of [150] in the year fourteen hundred and +ninety-three. + + +SEGUNDA VIAGE DE COLON. + +_La Carta del Doctor Chanca, que escribió a la Ciudad de Sevilla._ + +Muy magnífico Señor: Porque las cosas que yo particularmente escribo á +otros en otras cartas no son igualmente comunicables como las que en +esta escritura van, acordé de escribir distintamente las nuevas de acá y +las otras que á mi conviene suplicar á vuestra Señoría, é las nuevas son +las siguientes: Que la flota que los Reyes Católicos, nuestros Señores, +enviaron de España para las Indias é gobernacion del su Almirante del mar +Océano Cristóbal Colon por la divina permision, parte de Caliz á veinte y +cinco de Setiembre del año de [109] años con tiempo é viento convenible á +nuestro camino, é duró este tiempo dos dias, en los cuales pudimos andar +al pie de cincuenta leguas: y luego nos cambió el tiempo otros dos, en +los cuales anduvimos muy poco ó no nada; plogó á Dios que pasados los +dias nos tornó buen tiempo, en manera que en otros dos llegamos á la +Gran Canaria donde tomamos puerto, lo cual nos fue necesario por reparar +un navío que hacia mucha agua, y estovímos ende todo aquel dia, é luego +otra dia partimos é fizonos algunas calmerías, de manera que estovímos +en llegar al Gomero cuatro ó cinco dias, y en la Gomera fue necesario +estar algun dia por facer provisiones de carne, leña é agua la, que mas +pudiesen, por la larga jornada que se esperaba hacer sin ver mas tierra: +ansi que en la estada destos puertos y en un dia despues de partidos de +la Gomera, que nos fizo calma, que tardamos en llegar fasta la isla del +Fierro, estovimos diez y nueve ó veinte dias: desde aqui por la bondad +de Dios nos tornó buen tiempo, el mejor que nunca flota llevó tan largo +camino, tal que partidos del Fierro á trece de Octubre dentro de veinte +dias hobimos vista de tierra: y vieramosla á catorce ó quince si la noa +Capitana fuera tan buena velera comos los otros navíos, porque muchas +veces los otros navíos sacaban velas porque nos dejaban mucho atras. En +todo este tiempo hobimos mucha bonanza, que en él ni en todo el camino no +hobimos fortuna, salvo la víspera de S. Simon que nos vino una que por +cuatro horas nos puso en harto estrecho. El primero domingo despues de +Todos Santos, que fue á tres dias de Noviembre, cerca del alba, dijó un +piloto de la nao Capitana: albricias, que tenemos tierra. Fue el alegría +tan grande en la gente que era maravilla oir las gritas y placeres que +todos hacian, y con mucha razon, que la gente venian ya tan fatigados +de mala vida y de pasar agua, que con muchos deseos sospiraban todos +por tierra. Contaron aquel dia los pilotos del armada desde la isla de +Fierro hasta la primera tierra que vimos unas ochocientas leguas, otros +setecientas é ochenta, de manera que la diferencia no ere mucha, é mas +trescientas que ponen de la isla de Fierro fasta Caliz, que eran por +todos mil é ciento; ansí que no siento quien no fuese satisfecho de ver +agua. Vimos el Domingo de mañana sobredicho, por proa de los navíos, una +isla y luego á la man derecha parecio otra: la primera era la tierra alta +de sierras por aquella parte que vimos, la otra era tierra llana, tambien +muy llena de árboles muy espesos, y luego que fue mas de dia comenzó á +parecer á una parte é á otra islas; de manera que aquel dia eran seis +islas á diversas partes, y las mas harto grandes. Fuimos enderezados +para ver aquella que primero habiamos visto, é llegamos por la costa +andando mas de una lagua buscando puerto para sorgir, el cual todo aquel +espacio nunca se pudo hallar. Era en todo aquello que parecia desta isla +todo montaña muy hermosa y muy verde, fasta el agua que era alegria en +mirarla, porque en aquel tiempo no hay en nuestra tierra apenas cosa +verde. Despues que allí no hallamos puerto acordó el Almirante que nos +volviesemos á la otra isla que parescia á la mano derecha, que estaba +desta otra cuatro ó cinco leguas. Quedó por entonces un navío en esta +isla buscando puerto todo aquel dia para cuando fuese necesario venir +á ella, en la cual halló buen puerto é vido casas é gentes, é luego se +tornó aquella noche para donde estaba la flota que habia tomado puerto +en la otra isla, donde decendió el Almirante é mucha gente con él con +la bandera Real en las manos, adonde tomó posesion por sus Altezas en +forma de derecho. En esta isla habia tanta espesura de arboledas que +era maravilla, é tanta diferencia de árboles no conocidos á nadie que +era para espantar, dellos con fruto, dellos con flor, ansí que todo +era verde. Allí hallamos un arbol, cuya hoja tenia el mas fino olor de +clavos que nunca ví, y era como laurel, salvo que no era ansi grande; +yo ansí pienso que era laurel su especia. Allí habia frutas salvaginas +de diferentes maneras, de las quales algunos no muy sabios probaban, +y del gusto solamente tocándoles con las lenguas se les hinchaban las +caras, y les venia tan grande ardor y dolor que parecian que rabiaban, +los cuales se remediaban con cosas frias. En esta isla no hallamos gente +nin señal della, creimos que era despoblada, en la cual estovimos bien +dos horas, porque cuando allí llegamos era sobre tarde, é luego otro dia +de mañana partimos para otra isla que parescia en bajo desta que era muy +grande, fasta la cual desta que habria siete ú ocho leguas, llegamos á +ella hácia la parte de una gran montaña que parecia que queria llegar +al cielo, en medio de la cual montaña estaba un pico mas alto que toda +la otra montaña, del cual se vertian á diversas partes muchus aguas, en +especial hácia la parte donde ibamos: de tres leguas paresció un golpe +de agua tan gordo como un buey, que se despeñaba de tan alto como si +cayera del cielo: parescia de tan lejos, que hobo en los navíos muchas +apuestas, que unos decian que eran peñas blancas y otros que era agua. +Desque llegamos mas á cerca vídose lo cierto, y era la mas hermosa cosa +del mundo de ver cuan alto se despeñaba é de tan poco logar nacia tan +gran golpe de agua. Luego que llegamos cerco mandó el Almirante á una +carbela ligera que fuese costeando á buscar puerto, la cual se adelantó +y llegando á la tierra vido unas casas, é con la barca saltó el Capitan +en tierra é llegó á las casas, en las cuales halló su gente, y luego +que los vieron fueron huyendo, é entró en ellas, donde halló las cosas +que ellos tienen, que no habian llevado nada, donde tomó dos papagayos +muy grandes y muy diferenciados de cuantos se habian visto. Halló mucho +algodon hilado é por hilar, é cosas de sus mantenimientos, é de todo +trajo un poco, en especial trajo cuatro ó cinco huesos de brazos é +piernas de hombres. Luego que aquello vimos sospechamos que aquellas +islas eran las de Caribe, que son habitadas de gente que comen carne +humana, porque el Almirante por las señas que le habian dado del sitio +destas islas, el otro camino, los indios de las islas que antes habian +descubierto, habia enderezado el camino por descubrirlas, porque estaban +mas cerca de España, y tambien porque por allí se hacia el camino derecho +para venir á la isla Española, donde antes habia dejado la gente, á los +cuales, por la bondad de Dios y por el buen saber del Almirante, venimos +tan derechos como si por camino sabido é seguido vinieramos. Esta isla +es muy grande, y por el lado nos pareció que habia de luengo de costa +veinta é cinco leguas: fuimos costeando por ella buscando puerto mas +de dos leguas; por la parte donde ibamos eran montañas muy altas, á la +parte que dejamos parecian grandes llanos, á la orilla de la mar habia +algunos poblados pequeños, é luego que veian las velas huian todos. +Andadas dos leguas hallamos puerto y bien tarde. Esa noche acordó el +Almirante que á la madrugada saliesen algunos para tomar lengua é saber +que gente era, no embargante la sospecha é los que ya habian visto ir +huyendo, que era gente desnuda como la otra que ya el Almirante habia +visto el otro viage. Salieron esa madrugada ciertos Capitanes; los unos +vinieron á hora de comer é trageron un mozo de fasta catorce años, á +lo que despues se sopo, é él dijo que era de los que esta gente tenian +cativos. Los otros se dividieron, los unos tomaron un mochacho pequeño, +al cual llevaba un hombre por la mano, é por huir lo desamparó. Este +enviaron luego con algunos dellos, otros quedaron, é destos unos tomaron +ciertas mugeres naturales de la isla, é otras que se vinieron de grado, +que eran de las cativas. Desta compañía se apartó un Capitan no sabiendo +que se habia habido lengua con seis hombres, el cual se perdió con los +que con él iban, que jamas sopieron tornar, fasta que á cabo de cuatro +dias toparon con la costa de la mar, é siguiendo por ella tornaron á +topar con la flota. Ya los teniamos por perdidos é comidos de aquellas +gentes que se dicen los Caribes, porque no bastaba razon para creer que +eran perdidos de otra manera, porque iban entre ellos pilotos, marineros +que por la estrella saben ir é venir hasta España, creiamos que en tan +pequeño espacio no se podian perder. Este dia primero que allí decendimos +andaban por la playa junto con el agua muchos hombres é mugeres mirando +la flota, é maravillándose de cosa tan nueva é llegándose alguna barca á +tierra á hablar con ellos, diciéndolos _tayno tayno_, que quiere decir +_bueno_, esperaban en tanto que no salian del agua, junto con él moran, +de manera que cuando ellos querian se podian salvar: en conclusion, que +de los hombres ninguno se pudo tomar por fuerza ni por grado, salvo dos +que se seguraron é despues los trajeron por fuerza allí. Se tomaron +mas de veinte mugeres de las cativas, y de su grado se venian otros +naturales de la isla, que fueron salteadas é tomadas por fuerza. Ciertos +mochachos cabtivos se vinieron á nosotros huyendo de los naturales de +la isla que los tenian cabtivos. En este puerto estovimos ocho dias á +causa de la perdida del sobredicho Capitan, donde muchas veces salimos +á tierra andando por sus moradas é pueblos, que estaban á la costa, +donde hallamos infinitos huesos de hombres, é los cascos de las cabezas +colgados por las casas á manera de vasijas para tener cosas. Aquí no +parescieron muchos hombres; la causa era, segun nos dijeron las mugeres, +que eran idas diez canoas con gentes á saltear á otras islas. Esta +gente nos pareció mas pulítica que la que habita en estas otras islas +que habemos visto, aunque todos tienen las moradas de paja; pero estos +las tienen de mucho mejor hechura, é mas proveidas de mantenimientos, +é parece en ellas mas industria ansi veril como femenil. Tenian mucho +algodon hilado y por hilar, y muchas mantas de algodon tan bien tejidas +que no deben nada á las de nuestra patria. Preguntamos á las mugeres, +que eran cativas en esta isla, que qué gente era esta; respondieron que +eran Caribes. Despues que entendieron que nosotros aborreciamos tal gente +por su mal uso de comer carne de hombres, holgaban mucho, y sí de nuevo +traian alguna muger ó hombre de los Caribes, secretamente decian que eran +Caribes, que allí donde estaban todos en nuestro poder mostraban temor +dellos como gente sojuzgada, y de allí conocimos cuáles eran Caribes de +las mugeres é cuáles nó, porque las Caribes traian en las piernas en +cada una dos argollas tejidas de algodon, la una junto con rodilla, la +otra junto con los tobillos; de manera que les hacen las pantorrillas +grandes, é de los sobredichos logares muy ceñidas, que esto me parece +que tienen ellos por cosa gentil, ansi que por esta diferencia conocemos +los unos de los otros. La costumbre desta gente de Caribes es bestial: +son tres islas, esta se llama Turuqueira, la otra que primero vimos se +llama Ceyre, la tercera se llama Ayay; estos todos son conformidad como +si fuesen de un linage, los cuales no se hacen mal: unos é otros hacen +guerra á todas las otras islas comarcanas, los cuales van por mar ciento +é cincuenta leguas á saltear con muchas canoas que tienen, que son unas +fustas pequeñas de un solo madero. Sus armas son frechas en lugar de +hierros; porque no poseen ningun hierro, ponen unas puntas fechas de +huesos de torgugas los unos, otros de otro isla ponen unas espinas de un +pez fechas dentadas, que ansi lo son naturalmente, á manera de sierras +bien recias, que para gente desarmada, como son todos, es cosa que les +puede matar é hacer harto daño; pero para gente de nuestra nacion no son +armas para mucho temer. Esta gente saltea en las otras islas, que traen +las mugeres que pueden haber, en especial mozas y hermosas, las cuales +tienen para su servicio, é para tener por mancebas, é traen tantas que +en cincuenta casas ellos no parecieron, y de las cativas se vinieron +mas de veinte mozas. Dicen tambien estas mugeres que estos usan de una +crueldad que parece cosa increible; que los hijos que en ellas han se +los comen, que solamente crian los que han en sus mugeres naturales. Los +hombres que pueden haber, los que son vivos llevánselos á sus casas para +hacer carnicería dellos, y los que han muertos luego se los comen. Dicen +que la carne del hombre es tan buena que no hay tal cosa en el mundo; y +bien parece porque los huesos que en estas casas hallamos todo lo que se +puede roer todo lo tenian roido, que no habia en ellos sino lo que por +su mucha dureza no se podia comer. Allí se halló en una casa cociendo en +una olla un pezcuezo de un hombre. Los mochachos que cativan cortanlos +el miembro, é sirvense de ellos fasta que son hombres, y despues cuando +quieren facer fiesta mátanlos é cómenselos, porque dicen que que la +carne de los mochachos é de las mogeres no es buena para comer. Destos +mochachos se vinieron para nosotros huyendo tres todos tres cortados sus +miembros. E á cabo de cuatro dias vino el Capitan que se habia perdido, +de cuya venida estabamos ya bien desesparados, porque ya los habian +ido á buscar otras cuadrillas por dos veces, é aquel dia vino la una +caudrilla sin saber dellos ciertamente. Holgamos con su venida como si +nuevamente se hobieran hallado: trajo este Capitan con los que fueron +con él diez cabezas entre mochachos y mugeres. Estos ni los otros que +los fueron á buscar, nunca hallaron hombres porque se habien huido, ó +por ventura que en aquella comarca habia pocos hombres, porque segun se +supo de las mugeres eran idas diez canoas con gentes á saltear á otras +islas. Vino él é los que fueron con él tan destrozados del monte, que +era lástima de los ver: decian, preguntándoles como se habien perdido, +dijeron que era la espesura de los arboles tanta que el cielo no podian +ver, é que algunos de ellos, que eran marineros, habian subido por los +árboles para mirar el estrella é que nunca la podieron ver, é que si no +toparan con el mar fuera imposible tornar á la flota. Partimos desta isla +ocho dias despues que allí llegamos. Luego otro dia á medio dia vimos +otra isla, no muy grande, que estaria desta otra doce leguas; porque el +primero dia que partimos lo mas del dia nos fizo calma, fuimos junto +con la costa desta isla, é dijeron las Indias que llevabamos que no era +habitada, que los Caribes la habian despoblado, é por esto no paramos +en ella. Luego esa tarde vimos otra: á esa noche, cerca desta isla, +fallamos unos bajos, por cuyo temor sorgimos, que no osamos andar fasta +que fuese de dia. Luego á la mañana paresció otra isla harto grande: +á ninguna destas no llegamos por consolar los que habian dejado en la +Española, é no plogó á Dios segun que abajo paracerá. Otro dia á hora +de comer llegamos á una isla é pareciónos mucho bien, porque parecia +muy poblada, segun las muchas labranzas que en ella habia. Fuimos allá +é tomamos puerto en la costa: luego mandó el Almirante ir á tierra una +barca guarnecida de gente para si pudiese tomar lengua para saber que +gente era, é tambien porque habiamos menester informarnos del camino, +caso quel Almirante, aunque nunca habia fecho aquel camino, iba muy bien +encaminado segun en cabo pareció. Pero porque las cosas dubdosas se +deben siempre buscar con la mayor certinidad que haberse pueda, quiso +haber allí lengua, de la cual gente que iba en la barca ciertas personas +saltaron en tierra, llegaron en tierra á un poblado de donde la gente +ya se habia escondido. Tomaron allí cinco ó seis mugeres y ciertos +mochachos, de las cuales las mas eran tambien de las cativas como en la +otra isla, porque tambien estos eran de los Caribes, segun ya sabiamos +por la relacion de las mugeres que traiamos. Ya que esta barca se queria +tornar á los navíos con su presa que habia fecho por parte debajo; por +la costa venia una canoa en que venian cuatro hombres é dos mugeres +é un mochacho, é desque vieron la flota maravillados se embebecieron +tanto que por una grande hora estovieron que no se movieron de un lugar +casi dos tiros de lombarda de los navíos. En esto fueron vistos de los +que estaban en la barca é aun de toda la flota. Luego los de la barca +fueron para ellos tan junto con la tierra, que con el embebecimiento +que tenian, maravillándose é pensando que cosa seria, nunca los vieron +hasta que estovieron muy cerca dellos, que no les pudieron mucho huir +aunque harto trabajaron por ello; pero los nuestros aguijaron con tanta +priesa que no se les pudieron ir. Los Caribes desque vieron que el hoir +no les aprovechaba, con mucha osadia pusieron mano á los arcos, tambien +las mugeres como los hombres; é digo con mucha osadia porque ellos no +eran mas de cuatro hombres y dos mugeres, é los nuestros mas de veinte +é cinco, de los cuales firieron dos, al uno dieron dos frechadas en +los pechos é al otro una por el costado, é sino fuera porque llevaban +adargas é tablachutas, é porque los invistieron presto con la barca é +les trastornaron su canoa, asaetearan con sus frechas los mas dellos. +E despues de trastornada su canoa quedaron en el agua nadando, é á las +veces haciendo pie, que allí habia unos bajos, é tovieron harto que hacer +en tomarlos, que todavía cuanto podian tiraban, é con todo eso el uno +no lo pudieron tomar sino mal herido de una lanzada que murió, el cual +trajeron ansi herido fasta les navíos. La diferencia destos á los otros +indios en el hábito, es que los de Caribe tienen el cabello muy largo, +los otros son tresquilados é fechas cien mil diferencias en las cabezas +de cruces, é de otras pinturas en diversas maneras, cada uno como se le +antoja, lo cual se hacen con cañas agudas. Todos ansi los de Caribe como +los otros es gente sin barbas, que por maravilla hallarás hombre que las +tenga. Estos Caribes que allí tomaron venian tiznados los ojos é las +cejas, lo cual me parece que hacen por gala, é con aquello parescian mas +espantables; el uno destos dice que en una isla dellos, llamada Cayre, +que es la primera que vimos, á la cual no llegamos, hay mucho oro; que +vayan allá con clavos é contezuelas para hacer sus canoas, é que traerán +cuanto oro quisieren. Luego aquel dia partimos de esta isla, que no +estariamos allí mas de seis ó siete horas, fuemos para otra tierra que +pareció á ojo que estaba en el camino que habiamos de facer: llegamos +noche cerca della. Otro dia de mañana fuimos por la costa della: era +muy gran tierra, aunque no era muy continua, que eran mas de cuarenta y +tantos islones, tierra muy alta, é la mas della pelada, la cual no era +ninguna ni es de las que antes ni despues habemos visto. Parescia tierra +dispuesta para haber en ella metales: á esta no llegamos para saltar en +tierra, salvo una carabela latina llegó á un islon de estos, en el cual +hallaron ciertas casas de pescadores. Las Indias que traiamos dijeron +que no eran pobladas. Andovimos por esta costa lo mas deste dia, hasta +otro dia en la tarde que llegamos á vista de otra isla llamada Burenquen, +cuya costa corrimos todo un dia: juzgábase que ternia por aquella banda +treinta leguas. Esta isla es muy hermosa y muy fértil á parecer: á estu +vienon los de Caribe á conquistar, de la cual llevaban mucha gente; estos +no tienen fustas ningunas nin saben andar por mar; pero, segun dicen +estos Caribes que tomamos, usan arcos como ellos, é si por caso cuando +los vienen á saltear los pueden prender tambien se los comen como los de +Caribe á ellos. En un puerto desta isla estovimos dos dias, donde saltó +mucha gente en tierra; pero jamas podimos haber lengua, que todos se +fuyeron como gente temorizadas de los Caribes. Todas estas islas dichas +fueron descubiertas deste camino, que fasta aquí ninguna dellas habia +visto el Almirante el otro viage, todos son muy hermosas é de muy buena +tierra; pero esta paresció mejor á todos: aquí casi se acabaron las islas +que fácia la parte de España habia dejado de ver el Almirante, aunque +tenemos por cosa cierta que hay tierra mas de cuarenta leguas antes de +estas primeras hasta España, porque dos dias antes que viesemos tierra +vimos unas aves que llaman rabihorcados, que son aves de rapiña marinas +é ni sientan ni duermen sobre el agua, sobre tarde rodeando sobir en +alto, é despues tiran su via á buscar tierra para dormir, las cuales +no podrian ir á caer segun era tarde de doce ó quince leguas arriba, y +esto era á la man derecha donde veniamos hasta la parte de España; de +donde todos juzgaron allí quedar tierra, lo cual no se buscó porque se +nos hacia rodeo para la via que traiamos. Espero que á pocos viages se +hallará. Desta isla sobredicha partimos una madrugada, é aquel dia, antes +que fuese noche, hobimos vista de tierra, la cual tampoco era conocida de +ninguno de los qua habian venido el otro viage; pero por las nuevas de +las indias que traiamos sospechamos que era la Española, en la cual agora +estamos. Entre esta isla é la otra de Buriquen parecia de lejos otra, +aunque no era grande. Desque llegamos á esta Española, por el comienzo +de alla era tierra baja y muy llana, del conocimiento de la cual aun +estaban todos dubdosos si fuese la que es, porque aquella parte nin el +Almirante ni los otros que con él vinieron habian visto, é aquesta isla +como es grande es nombrada por provincias, e á esta parte que primero +llegamos llaman Hayti, y luego á la otra provincia junta con esta llaman +Xamaná, é á la otra Bohio; en la cual agora estamos; ansi hay en ellas +muchas provincias porque es gran cosa, porque segun afirman los que la +han visto por la costa de largo, dicen que habrá doscientas leguas: á +mi me parece que á lo menos habrá ciento é cincuenta; del ancho della +hasta agora no se sabe. Alla es ido cuarenta dias ha á rodearla una +carebela, la cual no es venida hasta hoy. Es tierra muy singular, donde +hay infinitos rios grandes é sierras grandes é valles grandes rasos, +grandes montañas: sospecho que nunca se secan las yerbas en todo el año. +Non creo que hay invierno ninguno en esta nin en las atras, porque por +Navidad se fallan muchos nidos de aves, dellas con pájaros, é dellas con +huevos. En ella ni en las otras nunca se ha visto animal de cuatro pies, +salvo algunos perros de todas colores como en nuestra patria, la hechura +como unos gosques grandes; de animales salvages no hay. Otrosí, hay un +animal de color de conejo é de su pelo, el grandor de un conejo nuevo, +el rabo largo, los pies é manos como de raton, suben por los árboles, +muchos los han comido, dicen que es muy bueno de comer: hay culebras +muchas no grandes; lagartos aunque no muchos, porque los indios hacen +tanta fiesta dellos como hariamos allá con faisanes, son del tamaño +de los de allá, salvo que en la hechura son diferentes, aunque en una +isleta pequeña, que está junto con un puerto que llaman Monte Christo, +donde estovimos muchos dias, vieron muchos dias un lagarto muy grande +que decian que seria de gordura de un becerro é atan complido como una +lanza, é muchas veces salieron por lo matar, é con la mucha espesura se +les metia en la mar, de manera que no se pudo haber dél derecho. Hay en +esta isla y en las otras infinitas aves de las de nuestra patria, é otras +muchas que allá nunca se vieron: de las aves domésticas nunca se ha visto +acá ninguna, salvo en la Zuruquia habia en las casas unas ánades, las +mas dellas blancas como la nieve é algunas dellas negras, muy lindas, +con crestas rasas, mayores que las de allá, menores que ánsares. Por +la costa desta isla corrimos al pie de cien leguas porque hasta donde +el Almirante habia dejado la gente, habria en este compás, que será en +comedio ó en medio de la isla. Andando por la provincia della llamada +Xamaná, en derecho echamos en tierra uno de los indios quel etro viage +habian llevado vestido, é con algunas cosillas quel Almirante le habia +mandado dar. Aquel dia se nos murió un marinero vizcaino que habia seido +herido de los Caribes, que ya dije que se tomaron, por su mala guarda, +ó porque ibamos por costa de tierra, dióse lugar que saliese una barca +á enterrarlo, é fueron en reguarda de la barca dos carabelas cerca con +tierra. Salieron á la barca en llegando en tierra muchos indios, de los +cuales algunos traian oro al cuello, é á las orejas; querian venir con +los cristianos á los navíos, é no los quisieron traer, porque no llevaban +licencia del Almirante; los cuales desque vieron que no los querian traer +se metieron dos dellos en una canoa pequeña, é se vinieron á una carabela +de las que se habian acercado á tierra, en la cual los recibieron con +su amor, é trajéronlos á la nao del Almirante, é dijeron, mediante un +interprete, que un Rey fulano les enviaba á saber que gente eramos, é +á rogar que quisiesemos llegar á tierra, porque tenian mucho oro é le +darian dello, é de lo que tenian de comer: el Almirante les mandó dar +sendas camisas é bonetes é otras cosillas, é les dijo que porque iba á +donde estaba Guacamarí non se podria detener, que otro tiempo habria que +le pudiese ver, é con esto se fueron. No cesamos de andar nuestro camino +fasta llegar á un puerto llamado Monte Cristi, donde estuvimos dos dias +para ver la disposicion de la tierra, porque no habia parecido bien +al Almirante el logar donde habia dejado la gente para hacer asiento. +Decendimos en tierra para ver la dispusicion: habia cerca de allí un gran +rio de muy buena agua; pero es toda tierra anegada é muy indispuesta +para habitar. Andando veyendo el rio é tierra hallaron algunos de los +nuestros en una parte dos hombres muertos junto con el rio, el uno con +un lazo al pescuezo y el otro con otro al pie, esto fue el primero dia. +Otro dia siguiente hallaron otros dos muertos mas adelante de aquellos, +el uno destos estaba en disposicion que se le pudo conocer tener muchas +barbas. Algunos de los nuestros sospecharon mas mal que bien, é con +razon, porque los indios son todos desbarbados, como dicho he. Este +puerto está del lugar donde estaba la gente cristiana doce leguas: +pasados dos dias alzamos velas para el lugar donde el Almirante habia +dejado la sobredicha gente, en compañía de un Rey destos indios, que se +llamaba Guacamarí, que pienso ser de los principales desta isla. Este +dia llegamos en derecho de aquel lugar; pero era ya tarde, é porque allí +habia unos bajos donde el otro dia se habia perdido la nao en que habia +ido el Almirante, no osamos tomar el puerto cerca de tierra fasta que +otro dia de mañana se desfondase é pudiesen entrar seguramente: quedamos +aquella noche no una legua de tierra. Esa tarde, viniendo para allí de +lejos, salió una canoa en que parescian cinco ó seis indios, los cuales +venian á prisa para nosotros. El Almirante creyendo que nos seguraba +hasta alzarnos, no quiso que los esperasemos, é porfiando llegaron hasta +un tiro de lombarda de nosotros, é parabanse á mirar, é desde allí desque +vieron que no los esperabamos dieron vuelta é tornaron su via. Despues +que surgimos en aquel lugar sobredicho tarde, el Almirante mandó tirar +dos lombardas á ver si respondian los cristianos que habian quedado con +el dicho Guacamarí, porque tambien tenian lombardas, los cuales nunca +respondieron ni menos parescian huegos ni señal de casas en aquel lugar, +de lo qual se desconsoló mucho la gente é tomaron la sospecha que de +tal caso se debia tomar. Estando ansi todos muy tristes, pasadas cuatro +ó cinco horas de la noche, vino la misma canoa que esa tarde habiamos +visto, é venia dando voces, preguntando por el Almirante un Capitan de +una carabela donde primero llegaron: trajéronlos á la nao del Almirante, +los cuales nunca quisieron entrar hasta que el Almirante los hablase; +demandaron lumbre para lo conocer, é despues que lo conocieron entraron. +Era uno dellos primo del Guacamarí, el cual los habia enviado otra vez. +Despues que se habian tornado aquella tarde traian caratulas de oro +que Guacamarí enviaba en presente; la una para el Almirante é la otra +para un Capitan quel otro viage habia ido con él. Estovieron en la nao +hablando con el Almirante en presencia de todos por tres horas mostrando +mucho placer, preguntándoles por los Cristianos que tales estaban: aquel +pariente dijo que estaban todos buenos, aunque entro ellos habia algunos +muertos de dolencia é otros de diferencia que habia contecido entre +ellos, é que Guacamarí estaba en otro lugar ferido en una pierna é por +eso no habia venido, pero que otro dia vernia; porque otros dos Reyes, +llamado el uno Caonabó y el otro Mayrení, habian venido á pelear con él +é que le habian quemado el logar; é luego esa noche se tornaron diciendo +que otra dia vernian con el dicho Guacamarí, é con esto nos dejaron por +esa noche consolados. Otro dia en la mañana estovimos esperando que +viniese el dicho Guacamarí, é entretanto saltaron en tierra algunos por +mandado del Almirante, é fueron al lugar donde solian estar, é halláronle +quemado un cortijo algo fuerte con una palizada, donde los Cristianos +habitaban, é tenian lo suyo quemado é derribado, é ciertas bernias é +ropas que los indios habian traido á echar en la casa. Los dichos indios +que por allí parecian andaban muy cahareños, que no se osaban allegar á +nosotros, antes huian; lo cual no nos pareció bien porque el Almirante +nos habia dicho que en llegando á quel lugar salian tantas canoas dellos +á bordo de los navíos á vernos que no nos podriamos defender dellos, é +que en el otro viage ansí lo facian; é como agora veiamos que estaban +sospechosos de nosotros no nos parecia bien, con todo halagándoles aquel +dia é arrojándolos algunas cosas, ansi como cascabeles é cuentas, hobo de +asegurarse un su pariente del dicho Guacamarí é otros tres, los cuales +entraron en la barca é trajéronlos á la nao. Despues que le preguntaron +por los Cristianos dijeron que todos eran muertos, aunque ya nos lo +habia dicho un indio de los que llevabamos de Castilla que lo habian +hablado los dos indios que antes habian venido á la nao, que se habian +quedado á bordo de la nao con su canao, pero lo ne habiamos creido. Fue +preguntado á este pariente do Guacamarí quien los habia muerto: dijo +que el Rey de Canoabó y el Rey Mayrení, é que le quemaron las cosas del +lugar, que estaban dellos muchos heridos, é tambien él dicho Guacamarí +estaba pasado un muslo, y él que estaba en otro lugar y que él queria ir +luego allá á lo llamar, al cual dieron algunas cosas, é luego se partió +para donde estaba Guacamarí. Todo aquel dia los estobimos esperando, +é desque vimos que no venian, muchos tenian sospecha que se habian +ahogado los indios que antenoche habian venido, porque los habian dado +á beber dos ó tres veces de vino, é venian en una canoa pequeña que se +los podria trastornar. Otro dia de mañana salió á tierra el Almirante é +algunos de nosotros, é fuemos donde solia estar la villa, la cual nos +vimos toda quemada é los vestidos de los cristianos se hallaban por +aquella yerba. Por aquella hora no vimos ningun muerto. Habia entre +nosotros muchas razones diferentes, unos sospechando que el mismo +Guacamarí fuese en la traicion ó muerte de los Cristianos, otros les +parecia que no, pues estaba quemada su villa, ansí que la cosa era mucho +para dudar. El Almirante mandó catar todo el sitio donde los Cristianos +estaban fortalecidos porquel los habia mandado que desque toviesen +alguna cantidad de oro que lo enterrasen. Entretanto que esto se hacia +quiso llegar á ver á cerca de una legua do nos parecia que podria haber +asiento para poder edificar una villa porque ya era tiempo, adonde fuimos +ciertos con él mirando la tierra por la costa, fasta que llegamos á un +poblado donde habia siete ú ocho casas; las quales habian desamparado +los indios luego que nos vieron ir, é llevaron lo que pudieron é lo otro +dejaron escondido entre yerbas junto con las casas, que es gente tan +bestial que no tienen discrecion para buscar lugar para habitar, que los +que viven á la marina es maravilla cuan bestialmente edifican, que las +casas enderedor tienen tan cubiertas de yerba ó de humidad, que estoy +espantado como viven. En aquellas casas hallamos muchas cosas de los +Cristianos, las cuales no se creian que ellos hobiesen rescatado, ansí +como una almalafa muy gentil, la cual no se habia descogido de como la +llevaron de Castilla, é calzas é pedazos de paños, é una ancla de la +nao quel Almirante habia allí perdido el otro viage, é otras cosas, de +las cuales mas se esforzó nuestra opinion; y de acá hallamos, buscando +las cosas que tenian guardadas en una esportilla mucho cosida é mucho á +recabdo, una cabeza de hombre mucho guardada. Allí juzgamos por entonces +que seria la cabeza de padre ó madre, ó de persona que mucho querian. +Despues he oido que hayan hallado muchas desta manera, por donde creo +ser verdad lo que allí juzgamos; desde allí nos tornamos. Aquel dia +venimos por donde estaba la villa, y cuando llegamos hallamos muchos +indios que se habian asegurado y estaban rescatando oro: tenian rescatado +fasta un marco: hallamos que habian mostrado donde estaban muertos once +cristianos, cubiertos ya de la yerba que habia crecido sobre ellos, é +todos hablaban por una boca que Caonabó é Mayreni les habian muerto; pero +con todo eso asomaban queja que los Cristianos uno tenia tres mugeres, +otro cuatro, doude creemos quel mal que les vino fue de zelos. Otro dia +de mañana, porque en todo aquello no habia logar dispuesto para nosotros +poder hacer asiento, acordó el Almirante fuese una carabela á una parte +para mirar lugar conveniente, é algunos que fuimos con él fuimos á otra +parte, á do hallamos un puerto muy seguro é muy gentil disposicion de +tierra para habitar, pero porque estaba lejos de donde nos deseabamos +que estaba la mina de oro, no acordó el Almirante de poblar sino en otra +parte que fuese mas cierta si se hallase conveniente disposicion. Cuando +venimos deste lugar hallamos venida la otra carabela que habia ido á la +otra parte á buscar el dicho lugar en la cual habio ido Melchior e otros +cuatro ó cinco hombres de pro. E yendo costeando por tierra salió á ellos +una canoa en que venian dos indios, el uno era hermano de Guacamarí, el +cual fue conocido por un piloto que iba en la dicha carabela, é preguntó +quien iba allí, al cual, dijeron los hombres principales, dijeron que +Guacamarí les rogaba que se llegasen á tierra, donde él tenia su asiento +con fasta cincuenta casas. Los dichos prencipales saltaron en tierra con +la barca é fueron donde él estaba, el cual fallaron en su cama echado +faciendo del doliente ferido. Fablaron con él preguntándole por los +Cristianos: respondió concertando con la mesma razon de los otros, que +era que Caonabó é Mayreni los habian muerto, é que á él habian ferido +en un muslo, el cual mostró ligado: los que entonces lo vieron ansí +les pareció que era verdad como él lo dijo: al tiempo del despedirse +dió á cada uno dellos una joya de oro, á cada uno como le pareció que +lo merescia. Este oro facian en fojas muy delgadas, porque lo quieren +para facer carátulas é para poderse asentar en betun que ellos facen, +si así no fuese no se asentaria. Otro facen para traer en la cabeza é +para colgar en las orejas é narices, ansí que todavía es menester que +sea delgado, pues que ellos nada desto hacen por riqueza salvo por buen +parecer. Dijo el dicho Guacamarí por señas e como mejor pudo, que porque +él estaba ansí herido que dijesen al Almirante que quisiese venir á +verlo. Luego quel Almirante llegó los sobredichos le contaron este caso. +Otro dia de mañana acordó partir para allá, al cual lugar llegariamos +dentro de tres horas, porque apenas habria dende donde estábamos allá +tres leguas; ansí que cuando allí llegamos era hora de comer; comimos +ante de salir en tierra. Luego que hobimos comido mandó el Almirante que +todos los Capitanes viniesen con sus barcas para ir en tierra, porque +ya esa mañana antes que partiesemos de donde estábamos habia venido el +sobredicho su hermano á hablar con el Almirante, é á darle priesa que +fuese al lugar donde estaba el dicho Guacamari. Allí fue el Almirante á +tierra é toda la gente de pro con él, tan ataviados que en una cibdad +prencipal parecieran bien: llevó algunas cosas para le presentar porque +ya habia recibido dél alguna cantidad de oro, é era razon le respondiese +con la obra é voluntad quel habia mostrado. El dicho Guacamarí ansí mismo +tenia aparejado para hacerle presente. Cuando llegamos hallámosle echado +en su cama, como ellos lo usan, colgado en el aire, fecha una cama de +algodon como de red; no se levantó, salvo dende la cama hizo el semblante +de cortesia como él mejor sopo, mostró mucho sentimiento con lágrimas +en los ojos por la muerte de los Cristianos, é comenzó á hablar en ello +mostrando, como mejor podia, como unos murieron de dolencia, é como otros +se habian ido á Caonabó á buscar la mina del oro é que allí los habian +muerto, é los otros que se los habian venido á matar allí en su villa. A +lo que parecian los cuerpos de los muertos no habia dos meses que habia +acaecido. Esa hora el presentó al Almirante ocho marcos y medio de oro, é +cinco ó seiscientos labrados de pedreria de diversos colores, é un bonete +de la misma pedrería, lo cual me parece deben tener ellos en mucho. En el +bonete estaba un joyel, lo cual le dió en mucha veneracion. Paraceme que +tienen en mas el cobre quel oro. Estábamos presentes yo y un zurugiano +de armada; entonces dijo el Almirante al dicho Guacamarí que nosotros +eramos sabios de las enfermedades de los hombres que nos quisiese mostrar +la herida: él respondió que le placia, para lo cual yo dije que seria +necesario, si pudiese, que saliese fuera de casa, porque con la mucha +gente estaba escura é no se podria ver bien; lo cual él fizo luego, creo +mas de empacho que de gana; arrimándose á el salió fuera. Despues de +asentado, llego el zurugiano á él é comenzó de desligarle: entonces dijo +al Almirante que era ferida fecha con ciba, que quiere decir con piedra. +Despues que fue desatada llegamos á tentarle. Es cierto que no tenia mas +mal en aquella que en la otra, aunque él hacia del raposo que le dolia +mucho. Ciertamente no se podia bien determinar porque las razones eran +ignotas, que ciertamente muchas cosas habia que mostraban haber venido +á él gente contraria. Ansimesmo el Almirante no sabia que se hacer: +parescióle, é á otros muchos, que por entonces fasta bien saber la verdad +que se debia disimular, porque despues de sabida, cada que quisiesen, +se podia dél recibir enmienda. E aquella tarde se vino con el Almirante +á las naos, é mostráronle caballos é cuanto ahí habia, de lo cual quedó +muy maravillado como de cosa estraña á él; tomó colacion en la nao, é esa +tarde luego se tornó á su casa: el Almirante dijo que queria ir á habitar +allí con él é queria facer casas, y él respondió que le placia, pero que +el lugar era mal sano porque era muy humido, é tal era él por cierto. +Esto todo pasaba estando por intérpretes dos indios de los que el otro +viage habian ido á Castilla, los cuales habian quedado vivos de siete que +metimos en el puerto, que los cinco se murieron en el camino, los cuales +escaparon á uña de caballo. Otro dia estuvimos surtos en aquel puerto; é +quiso saber cuando se partiria el Almirante: le mandó decir que otro dia. +En aquel dia vinieron á la nao el sobredicho hermano suyo é otros con él, +é trajeron algun oro para rescatar. Ansí mesmo el dia que allá salimos se +rescató buena cantidad de oro. En la nao habia diez mugeres de las que se +habian tomado en las islas de Cariby; eran las mas dellas de Boriquen. +Aquel hermano de Guacamarí habló con ellas: creemos que les dijo lo que +luego esa noche pusieron por obra y es que al primer sueño muy mansamente +se echaron al agua é se fueron á tierra, de manera que cuando fueron +falladas menos iban tanto trecho que con las barcas no pudieron tomar +mas de las cuatro, las cuales tomaron al salir del agua; fueron nadando +mas de una gran media legua. Otro dia de mañana envió el Almirante á +decir á Guacamarí que le enviase aquellas mugeres que la noche antes se +habian huido, é que luego las mandase buscar. Cuando fueren hallaron +el lugar despoblado, que no estaba persona en el: ahí tornaron muchos +fuerte á afirmar su sospecha, otros decian que se habria mudado á otra +poblacion quellos ansí lo suelen hacer. Aquel dia estovimos allí quedos +por que el tiempo era contrario para salir: otro dia de mañana acordó +el Almirante, pues que el tiempo era contrario, que seria bien ir con +las barcas á ver un puerto la costa arriba, fasta el cual habria dos +leguas, para ver si habria dispusicion de tierra para hacer habitacion; +donde fuemos con todas las barcas de los navíos dejando los navíos en el +puerto. Fuimos corriendo toda la costa, é tambien estos no se seguraban +bien de nosotros; llegamos á un lugar de donde todos eran huidos. Andando +por él fallamos junto con las casas, metido en el monte, un indio ferido +de una vara, de una ferida que resollaba por las espaldas, que no habia +podido huir mas lejos. Los desta isla pelean con unas varas agudas, las +cuales tiran con unas tiranderas como las que tiran los mochachos las +varillas en Castilla, con las cuales tiran muy lejos asaz certero. Es +cierto que para gente desarmada que pueden hacer harto daño. Este nos +dijo que Caonabó é los suyos lo habian ferido, é habian quemado las casas +á Guacamarí. Ansí quel poco entender que los entendemos é las razones +equívocas nos han traido á todos tan afuscados que fasta agora no se +ha podido saber la verdad de la muerte de nuestra gente, é no hallamos +en aquel puerto dispusicion saludable parer hacer habitacion. Acordó +el Almirante nos tornásemos por la costa arriba por do habiámos venido +de Castilla, porque la nueva del oro era fasta allá. Fuenos el tiempo +contrario, que mayor pena nos fue tornar treinta leguas atrás que venir +desde Castilla, que con el tiempo contrario é la largueza del camino ya +eran tres meses pasados cuando decendimos en tierra. Plugó á nuestro +Señor que por la contrariedad del tiempo que no nos dejó ir mas adelante, +hobimos de tomar tierra en el mejor sitio y dispusicion que pudieramos +escoger, donde hay mucho buen puerto é grrn pesquería, de la cual tenemos +mucha necesidad por el carecimiento de las carnes. Hay en esta tierra muy +singular pescado mas sano quel de España. Verdad sea que la tierra no +consiente que se guarde de un dia para otro porque es caliente é humida, +é por ende luego las cosas introfatibles ligeramente se corrompen. La +tierra es muy gruesa para todas cosas; tiene junto un rio prencipal é +otro razonable, asaz cerca de muy singular agua: edificase sobre la +ribera dél una cibdad Marta, junto quel lugar se deslinda con el agua, de +manera que la metad de la cibdad queda cercada de agua con una barranca +de peña tajada, tal que por allí no ha menester defensa ninguna; la otra +metad está cercada de una arboleda espesa que apenas podrá un conejo +andar por ella; es tan verde que en ningun tiempo del mundo fuego la +podrá quemar: hase comenzado á traer un brazo del rio, el cual dicen los +maestros que trairán por medio del lugar, é asentarán en él moliendas é +sierras de agua, é cuanto se pudiere hacer con agua. Han sembrado mucha +hortaliza, la cual es cierto que crece mas en ocho dias que en España en +veinte. Vienen aquí continuamente muchos indios é caciques con ellos, +que son como capitanes dellos, é muchas indias: todos vienen cargados de +_ages_, que son como nabos, muy excelente manjar, de los cuales facemos +acá muchas maneras de manjares en cualquier manera; es tanto cordial +manjar que nos tiene á todos muy consolados, porque de verdad la vida que +se trajo por la mar ha seido la mas estrecha que nunca hombres pasaron, +é fue ansí necesario porque no sabiamos que tiempo nos haria, ó cuanto +permitiría Dios que estoviesemos en el camino; ansí que fue cordura +estrecharnos, porque cualquier tiempo que viniera pudieramos conservar +la vida. Rescatan el oro é mantenimientos é todo lo que traen por cabos +de agujetas, por cuentas, por alfileres, por pedasos de escudillas é de +plateles. A este _age_ llaman los de Caribi _nabi_, é los indios _hage_. +Toda esta gente, como dicho tengo, andan como nacieron, salvo las mugeres +de esta isla traen cubiertas sus verguenzas, dellos con ropa de algodon +que les ciñen las caderas, otras con yerbas é fojas de árboles. Sus galas +dellos é dellas es pintarse, unos de negro, otros de blanco é colorado, +de tantos visajes que en verlos es bien cosa de reir; las cabezas rapadas +en logares, é en logares con vedijas de tantas maneras que no se podria +escrebir. En conclusion, que todo lo que allá en nuestra España quieren +hacer en la cabeza de un loco; acá el mejor dellos vos lo terná en mucha +merced. Aquí estamos en comarca de muchas minas de ora, que segun lo que +ellos dicen no hay cada una dellas de veinte ó veinte é cinco leguas: +las unas dicen que son en Niti, en poder de Caonabó, aquel que mató los +cristianos; otras hay en otra parte que se llama Cibao, las cuales, si +place á nuestro Señor, sabremos é veremos con los ojos antes que pasen +muchos dias, porque agora se ficiera sino porque hay tantas cosas de +proveer que no bastamos para todo, porque la gente ha adolecido en cuatro +ó cinco dias el tercio della, creo la mayor causa dello ha seido el +trabajo é mala pasada del camino: allende de la diversidad de la tierra; +pero espero en nuestro Señor que todos se levantarán con salud. Lo que +parece desta gente es que si lengua toviesemos que todos se convertirian, +porque cuanto nos veen facer tanto facen, en hincar las rodillas á +los altares, é al Ave Maria, é á las otras devociones é santiguarse: +todos dicen que quieren ser cristianos, puesto que verdaderamente son +idólatras, porque en sus casas hay figuras de muchas maneras; yo les he +preguntado que es aquello, dicenme que es cosa de _Turey_, que quiere +decir del cielo. Yo acometi á querer echarselos en el fuego é haciaseles +de mal que querian llorar: pero ansi piensan que cuanto nosotros traemos +que es cosa del cielo, que á todo llaman _Turey_, que quiere decir cielo. +El dia que yo salí á dormir en tierra fue el primero dia del Señor: el +poco tiempo que habemos gastado en tierra ha seido mas en hacer donde +nos metamos, é buscar las cosas necessarias, que en saber las cosas que +hay en la tierra, pero aunque ha sido poco se han visto cosas bien de +maravillar, que se han visto árboles que llevan lana y harto fina, tal +que los que saben del arte dicen que podrán hacer buenos paños dellos. +Destos árboles hay tantos que se podrán cargar las carabelas de la lana, +aunque es trabajosa de coger, porque los árboles son muy espinosos; +pero bien se puede hallar ingenio para la coger. Hay infinito algodon +de árboles perpetuos tan grandes como duraznos. Hay árboles que llevan +cera en color y en sabor, é en arder tan buena como la de abejas, tal +que no hay diferencia mucha de la una á la otra. Hay infinitos árboles +de trementina muy singular é muy fina. Hay mucho alquitira, tambien +muy buena. Hay árboles que pienso que llevan nueces moscadas, salvo +que agora estan sin fruto, é digo que lo pienso porque el sabor y olor +de la corteza es como de nueces moscadas. Vi una raiz de gengibre que +la traía un indio colgada al cuello. Hay tambien linaloe, aunque no es +de la manera del que fasta agora se ha visto en nuestras partes; pero +no es de dudar que sea una de las especias de linaloes que los dotores +ponemos. Tambien se ha hallado una manera de canela, verdad es que no es +tan fina como la que allá se ha visto, no sabemos si por veutura lo hace +el defeto de saberla coger en sus tiempos como se ha de coger, ó si por +ventura la tierra no la lleva mejor. Tambien se ha hallado mirabolanos +cetrinos, salvo que agora no estan sino debajo del árbol, como la tierra +es muy humida estan podridos, tienen el sabor mucho amargo, yo creo sea +del podrimiento; pero todo lo otro, salvo el sabor que está corrompido, +es de mirabolanos verdaderos. Hay tambien almástica muy buena. Todas +estas gentes destas islas, que fasta agora se han visto, no poseen fierro +ninguno. Tienen muchas ferramientas, ansi como hachas é azuelas hechas de +piedra tan gentiles é tan labradas que es maravilla como sin fierro se +pueden hacer. El mantenimiento suyo es pan hecho de raices de una yerba +que es entre árbol é yerba, é el age, de que ya tengo dicho que es como +nabos, que es muy buen mantenimiento: tienen por especia, por lo adobar, +una especia que se llama _agi_, con la cual comen tambien el pescado, +como aves cuando las pueden haber, que hay infinitas de muchas maneras. +Tienen otrosí unos granos como avellanas, muy buenos de comer. Comen +cuantas culebras é lagartos é arañas é cuantos gusanos se hallan por el +suelo; ansi que me parece es mayor su bestialidad que de ninguna bestia +del mundo. Despues de una vez haber determinado el Almirante de dejar +el descobrir las minas fasta primero enviar los navíos que se habian de +partir á Castilla, por la mucha enfermedad que habia seido en la gente, +acordó de enviar dos cuadrillas con dos Capitanes, el uno á Cibao y el +otro á Niti, donde está Caonobó, de que ya he dicho, las cuales fueron +é vinieron el uno á veinte dias de Enero, é el otro á veinte é uno: el +que fue á Cibao halló oro en tantas partes que no lo osa hombre decir, +que de verdad en mas de cincuenta arroyos é rios hallaban oro, é fuera +de los rios por tierra; de manera que en toda aquella provincia dice que +do quiera que lo quieran buscar lo hallarán. Trajo muestra de muchas +partes como en la arena de los rios é en las hontizuelas, que estan sobre +tierra, creese que cabando, como sabemos hacer, se hallará en mayores +pedazos, porque los indios no saben cabar ni tienen con que puedan cabar +de un palmo arriba. El otro que fue á Niti trajo tambien nueva de mucho +oro en tres ó cuatro partes; ansi mesmo trajo la muestra dello. Ansi +que de cierto los Reyes nuestros Señores desde agora se pueden tener +por los mas prósperos é mas ricos Príncipes del mundo, porque tal cosa +hasta agora no se ha visto ni leido de ninguno en el mundo, porque +verdaderamente á otro camino que los navíos vuelvan pueden llevar tanta +cantidad de oro que se puedan maravillar cualesquiera que lo supieren. +Aquí me parece sera bien cesar el cuento: creo los que no me conocen que +oyeren éstas cosas, me ternán por prolijo é por hombre que ha alargado +algo; pero Dios es testigo que yo no he traspasado una jota los términos +de la verdad. + +Hasta aquí es el treslado de lo que conviene á nuevas de aquellas partes +é Indias. Lo demas que venia en la carta no hace al caso, porque son +cosas particulares que el dicho Dotor Chanca, como natural de Sevilla, +suplicaba y encomendaba á los del Cabildo de Sevilla que tocaba á su +hacienda y á los suyos, que en la dicha cibdad habia dejado, y llegó esta +á Sevilla en el mes de [150] año de mil é cuatrocientos énoventa y tres +años. + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[108] Doctor Chanca was appointed physician to Columbus’s fleet by a +dispatch of the 23rd of May, 1493; and on the 24th, the chief accountants +were instructed to pay him salary and rations as scrivener in the Indies. +Señor de Navarrete, who saw the manuscript, “Historia de la Reyes +Católicos,” says that its author, Andres Bernaldez, Cura de los Palacios, +makes mention of Dr. Chanca, and had this same narration before him, as +may be seen in the one hundred and twentieth chapter of his history. + +[109] A similar gap in the original: it should say _of the year 1493_. + +[110] The island of Dominica, so called from having been discovered on a +Sunday. + +[111] The island Marigalante, so called from the name of the ship in +which Columbus sailed. + +[112] Dominica has no harbours, but there are several good roadsteads on +the western side. + +[113] Marigalante. + +[114] The fruit of the manchineal, which apparently produces similar +effects. + +[115] Guadaloupe. + +[116] It was Diego Marquez, the caterer, who with eight other men went +on shore into the interior of the island, without permission from the +admiral, who caused him to be sought for by parties of men with trumpets, +but without success. One of those who were sent out with this object, was +Alonzo de Hojeda, who took with him forty men, and on their return they +reported that they had found many aromatic plants, a variety of birds, +and some considerable rivers. The wanderers were not able to find their +way to the ships until the eighth of November. (M. F. Navarrete’s note, +from Bartholomeo de las Casas’ Manuscript History, chap. 84.) + +[117] This island, called further on Cayre, is most probably the “Charis” +or “Carib” referred to on page 14, which the log of the first voyage +makes to be next to and westward of Matenin, which latter all evidence +shows to be Martinique. Dominica, therefore, will be Charis or Ceyre. +Turuqueira and Ayay, probably the two islands which form Guadaloupe. + +[118] Tuesday the 12th of November. + +[119] The island Montserrat. See Herrera, Dec. 1. L. 2, c. vii. + +[120] The admiral called it Santa Maria la Redonda. See _ibid._ + +[121] Santa Maria la Antigua. See _ibid._ + +[122] The island of St. Martin. See _ibid._ + +[123] Dominica, see note, p. 31. + +[124] The island of _Santa Cruz_, where they anchored on Thursday the +fourteenth of November. See Herrera, Dec. 1. L. 2, cap. vii. + +[125] The admiral named the largest of these islands _St. Ursula_, and +all the others _The eleven thousand Virgins_. See _ibid._ + +[126] The island of _Porto Rico_, to which the admiral gave the name of +_St. John the Baptist_. See Herrera, Dec. 1. L. 2, cap. vii. + +[127] Porto Rico. + +[128] On Friday, the twenty-second of November, the admiral first caught +sight of the island of Española. See Herrera, Dec. 1. L. 2, cap. vii. + +[129] Mona Island. + +[130] Apparently between Point Macao and Point Engaño, which is flat. The +higher land of the north coast commences at Point Macao. + +[131] On the parallel of 18° 25′ the island has an extreme length of 400 +miles, and its extreme breadth may be taken at 150 on the meridian of 71° +20′. + +[132] In all probability a species of _capromys_. + +[133] Cabras or Goat Island, close to “el Fraile” in the Bay of Monte +Cristi. + +[134] An alligator. + +[135] The river Yaque. + +[136] The admiral anchored at the entrance of the harbour of Navidad, on +Wednesday, the twenty-seventh of November, towards midnight, and on the +following day put into the harbour. See Herrera, Dec. 1. L. 2, cap. viii +and ix. + +[137] The Bay of Caracol, four leagues west of Fort Dauphin. + +[138] This is the earliest mention of a hammock. + +[139] Port Dauphin. + +[140] Port Isabelique, or Isabella, ten leagues to the east of Monte +Christi. + +[141] The river Isabella. + +[142] The infant city of Isabella. + +[143] Yams. + +[144] A species of the natural order _Bombaceæ_; perhaps the _Eriodendron +anfractuosum_. + +[145] These were probably trees of the laurel tribe, the bark of which is +generally spicy like cinnamon. The cinnamon mentioned below was probably +also one of these and not true cinnamon. + +[146] Barbadoes aloes, still considered as of inferior quality to those +of Socotra. + +[147] In fact he sent twelve vessels under the command of Antonio de +Torres, who set sail from the port of Navidad, on the second of February, +1494, charged with an account of all that had occurred. (Navarrete.) + +[148] This was Alonzo de Ojeda, who went out with fifteen men, in the +month of January 1494, to seek the mines of Cibao, and returned a few +days after with good news, having been well received everywhere by the +natives. (Navarrete.) + +[149] It is to be regretted, Navarrete here justly remarks, that +Dr. Chanca should not have described the subsequent occurrences in +Hispaniola, which are very important, and which have been related by +cotemporary historians. + +[150] A similar gap in the original. The date of the year is a mistake. +This letter might have been brought by the ships commanded by Torres, and +consequently must have been written at the end of January, 1494, after +the expedition of Ojeda. (Navarrete.) + + + + +MEMORIAL. + + +_Memorial of the results of the Second Voyage of the Admiral, Christopher +Columbus, to the Indies, drawn up by him for their Highnesses King +Ferdinand and Queen Isabella; and addressed to Antonio de Torres, from +the City of Isabella, the 30th of January, 1494. The reply of their +Highnesses is affixed at the end of each chapter._[151] + +The report which you, Antonio de Torres, captain of the ship +_Marigalante_, and Governor of the city of Isabella, have to make, on my +behalf, to the King and Queen our sovereigns, is as follows: + +Imprimis: after having delivered the credentials which you bear from me +to their Highnesses, you will do homage in my name, and commend me to +them as to my natural sovereigns, in whose service I desire to continue +till death; and you will furthermore be able to lay before them all that +you have yourself seen and known respecting me. + +_Their Highnesses accept and acknowledge the service._ + +Item: Although, by the letters which I have written to their Highnesses, +as well as to Father Buil and to the Treasurer, a clear and comprehensive +idea may be formed of all that has transpired since our arrival; you +will, notwithstanding, inform their Highnesses, on my behalf, that God +has been pleased to manifest such favour towards their service, that not +only has nothing hitherto occurred to diminish the importance of what I +have formerly written or said to their Highnesses; but on the contrary I +hope, by God’s grace, shortly to prove it more clearly by facts; because +we have found upon the sea shore, without penetrating into the interior +of the country, some spots showing so many indications of various spices, +as naturally to suggest the hope of the best results for the future. The +same holds good with respect to the gold mines; for two parties only, +who were sent, out in different directions to discover them, and who, +because they had few people with them, remained out but a short time, +found, nevertheless, a great number of rivers whose sands contained this +precious metal in such quantity, that each man took up a sample of it +in his hand; so that our two messengers returned so joyous, and boasted +so much of the abundance of gold, that I feel a hesitation in speaking +and writing of it to their Highnesses. But as Gorbalan, who was one of +the persons who went on the discovery, is returning to Spain, he will be +able to relate all that he has seen and observed; although there remains +here another individual,—named Hojeda, formerly servant of the Duke of +Medinaceli, and a very discreet and pains-taking youth,—who without doubt +discovered, beyond all comparison, more than the other, judging by the +account which he gave of the rivers he had seen; for he reported, that +each of them contained things that appeared incredible. It results from +all this, that their Highnesses ought to return thanks to God, for the +favour which He thus accords to all their Highnesses’ enterprises. + +_Their Highnesses return thanks to God for all that is recorded, and +regard as a very signal service all that the Admiral has already done, +and is yet doing; for they are sensible that, under God, it is he who +has procured for them their present and future possessions in these +countries; and as they are about to write to him on this subject more at +length, they refer to their letter._ + +Item. You will repeat to their Highnesses what I have already written +to them, that I should have ardently desired to have been able to send +them, by this occasion, a larger quantity of gold than what they have +any hope of our being able to collect, but that the greater part of the +people we employed fell suddenly ill. Moreover, the departure of this +present expedition could not be delayed any longer, for two reasons: +namely, on account of the heavy expense which their stay here occasioned; +and because the weather was favourable for their departure, and for the +return of those who should bring back the articles of which we stand in +the most pressing need. If the former were to put off the time of their +starting, and the latter were to delay their departure, they would not +be able to reach here by the month of May. Besides, if I wished now to +undertake a journey to the rivers with those who are well,—whether with +those who are at sea, or those who are on land in the huts,—I should +experience great difficulties, and even dangers; because, in traversing +three or four-and-twenty leagues, where there are bays and rivers to +pass, we should be obliged to carry, as provision for so long a journey, +and for the time necessary for collecting the gold, many articles of +food, etc., which could not be carried on our backs, and there are +no beasts of burden to be found, to afford the necessary assistance. +Moreover, the roads and passes are not in such a condition as I should +wish for travelling over; but they have already begun to make them +passable. It would be also extremely inconvenient to leave the sick men +here in the open air, or in huts, with such food and defences as they +have on shore; although these Indians appear every day to be more simple +and harmless to those who land for the purpose of making investigations. +In short, although they come every day to visit us, it would nevertheless +be imprudent to risk the loss of our men and our provisions, which might +very easily happen, if an Indian were only, with a lighted coal, to set +fire to the huts, for they ramble about both night and day; for this +reason, we keep sentinels constantly on the watch while the dwellings are +exposed and undefended. + +_He has done well._ + +Further, as we have remarked that the greatest part of those who have +gone out to make discoveries, have fallen sick on their return, and that +some have even been obliged to abandon the undertaking in the middle of +their journey, and return, it was equally to be feared that the same +would occur to those who were at the time enjoying good health, if +they were also to go. There were two evils to fear:—one, the chance of +falling ill in undertaking the same work, in a place where there were no +houses nor any kind of protection, and of being exposed to the attacks +of the cacique called Caonabo, who, by all accounts, is a badly-disposed +man, and extremely daring; who, if he were to find us in a dispirited +condition and sick, might venture upon what he would not dare to do if +we were well. The other evil consisted in the difficulty of carrying the +gold; for, either we should have to carry it in small quantities, and go +and return every day, and thus daily expose ourselves to the chance of +sickness; or we should have to send it under the escort of a party of +our people, and equally run the risk of losing them. + +_He has done well._ + +These are the reasons, you will tell their Highnesses, why the departure +of the expedition has not been delayed, and why only a sample of the +gold is sent to them; but I trust in the mercy of God, who in all +things and in every place has guided us hitherto, that all our men will +be soon restored to health, as, indeed, they are already beginning to +be; for they have but to try this country for a little time and they +speedily recover their health. One thing is certain, that if they could +have fresh meat, they would very quickly, by the help of God, be up and +doing; and those who are most sickly, would speedily recover. I hope +that they may be restored. The small number of those who continue well, +are employed every day in barricading our dwelling, so as to put it in +a state of defence, and in taking necessary measures for the safety +of our ammunition; which will be finished now in a few days, for all +our fortifications will consist simply of stone walls.[152] These +precautions will be sufficient, as the Indians are not a people to be +much afraid of; and, unless they should find us asleep, they would not +dare to undertake any hostile movement against us, even if they should +entertain the idea of so doing. The misfortune which happened to those +who remained here, must be attributed to their want of vigilance; for +however few they were in number, and however favourable the opportunities +that the Indians may have had for doing what they did, they would never +have ventured to do them any injury, if they had only seen that they took +proper precautions against an attack. As soon as this object is gained, I +will undertake to go in search of these rivers; either proceeding hence +by land, and looking out for the best expedients that may offer, or else +by sea, rounding the island until we come to the place which is described +as being only six or seven leagues from where these rivers that I speak +of are situated; so that we may collect the gold in safety, and put it +in security against all attacks in some stronghold or tower, which may +be quickly built for that purpose: and thus, when the two caravels shall +return thither, the gold may be taken away and finally sent home in +safety at the first favourable season for making the voyage. + +_This is well and exactly as he should do._ + +Item. You will inform their Highnesses (as indeed has been already +said), that the cause of the sickness so general among us, is the change +of air and water, for we find that all of us are affected, though few +dangerously; consequently, the preservation of the health of the people +will depend, under God, on their being provided with the same food +that they are accustomed to in Spain: neither those who are here now, +nor those that shall come, will be in a position to be of service to +their Highnesses, unless they enjoy good health. We ought to have fresh +supplies of provisions until the time that we may be able to gather a +sufficient crop from what we shall have sown or planted here: I speak +of wheat, barley, and grapes, towards the cultivation of which not +much has been done this year, from our being unable earlier to choose +a convenient settlement. When we had chosen it, the small number of +labourers that were with us fell sick; and, even when they recovered, +we had so few cattle, and those so lean and weak, that the utmost they +could do was very little; however, they have sown a few plots of ground, +for the sake of trying the soil, which seems excellent, in the hope of +thereby obtaining some relief in our necessities. We are very confident, +from what we can see, that wheat and grapes will grow very well in +this country. We must, however, wait for the fruit; and if it grows as +quickly and well as the corn, in proportion to the number of vines that +have been planted, we shall certainly not stand in need of Andalusia and +Sicily here. There are also sugar-canes, of which the small quantity +that we have planted has taken root. The beauty of the country in these +islands,—the mountains, the valleys, the streams, the fields watered by +broad rivers,—is such that there is no country on which the sun sheds his +beams that can present a more charming appearance. + +_Since the land is so fertile, it is desirable to sow of all kinds as +much as possible; and Don Juan de Fonseca is instructed to send over +immediately everything requisite for that purpose._ + +Item. You will say, that as a large portion of the wine that we brought +with us has run away, in consequence, as most of the men say, of the bad +cooperage of the butts made at Seville, the article that we stand most +in need of now, and shall stand in need of, is wine; and although we +have biscuit and corn for some time longer, it is nevertheless necessary +that a reasonable quantity of these be sent to us, for the voyage is +a long one, and it is impossible to make a calculation for every day; +the same holds good with respect to pork and salt beef, which should be +better than what we brought out with us on this voyage. Sheep, and still +better, lambs and lambkins, more females than males, young calves and +heifers, also are wanted, and should be sent by every caravel that may +be dispatched hither; and at the same time some asses, both male and +female, and mares for labour and tillage; for here there are no beasts +that a man can turn to any use. As I fear that their Highnesses may not +be at Seville, and that their officers or ministers will not, without +their express instructions, make any movement towards the carrying out +of the necessary arrangements for the return voyage; and that, in the +interval between the report and the reply, the favourable moment for the +departure of the vessels which are to return hither (and which should +be in all the month of May) may elapse, you will tell their Highnesses, +as I charged and ordered you, that I have given strict orders that the +gold that you carry with you be placed in the hands of some merchant in +Seville, in order that he may therefrom disburse the sums necessary for +loading the two caravels with wine, corn, and other articles detailed in +this memorial; and this merchant shall convey or send the said gold to +their Highnesses, that they may see it, receive it, and from it cause to +be defrayed the expenses that may arise from the fitting-up and loading +of the said two caravels. It is necessary, for the encouragement of the +men who remain here, and for the support of their spirits, that an effort +should be made to let the expedition arrive in the course of the month of +May, so that before summer they may have the fresh provisions, and other +necessaries, especially against sickness. We particularly stand in need +of raisins, sugar, almonds, honey, and rice, of which we ought to have +had a great quantity, but brought very little with us, and what we had is +now consumed. The greater part of the medicines, also, that we brought +from Spain are used up, so many of our number having been sick. For all +these articles, both for those who are in good health and for the sick, +you carry, as I have already said, memorials signed by my hand; you will +execute my orders to the full, if there be sufficient money wherewith to +do so, or you will at least procure what is more immediately necessary, +and which ought, consequently, to come as speedily as possible by the +two vessels. As to the remainder, you will obtain their Highnesses’ +permission for their being sent by other vessels without loss of time. + +_Their Highnesses will give instructions to Don Juan de Fonseca to make +immediate inquiry respecting the imposition in the matter of the casks, +in order that those who supplied them shall at their own expense make +good the loss occasioned by the waste of the wine, together with the +costs. He will have to see that sugar-canes of good quality be sent, +and will immediately look to the despatch of the other articles herein +required._ + +Item. You will tell their Highnesses, that as we have no interpreter +through whom we can make these people acquainted with our holy faith, +as their Highnesses and we ourselves desire, and as we will do so soon +as we are able, we send by these two vessels some of these cannibal men +and women, as well as some children, both male and female, whom their +Highnesses might order to be placed under the care of the most competent +persons to teach them the language. At the same time they might be +employed in useful occupations, and by degrees through somewhat more care +being bestowed upon them than upon other slaves, they would learn one +from the other. By not seeing or speaking to each other for a long time, +they will learn much sooner in Spain than they will here, and become much +better interpreters. We will, however, not fail to do what we can; it +is true, that as there is but little communication between one of these +islands and another, there is some difference in their mode of expressing +themselves, which mainly depends on the distance between them. But as +amongst all these islands, those inhabited by the cannibals are the +largest and the most populous, it must be evident that nothing but good +can come from sending to Spain men and women who may thus one day be led +to abandon their barbarous custom of eating their fellow-creatures. By +learning the Spanish language in Spain, they will much earlier receive +baptism and advance the welfare of their souls; moreover, we shall gain +great credit with the Indians who do not practise the above-mentioned +cruel custom, when they see that we have seized and led captive those +who injure them, and whose very name alone fills them with horror. You +will assure their Highnesses, that our arrival in this country, and the +sight of so fine a fleet, have produced the most imposing effect for the +present, and promise great security hereafter; for all the inhabitants of +this great island, and of the others, when they see the good treatment +that we shall shew to those who do well, and the punishment that we shall +inflict on those who do wrong, will hasten to submit, so that we shall be +able to lay our commands on them as vassals of their Highnesses. And as +even now they not only readily comply with every wish that we express, +but also of their own accord endeavour to do what they think will please +us, I think that their Highnesses may feel assured that, on the other +side also, the arrival of this fleet has, in many respects, secured for +them, both for the present and the future, a wide renown amongst all +Christian Princes; but they themselves will be able to form a much better +judgment on this subject than it is in my power to give expression to. + +_Let him be informed of what has transpired respecting the cannibals that +came over to Spain. He has done well and let him do as he says; but let +him endeavour by all possible means to convert them to our holy Catholic +religion, and do the same with respect to the inhabitants of all the +islands to which he may go._ + +Item. You will tell their Highnesses, that the welfare of the souls of +the said cannibals, and of the inhabitants of this island also, has +suggested the thought that the greater the number that are sent over to +Spain the better, and thus good service may result to their Highnesses +in the following manner. Considering what great need we have of cattle +and of beasts of burthen, both for food and to assist the settlers in +this and all these islands, both for peopling the land and cultivating +the soil, their Highnesses might authorize a suitable number of caravels +to come here every year to bring over the said cattle, and provisions, +and other articles; these cattle, etc., might be sold at moderate prices +for account of the bearers, and the latter might be paid with slaves, +taken from among the Caribbees, who are a wild people, fit for any work, +well proportioned and very intelligent, and who, when they have got rid +of the cruel habits to which they have become accustomed, will be better +than any other kind of slaves. When they are out of their country, they +will forget their cruel customs; and it will be easy to obtain plenty of +these savages by means of row-boats that we propose to build. It is taken +for granted, that each of the caravels sent by their Highnesses, will +have on board a confidential man, who will take care that the vessels do +not stop anywhere else than here, where they are to unload and reload +their vessels. Their Highnesses might fix duties on the slaves that may +be taken over, upon their arrival in Spain. You will ask for a reply upon +this point, and bring it to me, in order that I may be able to take the +necessary measures, should the proposition merit the approbation of their +Highnesses. + +_The consideration of this subject has been suspended for a time, until +fresh advices arrive from the other side: let the Admiral write what he +thinks upon the subject._ + +Item. You will also tell their Highnesses, that freighting the ships +by the ton, as the Flemish merchants do, will be more advantageous and +less expensive than any other mode, and it is for this reason that I +have given you instructions to freight in this manner the caravels that +you have now to send off, and it will be well to adopt this plan with +all the others that their Highnesses may send provided it meets their +approbation; but I do not mean to say that this measure should be applied +to the vessels that shall come over licensed for the traffic of slaves. + +_Their Highnesses have given directions to Don Juan de Fonseca, to have +the caravels freighted in the manner described, if it can be done._ + +Item. You will tell their Highnesses, that in order to save any extra +expense, I have purchased the caravels mentioned in the memorial of which +you are the bearer, in order to keep them here with the two vessels, +the _Gallega_ and the _Capitana_, of which, by advice of the pilot its +commander, I purchased the three-eighths for the price declared in the +said memorial, signed by my hand. These vessels will not only give +authority and great security to those who will have to remain on shore +and whose duty it will be to make arrangements with the Indians for +collecting the gold; but they will be also very useful to ward off any +attack that may be made upon them by strangers; moreover, the caravels +will be required for the task of making the discovery of terra firma, +and of the islands which lie scattered about in this vicinity. You will +therefore beg their Highnesses to pay, at the term of credit arranged +with the sellers, the sums which these vessels shall cost, for without +doubt their Highnesses will be very soon reimbursed for what they may +expend; at least, such is my belief and hope in the mercy of God. + +_The Admiral has done well. You will tell him that the sum mentioned has +been paid to the seller of the vessels, and that Don Juan de Fonseca has +been ordered to pay the cost of the caravels purchased by the Admiral._ + +Item. You will speak to their Highnesses, and beseech them on my behalf, +in the most humble manner possible, to be pleased to give mature +reflection to the observations I may make, in letters or more detailed +statements, with reference to the peacefulness, harmony, and good +feeling of those who come hither; in order that for their Highnesses +service persons may be selected who will hold in view the purpose for +which these men are sent, rather than their own interest; and since you +yourself have seen and are acquainted with these matters, you will speak +to their Highnesses upon this subject, and will tell them the truth on +every point exactly as you have understood it; you will also take care +that the orders which their Highnesses shall give on this point be put +into effect, if possible, by the first vessels, in order that no further +injury occur here in the matters that affect their service. + +_Their Highnesses are well informed of all that takes place, and will see +to it that everything is done as it should be._ + +Item. You will describe to their Highnesses the position of this city, +the beauty of the province in which it is situated, as you have seen it, +and as you can honestly speak of it; and you can inform them, that in +virtue of the powers which I have received from them, I have made you +governor of the said city; and you will tell them also that I humbly +beseech them, out of consideration for your services, to receive your +nomination favourably, which I sincerely hope they may do. + +_Their Highnesses are pleased to sanction your appointment as governor._ + +Item. As Messire Pedro Margarite, an officer of the household to their +Highnesses, has done good service, and will, I hope, continue to do so +for the future in all matters which may be entrusted to him, I have +felt great pleasure in his continuing his stay in this country; and I +have been much pleased to find that Gaspar and Beltran also remain: +and as they are all three well known to their Highnesses as faithful +servants, I shall place them in posts or employments of trust. You will +beg their Highnesses especially to have regard to the situation of +the said Messire Pedro Margarite, who is married and the father of a +family, and beseech them to give him some vacant command in the order of +Santiago, of which he is a knight, in order that his wife and children +may thus have a competence to live upon. You will also make mention of +Juan Aguado, a servant of their Highnesses; you will inform them of the +zeal and activity with which he has served them in all matters that have +been entrusted to him; and also that I beseech their Highnesses on his +behalf, as well as on behalf of those above mentioned, not to forget my +recommendation, but to give it full consideration. + +_Their Highnesses grant an annual pension of thirty thousand maravedis +to Messire Pedro Margarite, and pensions of fifteen thousand maravedis +to Gaspard and Beltram, which will be reckoned from this day, the 15th +of August 1494. They give orders that the said pensions be paid by the +Admiral out of the sums to be paid in the Indies, and by Don Juan de +Fonseca out of the sums to be paid in Spain. With respect to the matter +of Juan Aguado, their Highnesses will not be forgetful._ + +Item. You will inform their Highnesses of the continual labour that +Doctor Chanca has undergone, from the prodigious number of sick and the +scarcity of provisions: and that, in spite of all this, he exhibits the +greatest zeal and kindness in everything that relates to his profession. +As their highnesses have entrusted me with the charge of fixing the +salary that is to be paid to him while out here (although it is certain +that he neither receives, nor can receive anything from any one, and +does not receive anything from his position, equal to what he did, and +could still do in Spain, where he lived peaceably and at ease, in a very +different style from what he does here; and, although he declares that he +earned more in Spain, exclusive of the pay which he received from their +Highnesses), I have, nevertheless, not ventured to place to the credit +of his account more than fifty thousand maravedis per annum, as the sum +which he is to receive for his yearly labour during the time of his stay +in this country. I beg their Highnesses to give their sanction to this +salary, exclusive of his maintenance while here; and I do so, because he +asserts that all the medical men who attend their Highnesses in the royal +yachts, or in any of their expeditions, are accustomed to receive by +right the day’s pay out of the annual salary of each individual. Let this +be as it may, I am informed for certain, that on whatever service they +are engaged, it is the custom to give them a certain fixed sum, settled +at the will and by order of their Highnesses, as compensation for the +said day’s pay. You will, therefore, beg their Highnesses to decide this +matter, as well with respect to the annual pay as to the above-mentioned +usage, so that the said doctor may be reasonably satisfied. + +_Their Highnesses acknowledge the justice of Doctor Chanca’s +observations, and it is their wish that the Admiral shall pay him the +sum which he has allowed him, exclusive of his fixed annual salary. With +respect to the day’s pay allowed to medical men, it is not the custom to +authorize them to receive it, except when they are in personal attendance +upon our Lord the King._ + +Item. You will tell their Highnesses what great devotion Coronel has +shown to the service in many respects, and what great proofs he has given +of it in every important matter that has been trusted to him, and how +much we feel his loss now that he is sick. You will represent to them +how just it is that he should receive the recompense of such good and +loyal services, not only in the favours which may hereafter be shown to +him, but also in his present pay, in order that he, and all those that +are with us, may see what profit will accrue to them from their zeal in +the service; for the importance and difficulty of exploring the mines +should call for great consideration towards those to whom such extensive +interests are entrusted; and, as the talents of the said Coronel have +made me determine upon appointing him principal constable of this portion +of the Indies, and, as his salary is left open, I beg their Highnesses +to make it as liberal as may be in consideration of his services, and to +confirm his nomination to the service which I have allotted to him, by +giving him an official appointment thereto. + +_Their Highnesses grant him, besides his salary, an annual pension of +fifteen thousand maravedis; the same to be paid him at the same time as +the said salary._ + +Item. You will, at the same time, tell their Highnesses that the +bachelor, Gil Garcia, came out here in quality of principal alcalde, +without having any salary fixed or allowed to him: that he is a good man, +well-informed, correct in his conduct, and very necessary to us; and that +I beg their Highnesses to be pleased to appoint him a salary sufficient +for his support; and that it be remitted to him together with his pay +from the other side. + +_Their Highnesses grant him an annual pension of twenty thousand +maravedis during his stay in the Indies, and that over and above his +fixed appointments; and it is their order that this pension be paid to +him at the same time as his salary._ + +Item. You will tell their Highnesses, as I have already told them in +writing, that I think it will be impossible to go this year to make +discoveries until arrangements have been made to work the two rivers in +which the gold has been found in the most profitable manner for their +Highnesses’ interest; and this may be done more effectively hereafter, +because it is not a thing that every one can do to my satisfaction, or +with advantage to their Highnesses’ service, unless I be present; for +whatever is to be done always turns out best under the eye of the party +interested. + +_It is the most necessary thing possible that he should strive to find +the way to this gold._ + +Item. You will tell their Highnesses, that the horse-soldiers that came +from Grenada to the review which took place at Seville, offered good +horses, but that at the time of their being sent on board, they took +advantage of my absence (for I was somewhat indisposed), and changed them +for others, the best of which does not seem worth two thousand maravedis, +for they sold the first and bought these; and this deception on the part +of the horse-soldiers, is very like what I have known to occur to many +gentlemen in Seville of my acquaintance. It seems that Juan de Soria, +after the price was paid, for some private interest of his own, put +other horses in the place of those that I expected to find, and when I +came to see them, there were horses there that had never been offered +to me for sale. In all this the greatest dishonesty has been shown, +so that I do not know whether I ought to complain of him alone, since +these horse-soldiers have been paid their expenses up to the present +day, besides their salary and the hire of their horses, and when they +are ill, they will not allow their horses to be used, because they are +not present. It is not their Highnesses’ wish that these horses should +be purchased for anything but their Highnesses’ service, but these men +think they are only to be employed on work which requires them to ride +on horse-back, which is not the case at present. All these considerations +lead me to think, that it would be more convenient to buy their horses, +which are worth but little, and thus avoid being exposed daily to new +disputes; finally, their Highnesses will decide on what plan is best for +their own interests. + +_Their Highnesses order Don Juan de Fonseca to make inquiries respecting +the matter of the horses, and if it be true that such a deception has +been practised, to send up the culprits to be punished as they deserve; +also to gain information respecting the other people that the admiral +speaks of, and to send the result of the information to their Highnesses. +With respect to the horse soldiers, it is their Highnesses’ wish and +command that they continue where they are, and remain in service, because +they belong to the guards and to the class of their Highnesses’ servants. +Their Highnesses also command the said horse soldiers to give up their +horses into the charge of the Admiral on all occasions when they shall be +required, and if the use of the horses should occasion any loss, their +Highnesses direct that compensation shall be made for the amount of the +injury, through the medium of the Admiral._ + +Item. You will mention to their Highnesses, that more than two hundred +persons have come here without fixed salaries, and that some of them +are very useful to the service; and in order to preserve system and +uniformity, the others have been ordered to imitate them. For the first +three years, it is desirable that we should have here a thousand men, in +order to keep a safeguard upon the island and upon the rivers that supply +the gold: and even if we were able to mount a hundred men on horse-back, +so far from being an evil, it will be a very necessary thing for us; but +their Highnesses might pass by the question of the horse-men until gold +shall be sent. In short, their Highnesses should give instructions as to +whether the two hundred people who have come over without pay, should +receive pay like the others, if they do their work well; for we certainly +have great need of them to commence our labours, as I have already shown. + +_It is their Highnesses’ wish and command, that the two hundred persons +without pay shall replace such of those who are paid as have failed, or +as shall hereafter fail, in their duty, provided they are fit for the +service and please the Admiral; and their Highnesses order the Accomptant +to enter their names in the place of those who shall fail in their duty, +as the Admiral shall determine._ + +Item. As there are means of diminishing the expenses that these people +occasion, by employing them, as other Princes do, in industrial +occupations, I think it would be well that all ships that come here +should be ordered to bring, besides the ordinary stores and medicines, +shoes, and leather for making shoes, shirts, both of common and superior +quality, doublets, laces, some peasants’ clothing, breeches, and cloth +for making clothes, all at moderate prices; they might also bring other +articles, such as conserves, which do not enter into the daily ration, +yet are good for preserving health. The Spaniards that are here would +always be happy to receive such articles as these in lieu of part of +their pay; and if they were purchased by men who were selected for +their known loyalty, and who take an interest in the service of their +Highnesses, considerable economy would result from this arrangement. +Ascertain their Highnesses’ pleasure on this head, and if the plan be +deemed expedient for the service, it should be put in practice at once. + +_This matter may rest for the present until the Admiral shall write more +fully on the subject; meanwhile, Don Juan de Fonseca shall be ordered to +instruct Don Ximenes de Bribiesca to make the necessary arrangements for +the execution of the proposed plans._ + +Item. You will tell their Highnesses that, in a review that was holden +yesterday, it was remarked that a great number of the people were without +arms, which I think must be attributed partly to the exchange made at +Seville, or in the harbour, when those who presented themselves armed +were left for a while, and for a trifle exchanged their arms for others +of an inferior quality. I think it would be desirable that two hundred +cuirasses, a hundred arquebuses, a hundred arblasts, and many other +articles of defensive armour, should be sent over to us; for we have +great need of them to arm those who are at present without them. + +_Don Juan de Fonseca has already been written to, to provide them._ + +Item. Inasmuch as many married persons have come over here, and are +engaged in regular duties, such as masons and other tradesmen, who have +left their wives in Spain, and wish that the pay that falls due to them +may be paid to their wives, or whomsoever they may appoint, in order that +they may purchase for them such articles as they may need, I therefore +beseech their Highnesses to take such measures as they may deem expedient +on this subject; for it is of importance to their interests that these +people be well provided for. + +_Their Highnesses have already ordered Don Juan de Fonseca to attend to +this matter._ + +Item. Besides the other articles which I have begged from their +Highnesses in the memorial which you bear, signed by my hand, and which +articles consist of provisions and other stores, both for those who are +well and for those who are sick, it would be very serviceable that fifty +pipes of molasses should be sent hither from the island of Madeira; for +it is the most nutritious food in the world, and the most wholesome. A +pipe of it does not ordinarily cost more than two ducats, exclusive of +the casks; and if their Highnesses would order one of the caravels to +call at the said island on the return voyage, the purchase might be made, +and they might, at the same time, buy ten casks of sugar, of which we +stand greatly in need. It is the most favourable season of the year to +obtain it at a cheap rate, that is to say, between this and the month of +April. The necessary orders might be given, if their Highnesses think +proper, and yet the place of destination be carefully concealed. + +_Don Juan de Fonseca will see to it._ + +Item. You will tell their Highnesses that, although the rivers contain +in their beds the quantity of gold described by those who have seen it, +there is no doubt that the gold is produced not in the rivers but the +earth; and that the water happening to come in contact with the mines, +washes it away mingled with the sand. And as among the great number of +rivers that have been already discovered there are some of considerable +magnitude, there are also some so small that they might rather be called +brooks than rivers, only two fingers’ breadth deep, and very short in +their course; there will, therefore, be some men wanted to wash the +gold from the sand, and others to dig it out of the earth. This latter +operation will be the principal and the most productive; it will be +expedient, therefore, that their Highnesses send men both for the +washing and for the mining, from among those who are employed in Spain in +the mines at Almaden[153], so that the work may be done in both manners. +We shall not, however, wait for the arrival of these workmen, but hope, +with the aid of God and with the washers that we have here with us, when +they shall be restored to health, to send a good quantity of gold by the +first caravels that shall leave for Spain. + +_This shall be completely provided for in the next voyage out; meanwhile, +Don Juan de Fonseca has their Highnesses’ orders to send as many miners +as he can find. Their Highnesses write also to Almaden, with instructions +to select the greatest number that can be procured, and to send them up._ + +Item. You will beseech their Highnesses very humbly in my name, to be +pleased to pay regard to my strong recommendation of Villacorta, who, +as their Highnesses are aware, has been extremely useful, and has shown +the greatest possible zeal in this affair. As I know him to be a zealous +man and well disposed to their Highnesses’ service, I shall take it as a +favour if they will deign to grant him some post of trust adapted to his +qualifications, and in which he might give proof of his industry and warm +desire to serve their Highnesses: and you will manage that Villacorta +shall have practical evidence that the work which he has done for me, and +in which I found him needful to me, has been of some profit to him. + +_This shall be done as he wishes._ + +Item. That the said Messire Pedro, Gaspar, Beltran, and others remaining +here, came out in command of caravels which have now gone back, and are +in receipt of no salary whatever; but as these are people who should be +employed in the most important and confidential positions, their pay has +not been fixed, because it ought to be different from that of the rest; +you will beg their Highnesses, therefore, on my behalf, to settle what +ought to be given them either yearly or monthly, for the advantage of +their Highnesses’ service. + +Given in the City of Isabella, the thirtieth of January, in the year +fourteen hundred and ninety-four. + +_This point has been already replied to above; but as in the said clause +he says that they should receive their pay, it is now their Highnesses’ +command that their salary shall be paid to them from the time that they +gave up their command._ + + +MEMORIAL + +_Que para los Reyes Católicos dió el Almirante D. Cristobal Colon, en +la ciudad Isabela, á 30 de Enero de 1494 á Antonio de Torres, sobre el +suceso de su segundo viage á las Indias; y al final de cada capítulo la +respuesta de sus Altezas._ + +Lo que vos Antonio de Torres, capitan de la nao _Marigalante_, é Alcaide +de la ciudad Isabela, habeis de decir é suplicar de mi parte al Rey é la +Reina nuestros Señores es lo siguiente: + +Primeramente, dadas las cartas de creencia que llevais de mí para sus +Altezas, besareis por mi sus reales pies é manos, é me encomendareis en +sus Altezas como á Rey é Reina mis Señores naturales, en cuyo servicio yo +deseo fenecer mis dias, como esto mas largamente vos podreis decir á sus +Altezas, segun lo que en mi vistes é supistes. + +_Sus Altezas se lo tienen en servicio._ + +Item: Como quiera que por las cartas que á sus altezas escribo y aun el +Padre Fray Buil y el Tesorero, podrán comprender todo lo que acá despues +de nuestra llegada se fizo, y esto harto por menudo y extensamente; +con todo direis á sus Altezas de mi parte, que á Dios ha placido darme +tal gracia para en su servicio, que hasta aquí no hallo yo menos ni se +ha hallado en cosa alguna de lo que yo escribí y dije, y afirmé á sus +Altezas en los dias pasados, antes por gracia de Dios espero que aun muy +mas claramente y muy presto por la obra parecerá, porque las cosas de +especeria en solas las orillas de la mar, sin haber entrado dentro en +la tierra, se halla tal rastro é principios della, que es razon que se +esperen muy mejores fines, y esto mismo en las minas del oro, porque con +solos dos que fueron á descubrir cada uno por su parte, sin detenerse +allá porque era poca gente, se han descubierto tantos rios tan poblados +de oro, que cualquier de los que lo vieron é cogieron, solamente con +las manos por muestra, vinieron tan alegres, y dicen tantas cosas de la +abundancia dello, que yo tengo empacho de las decir y escribir á sus +altezas; pero porque allá vá Gorbalan, que fue uno de los descubridores, +el dirá lo que vió, aunque acá queda otro que llaman Hojeda, criado del +Duque de Medinaceli, muy discreto mozo y de muy gran recabdo, que sin +duda y aun sin comparacion, descubrió mucho mas, segun el memorial de +los rios que él trajo, diciendo que en cada uno de ellos hay cosa de no +creella; por lo cual sus Altezas pueden dar gracias á Dios, pues tan +favorablemente se ha en todas sus cosas. + +_Sus Altezas dan muchas gracias a Dios por esto, y tienen en muy senalado +servicio al Almirante todo lo que en esto ha fecho y hace, porque conocen +que despues de Dios á él son en cargo de todo lo que en esto han habido +y hobieren; y porque cerca desto le escriben mas largo, á su carta se +remiten._ + +Item: Dieris á sus Altezas, como quier que ya se les escribe, que yo +deseaba mucho en esta armada poderles enviar mayor cuantidad de oro del +que acá se espera poder coger, si la gente que acá está nuestra, la +mayor parte subitamente no cayera doliente; pero porque ya esta armada +non so podia detener acá mas, siquiera por la costa grande que hace, +siquiera porque el tiempo es este propio para ir y poder volver los +que han de traer acá las cosas que aquí hacen mucha mengua, porque si +tardasen de irse de aquí non podrian volverse para Mayo los que han de +volver, y allende desto si con los sanos que acá se hallan, así en mar +como en tierra en la poblacion, yo quisiera emprender de ir á las minas +ó rios agora, habia muchas dificultades é aun peligros, porque de aquí +á veinte y tres ó veinte y cuatro leguas, en donde hay puertos é rios +para pasar y para tan largo camino, y para estar allá al tiempo que seria +menester para coger el oro, habia menester llevar muchos mantenimientos, +los cuales non podrian llevar á cuestas, ni hay bestias acá que á esto +pudiesen suplir, ni los caminos é pasos non estan tan aparejados, como +quier que se han comenzado á adobar para que se podiesen pasar; y tambien +era grande inconveniente dejar acá los dolientes en lugar abierto y +chozas, y las provisiones y mantenimientos que estan en tierra, que +como quier que estos indios se hayan mostrado á los descubridores, y se +muestran cada dia muy simples y sin malicia; con todo, porque cada dia +vienen acá entre nosotros non pareció que fuera buen consejo meter á +riesgo y á ventura de perderse esta gente y los mantenimientos, lo que un +indio con un tizon podria hacer poniendo huego á las chozas, porque de +noche y de dia siempre van y vienen; á causa dellos tenemos guardas en el +campo mientras la poblacion está abierta y sin defension. + +_Que lo hizo bien._ + +Otrosí: Como habemos visto en los que fueron por tierra á descobrir que +los mas cayeron dolientes despues de vueltos, y aun algunos se hobieron +de volver del camino, era tambien razon de temer que otro tal conteciese +a los que agora irian destos sanos que se hallan, y seguirse hian dos +peligros de allí, el uno de adolecer allá en la misma obra dó no hay +casa ni reparo alguno de aquel Cacique que llaman Caonabó que es hombre, +segun relacion de todos, muy malo y muy mas atrevido, el cual viéndonos +allá así desbaratados y dolientes, podria emprender lo que non osaria si +fuesemos sanos: y con esto mismo se allega otra dificultad de traer acá +lo que llegasemos de oro, porque ó habiamos de traer poco y ir y venir +cada dia, y meterse en el riesgo de las dolencias, ó se habia de enviar +con alguna parte de la gente con el mismo peligro de perderlo. + +_Lo hizo bien._ + +Así que, direis á sus Altezas, que estas son las cabsas porque de +presente non se ha detenido el armada, ni se les envia oro mas de las +muestras; pero confiando en la misericordia de Dios, que en todo y por +todo nos ha guiado hasta aquí, esta gente convalescerá presto, como ya +lo hace, porque solamente les prueba la tierra de algunas ceciones, y +luego se levantan; y es cierto que si toviesen algunas carnes frescas +para convalescer muy presto serian todos en pie con ayuda de Dios, é +aun los mas estarian ya convalescidos en este tiempo, espero que ellos +convalescerán: con estos pocos sanos que acá quedan, cada dia se entiende +en cerrar la poblacion y meterla en alguna defensa, y los mantenimientos +en seguro, que será fecho en breves dias, porque non ha de ser sino +albarradas que non son gente los indios, que si dormiendo non nos +fallasen para emprender cosa ninguna, aunque la toviesen pensada, que +así hicieron á los otros que acá quedaron por su mal recabdo, los cuales +por pocos que fuesen, y por mayores ocasiones que dieran á los indios +de haber é de hacer lo que hicieron, nunca ellos osaran emprender de +dañarles si los vieran á buen recabdo: y esto fecho luego se entenderá +en ir á los dichos rios, ó desde acquí tomando el camino, y buscando los +mejores expedientes que se puedan, ó por la mar rodeando la isla fasta +aquella parte de donde se dice que no debe haber mas de seis ó siete +leguas hasta los dichos rios; por forma que con seguridad se pueda cojer +el oro y ponerlo en recabdo de alguna fortaleza ó torre que allí se haga +luego, para tenerlo cogido al tiempo que las dos carabelas volverán acá, +é para que luego con el primer tiempo que sea para navegar este camino se +envie á buen recabdo. + +_Que está bien, y así lo debe hacer._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas, como dicho es, que las causas de las +dolencias tan general de todos es de mudamiento de aguas y aires, porque +vemos que á todos arreo se extiende y peligran pocos; por consiguiente +la conservacion de la sanidad, despues de Dios, está que esta gente sea +proveida de los mantenimientos que en España acostumbraba, porque dellos, +ni de otros que viniesen de nuevo sus Altezas se podrán servir si no +estan sanos; y esta provision ha de durar hasta que acá se haya fecho +cimiento de lo que acá se sembrare é plantare, digo de trigos y cebadas, +é viñas, de lo cual para este año se ho fecho poco, porque no se pudo de +antes tomar asiento, y luego que se tomó adolescieron aquellos poquitos +labradores que acá estaban, los cuales aunque estovieran sanos tenian +tan pocas bestias y tau magras y flacas, que poco es lo que pudieran +hacer: con todo, alguna cosa han sembrado, mas para probar la tierra, que +parece muy maravillosa, para que de alli se puede esperar remedio alguno +en nuestras necesidades. Somos bien ciertos, como la obra lo muestra, +que en esta tierra asi el trigo como el vino nacerá muy bien; pero hase +de esperar el fruto, el cual si tal será como muestra la presteza del +nacer del trigo, y de algunos poquitos de sarmientos que se pusieron, es +cierto que non fará mengua el Andalucía ni Secilia aquí, ni en las cañas +de azucar, segun unas poquitas que se pusieron han prendido; porque es +cierto que la hermosura de la tierra de estas islas, así de montes é +sierras y aguas, como de vegas donde hay rios cabdales, es tal la vista +que ninguna otra tierra que sol escaliente puede ser mejor al parecer ni +tan fermosa. + +_Pues la tierra es tal, que debe procurar que se siembre lo mas que ser +pudiere de todas cosas, y á D. Juan de Fonseca se escribe que envie de +contino todo lo que fuere menester para esto._ + +Item: Direis que á cabsa de haberse derramado mucho vino en este camino +del que la flota traia, y esto, segun dicen los mas, á culpa de la mala +obra que los toneleros ficieron en Sevilla, la mayor mengua que agora +tenemos, aquí, ó esperamos por esto tener, es de vinos, y como quier que +tengamos para mas tiempo así vizcocho como trigo, con todo es necesario +que tambien se envie alguna cuantidad razonable, porque el camino es +largo y cada dia no se puede proveer, é asimismo algunas canales, digo +tocinos, y otra cecina que sea mejor que la que habemos traido este +camino. De carneros vivos y aun antes corderos y cordericas, mas fembras +que machos, y algunos becerros y becerras pequeños son menester, que cada +vez vengan en cualquier carabela que acá se enviare, y algunas asnas +y asnos, y yeguas para trabajo y simiente, que acá ninguna de estas +animalias hay de que hombre se pueda ayudar ni valer. Y porque recelo +que sus Altezas no se fallarán en Sevilla, ni los Oficiales ó Ministros +suyos sin expreso mandamiento non proveerían en lo porque agora con +este primero camino es necesario que venga, porque en la consulta y en +la respuesta se pasaria la sazon del partir los navíos que acá por todo +Mayo es necesario que sean; direis á sus Altezas, como yo vos dí cargo y +mandé, que del oro que allá llevais empeñándolo, ó poniêndolo en poder +de algun mercader en Sevilla, el cual distraya y ponga los maravedis que +serán menester para cargar dos carabelas de víno y de trigo, y de las +otras cosas que llevais por memorial, el cual mercader lleve ó envie el +dicho oro para sus Altezas, que le vean, resciban y hagan pagar lo que +hobiere distraido é puesto para el despacho y cargazon de las dichas +dos carabelas, las cuales por consolar y esforzar esta gente que acá +queda, cumple que fagan mas de poder de ser acá vueltas por todo el +mes de Mayo, porque la gente antes de entrar en el verano vea é tengan +algun refrescamiento destas cosas, en especial para las dolencias; de +las cuales cosas acá ya tenemos gran mengua, como son pasas, azucar, +almendras, miel é arroz, que debiera venir en gran cuantidad y vino muy +poca, é aquello que vino es ya consumido é gastado, y aun la mayor parte +de las medecinas que de allá trojieron, por la muchedumbre de los muchos +dolientes; de las cuales cosas, como dicho es, vos llevais memoriales +así para sanos, como para dolientes, firmados de mi mano, los cuales +cumplidamente si el dinero bastare, ó á lo menos lo que mas necesario sea +para agora despachar, es para que lo puedan luego traer los dichos dos +navíos, y lo que quedare procurareis con sus Altezas que con otros navíos +venga lo mas presto que ser pudiere. + +_Sus Altezas enviaron á mandar á D. Juan de Fonseca que luego haya +informacion de los que hicieron ese engaño en los toneles, y de sus +bienes haga que se cobre todo el daño que vino en el vino, con las +costas; y en lo de las cañas vea como las que se enviaren sean buenas, y +en las otras cosas que aquí dice que las provea luego._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas que á cabsa que acá no hay lengua por medio +de la cual á esta gente se pueda dar á entender nuestra santa Fé, +como sus Altezas desean, y aun los que acá estamos, como quier que se +trabajará cuanto pudieren, se envian de presente con estos navíos así +de los canibales, hombres y mugeres y niños y niñas, los cuales sus +Altezas pueden mandar poner en poder de personas con quien puedan mejor +aprender la lengua, ejercitándolos en cosas de servicio, y poco á poco +mandando poner en ellos algun mas cuidado que en otros esclavos para que +deprendan unos de otros, que no se hablen ni se vean sino muy tarde, que +mas presto deprenderán allá que no acá, y serán mejores intérpretes, como +quier que acá non se dejará de hacer lo que se pueda; es verdad que como +esta gente platican poco los de la una isla con los de la otra, en las +lenguas hay alguna diferencia entre ellos, segun como estan mas cerca +ó mas lejos: y porque entre las otras islas las de los canibales son +mucho grandes, y mucho bien pobladas, parecerá acá que tomar dellos y +dellas y enviarlos allá á Castilla non seria sino bien, porque quitarse +hian una vez de aquella inhumana costumbre que tienen de comer hombres, +y allá en Castilla entendiendo la lengua muy mas presto rescibirian el +Bautismo, y farian el provecho de sus animas: aun entre estos pueblos +que non son de esas costumbres, se ganaria gran crédito por nosotros +viendo que aquellos prendiesemos y cativasemos, de quien ellos suelen +rescibir daños, y tienen tamaño miedo que del nombre solo se espantan; +certificando á sus Altezas que la venida é vista de esta flota acá en +esta tierra así junta y hermosa, ha dado muy grande autoridad á esto y +muy grande seguridad para las cosas venideras, por que toda esta gente +de esta grande isla y de las otras, viendo el buen tratamiento que á los +buenos se fará, y el castigo que á los malos se dará, verná á obediencia +prestament para poderlos mandar como vasallos de sus Altezas. Y como +quier que ellos agora donde quier que hombre se halle non solo hacen de +grado lo que hombre quiere que fagan, mas ellos de su voluntad se ponen á +todo lo que entienden que nos puede placer, y tambien pueden ser ciertos +sus Altezas que non menos allá, entre los cristianos Principes haber dado +gran reputacion la venida desta armada por muchos respetos, así presentes +como venideros, los cuales sus Altezas podrán mejor pensar y entender que +non sabria decir. + +_Decirle heis lo que acá ha habido en lo de dos canibales que acá +vinieron._ + +_Que está muy bien, y así lo debe hacer; pero que procure allá, como +si ser pudiere, se reduzgan á nuestra santa Fé católica, y asimismo lo +procure con los de las islas donde está._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas, que el provecho de las almas de los dichos +canibales, y aun destos de acá, ha traido el pensamiento que cuantos mas +allá se llevasen seria mejor, y en ello podrian sus Altezas ser servidos +desta manera: que visto cuanto son acá menester los ganados y bestias de +trabajo para el sostenimiento de la gente que acá ha de estar, y bien de +todas estas islas, sus Altezas podrán dar licencia é permiso á un número +de carabelas suficiente que vengan acá cada año, y trayan de los dichos +ganados y otros mantenimientos y cosas para poblar el campo y aprovechar +la tierra, y esto en precios razonables á sus costas de los que las +trugieren, las cuales cosas se les podrian pagar en esclavos de estos +canibales, gente tan fiera y dispuesta, y bien proporcionada y de muy +buen entendimiento, los cuales quitados de aquella inhumanidad creemos +que serán mejores que otros ningunos esclavos, la cual luego perderán que +sean fuera de su tierra, y de estos podrán haber muchos con las fustas de +remos que acá se entienden de hacer, fecho empero presupuesto que cada +una de las carabelas que viniesen de sus Altezas pusiesen una persona +fiable, la cual defendiese las dichas carabelas que non descendiesen +á ninguna otra parte ni isla salvo aquí, donde ha de estar la carga y +descarga de toda la mercaduría; y aun destos esclavos que se llevaren, +sus Altezas podrian haber sus derechos allá; y desto traereís ó enviareis +respuesta, porque acá se hagan los aparejos que son menester con mas +confianza, si á sus Altezas pareciere bien. + +_En esto se ha suspendido por agora hasta que venga otro camino de allá, +y escriba el Almirante lo que en esto le paresciere._ + +Item: Tambien direis á sus Altezas que mas provechoso es, y menos costa, +fletar los navíos como los fletan los mercaderes para Flandes por +toneladas que non de otra manera; por ende que yo vos dí cargo de fletar +á este respecto las dos carabelas que habeis luego de enviar: y así se +podrá hacer de todas las otras que sus Altezas enviaren, si de aquella +forma se ternán por servidos; pero non entiendo decir esto de las que han +de venir con su licencia por la mercaduria de los esclavos. + +_Sus Altezas mandan á D. Juan de Fonseca que en el fletar de las +carabelas tenga esta forma si ser pudiere._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas que á causa de escusar alguna mas costa, yo +merqué estas carabelas que llevais por memorial para retenerlas acá con +estos dos naos, conviene á saber, la Gallega y esa otra Capitana, de +la cual merqué por semejante del Maestre della los tres ochavos por el +precio que en el dicho memorial destas copias llevais firmado de mi mano, +los cuales navíos non solo darán autoridad y gran seguridad á la gente +que ha de estar dentro y conversar con los indios para cojer el oro, mas +aun para otra cualquier cosa de peligro que de gente estraña pudiese +acontescer, allende que las carabelas son necesarias para el descubrir de +la tierra firme y otras islas que entre aquí é allá estan; y suplicareis +á sus Altezas que los maravedis que estos navíos cuestan manden pagar en +los tiempos que se les ha prometido, porque sin dubda ellos ganarán bien +su costa, segun yo creo y espero en la misericordia de Dios. + +_El Almirante lo hizo bien, y decirle heis como acá se pago al que vendió +la nao, y mandaron á D. Juan de Fonseca que pague lo de las carabelas que +el Almirante compró._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas y suplicareis de mi parte cuanto mas +humilmente pueda, que les plega mucho mirar en lo que por las cartas +y otras escripturas verán mas largamente tocante á la paz é sosiego e +concordia de los que acá estan, y que para las cosas del servicio de +sus Altezas escojan tales personas que non se tenga recelo dellas y que +miren mas á lo por que se envian que non á sus propios intereses; y en +esto, pues que todas las cosas vistes é supistes, hablareis é direis á +sus Altezas la verdad de todas las cosas como las comprendistes, y que +la provision de sus Altezas que sobre ello mandaren facer venga con los +primeros navíos si posible fuere, á fin que acá non se hagan escándalos +en cosa que tanto va en el servicio de sus Altezas. + +_Sus Altezas estan bien informados desto, y en todo se proveerá como +conviene._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas el asiento de esta ciudad, é la fermosura de +la provincia alderedor como lo vistes y compreendistes, y como yo vos +hice Alcayde della por los poderes que de sus Altezas tengo para ello, +á las cuales humilmente suplico que en alguna parte de satisfaccion +de vuestros servicios tengan por bien la dicha provision, como de sus +Altezas yo espero. + +_A sus Altezas plaze que vos seais Alcayde._ + +Item: Porque Mosen Pedro Margarité, criado de sus Altezas, há bien +servido, y espero que así lo hara adelante en las cosas que le fueren +encomendadas, he habido placer de su quedada aqui, y tambien de Gaspar +y de Beltran por ser conocidos criados de sus Altezas para los poner en +cosas de confianza: suplicareis á sus Altezas que especial al dicho Mosen +Pedro, que es casado y tiene hijos le provean de alguna encomienda en la +Orden de Santiago, de la cual él tiene el hábito, porque su muger é hijos +tengan en que vivir. Asimismo hareis relacion de Juan Aguado, criado de +sus Altezas, cuan bien é diligentemente ha servido en todo lo que le ha +seido mandado; que suplico á sus Altezas á él é á los sobredichos los +hayan por encomendados é por presentes. + +_Sus Altezas mandan asentar á Mosen Pedro 30000 maravedis cada ano, y +á Gaspar y Beltran á cada uno 15000 maravedis cada año desde hoy 15 de +Agosto de 94 en adelante, y así les haga pagar el Almirante en lo que +allá se hobiere de pagar, y D. Juan de Fonseca en lo que acá se hobiere +de pagar: y en lo de Juan Aguado sus Altezas habrān memoria de él._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas el trabajo que el Doctor Chanca tiene con el +afruenta de tantos dolientes, y aun la estrechura de los mantenimientos, +é aun con todo ello se dispone con gran diligencia y caridad en todo lo +que cumple á su oficio, y porque sus Altezas remitieron á mí el salario +que acá se le habia de dar, porque estando acá es cierto quel non toma +ni puede haber nada de ninguno, ni ganar de su oficio como en Castilla +ganaba, ó podria ganar estando á su reposo é viviendo de otra manera +que acá no vive; y así que como quiera que él jura que es mas lo que +allá ganaba allende el salario que sus Altezas le dan, y non me quise +estender mas de cincuenta mil maravedis por el trabajo que acá pasa +cada un año mientras acá estoviere; los cuales suplico á sus Altezas +le manden librar con el sueldo de acá y eso mismo, porque él dice y +afirma que todos los fisicos de vuestras Altezas, que andan en reales ó +semejantes cosas que estas, suelen haber de derecho un dia de sueldo en +todo el año de toda la gente: con todo he seido informado, y dicenme, que +como quier que esto sea, la costumbre es de darles cierta suma tasada á +voluntad y mandamiento de sus Altezas en compensa de aquel dia de sueldo. +Suplicareis á sus Altezas que en ello manden proveer, así en lo del +salario como de esta costumbre, por forma que el dicho Doctor tenga razon +de ser contento. + +_A sus Altezas place desto del Doctor Chanca, y que se le pague esto +desde quel Almirante gelo asentó, y que gelos pague con lo del sueldo._ + +_En esto del dia del sueldo de los fisicos, non lo acostumbran haber sino +donde el Rey nuestro Senor esté en persona._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas de Coronel cuanto es hombre para servir á sus +Altezas en muchas cosas, y cuanto ha servido hasta aquí en todo lo mas +necesario, y la mengua que dél sentimos agora que está doliente, y que +sirviendo de tal manera es razon quel sienta el fruto de su servicio, non +solo en las mercedes para despues mas en lo de su salario en lo presente, +en manera quél é los que acá estan sientan que les aprovecha el servicio, +porque segun el ejercicio que acá se ha de tener en cojer este oro, no +son de tener en poco las personas en quien tanta diligencia hay: y porque +por su habilidad se proveyó acá por mí del oficio de Alguacil mayor +destas Indias, y en la provision va el salario en blanco, que suplico á +sus Altezas gelo manden henchir como mas sea su servicio, mirando sus +servicios, confirmándole la provision que acá se le dió, e proveyéndole +de él de juro. + +_Sus Altezas mandan que le asienten quince mil maravedis cada año mas de +su sueldo, é que se le paguen cuando le pagaren su sueldo._ + +Asimismo direis á sus Altezas como aquí vino el Bachiller Gil García por +Alcade mayor é non se le ha consignado ni nombrado salario, y es persona +de bien y de buenas letras, é diligente, é es acá bien necesario; que +suplico á sus Altezas le manden nombrar é consignar su salario, por +manera que él se pueda sostener, é le sea librado con el dinero del +sueldo de acá. + +_Sus Altezas le mandan asentar cada año viente mal maravedis en tanto +que allá estoviere y mas su sueldo, y que gelo paguen cuando pagaren el +sueldo._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas como quier que ya se lo escribo por las +cartas, que para este año non entiendo que sea posible ir á descobrir +hasta que esto destos rios que se hallaron de oro sea puesto en el +asiento debido á servicio do sus Altezas, que despues mucho mejor +se podrá facer, porque no es cosa que nadie la podiese facer sin mi +presencia á mi grado, ni á servicio de sus Altezas, por muy bien que lo +ficiese, como es en dubda segun lo que hombre vee por su presencia. + +_Trabaje como lo mas preciso que ser pueda se sepa lo adito de ese oro._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas como los escuderos de caballo que vinieron de +Granada, en el alarde que ficieron en Sevilla mostraron buenos caballos, +é despues al embarcar, yo no lo ví porque estaba un poco doliente, +y metiéronlos tales quel mejor dellos non parece que vale dos mil +maravedis, porque vendieron los otros y compraron estos, y esto fue de la +suerte que se hizo lo de mucha gente que allá en los alardes de Sevilla +yo vi muy buena; parece que Juan de Soria, despues dea dado el dinero +del sueldo, por algun interese suyo puso otros en lugar de aquellos que +yo acá pensaba fallar, y fallo gente que yo nunca habia visto: en esto +ha habido gran maldad, de tal manera que yo no sé si me queje dél solo: +por esto, visto que á estos escuderos se ha fecho la costa hasta aquí, +allende de sus sueldos y tambien á sus caballos, y se hace de presente y +son personas que cuando ellos estan dolientes, ó non se les antoja, non +quieren que sus caballos sirvan sin ellos mismos; sus Altezas no quieren +que se les compren estos caballos sino que sirvan á sus Altezas, y esto +mismo no les paresce que deban servir ni cosa ninguna sino á caballo; +lo cual agora de presente non face mucho al caso, é por esto parece que +seria mejor comprarles los caballos, pues que tan poco valen, y non +estar cada dia con ellos en estas pendencias; por ende que sus Altezas +determinen esto como fuere su servicio. + +_Sus Altezas mandan á D. Juan de Fonseca, que se informe de esto de estos +caballos, y si se hallare que es verdad que hicieron ese engaño, lo +envien á sus Altezas porque lo mandarán castigar; y tambien se informe +desto que dice de la otra gente, y envie la pesquisa á sus Altezas: y en +lo destos escuderos sus Altezas mandan que esten allá y sirvan, pues son +de las guardas y criados de sus Altezas; y á los escuderos mandan sus +Altezas que den los caballos cada vez que fueren menester y el Almirante +lo mandare, y si algun daño recibieren los caballos yendo otros en ellos, +por medio del Almirante mandan sus Altezas que gelo paguen._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas como aquí han venido mas de doscientas +personas sin sueldo, y hay algunos dellos que sirven bien, y aun los +otros por semejante se mandan que lo hagan así y porque para estos +primeros tres años será gran bien que aqui esten mil hombres para asentar +y poner en muy gran seguridad esta Isla y rios de oro, y aunque hobiese +ciento de caballo non se perderia nada, antes parece necesario, aunque +en estos de caballo fasta que oro se envie sus Altezas podrán sobreceer: +con todo á estas doscientas personas, que vienen sin sueldo, sus Altezas +deben enviar á decir si se les pagará sueldo como á los otros sirviendo +bien, porque cierto son necesarios como dicho tengo para este comienzo. + +_De estas doscientas personas que aquî dice que fueron sin sueldo, mandan +sus Altezas que entren en lugar de los que han faltado y faltaren de los +que iban á sueldo, seyendo habiles y á contentamiento del Almirante, +y sus Altezas mandan al Contador que los asiente en lugar de los que +faltaren como el Almirante lo dijere._ + +Item: Porque en algo la costa de esta gente se puede aliviar con +industria y formas que otros Principes suelen tener en otras, lo gastado +mejor que acá se podria escusar, paresce que seria bien mandar traer +en los navíos que vinieren allende de las otras cosas que son para los +mantenimientos comunes, y de la botica, zapatos y cueras para los mandar +facer; camisas comunes y de otras, jubones, lienzo, sayos, calzas, paños +para vestir en razonables precios; y otras cosas, como son conservas, que +son fuera de racion, y para conservacion de la salud, las cuales cosas +todas la gente de acá rescibiria de grado en descuento de su sueldo, y +si allá esto se mercase por Ministros leales y que mirasen el servicio +de sus Altezas, se ahorraria algo: por ende sabreis la voluntad de sus +Altezas cerca desto, y si les pareciere ser su servicio luego se debe +poner en obra. + +_Por este camino se solia ser fasta que mas escriba el Almirante, y ya +enviarán á mandar á D. Juan de Fonseca con Jimeno de Bribiesca que provea +en esto._ + +Item: Tambien direis á sus Altezas, que por cuanto ayer en el alarde +que se tomó se falló la gente muy desarmada lo cual pienso que en parte +contesció por aquel trocar que allá se fizo en Sevilla ó en el puerto +cuando se dejaron los que se mostraron armados, y tomaron otros que daban +algo á quien los trocaba, paresce que seria bien que se mandasen traer +doscientas corazas, y cien espingardas y cien ballestas, y mucho almacen, +que es la cosa que mas menester habemos, y de todas estas armas se podrán +dar á los desarmados. + +_Ya se escribe á D. Juan de Fonseca que provea en esto._ + +Item: Por cuanto algunos oficiales que acá vinieron como son albañies y +de otros oficios, que son casados y tienen sus mugeres allá, y querrian +que allá lo que se les debe de su sueldo se diese á sus mugeres ó á las +personas á quien ellos enviaren sus recabdos, para que les compren las +cosas que acá han menester; que á sus Altezas suplico les mande librar, +porque su servicio es que estos esten proveidos acá. + +_Ya enviaron á mandar sus Altezas á D. Juan de Fonseca que provea en +esto._ + +Item: Porque allende las otras cosas que allá se envian á pedir por los +memoriales que llevais de mi mano firmados, así para mantenimiento de +los sanos como para los dolientes, seria muy bien que se hobiesen de la +isla de la Madera cincuenta pipas de miel de azúcar, porque es el mejor +mantenimiento del mundo y mas sano, y non suele costar cada pipa sino +á dos ducados sin el casco, y si sus Altezas mandan que á la vuelta +pase por allí alguna carabela las podrá mercar, y tambien diez cajas de +azúcar que es mucho menester, que esta es la mejor sazon del año, digo +entre aquí é el mes de Abril para fallarlo, é haber dello buena razon y +podriase dar orden mandándolo sus Altezas, é que non supiesen allá para +donde lo quieren. + +_D. Juan de Fonseca que provea en esto._ + +Item: Direis á sus Altezas, por cuanto aunque los rios tengan en la +cuantidad que se dice por los que lo han visto, pero que lo cierto dello +es quel oro non se engendra en los rios mas en la tierra, quel agua +topando con las minas lo trae envuelto en las arenas, y porque en estos +tantos rios se han descubierto, como quiera que hay algunos grandecitos +hay otros tan pequeños que son mas fuentes que no rios, que non llevan +de dos dedos de agua, y se falla luego el cabo doede nasce; para lo cual +non solo serán provechosos los lavadores para cogerlo en el arena, mas +los otros para cavarlo en la tierra, que será lo mas especial é de mayor +cuantidad; é por esto será bien que sus Altezas envien lavadores, é de +los que andan en las minas allá en Almaden, porque en la una manera y en +la otra se faga el ejercicio, como quier que acá non esperaremos á ellos, +que con los lavadores que aquí tenemos, esperamos con la ayuda de Dios, +si una vez la gente está sana, allegar un buen golpe de oro para las +primeras carabelas que fueren. + +_A otro camino se proveerá en esto cumplidamente; en tanto mandan sus +Altezas á D. Juan de Fonseca que envie luego los mas minadores que +pudiere haber, y escriben al Almaden, que de allí tomen los que mas +pudieren y los envien._ + +Item: Suplicareis á sus Altezas de mi parte muy humildemente, que quieran +tener por muy encomendado á Villacorta, el cual, como sus Altezas saben, +ha mucho servido en esta negociacion, y con muy buena voluntad, y segun +le conozco persona diligente y afecionada á su servicio; rescebiré merced +que se le dé algun cargo de confianza, para lo cual él ser sufficiente, +y pueda mostrar su deseo de servir y diligencia, y esto procurareis por +forma que el Villacorta conozca por la obra que lo que ha trabajado por +mi en lo que yo le hobe menester le aprovecha en esto. + +_Así se hará._ + +Item: Que los dichos Mosen Pedro y Gaspar y Beltran, y otros que han +quedado acá, trajieron capítanias de carabelas, que son agora vueltas, y +non gozan del sueldo; pero porque son tales personas, que se han de poner +en cosas principales y de confianza, non se les ha determinado el sueldo +que sea diferenciado de los otros: suplicareis de mi parte á sus Altezas +determinen lo que se les ha de dar en cada un año, ó por meses, como mas +fueren servidos. Fecho en la ciudad Isabela á treinta dias de Enero de +mil cuatrocientos y noventa y cuatro años. + +_Ya está respondido arriba, pero porque en el dicho capítulo que en esto +habia dice que gozan del salario, desde agora mandan sus Altezas que se +les cuenten á todos sus salarios desde que dejaron las capitanías._ + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[151] In the original, the replies are affixed in the margin of each +chapter. (Navarrete). + +[152] _Albarrada_—an Arabic word implying a stone wall without mortar. + +[153] In La Mancha, New Castile, famous for mines of quicksilver. + + + + +THIRD VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS. + + +_Narrative of the Voyage which Don Christopher Columbus made the third +time that he came to the Indies, when he discovered terra firma, as he +sent it to their Majesties from the Island of Hispaniola._ + +Most serene and most exalted and powerful Princes, the King and Queen, +our Sovereigns: The Blessed Trinity moved your Highnesses to this +enterprise of the Indies; and of His Infinite goodness has chosen me to +proclaim it to you; wherefore as His ambassador I approached your royal +presence, moved by the consideration that I was appealing to the most +exalted monarchs in Christendom, who exercised so great an influence over +the Christian faith, and its advancement in the world. Those who heard of +it looked upon it as impossible, for they fixed all their hopes on the +favours of fortune, and pinned their faith solely upon chance. I gave +to the subject six or seven years of great anxiety, explaining, to the +best of my ability, how great service might be done to our Lord, by this +undertaking, in promulgating His sacred name and our holy faith among so +many nations;—an enterprise so exalted in itself, and so calculated to +enhance the glory and immortalise the renown of great sovereigns. It was +also requisite to refer to the temporal prosperity which was foretold in +the writings of so many trustworthy and wise historians, who related that +great riches were to be found in these parts. At the same time I thought +it desirable to bring to bear upon the subject the sayings and opinions +of those who have written upon the geography of the world, and finally, +your Highnesses came to the determination that the undertaking should be +entered upon. In this your Highnesses exhibited the noble spirit which +has been always manifested by you on every great subject; for all others +who had thought of the matter or heard it spoken of, unanimously treated +it with contempt, with the exception of two friars,[154] who always +remained constant in their belief of its practicability. I, myself, +in spite of fatiguing opposition, felt sure that the enterprise would +nevertheless prosper, and continue equally confident of it to this day, +because it is a truth, that though everything will pass away, the Word +of God will not, and everything that he has said will be fulfilled; who +so clearly spoke of these lands, by the mouth of the prophet Isaiah, in +so many places in Scripture, that from Spain the holy name of God was +to be spread abroad. Thus I departed in the name of the Holy Trinity, +and returned very soon, bringing with me an account of the practical +fulfilment of everything I had said. Your Highnesses again sent me out, +and in a short space of time, by God’s mercy, not by [155] I discovered +three hundred and thirty-three leagues of terra firma on the eastern +side, and seven hundred islands,[156] besides those which I discovered +on the first voyage; I also succeeded in circumnavigating the island +of Española, which is larger in circumference than all Spain, the +inhabitants of which are countless, and all of whom may be laid under +tribute. It was then that complaints arose, disparaging the enterprise +that I had undertaken, because, forsooth, I had not immediately sent the +ships home laden with gold,—no allowance being made for the shortness +of the time, and all the other impediments of which I have already +spoken. On this account (either as a punishment for my sins, or, as I +trust, for my salvation), I was held in detestation, and had obstacles +placed in the way of every thing I said, or for which I petitioned. I +therefore resolved to apply to your Highnesses, to inform you of all +the wonderful events that I had experienced, and to explain the reason +of every proposition that I made, making reference to the nations that +I had seen, among whom, and by whose instrumentality, many souls may be +saved. I related how the natives of Española had been laid under tribute +to your Highnesses, and regarded you as their sovereigns. And I laid +before your Highnesses abundant samples of gold and copper,—proving the +existence of extensive mines of those metals. I also laid before your +Highnesses many sorts of spices, too numerous to detail; and I spoke +of the great quantity of brazil-wood, and numberless other articles +found in those lands. All this was of no avail with some persons, who +began, with determined hatred, to speak ill of the enterprise, not +taking into account the service done to our Lord in the salvation of +so many souls, nor the enhancement of your Highnesses’ greatness to a +higher pitch than any earthly prince has yet enjoyed; nor considering, +that from the exercise of your Highnesses’ goodness, and the expense +incurred, both spiritual and temporal advantage was to be expected, and +that Spain must in the process of time derive from thence, beyond all +doubt, an unspeakable increase of wealth. This might be manifestly seen +by the proofs given in the written descriptions of the voyages already +made, showing that the fulfilment of every other hope may be reasonably +expected. Nor were they affected by the consideration of what great +princes throughout the world have done to increase their fame: as, for +example, Solomon, who sent from Jerusalem, to the uttermost parts of +the east, to see Mount Sopora [Σωφίρ, Ophir], in which expedition his +ships were detained three years; and which mountain your Highnesses now +possess in the island of Española. Nor, as in the case of Alexander, who +sent to observe the mode of government in the island of Taprobana,[157] +in India; and Cæsar Nero, to explore the sources of the Nile,[158] and to +learn the causes of its increase in the summer, when water is needed; and +many other mighty deeds that princes have done, and which it is allotted +to princes to achieve. Nor was it of any avail that no prince of Spain, +as far as I have read, has ever hitherto gained possession of land out +of Spain; and that the world of which I speak is different from that +of which the Romans, and Alexander, and the Greeks made mighty efforts +with great armies to gain possession. Nor have they been affected by the +recent noble example of the kings of Portugal, who have had the courage +to explore as far as Guinea, and to make the discovery of it, expending +so much gold and so many lives in the undertaking, that a calculation of +the population of the kingdom would show that one half of them have died +in Guinea: and though it is now a long time since they commenced these +great exertions, the return for their labour and expense has hitherto +been but trifling; this people has also dared to make conquests in +Africa, and to carry on their exploits to Ceuta, Tangier, Argilla, and +Alcazar, repeatedly giving battle to the Moors; and all this at great +expense; simply because it was an exploit worthy of a prince, undertaken +for the service of God, and to advance the enlargement of His kingdom. +The more I said on the subject, the more two-fold was reproach cast upon +it, even to the expression of abhorrence, no consideration being given +to the honour and fame that accrued to your Highnesses throughout all +Christendom from your Highnesses having undertaken this enterprise; so +that there was neither great nor small who did not desire to hear tidings +of it. Your Highnesses replied to me encouragingly, and desired that I +should pay no regard to those who spoke ill of the undertaking, inasmuch +as they had received no authority or countenance whatever from your +Highnesses. + +I started from San Lucar, in the name of the most Holy Trinity, on +Wednesday the 30th of May,[159] much fatigued with my voyage, for I had +hoped, when I left the Indies, to find repose in Spain; whereas, on the +contrary, I experienced nothing but opposition and vexation. I sailed +to the island of Madeira by a circuitous route, in order to avoid any +encounter with an armed fleet from France,[160] which was on the look +out for me off Cape St. Vincent. Thence I went to the Canaries,[161] +from which islands I sailed with but one ship and two caravels, having +dispatched the other ships to Española by the direct road to the +Indies;[162] while I myself moved southward, with the view of reaching +the equinoctial line, and of then proceeding westward, so as to leave +the island of Española to the north. But having reached the Cape Verde +islands[163] (an incorrect name[164], for they are so barren that nothing +green was to be seen there, and the people so sickly that I did not +venture to remain among them), I sailed away four hundred and eighty +miles, which is equivalent to a hundred and twenty leagues, towards the +south-west, where, when it grew dark, I found the north star to be in +the fifth degree. The wind then failed me, and I entered a climate where +the intensity of the heat was such, that I thought both ships and men +would have been burnt up, and everything suddenly got into such a state +of confusion, that no man dared go below deck to attend to the securing +of the water-cask and the provisions. This heat lasted eight days; on the +first day the weather was fine, but on the seven other days it rained +and was cloudy, yet we found no alleviation of our distress; so that I +certainly believe, that if the sun had shone as on the first day, we +should not have been able to escape in any way. + +I recollect, that in sailing towards the Indies, as soon as I passed a +hundred leagues to the westward of the Azores, I found the temperature +change: and this is so all along from north to south. I determined, +therefore, if it should please the Lord to give me a favourable wind and +good weather, so that I might leave the part where I then was, that I +would give up pursuing the southward course, yet not turn backwards, but +sail towards the west, moving in that direction in the hope of finding +the same temperature that I had experienced when I sailed in the parallel +of the Canaries,—and then, if it proved so, I should still be able to +proceed more to the south. At the end of these eight days it pleased +our Lord to give me a favourable east wind, and I steered to the west, +but did not venture to move lower down towards the south, because I +discovered a very great change in the sky and the stars, although I found +no alteration in the temperature. I resolved, therefore, to keep on the +direct westward course, in a line from Sierra Leone, and not to change +it until I reached the point where I had thought I should find land, +where I would repair the vessels, and renew, if possible, our stock of +provisions, and take in what water we wanted. At the end of seventeen +days, during which our Lord gave me a propitious wind, we saw land at +noon of Tuesday the 31st of July.[165] This I had expected on the Monday +before, and held that route up to this point; but as the sun’s strength +increased, and our supply of water was failing, I resolved to make for +the Caribee Islands, and set sail in that direction; when, by the mercy +of God, which He has always extended to me, one of the sailors went up +to the main-top and saw to the westward a range of three mountains. Upon +this we repeated the “Salve Regina,” and other prayers, and all of us +gave many thanks to our Lord. I then gave up our northward course, and +put in for the land: at the hour of complines we reached a cape, which I +called Cape Galea,[166] having already given to the island the name of +Trinidad, and here we found a harbour, which would have been excellent +but there was no good anchorage. We saw houses and people on the spot, +and the country around was very beautiful, and as fresh and green as +the gardens of Valencia in the month of March. I was disappointed at +not being able to put into the harbour, and ran along the coast to +the westward. After sailing five leagues I found very good bottom and +anchored. The next day I set sail in the same direction, in search of a +harbour where I might repair the vessels and take in water, as well as +improve the stock of provisions which I had brought out with me. When +we had taken in a pipe of water, we proceeded onwards till we reached +the cape, and there finding good anchorage and protection from the east +wind, I ordered the anchors to be dropped, the water-cask to be repaired, +a supply of water and wood to be taken in, and the people to rest +themselves from the fatigues which they had endured for so long a time. +I gave to this point the name of Sandy Point (Punta del Arenal). All +the ground in the neighbourhood was filled with foot-marks of animals, +like the impression of the foot of a goat;[167] but although it would +have appeared from this circumstance that they were very numerous, only +one was seen, and that was dead. On the following day a large canoe +came from the eastward, containing twenty-four men, all in the prime +of life, and well provided with arms, such as bows, arrows, and wooden +shields; they were all, as I have said, young, well-proportioned, and +not dark black, but whiter than any other Indians that I had seen,—of +very graceful gesture and handsome forms, wearing their hair long and +straight, and cut in the Spanish style. Their heads were bound round +with cotton scarfs elaborately worked in colours, which resembled the +Moorish head-dresses. Some of these scarfs were worn round the body and +used as a covering in lieu of trousers. The natives spoke to us from +the canoe while it was yet at a considerable distance, but none of us +could understand them; I made signs to, them, however, to come nearer +to us, and more than two hours were spent in this manner,—but if by any +chance they moved a little nearer, they soon pushed off again. I caused +basins and other shining objects to be shown to them to tempt them to +come near; and after a long time, they came somewhat nearer than they +had hitherto done,—upon which, as I was very anxious to speak with them +and had nothing else to show them to induce them to approach, I ordered +a drum to be played upon the quarter-deck, and some of our young men +to dance, believing the Indians would come to see the amusement. No +sooner, however, did they perceive the beating of the drum and the +dancing, than they all left their oars, and strung their bows, and each +man laying hold of his shield, they commenced discharging their arrows +at us; upon this, the music and dancing soon ceased; and I ordered a +charge to be made from some of our cross-bows; they then left us, and +went rapidly to the other caravel, and placed themselves under its poop. +The pilot of that vessel received them courteously, and gave to the man +who appeared to be their chief, a coat and hat; and it was then arranged +between them, that he should go to speak with him on shore. Upon this the +Indians immediately went thither and waited for him; but as he would not +go without my permission, he came to my ship in a boat, whereupon the +Indians got into their canoe again and went away, and I never saw any +more of them or of any of the other inhabitants of the island. When I +reached the point of Arenal, I found that the island of Trinidad formed +with the land of Gracia[168] a strait of two leagues’ width from west to +east, and as we had to pass through it to go to the north, we found some +strong currents which crossed the strait, and which made a great roaring, +so that I concluded there must be a reef of sand or rocks, which would +preclude our entrance; and behind this current was another and another, +all making a roaring noise like the sound of breakers against the rocks. +I anchored there, under the said point of Arenal, outside of the strait, +and found the water rush from east to west with as much impetuosity as +that of the Guadalquivir at its conflux with the sea; and this continued +constantly day and night, so that it appeared to be impossible to move +backwards for the current or forwards for the shoals. In the dead of +night, while I was on deck, I heard an awful roaring that came from the +south towards the ship; I stopped to observe what it might be, and I saw +the sea rolling from west to east like a mountain as high as the ship, +and approaching by little and little; on the top of this rolling sea came +a mighty wave roaring with a frightful noise and the same terrific uproar +as the other currents, producing, as I have already said, a sound as of +breakers upon the rocks.[169] To this day I have a vivid recollection +of the dread I then felt, lest the ship might founder under the force +of that tremendous sea; but it passed by, and reached the mouth of the +before-mentioned passage, where the uproar lasted for a considerable +time. On the following day I sent out boats to take soundings, and found +that in the strait, at the deepest part of the embouchure, there were +six or seven fathoms of water, and that there were constant contrary +currents, one running inwards, and the other outwards. It pleased the +Lord, however, to give us a favourable wind, and I passed inwards through +that strait, and soon came to still water. In fact some water which was +drawn up from the sea, proved to be fresh. I then sailed northwards till +I came to a very high mountain, at about twenty-six leagues from the +Punta del Arenal; here two lofty headlands appeared, one towards the +east, and forming part of the island of Trinidad,[170] and the other, on +the west, being part of the land which I have already called Gracia;[171] +we found here a channel still narrower than that of Arenal,[172] with +similar currents, and a tremendous roaring of water; the water here also +was fresh. Hitherto I had held no communication with any of the people of +this country, although I very earnestly desired it; I therefore sailed +along the coast westwards, and the further I advanced, the fresher and +more wholesome I found the water; and when I had proceeded a considerable +distance, I reached a spot where the land appeared to be cultivated. +There I anchored, and sent the boats ashore, and the men who went in them +found the natives had recently left the place; they also observed that +the mountain was covered with monkeys. They came back, and as the coast +at that part presented nothing but a chain of mountains, I concluded that +further west we should find the land flatter, and consequently in all +probability inhabited. Actuated by this thought I weighed anchor, and +ran along the coast until we came to the end of the cordillera; I then +anchored at the mouth of a river, and we were soon visited by a great +number of the inhabitants, who informed us, that the country was called +Paria, and that further westward it was more fully peopled. I took four +of these natives, and proceeded on my westward voyage; and when I had +gone eight leagues further, I found on the other side of a point which +I called Punta de la Aguja (Needle Point)[173] one of the most lovely +countries in the world, and very thickly peopled: it was three o’clock +in the morning when I reached it, and seeing its verdure and beauty, I +resolved to anchor there and communicate with the inhabitants. Some of +the natives soon came out to the ship, in canoes, to beg me, in the name +of their king, to go on shore; and when they saw that I paid no attention +to them, they came to the ship in their canoes in countless numbers, many +of them wearing pieces of gold on their breasts, and some with bracelets +of pearls on their arms; on seeing which I was much delighted, and made +many inquiries with the view of learning where they found them. They +informed me, that they were to be procured in their own neighbourhood, +and also northward of that country. I would have remained here, but the +provisions of corn, and wine, and meats, which I had brought out with so +much care for the people whom I had left behind, were nearly wasted, so +that all my anxiety was to get them into a place of safety, and not to +stop for any thing. I wished, however, to get some of the pearls that I +had seen, and with that view sent the boats on shore. The natives are +very numerous, and all handsome in person, and of the same colour as +the Indians we had already seen; they are, moreover, very affable, and +received our men who went on shore most courteously, seeming very well +disposed towards us. These men relate, that when the boats reached the +shore, two of the chiefs, whom they took to be father and son, came +forward in advance of the mass of the people, and conducted them to a +very large house with façades, and not round and tent-shaped as the +other houses were; in this house were many seats, on which they made our +men sit down, they themselves sitting with them. They then caused bread +to be brought, with many kinds of fruits, and various sorts of wine, +both white and red, not made of grapes, but apparently produced from +different fruits. The most reasonable inference is, that they use maize, +which is a plant that bears an ear like that of wheat, some of which I +took with me to Spain, where it now grows abundantly; the best of this +they seemed to regard as most excellent, and set a great value upon +it. The men remained together at one end of the house, and the women at +the other. Great vexation was felt by both parties that they could not +understand each other, for they were mutually anxious to make inquiries +respecting each other’s country. After our men had been entertained +at the house of the elder Indian, the younger took them to his house, +and gave them an equally cordial reception; after which they returned +to their boats and came on board. I weighed anchor forthwith, for I +was hastened by my anxiety to save the provisions which were becoming +spoiled, and which I had procured and preserved with so much care and +trouble, as well as to attend to my own health, which had been affected +by long watching; and although on my former voyage, when I went out to +discover terra firma, I passed thirty-three days without natural rest, +and was all that time without seeing it, yet never were my eyes so much +affected with bleeding or so painful as at this period. These people, as +I have already said, are very graceful in form,—tall, and lithe in their +movements, and wear their hair very long and smooth. They also bind +their heads with handsome worked handkerchiefs, which from a distance +look like silk or gauze; others use the same material in a longer form, +wound round them so as to cover them like trousers, and this is done +by both the men and the women. These people are of a whiter skin than +any I have seen in the Indies. It is the fashion among all classes to +wear something at the breast, and on the arms, and many wear pieces of +gold hanging low on the bosom. Their canoes are larger, lighter, and +of better build than those of the islands which I have hitherto seen, +and in the middle of each they have a cabin or room, which I found was +occupied by the chiefs and their wives. I called this place “Jardines,” +that is “the Gardens,” for it corresponded to that appellation. I made +many inquiries as to where they found the gold, in reply to which, all +of them directed me to an elevated tract of land at no great distance, +on the confines of their country, lying to the westward; but they all +advised me not to go there, for fear of being eaten, and at the time, I +imagined that by their description they wished to imply, that they were +cannibals who dwelt there, but I have since thought it possible, that +they meant merely to express, that the country was filled with beasts +of prey. I also inquired of them where they obtained the pearls, and +in reply to this question likewise, they directed me to the westward, +and also to the north, behind the country they occupied. I did not put +this information to the test, on account of the provisions, and the +weakness of my eyes, and because the large ship that I had with me was +not calculated for such an undertaking. The short time that I spent with +them was all passed in putting questions; and at the hour of vespers +[six P.M.], as I have already said, we returned to the ships, upon which +I weighed anchor and sailed to the westward. I proceeded onwards on the +following day, until I found that we were only in three fathoms water; +at this time I was still under the idea that it was but an island, and +that I should be able to make my exit by the north. With this view I sent +a light caravel in advance of us, to see whether there was any exit, or +whether the passage was closed. The caravel proceeded a great distance, +until it reached a very large gulf, in which there appeared to be four +smaller gulfs, from one of which debouched a large river. They invariably +found ground at five fathoms, and a great quantity of very fresh water, +indeed, I never tasted any equal to it. I was very disappointed when I +found that I could make no exit, either by the north, south, or west, +but that I was enclosed on all three sides by land. I therefore weighed +anchor, and sailed in a backward direction, with the hope of finding a +passage to the north by the strait, which I have already described; but +I could not return along the inhabited part where I had already been, on +account of the currents, which drove me entirely out of my course. But +constantly, at every headland, I found the water sweet and clear, and we +were carried eastwards very powerfully towards the two straits already +mentioned. I then conjectured, that the currents and the overwhelming +mountains of water which rushed into these straits with such an awful +roaring, arose from the contest between the fresh water and the sea. The +fresh water struggled with the salt to oppose its entrance, and the salt +contended against the fresh in its efforts to gain a passage outwards. I +also formed the conjecture, that at one time there was a continuous neck +of land from the island of Trinidad to the land of Gracia, where the +two straits now are, as your Highnesses will see, by the drawing which +accompanies this letter. I passed out by this northern strait, and found +the fresh water come even there; and when, by the force of the wind, I +was enabled to effect a passage, I remarked, while on one of the watery +billows which I have described, that the water on the inner side of the +current was fresh, and on the outside salt. + +When I sailed from Spain to the Indies, I found, that as soon as I had +passed a hundred leagues westward of the Azores, there was a very great +change in the sky and the stars, in the temperature of the air, and in +the water of the sea; and I have been very diligent in observing these +things. I remarked, that from north to south, in traversing these hundred +leagues from the said islands, the needle of the compass, which hitherto +had turned towards the north-east, turned a full quarter of the wind to +the north-west, and this took place from the time when we reached that +line. At the same time an appearance was presented, as if the sea shore +had been transplanted thither, for we found the sea covered all over +with a sort of weed, resembling pine branches, and with fruits like +that of the mastic tree, so thick, that on my first voyage I thought it +was a reef, and that the ships could not avoid running aground; whereas +until I reached this line, I did not meet with a single bough. I also +observed, that at this point the sea was very smooth, and that though the +wind was rough, the ships never rolled. I likewise found, that within +the same line, towards the west, the temperature was always mild, and +that it did not vary summer or winter. While there, I observed that the +north star described a circle five degrees in diameter; that when its +satellites[174] are on the right side, then the star was at its lowest +point, and from this point it continues rising until it reaches the +left side, where it is also at five degrees, and then again it sinks +until it at length returns to the right side. In this voyage I proceeded +immediately from Spain to the island of Madeira, thence to the Canaries, +and then to the Cape Verde islands, and from the Cape Verde islands I +sailed southwards, even below the equinoctial line, as I have already +described. When I reached the parallel of Sierra Leone, in Guinea, I +found the heat so intense, and the rays of the sun so fierce, that I +thought that we should have been burnt; and although it rained and +the sky was heavy with clouds, I still suffered the same oppression, +until our Lord was pleased to grant me a favourable wind, giving me an +opportunity of sailing to the west, so that I reached a latitude where +I experienced, as I have already said, a change in the temperature. +Immediately upon my reaching this line, the temperature became very +mild, and the more I advanced, the more this mildness increased; but I +did not find the positions of the stars correspond with these effects. +I remarked at this place, that when night came on, the polar star was +five degrees high, and then the satellites were over head; afterwards, +at midnight, I found that star elevated ten degrees, and when morning +approached, the satellites were fifteen degrees below. I found the +smoothness of the sea continue, but not so the weeds; as to the polar +star, I watched it with great wonder, and devoted many nights to a +careful examination of it with the quadrant, and I always found that +the lead and line fell to the same point. I look upon this as something +new, and it will probably be admitted, that it is a short distance for +so great a change to take place in the temperature. I have always read, +that the world comprising the land and the water was spherical, and the +recorded experiences of Ptolemy and all others, have proved this by the +eclipses of the moon, and other observations made from east to west, as +well as by the elevation of the pole from north to south. But as I have +already described, I have now seen so much irregularity, that I have +come to another conclusion respecting the earth, namely, that it is not +round as they describe, but of the form of a pear, which is very round +except where the stalk grows, at which part it is most prominent; or +like a round ball, upon one part of which is a prominence like a woman’s +nipple, this protrusion being the highest and nearest the sky, situated +under the equinoctial line, and at the eastern extremity of this sea,—I +call that the eastern extremity, where the land and the islands end. +In confirmation of my opinion, I revert to the arguments which I have +above detailed respecting the line, which passes from north to south, a +hundred leagues westward of the Azores; for in sailing thence westward, +the ships went on rising smoothly towards the sky, and then the weather +was felt to be milder, on account of which mildness, the needle shifted +one point of the compass; the further we went, the more the needle moved +to the north-west, this elevation producing the variation of the circle, +which the north star describes with its satellites; and the nearer I +approached the equinoctial line, the more they rose, and the greater +was the difference in these stars and in their circles. Ptolemy and the +other philosophers, who have written upon the globe, thought that it was +spherical, believing that this hemisphere was round as well as that in +which they themselves dwelt, the centre of which was in the island of +Arin,[175] which is under the equinoctial line between the Arabian Gulf +and the Gulf of Persia; and the circle passes over Cape St. Vincent, +in Portugal, westward, and eastward, by Cangara and the Seras,[176] in +which hemisphere I make no difficulty as to its being a perfect sphere +as they describe; but this western half of the world, I maintain, is +like the half of a very round pear, having a raised projection for +the stalk, as I have already described, or like a woman’s nipple on a +round ball. Ptolemy and the others who have written upon the globe, +had no information respecting this part of the world, which was then +unexplored; they only established their arguments with respect to their +own hemisphere, which, as I have already said, is half of a perfect +sphere. And now that your Highnesses have commissioned me to make this +voyage of discovery, the truths which I have stated are evidently proved, +because in this voyage, when I was off the island of Hargin,[177] and +its vicinity, which is twenty degrees to the north of the equinoctial +line, I found the people are black, and the land very much burnt; and +when after that I went to the Cape Verde islands, I found the people +there much darker still, and the more southward we went, the more they +approach the extreme of blackness; so that when I reached the parallel of +Sierra Leone, where, as night came on, the north star rose five degrees, +the people there were excessively black; and as I sailed westward, the +heat became extreme. But after I had passed the meridian, or line which +I have already described, I found the climate become gradually more +temperate; so that when I reached the island of Trinidad, where the +north star rose five degrees as night came on, there, and in the land +of Gracia, I found the temperature exceedingly mild; the fields and the +foliage likewise were remarkably fresh and green, and as beautiful as +the gardens of Valencia in April. The people there are very graceful in +form, less dark than those whom I had before seen in the Indies, and wear +their hair long and smooth; they are also more shrewd, intelligent, and +courageous. The sun was then in the sign of Virgo, over our heads and +theirs; therefore, all this must proceed from the extreme blandness of +the temperature, which arises, as I have said, from this country being +the most elevated in the world, and the nearest to the sky. On these +grounds, therefore, I affirm, that the globe is not spherical, but that +there is the difference in its form which I have described; the which +is to be found in this hemisphere, at the point where the Indies meet +the ocean, the extremity of the hemisphere being below the equinoctial +line. And a great confirmation of this is, that when our Lord made the +sun, the first light appeared in the first point of the east, where the +most elevated point of the globe is; and although it was the opinion of +Aristotle, that the antarctic pole, or the land under it, was the highest +part of the world, and the nearest to the heavens, other philosophers +oppose him, and say, that the highest part was below the arctic pole, by +which reasoning it appears, that they understood, that one part of the +world must be loftier, and nearer the sky, than the other; but it never +struck them that it might be under the equinoctial, in the way that I +have said, which is not to be wondered at, because they had no certain +knowledge respecting this hemisphere, but merely vague suppositions, for +no one has ever gone or been sent to investigate the matter, until now +that your Highnesses have sent me to explore both the sea and the land. +I found that between the two straits, which, as I have said, face each +other in a line from north to south, is a distance of twenty-six leagues; +and there can be no mistake in this calculation, because it was made +with the quadrant. I also find, that from these two straits on the west +up to the above-mentioned gulf, to which I gave the name of the Gulf of +Pearls,[178] there are sixty-eight leagues of four miles to the league, +which is the reckoning we are accustomed to make at sea; from this gulf +the water runs constantly with great impetuosity towards the east, and +this is the cause why, in these two straits, there is so fierce a turmoil +from the fresh water encountering the water of the sea. In the southern +strait, which I named the Serpent’s Mouth, I found that towards evening +the polar star was nearly at five degrees elevation; and in the northern, +which I called the Dragon’s Mouth, it was at an elevation of nearly seven +degrees. The before-mentioned Gulf of Pearls is to the west of the [179] +of Ptolemy, nearly three thousand nine hundred miles, which make nearly +seventy equinoctial degrees, reckoning fifty-six miles and two-thirds +to a degree. The Holy Scriptures record, that our Lord made the earthly +paradise, and planted in it the tree of life, and thence springs a +fountain from which the four principal rivers in the world take their +source; namely, the Ganges in India, the Tigris, and Euphrates in [180] +which rivers divide a chain of mountains, and forming Mesopotamia, flow +thence into Persia,—and the Nile, which rises in Ethiopia, and falls into +the sea at Alexandria. + +I do not find, nor have ever found, any account by the Romans or Greeks, +which fixes in a positive manner the site of the terrestrial paradise, +neither have I seen it given in any mappe-monde, laid down from authentic +sources. Some placed it in Ethiopia, at the sources of the Nile, but +others, traversing all these countries, found neither the temperature +nor the altitude of the sun correspond with their ideas respecting it; +nor did it appear that the overwhelming waters of the deluge had been +there. Some pagans pretended to adduce arguments to establish that it was +in the Fortunate Islands, now called the Canaries, etc. + +St. Isidore, Bede, Strabo,[181] and the Master of scholastic +history,[182] with St. Ambrose, and Scotus, and all the learned +theologians, agree that the earthly paradise is in the east, etc. + +I have already described my ideas concerning this hemisphere and its +form, and I have no doubt, that if I could pass below the equinoctial +line, after reaching the highest point of which I have spoken, I should +find a much milder temperature, and a variation in the stars and in the +water; not that I suppose that elevated point to be navigable, nor even +that there is water there; indeed, I believe it is impossible to ascend +thither, because I am convinced that it is the spot of the earthly +paradise, whither no one can go but by God’s permission; but this land +which your Highnesses have now sent me to explore, is very extensive, +and I think there are many other countries in the south, of which the +world has never had any knowledge. + +I do not suppose that the earthly paradise is in the form of a rugged +mountain, as the descriptions of it have made it appear, but that it is +on the summit of the spot, which I have described as being in the form +of the stalk of a pear; the approach to it from a distance must be by a +constant and gradual ascent; but I believe that, as I have already said, +no one could ever reach the top; I think also, that the water I have +described may proceed from it, though it be far off, and that stopping +at the place which I have just left, it forms this lake. There are +great indications of this being the terrestrial paradise, for its site +coincides with the opinion of the holy and wise theologians whom I have +mentioned; and moreover, the other evidences agree with the supposition, +for I have never either read or heard of fresh water coming in so large +a quantity, in close conjunction with the water of the sea; the idea is +also corroborated by the blandness of the temperature; and if the water +of which I speak, does not proceed from the earthly paradise, it seems to +be a still greater wonder, for I do not believe that there is any river +in the world so large or so deep. + +When I left the Dragon’s Mouth, which is the northernmost of the two +straits which I have described, and which I so named on the day of +our Lady of August,[183] I found that the sea ran so strongly to the +westward, that between the hour of mass,[184] when I weighed anchor, and +the hour of complines,[185] I made sixty-five leagues of four miles each; +and not only was the wind not violent, but on the contrary very gentle, +which confirmed me in the conclusion, that in sailing southward, there is +a continuous ascent, while there is a corresponding descent towards the +north. + +I hold it for certain, that the waters of the sea move from east to west +with the sky, and that in passing this track, they hold a more rapid +course, and have thus eaten away large tracts of land, and hence has +resulted this great number of islands; indeed, these islands themselves +afford an additional proof of it, for on the one hand all those which lie +west and east, or a little more obliquely north-west and south-east, +are broad; while those which lie north and south, or north-east and +south-west, that is, in a directly contrary direction to the said winds, +are narrow; furthermore, that these islands should possess the most +costly productions, is to be accounted for by the mild temperature, which +comes to them from heaven, since these are the most elevated parts of +the world. It is true, that in some parts, the waters do not appear to +take this course, but this only occurs in certain spots, where they are +obstructed by land, and hence they appear to take different directions. + +Pliny writes that the sea and land together form a sphere, but that the +ocean forms the greatest mass, and lies uppermost, while the earth is +below and supports the ocean, and that the two afford a mutual support to +each other, as the kernel of a nut is confined by its shell. The Master +of scholastic history, in commenting upon Genesis, says, that the waters +are not very extensive; and that although when they were first created +they covered the earth, they were yet vaporous like a cloud, and that +afterwards they became condensed, and occupied but small space, and in +this notion Nicolas de Lira agrees. Aristotle says that the world is +small, and the water very limited in extent, and that it is easy to pass +from Spain to the Indies; and this is confirmed by Avenruyz,[186] and +by the Cardinal Pedro de Aliaco, who, in supporting this opinion, shows +that it agrees with that of Seneca, and says that Aristotle had been +enabled to gain information respecting the world by means of Alexander +the Great, and Seneca by means of the Emperor Nero, and Pliny through the +Romans; all of them having expended large sums of money, and employed +a vast number of people, in diligent inquiry concerning the secrets of +the world, and in spreading abroad the knowledge thus obtained. The said +cardinal allows to these writers greater authority than to Ptolemy, and +other Greeks and Arabs; and in confirmation of their opinion concerning +the small quantity of water on the surface of the globe, and the limited +amount of land covered by that water, in comparison of what had been +related on the authority of Ptolemy and his disciples, he finds a +passage in the third book of Esdras, where that sacred writer says, that +of seven parts of the world six are discovered, and the other is covered +with water. The authority of the third and fourth books of Esdras is +also confirmed by holy persons, such as St. Augustin, and St. Ambrose +in his _Exameron_, where he says,—“Here my son Jesus shall first come, +and here my son Christ shall die!” These holy men say that Esdras was a +prophet as well as Zacharias, the father of St. John, and _El Braso_[187] +Simon; authorities which are also quoted by Francis de Mairones.[188] +With respect to the dryness of the land, experience has shown that it is +greater than is commonly believed; and this is no wonder, for the further +one goes the more one learns. + +I now return to my subject of the land of Gracia, and of the river and +lake found there, which latter might more properly be called a sea; for +a lake is but a small expanse of water, which, when it becomes great, +deserves the name of a sea, just as we speak of the Sea of Galilee and +the Dead Sea; and I think that if the river mentioned does not proceed +from the terrestrial paradise, it comes from an immense tract of land +situated in the south, of which no knowledge has been hitherto obtained. +But the more I reason on the subject, the more satisfied I become that +the terrestrial paradise is situated in the spot I have described; and I +ground my opinion upon the arguments and authorities already quoted. May +it please the Lord to grant your Highnesses a long life, and health and +peace to follow out so noble an investigation; in which I think our Lord +will receive great service, Spain considerable increase of its greatness, +and all Christians much consolation and pleasure, because by this means +the name of our Lord will be published abroad. + +In all the countries visited by your Highnesses’ ships, I have caused +a high cross to be fixed upon every headland, and have proclaimed, to +every nation that I have discovered, the lofty estate of your Highnesses, +and of your court in Spain. I also tell them all I can respecting our +holy faith and of the belief in the holy mother Church, which has its +members in all the world; and I speak to them also of the courtesy and +nobleness of all Christians, and of the faith they have in the Holy +Trinity. May it please the Lord to forgive those who have calumniated +and still calumniate this excellent enterprise, and oppose and have +opposed its advancement, without considering how much glory and greatness +will accrue from it to your Highnesses throughout all the world. They +cannot state anything in disparagement of it, except its expense, and +that I have not immediately sent back the ships loaded with gold. They +speak this without considering the shortness of the time, and how many +difficulties there are to contend with; and that every year there are +individuals who singly earn by their deserts out of your Majesties’ own +household, more revenue than would cover the whole of this expense. Nor +do they take into consideration that the princes of Spain have never +gained possession of any land out of their own country, until now that +your Highnesses have become the masters of another world, where our holy +faith may become so much increased, and whence such stores of wealth may +be derived; for although we have not sent home ships laden with gold, +we have, nevertheless, sent satisfactory samples, both of gold and of +other valuable commodities, by which it may be judged that in a short +time large profit may be derived. Neither do they take into consideration +the noble spirit of the princes of Portugal, who so long ago carried into +execution the exploration of Guinea, and still follow it up along the +coast of Africa, in which one-half of the population of the country has +been employed, and yet the King is more determined on the enterprise than +ever. The Lord grant all that I have said, and lead them to think deeply +upon what I have written; which is not the thousandth part of what might +be written of the deeds of princes who have set their minds upon gaining +knowledge, and upon obtaining territory and keeping it. + +I say all this, not because I doubt the inclination of your Highnesses +to pursue the enterprise while you live,—for I rely confidently on the +answers your Highnesses once gave me by word of mouth,—nor because I +have seen any change in your Highnesses, but from the fear of what I +have heard from those of whom I have been speaking; for I know that +water dropping on a stone will at length make a hole. Your Highnesses +responded to me with that nobleness of feeling which all the world knows +you to possess, and told me to pay no attention to these calumniations; +for that your intention was to follow up and support the undertaking, +even if nothing were gained by it but stones and sand. Your Highnesses +also desired me to be in no way anxious about the expense, for that much +greater cost had been incurred on much more trifling matters, and that +you considered all the past and future expense as well laid out; for that +your Highnesses believed that our holy faith would be increased, and your +royal dignity enhanced, and that they were no friends of the royal estate +who spoke ill of the enterprise. + +And now, during the despatch of the information respecting these lands +which I have recently discovered, and where I believe in my soul that +the earthly paradise is situated, the “Adelantado” will proceed with +three ships, well stocked with provisions, on a further investigation, +and will make all the discoveries he can about these parts. Meanwhile, +I shall send your Highnesses this letter, accompanied by a map of the +country, and your Majesties will determine on what is to be done, and +give your orders as to how it is your pleasure that I should proceed: the +which, by the aid of the Holy Trinity, shall be carried into execution +with all possible diligence, in the faithful service and to the entire +satisfaction of your Majesties. Thanks be to God. + + +TERCER VIAGE DE COLON. + +_La historia del viage quel Almirante D. Cristobal Colon hizo la tercera +vez que vino á las Indias cuando descubrió la tierra firme, como lo envió +á los Reyes desde la Isla Española._ + +Serenísimos é muy altos é muy poderosos Príncipes Rey é Reina nuestros +Señores: La Santa Trinidad movió á vuestras Altezas á esta empresa de las +Indias, y por su infinita bondad hizo á mí mensagero dello, al cual vine +con el embajada á su Real conspetu, movido como á los mas altos Príncipes +de cristianos y que tanto se ejercisaban en la fé y acrecentamiento +della; las personas que entendieron en ello lo tuvieron por imposible, +y el caudal hacian sobre bienes de fortuna, y allí echaron el clavo. +Puse en esto seis ó siete años de grave pena, amostrando lo mejor que +yo sabia cuanto servicio se podia hacer á nuestro Señor en esto en +divulgar su santo nombre y Fé á tantos pueblos; lo cual todo era cosa +de tanta excelencia y buena fama y gran memoria para grandes Príncipes: +fue tambien necesario de hablar del temporal adonde se les amostró el +escrebir de tantos sabios dignos de fé, los cuales escribieron historias. +Los cuales contaban que en estas partes habia muchas riquezas, y asimismo +fue necesario traer á esto el decir é epinion de aquellos que escribieron +é situaron el mundo: en fin vuestras Altezas determinaron questo se +pusiese en obra. Aquí mostraron el grande corazon que siempre ficieron +en toda cosa grande, porque todos los que habian entendido en ello y +oido esta platica todos á una mano lo tenian á burla, salvo dos frailes +que siempre fueron constantes. Yo, bien que llevase fatiga, estaba bien +seguro que esto no vernia á menos, y estoy de contino, porque es verdad +que todo pasará, y no la palabra de Dios, y se complirá todo lo que dijó; +el cual tan claro habló de estas tierras por la boca de Isaías en tantos +lugares de su Escriptura, afirmando que de España les seria divulgado su +santo nombre. E partí en nombre de la Santa Trinidad, y volví muy presto +con la experiencia de todo cuanto yo habia dicho en la mano: tornáronme á +enviar vuestras Altezas, y en poco espacio digo, no de [155] le descubri +por virtud divinal trescientas y treinta y tres leguas de la tierra +firme, fin de Oriente, y setcentas [_sic_] islas de nombre, allende de +lo descubierto en el primero víage, y le allané la Isla Española que +boja mas que España, en que la gente della es sin cuento, y que todos +le pagasen tributo. Nació allí mal decir y menosprecio de la empresa +comenzada en ello, porque no habia yo enviado luego los navíos cargados +de oro, sin considerar le brevedad del tiempo, y lo otro que yo dije +de tantos inconvenientes; y en esto por mis pecados ó por mi salvacion +creo que será, fue puesto en aborrecimiento y dado impedimento á cuanto +yo decia y demandaba; por lo cual acordé de venir á vuestras Altezas, +y maravillarme de todo, y mostrarles la razon que en todo habia, y les +dige de los pneblos que yo habia visto, en qué ó de qué se podrian +salvar muchas animas, y les truje las obligaciones de la gente de la +Isla Española, de como se obligaban á pagar tributo é les tenian por sos +Reyes y Señores, y les truje abastante muestra de oro, y que hay mineros +y granos muy grandes, y asimismo de cobre; y les truje de muchas maneras +de especerias, de que seria largo de escrebir, y les dije de la gran +cantidad de brasil, y otras infinitas cosas. Todo no aprovechó para con +algunas personas que tenian gana y dado comienzo á mal decir del negocio, +ni entrar con fabla del servicio de nuestro Señor con se salvar tantas +animas, ni á decir questo era grandeza de vuestras Altezas, de la mejor +calidad que hasta hoy haya usado Príncipe, por quel ejercicio é gasto +era para el espiritual y temporal, y que no podia ser que andando el +tiempo no hobiese la España de aquí grandes provechos, pues que se veian +las señales que escribieron de lo de estas partidas tan manifiestas; +que tambien se llegaria á ver todo el otro complimiento, ni á decir +cosas que usaron grandes Principes en el mundo para crecer su fama, así +como de Salomon que envió desde Hierusalem en fin de Oriente á ver el +monte Sopora, en que se detovieron los navíos tres años, el cual tienen +vuestras Altezas agora en la Isla Española; ni de Alejandre, que envió á +ver el regimiento de la Isla de Trapobana en India, y Nero Cesar á ver +las fuentes del Nilo, y la razon porque crecian en el verano, cuando las +aguas son pocas, y otras muchas grandezas que hicieron Príncipes, y que +á Príncipes son estas cosas dadas de hacer; ni valia decir que yo nunca +habia leido que Príncipes de Castilla jamas hobiesen ganado tierra fuera +della, y que esta de acáes otro mundo en que se trabajaron Romanos y +Alejandre y Griegos, para la haber con grandes ejercicios, ni decir del +presente de los Reyes de Portugal, que tovieron corazon para sostener á +Guinea, y del descobrir della, y que gastaron oro y gente á tanta, que +quien contase toda la del Reino se hallaria que otra tanta como la mitad +son muertos en Guinea, y todavia la continuaron hasta que les salió +dello lo que parece, lo cual todo comenzaron de largo tiempo, y hay muy +poco que les da renta; los cuales tambien osaron conquistar en Africa, y +sostener la empresa á Cepta, Tanjar y Arcilla, é Alcazar, y de contino +dar guerra á los moros, y todo esto con grande gasto, solo por hacer cosa +de Príncipe servir á Dios y acrecentar su Señorío. + +Cuanto yo mas decia tanto mas se doblaba á poner esto á vituperio, +amostrando en ello aborrecimiento, sin considerar cuánto bien parecio en +todo el mundo, y cuánto bien se dijo en todos los cristianos de vuestras +Altezas por haber tomado esta empresa, que no hobo grande ni pequeño +que no quisiese dello carta. Respondiéronme vuestras Altezas riéndose y +diciendo que yo no curase de nada porque no daban autoridad ni creencia á +quien les mal decia de esta empresa. + +Partí en nombre de la Santísima Trinidad, Miercoles 30 de Mayo de la +villa de S. Lúcar, bien fatigado de mi viage, que adonde esperaba +descanso, cuando yo partí de estas Indias, se me dobló la pena, y navegué +á la Isla de la Madera por camino no acostumbrado, por evitar escándalo +que pudiera tener con un armada de Francia, que me aguardaba al Cabo de +S. Vicente, y de allí á las Islas de Canaria, de adonde me partí con +una nao y dos carabelas, y envié los otros navíos á derecho camino á +las Indias á la Isla Española, y yo navegué al Austro con propósito de +llegar á la línea equinocial, y de allí seguir al Poniente hasta que la +Isla Española me quedase al Septentrion, y llegado á las Islas de Cabo +Verde, falso nombre, porque son atan secas que no ví cosa verde en ellas, +y toda la gente enferma, que no osé detenerme en ellas, y navegué al +Sudueste cuatrocientas y ochenta millas, que son ciento y veinte leguas, +adonde en anocheciendo tenia la estrella del norte en cinco grados; allí +me desamparó el viento y entré en tanto ardor y tan grande que creí +que se me quemasen los navíos y gente, que todo de un golpe vino á tan +desordenado, que no habia persona que osase descender debajo de cubierta +á remediar la vasija y mantenimientos; duró este ardor ocho dias; al +primer dia fue claro, y los siete dias siguientes llovió é hizo ñumblado, +y con todo no fallamos remedio, que cierto si así fuera de sol como el +primero, yo creo que no pudiera escapar en ninguna manera. + +Acórdome que navegando á las Indias siempre que yo paso al Poniente de +las Islas de los Azores cien leguas, allí fallo mudar la temperanza, +y esto es todo de Septentrion en Austro, y determiné que si á nuestro +Señor le pluguiese de me dar viento y buen tiempo que pudiese salir de +adonde estaba, de dejar de ir mas al Austro, ni volver tampoco atrás, +salvo de navegar al Poniente, á tanto que ya llegase á estar con esta +raya con esperanza que yo fallaria allí así temperamiento, como habia +fallado cuando yo navegaba en el paralelo de Canaria. E que si así fuese +que entonces yo podria ir mas al Austro, y plugó á nuestro Señor que al +cabo de estos ocho dias de me dar buen viento Levante, y yo seguí al +Poniente, mas no osé declinar abajo al Austro porque fallé grandísimo +mudamiento en el cielo y en las estrellas, mas non fallé mudamiento en la +temperancia; así acordé de proseguir delante siempre justo al Poniente, +en aquel derecho de la Sierra Lioa, con propósito de non mudar derrota +fasta adonde yo habia pensado que fallaria tierra, y allí adobar los +navíos, y remediar si pudiese los mantenimientos y tomar agua que no +tenia; y al cabo de diez y siete dias, los cuales nuestro Señor me dió de +próspero viento, Martes 31 de Julio á medio dia nos amostró tierra é yo +la esperaba el Lunes antes, y tuve aquel camino fasta entonces, que en +saliendo el sol, por defecto del agua que no tenia, determiné de andar á +las Islas de los Caribales, y tomé esa vuelta; y como su alta Magestad +haya siempre usado de misericordia conmigo, por acertamiento subió un +marinero á la gavia, y vido al Poniente tres moñtanas juntas: dijimos +la Salve Regina y otras prosas, y dimos todos muchas gracias á nuestro +Señor, y despues dejé el camino de Septentrion, y volví hácia la tierra, +adonde yo llegué á hora de completas á un Cabo á que dije de la Galea +despues de haber nombrado á la Isla de la Trinidad, y allí hobiera muy +buen puerto si fuera fondo, y habia casas y gente, y muy lindas tierras, +atan fermosas y verdes come las huertas de Valencia en Marzo. Pesóme +cuando no pude entrar en el puerto, y corri la costa de esta tierra del +luengo fasta el poniente, y andadas cinco leguas fallé muy buen fondo y +surgí, y en el otro dia dí la vela á este camino buscando puerto para +adobar los navíos y tomar agua, y remediar el trigo y los bastimentos que +llevaba solamente. Allí tomé una pipa de agua, y con ella anduve ansi +hasta llegar al cabo, y allí fallé abrigo de Levante y buen fondo, y así +mandé surgir y adobar la vasija y tomar agua y leña, y descendir la gente +á descansar de tanto tiempo que andaban penando. + +A esta punta llamé del Arenal, y allí se falló toda la tierra follada +de unas animalías que tenian la pata como de cabra, y bien que segun +parece ser allí haya muchas, no se vido sino una muerta. El dia siguiente +vino de hácia oriente una grande canoa con veinte y cuatro hombres, +todos mancebos é muy ataviados de armas, arcos y flechas y tablachinas, +y ellos, como dije, todos, mancebos, de buena disposicion y no negros, +salvo mas blancos que otros que haya visto en las Indias, y de muy lindo +gesto, y fermosos cuerpos, y los cabellos largos y llanos, cortados á +la guisa Castilla, y traian la cabeza atada con un pañuelo de algodon +tejido á labores y colores, el cual creia yo que era almaizar. Otro de +estos pañuelos traían ceñido é se cobijaban con él en lugar de pañetes. +Cuando llegó esta canoa habló de muy lejos, é yo ni otro ninguno no los +entendiamos, salvo que yo les mandaba hacer señas que se allegasen, y +en esto se pasó mas de dos horas, y si se llegaban un poco luego se +desviaban. Yo les hacia mostrar bacines y otras cosas que lucian por +enamorarlos porque viniesen, y á cabo de buen rato se allegaron mas que +hasta entonces no habian, y yo deseaba mucho haber lengua, y no tenia +ya cosa que me pareciese que era de mostrarles para que viniesen; salvo +que hice sobir un tamborin en el castillo de popa que tañesen, é unos +mancebos que danzasen, creyendo que se allegarian á ver la fiesta; +y luego que vieron tañer y danzar todos dejaron los remos y echaron +mano á los arcos y los encordaron, y embrazo cada uno su tablachina, y +comenzaron á tirarnos flechas: cesó luego el tañer y danzar, y mandé +luego sacar unas ballestas, y ellos dejáronme y fueren á mas andar á otra +carabela y de golpe se fueron debajo la popa della, y el piloto entró con +ellos, y dió un sayo é un bonete á un hombre principal que le pareció +dellos, y quedó concertado que le iria hablar allí en la playa, adonde +ellos luego fueron con la canoa esperándole, y él como no quiso ir sin mi +licencia, como ellos le vieron venir á la nao con la barca, tornaron á +entrar en la canoa é se fueron, é nunca mas los vide ni á otros de esta +isla. + +Cuando yo llegué á esta punta del Arenal, allí se hace una boca grande de +dos leguas de Poniente á Levante, la Isla de la Trinidad con la tierra de +Gracia y que para haber de entrar dentro para pasar al Septentrion habia +unos hileros de corrientes que atravesaban aquella boca y traían un rugir +muy grande, y creí yo que sería un arrecife de bajos é peñas, por el cual +no se ponria entrar dentro en ella, y detras de este hilero habia otro y +otro que todos traian un rugir grande como ola de la mar que va á romper +y dar en peñas. Surgí allí á la dicha punta del Arenal, fuera de la dicha +boca, y fallé que venia el agua del Oriente fasta el Poniente con tanta +furia como hace Guadalquivir en tiempo de avenida, y esto de contino +noche y dia, que creí quo no podria volver atrás por la corriente, ni ir +adelante por los bajos; y en la noche ya muy tarde, estando al bordo de +la nao, oí un rugir muy terrible que venia de la parte del Austro hácia +la nao, y me paré á mirar, y ví levantando la mar de Poniente á Levante, +en manera de una loma tan alta como la nao, y todavia venia hácia mi poco +á poco, y encima della venia un filero de corriente que venia rugiendo +con muy grande estrépito con aquella furia de aquel rugir que de los +otros hileros que yo dije que me parecian ondas de mar que daban en +peñas, que hoy en dia tengo el miedo en el cuerpo que no me trabucasen la +nao cuando llegasen debajo della, y passó y llegó fasta la boca adonde +allí se detuvo grande espacio. Y el otro dia siguiente envié las barcas á +sondar y fallé en el mas bajo de la boca, que habia seis ó siete brazas +de fondo, y de contino andaban aquellos hileros unos por entrar y otros +por salir, y plugo á nuestro Señor de me dar buen viento, y atravesé por +esa boca adentro, y luego hallé tranquilidad, y por acertamiento se sacó +del agua de la mar y la hallé dulce. Navegué al Septentrion fasta una +sierra muy alta, adonde serian veinte y seis leguas de esta punta del +Arenal, y allí habia dos cabos de tierra muy alta, el uno de la parte del +Oriente, y era de la misma Isla de la Trinidad, y el otro del Occidente +de la tierra que dije de Gracia, y allí hacia una boca muy angosta mas +que aquella de la punta del Arenal, y allí habia los mismos hileros y +aquel rugir fuerte del agua como era en la punta del Arenal, y asimismo +allí la mar era agua dulce; y fasta entonces yo no habia habido lengua +con ninguna gente de estas tierras, y lo deseaba en gran manera, y por +esto navegué al luengo de la costa de esta tierra hácia el Poniente, y +cuanto mas andaba hallaba el agua de la mar mas dulce y mas sabrosa, y +andando una gran parte llegué á un lugar donde me parecian las tierras +labradas y surgí y envié las barcas á tierra, y fallaron que de fresco +se habia ido de allí gente, y fallaron todo el monte cubierto de gatos +paules: volviéronse, y como esta fuese sierra me pareció que mas allá +al Poniente las tierras eran mas llanas, y que allí seria poblado, y +por esto seria poblado, y mandé levantar las anclas y corrí esta costa +fasta el cabo de esta sierra, y allí á un rio surgi, y luego vino mucha +gente, y me dijeron como llamaron á esta tierra Paria y que de allí mas +al Poniente era mas poblada; tomé dellos cuatro, y despues navegué al +Poniente, y andadas ocho leguas mas al Poniente allende una punta á que +yo llamé del Aguja: hallé unas tierras las mas hermosas del mundo, y +muy pobladas: llegué allí una mañana á hora de tercia, y por ver esta +verdura y esta hermosura acordé surgir y ver esta gente, de los cuales +luego vinieron en canoas á la nao á rogarme, de partes de su Rey, que +descendiese en tierra; é cuando vieron que no curé dellos vinieron á la +nao infinitísimos en canoas, y muchos traían piezas de oro al pescuezo, y +algunos atados á los brazos algunas perlas: holgué mucho cuando las ví é +procuré mucho de saber donde las hallaban, y me dijeron que allí, y de la +parte del Norte de aquella tierra. + +Quisiera detenerme, mas estos bastimentos, que yo traía, trigo y vino é +carne para esta gente que acá esta se me acababan de perder, los cuales +hobe allá con tanta fatiga, y por esto yo no buscaba sino á mas andar á +venir á poner en ellos cobro, y no me detener para cosa alguna: procuré +de haber de aquellas perlas, y envié las barcas á tierra: esta gente es +muy mucha, y toda de muy buen parecer, de la misma color que los otros de +antes, y muy tratables: la gente nuestra que fue á tierra los hallaron +tan convenibles, y los recibieron muy honradamente: dicen que luego que +llegaron las barcas á tierra que vinieron dos personas principales cón +todo el pueblo, creen que el uno el padre y el otro era su hijo, y los +llevaron á una casa muy grande hecha á dos aguas, y no redonda, como +tienda de campo, como son estas otras, y allí tenian muchas sillas á +donde los ficieron asentar, y otras donde ellos se asentaron; y hicieron +traer pan, y de muchas maneras frutas é vino de muchas maneras blanco +é tinto, mas no de uvas: debe él de ser de diversas maneras uno de una +fruta y otro de otra; y asimismo debe de ser dello de maiz, que es una +simiente que hace una espiga como una mazorca de que llevé yo allá, y hay +ya mucho en Castilla, y parece que aquel que lo tenia mejor lo traía por +mayor excelencia, y lo daba en gran precio: los hombres todos estaban +juntos á un cabo de la casa, y las mugeres en otro. Recibieron ambas +las partes gran pena porque no se entendian, ellos para preguntar á los +otros de nuestra patria, y los nuestros por saber de la suya. E despues +que hobieron rescebido colacion allí en casa del mas viejo, los llevó el +mozo á la suya, e fizo otro tanto, é despues se pusieron en las barcas +é se vinieron á la nao, é yo luego levanté las anclas porque andaba +mucho de priesa por remediar los mantenimientos que se me perdian que yo +habia habido con tanta fatiga, y tambien por remediarme á mí que habia +adolescido por el desvelar de los ojos, que bien quel viage que yo fuí +á descubrir la tierra firme estuviese teinta y tres dias sin concebir +sueño, y estoviese tanto tiempo sin vista, non se me deñaron los ojos, ni +se me rompieron de sangre y con tantos dolores como agora. + +Esta gente, como ya dije, son todos de muy linda estatura, altos de +cuerpos, é de muy lindos gestos, los cabellos muy largos é llanos, y +traen las cabezas atadas con unos pañuelos labrados, como ya dije, +hermosos, que parecen de lejos de seda y almaizares: otro traen ceñido +mas largo que se cobijan con él en lugar de pañetes, ansi hombres como +mugeres. La color de esta gente es mas blanca que otra que haya visto en +las Indias; todos traían al pescuezo y á los brazos algo á la guisa de +estas tierras, y muchos traían piezas de oro bajo colgado al pescuezo. +Las canoas de ellos son muy grandes y de mejor hechura que no son estas +otras, y mas livianas, y en el medio de cada una tienen un apartamiento +como cámara en que ví que andaban los principales con sus mugeres. Llamé +allí á este lugar Jardines, porque así conforman por el nombre. Procuré +mucho de saber donde cogian aquel oro, y todos me aseñalaban una tierra +frontera dellos al Poniente, que era muy alta, mas no lejos; mas todos +me decian que no fuese allá porque allí comian los hombres, y entendí +entonces que decian que eran hombres caribales, é que serian como los +otros, y despues he pensado que podria ser que lo decian porque allí +habria animalias. Tambien les pregunté adonde cogian las perlas, y me +señalaron tambien que al Poniente, y al Norte detrás de esta tierra donde +estaban. Dejélo de probar por esto de los mantenimientos, y del mal de +mis ojos, y por una nao grande que traigo que no es para semejante hecho. + +Y como el tiempo fue breve se pasó todo en preguntas, y se volvieron á +los navíos, que seria hora de visperas, como ya dije, y luego levanté las +anclas y navegué al Poniente; y asimesmo el dia siguiente fasta que me +fallé que no habia si non tres brazas de fondo, con creencia que todavía +esta seria isla, y que yo podria salir al Norte; y así visto envié una +carabela sotil adelante á ver si habia salida ó si estaba cerrado, y ansi +anduvo mucho camino fasta un golfo muy grande en el cual parecia que +habia otros cuatro medianos, y del uno salia un rio grandísimo: fallaron +siempre cinco brazas de fondo y el agua muy dulce, en tanta cantidad que +yo jamas bebíla pareja della. Fuí yo muy descontento della cuando ví +que no podia salir al Norte ni podia andar ya al Austro ni al Poniente +porque yo estaba cercado por todas partes de la tierra, y así levanté +las anclas, y torne atrás para salir al Norte por la boca que yo arriba +dije, y no pude volver por la poblacion adonde yo habia estado, por causa +de las corrientes que me habian desviado della, y siempre en todo cabo +hallaba el agua dulce y clara, y que me llevaba al Oriente muy recio +fácia las dos bocas que arriba dije, y entonces conjeturé que los hilos +de la corriente, y aquellas lomas que salian y entraban en estas bocas +con aquel rugir tan fuerte que era pelea del agua dulce con la salada. La +dulce empujaba á la otra porque no entrase, y la salada porque la otra no +saliese; y conjeturé que allí donde son estas dos bocas que algun tiempo +seria tierra continua á la Isla de la Trinidad con la tierra de Gracia, +como podrán ver vuestras Altezas por la pintura de lo que con esta les +envio. Salí yo por esta boca del Norte y hallé quel agua dulce siempre +vencia, y cuando pasé, que fue con fuerza de viento, estando en una de +aquellas lomas, hallé en aquellos hilos de la parte de dentro el agua +dulce, y de fuera salada. + +Cuando yo navegué de España á las Indias fallo luego en pasando cien +leguas á Poniente de los Azores grandísimo mudamiento en el cielo é en +las estrellas, y en la temperancia del aire, y en las aguas de la mar, y +en esto he tenido mucha diligencia en la experiencia. + +Fallo que de Septentrion en Austro, pasando las dichas cien leguas de +las dichas islas, que luego en las agujas de marear, que fasta entonces +nordesteaban, noruestean una cuarta de viento todo entero, y esto es en +allegando allí á aquella línea, como quien traspone una cuesta, asimesmo +fallo la mar toda llena de yerba de una calidad que parece ramitos de +pino y muy cargada de fruta como de lantisco, y es tan espesa que al +primer viage pensé que era bajo, y que daria en seco con los navíos, y +hasta llegar con esta raya no se falla un solo ramito: fallo tambien en +llegando allí la mar muy suave y llana, y bien que vente recio nunca +se levanta. Asimismo hallo dentro de la dicha raya hácia Poniente la +temperancia del cielo muy suave, y no discrepa de la cantidad quier sea +invierno, quier sea en verano. Cuando allí estoy hallo que la estrella +del Norte escribe un círculo el cualo tiene en el diámetro cinco grados, +y estando las guardas en el brazo derecho estonces está la estrella en el +mas bajo, y se vá alzando fasta que llega al brazo izquierdo, y estonces +está cinco grados, y de allí se vá abajando fasta llegar á volver otra +vez al brazo derecho. + +Yo allegué agora de España á la Isla de la Madera, y de allí á Canaria, y +dende á las Islas de Cabo Verde, de adonde cometí el viage para navegar +al Austro fasta debajo la linea equinocial, como ya dije: allegado á +estar en derecho con el paralelo que pasa por la Sierra Leoa en Guinea, +fallo tan grande ardor, y los rayos del sol tan calientes que pensaba +de quemar, y bien que lloviese y el cielo fuese muy turbado siempre yo +estaba en esta fatiga, fasta que nuestro Señor proveyó de buen viento y +á mi puso en voluntad que yo navegase al Occidente con este esfuerzo, +que en llegando á la raya de que yo dije que allí fallaria mudamiento +en la temperancia. Despues que yo emparejé á estar en derecho de esta +raya luego fallé la temperancia del cielo muy suave, y cuanto mas andaba +adelante mas multiplicaba; mas no hallé conforme á esto las estrellas. + +Fallé allí que en anocheciendo tenia yo la estrella del Norte alta cinco +grados, y estonces las guardas estaban encima de la cabeza, y despues á +la media noche fallaba la estrella alta diez grados, y en amaneciendo que +las guardas estaban en los pies quince. + +La suavelidad de la mar fallé conforme, mas no en la yerba: en esto de la +estrella del Norte tomé grande admiracion, y por esto muchas noches con +mucha diligencia tornaba yo á repricar la vista della con el cuadrante, y +siempre fallé que caía el plomo y hilo á un punto. + +Por cosa nueva tengo yo esto, y podrá ser que será tenida que en poco +espacio haga tanta diferencia el cielo. + +Yo siempre lei que el mundo, tierra é agua era esférico é las autoridades +y esperiencias que Tolomeo y todos los otros escribieron de este +sitio, daban é amostraban para ello así por eclipses de la luna y +otras demostraciones que hacen de Oriente fasta Occidente, como de la +elevacion del polo de Septentrion en Austro. Agora ví tanta disformidad, +como ya dije, y por esto me puse á tener esto del mundo, y fallé que no +era redondo en la forma que escriben; salvo que es de la forma de una +pera que sea toda muy redonda, salvo allí donde tiene el pezon que allí +tiene mas alto, ó como quien tiene una pelota muy redonda, y en un lugar +della fuese como una teta de muger allí puesta, y que esta parte deste +pezon sea la mas alta é mas propincua al cielo, y sea debajo la línea +equinocial, y en esta mar Océana en fin del Oriente: llamo yo fin de +Oriente, adonde acaba toda la tierra é islas, é para esto allego todas +las razones sobre-escriptas de la raya que pasa al Occidente delas islas +de los Azores cien leguas de Septentrion en Austro, que en pasando de +allí al Poniente ya van los navíos alzándose hácia el cielo suavemente, y +entonces se goza de mas suave temperancia y se muda el aguja del marear +por causa de la suavidad desa cuarta de viento, y cuanto mas va adelante +é alzándose mas noruestea, y esta altura causa el desvariar del circulo +que escribe la estrella del Norte con las guardas, y cuanto mas pasare +junto con la línea equinocial, mas se subirán en alto, y mas diferencia +habrá en las dichas estrellas, y en los circulos dellas. Y Tolomeo y los +otros sabios que escribieron de este mundo, creyeron que era esférico, +creyendo queste hemisferio que fuese redondo como aquel de allá donde +ellos estaban, el cual tiene el centro en la Isla de Arin, qués debajo la +linea equinocial entre el sino Arabico y aquel de Persia, y el círculo +pasa sobre el Cabo de S. Vicente en Portugal por el Poniente, y pasa en +Oriente por Cangara y por las Seras, en el cual hemisferio no hago yo que +hay ninguna dificultad, salvo que sea esférico redondo como ellos dicen: +mas este otro digo que es como sería la mitad de la pera bien redonda, la +cual toviese el pezon alto como y dije, ó como una teta de muger en una +pelota redonda, así que desta media parte non hobo noticia Tolomeo ni los +otros que escribieron del mundo por ser muy ignoto; solamente hicieron +raiz sobre el hemisferio, adonde ellos estaban ques redondo esférico, +como arriba dije. Y agora que vuestras Altezas lo han mandado navegar y +buscar y descobrir, se amuestra evidentísimo, porque estando yo en este +viage al Septentrion veinte grados de la línea equinocial, allí era en +derecho de Hargin, é de aquellas tierras: é allí es la gente negra é la +tierra muy quemada, y despues que fuí á las Islas de Cabo Verde, allí en +aquellas tierras es la gente mucho mas negra, y cuanto mas bajo se van al +Austro tanto mas llegan al extremo, en manera que allí en derecho donde +yo estaba, qués la Sierra Leoa, adonde se me alzaba la estrella del Norte +en anocheciendo cinco grados, allí es la gente negra en extrema cantidad, +y despues que de allí navegué al Occidente tan extremos calores; y pasada +la raya de que yo dije fallé multiplicar la temperancia, andando en +tanta cantidad que cuando yo llegué á la isla de la Trinidad, adonde la +estrella del Norte en anocheciendo tambien se me alzaba cinco grados, +allí y en la tierra de Gracia hallé temperancia suavísima, y las tierras +y árboles muy verdes, y tan hermosos como en Abril en las huertas de +Valencia; y la gente de allí de muy linda estatura, y blancos mas que +otros que haya visto en las Indias, é los cabellos muy largos é llanos, é +gente mas astuta é de mayor ingenio, é no cobardes. Entonces era el sol +en Virgen encima de nuestras cabezas é suyas, ansí que todo esto procede +por la suavísima temperancia que allí es, la cual procede por estar mas +alto en el mundo mas cerca del aire que cuento; y así me afirmo quel +mundo no es esférico, salvo que tiene esta diferencia que ya dije: la +cual es en este hemisferio adonde caen las Indias é la mar Oceana, y el +extremo dello es debajo la línea equinocial, y ayuda mucho á esto que +sea ansí, porque el sol cuando nuestro Señor lo hizo fue en el primer +punto de Oriente, ó la primera luz fue aquí en Oriente, allí donde es el +extremo de la altura deste mundo; y bien quel parecer de Aristotel fuese +que el Polo antártico ó la tierra ques debajo dél sea la mas alta parte +en el mundo, y mas propincua al cielo, otros sabios le impugnan diciendo +que es esta ques debajo del ártico, por las cuales razones parece que +entendian que una parte deste mundo debia de ser mas propincua y noble al +cielo que otra, y no cayeron en esto que sea debajo del equinocial por +la forma que yo dije, y no es maravilla porque deste hemisferio non se +hobiese noticia cierta, salvo muy liviana y por argumento, porque nadie +nunca lo ha andado ni enviado á buscar, hasta agora que vuestras Altezas +le mandaron explorar é descubrir la mar y la tierra. + +Fallo que de allí de estas dos bocas, las cuales como yo dije estan +frontero por línea de Septentrion en Austro, que haya de la una á la otra +veinte y seis leguas, y no pudo haber en ello yerro porque se midieron +con cuadrante, y destas dos bocas de accidente fasta el golfo que yo +dije, al cual llamé de las Perlas, que son sesenta é ocho leguas de +cuatro millas dada una como acostumbramos en la mar, y que de allá de +este golfo corre de contino el agua muy fuerte hácia el oriente; y que +por esto tienen aquel combate estas dos bocas con la salada. En esta +boca de Austro á que yo llamé de la Sierpe, fallé en anocheciendo que yo +tenia la estrella del Norte alta cuasi cinco grados, y en aquella del +otra Septentrion, á que yo llamé del Drago, eran cuasi siete, y fallo +queldicho Golfo de las Perlas está occidentalal Occidente de el [179] de +Tolomeo cuasi tres mil é novecientas millas, que son cuasi setenta grados +equinociales, contando por cada uno cincuenta y seis millas é dos tercios. + +La Sacra Escriptura testifica que nuestro Señor hizo al Paraiso terrenal, +y en él puso el Arbol de la vida, y del sale una fuente de donde +resultan en este mundo cuatro rios principales: Ganges en India, Tigris +y Eufrates en [180] los cuales apartan la sierra y hacen la Mesopotamia +y van à tener en Persia, y el Nilo que nace en Etiopia y va en la mar en +Alejandría. + +Yo no hallo ni jamas he hallado escriptura de Latinos ni de Griegos que +certificadamente diga el sitio en este mundo del Paraiso terrenal, ni +visto en ningun mapamundo, salvo, situado con autoridad de argumento. +Algunos le ponian allí donde son las fuentes del Nilo en Etiopia; mas +otros anduvieron todas estas tierras y no hallaron conformidad dello en +la temperancia del cielo, en la altura hácia el cielo, porque se pudiese +comprehender que el era allí, ni que las aguas del diluvio hobiesen +llegado allí, las cuales subieron encima, &c. Algunos gentiles quisieron +decir por argumentos, que el era en las islas Fortunatas que son las +Canarias, &c. + +S. Isidro y Beda y Strabo, y el Maestro de la historia escolástica, y San +Ambrosio, y Scoto, y todos los sanos teólogos conciertan quel Paraiso +terrenal es en el Oriente, &c. + +Ya dije lo que yo hallaba deste hemisferio y de la hechura, y creo que si +yo pasara por debajo de la línea equinocial que en llegando allí en esto +mas alto que fallara muy mayor temperancia, y diversidad en las estrellas +y en las aguas; no porque yo crea que allí donde es el altura del extremo +sea navegable ni agua, ni que se pueda subir allá, porque creo que allí +es el Paraiso terrenal adonde no puede llegar nadie, salvo por voluntad +Divina; y creo que esta tierra que agora mandaron descubrir vuestras +Altezas sea grandísima y haya otras muchas en el Austro de que jamas se +hobo noticia. + +Yo no tomo quel Paraise terrenal sea en forma de montaña aspera como el +escrebir dello nos amuestra, salvo quel sea en el colmo allí donde dije +la figura del pezon de la pera, y que poco á poco andando hácía allí +desde muy lejos se va subiendo á él; y creo que nadie no podria llegar +al colmo como yo dije, y creo que pueda salir de allí esa agua, bien que +sea lejos y venga á parar allí donde yo vengo, y faga este lago. Grandes +indicios son estos del Paraiso terrenal, porquel sitio es conforme á la +opinion de estos santos é sanos teólogos, y asimismo las señales son +muy conformes, que yo jamas leí ni oí que tanta cantidad de agua dulce +fuese así adentro é vecina con la salada; y en ello ayuda asimismo la +suavísima temperancia, y si de allí del Paraiso no sale, parece aun mayor +maravilla, porque no creo que se sepa en el mundo de rio tan grande y tan +fondo. + +Despues que yo salí de la boca del Dragon, ques la una de las dos aquella +del Septentrion, á la cual así puse nombre, el dia siguiente, que fue dia +de Nuestra Señora de Agosto, fallé que corria tanto la mar al Poniente, +que despues de hora de misa que entré en camino, anduve fasta hora de +completas sesenta y cinco leguas de cuatro millas cada una, y el viento +no era demasiado, salvo muy suave; y esto ayuda el cognoscimiento que de +allí yendo al Austro se va mas alto, y andando hácia el Septentrion, como +entonces, se va descendiendo. + +Muy conoscido tengo que las aguas de la mar llevan su curso de Oriente á +Occidente con los cielos, y que allí en esta comarca cuando pasan llevan +mas veloce camino, y por esto han comido tanta parte de la tierra, porque +por eso son acá tantas islas, y ellas mismas hacen desto testimonio, +porque todas á una mano son largas de Poniente á Levante, y Norueste +é Sueste ques un poco mas alto é bajo, y angostas de Norte á Sur, y +Nordeste Sudueste, que son en contrario de los otros dichos vientos, y +aquí en ellas todas nascen cosas preciosas por la suave temperancia que +les procede del cielo por estar hácia el mas alto del mundo. Verdad es +que parece en algunos lugares que las aguas no hagan este curso; mas esto +no es, salvo particularmente en algunos lugares donde alguna tierra le +está al encuentro, y hace parecer que andan diversos caminos. + +Plinio escribe que la mar é la tierra hace todo una esfera, y pone questa +mar Oceana sea la mayor cantidad del agua, y está hácia el cielo, y +que la tierra sea debajo y que le sostenga, y mezclado es uno con otro +como el amago de la nuez con una tela gorda que va abrazado en ello. El +Maestro de la Historia escolástica sobre el Genesis dice que las aguas +son muy pocas, que bien que cuando fueron criadas que cobijasen toda la +tierra que entonces eran vaporables en manera de niebla, y que despues +que fueron sólidas é juntadas que ocuparon muy poco lugar, y en esto +concierta Nicolao de Lira. El Aristotel dice que este mundo es pequeño +y es el agua muy poca, y que facilmente se puede pasar de España á las +Indias, y esto confirma el Avenruyz y le alega el Cardenal Pedro de +Aliaco, autorizando este decir y aquel de Séneca, el cual conforma con +estos diciendo que Aristoteles pudo saber muchos secretos del mundo á +causa de Alejandro Magno, y Séneca á causa de Cesar Nero y Plinio por +respecto de los Romanos, los cuales todos gastaron dineros é gente, y +pusieron mucha diligencia en saber los secretos del mundo y darlos á +entender á los pueblos; el cual Cardenal da á estos grande autoridad mas +que á Tolomeo ni á otros Griegos ni Arabes, y á confirmacion de decir +quel agua sea poca y quel cubierto del mundo della sea poco, al respecto +de lo que se decia por autoridad de Tolomeo y de sus secuaces: á esto +trae una autoridad de Esdras del 3ᵒ. libro suyo, adonde dice que de +siete partes del mundo las seis son descubiertas y la una es cubierta de +agua, la cual autoridad es aprobada por Santos, los cuales dan autoridad +al 3ᵒ. é 4ᵒ. libro de Esdras, ansí como es S. Agustin é S. Ambrosio en +su _exameron_, adonde alega allí vendrá mi hijo Jesus é morira mi hijo +Cristo, y dicen que Esdrás fue Profeta, y asimismo Zacarías, padre de S. +Juan, y el braso Simon; las cuales autoridades tambien alega Francisco +de Mairones: en cuanto en esto del enjuto de la tierra mucho se ha +experimentado ques mucho mas de lo quel vulgo crea; y no es maravilla, +porque andando mas mas se sabe. + +Torno á mi propósito de la tierra de Gracia y rio y lago que allí fallé, +atan grande que mas se le puede llamar mar que lago, porque _lago_ es +lugar de agua, y en seyendo grande se dice _mar_, como se dijo á la mar +de Galilea y al mar Muerto, y digo que sino procede del Paraiso terrenal +que viene este rio y procede de tierra infinita, pues al Austro, de la +cual fasta agora no se ha habido noticia, mas yo muy asentado tengo en el +anima que allí adonde dije es el Paraiso terrenal, y descanso sobre las +razones y autoridades sobre-escriptas. + +Plega á nuestro Señor de dar mucha vida y salud y descanso á vuestras +Altezas para que puedan proseguir esta tan noble empresa, en la cual me +parece que rescibe nuestro Señor mucho servicio, y la España crece de +mucha grandeza, y todos los Cristianos mucha consolacion y placer, porque +aquí se divulgará el nombre de nuestro Señor; y en todas las tierras +adonde los navíos de vuestras Altezas van, y en todo cabo mando plantar +una alta cruz, y á toda la gente que hallo notifico el estado de vuestras +Altezas y como su asiento es en España, y les digo de nuestra santa fe +todo lo que yo puedo, y de la creencia de la Santa Madre Iglesia, la cual +tiene sus miembros en todo el mundo, y les digo la policía y nobleza de +todos los Cristianos, y la fe que en la Santa Trinidad tienen; y plega +á nuestro Señor de tirar de memoria á las personas que han impugnado y +impugnan tan excelente empresa, y impiden y impidieron porque no vaya +adelante, sin considerar cuanta honra y grandeza es del Real Estado da +vuestras Altezas en todo el mundo; no saben que entreponer á maldecir +de esto, salvo que se hace gasto en ello, y porque luego no enviaron +los navíos cargados de oro sin considerar la brevedad del tiempo y +tantos inconvenientes como acá se han habido, y no considerar que en +Castilla en casa de vuestras Altezas salen cada año personas que por +su merecimiento ganaron en ella mas de renta cada uno dellos mas de +lo ques necesario que se gaste en esto; ansimesmo sin considerar que +ningunos Príncipes de España jamas ganaron tierra alguna fuera della, +salvo agora que vuestras Altezas tienen acá otro mundo, de adonde puede +ser tan acrescentada nuestra santa fe, y de donde se podrán sacar tantos +provechos, que bien que no se hayan enviado los navíos cargados de oro, +se han enviado suficientes muestras dello y de otras cosas de valor, por +donde se puede juzgar que en breve tiempo se podrá haber mucho provecho, +y sin mirar el gran corazon de los Príncipes de Portugal que há tanto +tiempo que prosiguen la impresa de Guinea, y prosiguen aquella de Africa, +adonde han gastado la mitad de la gente de su Reino, y agora está el Rey +mas determinado á ello que nunca. Nuestro Señor provea en esto como yo +dije, y les ponga en memoria de considerar de todo esto que va escripto, +que no es de mil partes la una de lo que yo podria escrebir de cosas de +Príncipes que se ocuparon á saber y conquistar y sostener. + +Todo esto dije, y no porque crea que la voluntad de vuestras Altezas sea +salvo proseguir en ello en cuanto vivan, y tengo por muy firme lo que me +respondió vuestras Altezas una vez que por palabra le decir desto, no +porque yo hobiese visto mudamiento ninguno en vuestras Altezas salvo por +temor de lo que yo oia destos que yo digo, y tanto da una gotera de agua +en una piedra que le hace un agujero; y vuestras Altezas me respondió +con aquel corazon que se sabe en todo el mundo que tienen, y me dijo +que no curase de nada de eso, porque su voluntad era de proseguir esta +empresa y sostenerla, aunque no fuese sino piedras y peñas, y quel gasto +que en ello se hacia que lo tenia en nada, que en otras cosas no tan +grandes gastaban mucho mas, y que lo tenian todo por muy bien gastado lo +del pasado y lo que se gastase en adelante, porque creian que nuestra +santa fe sería acrecentada y su Real Señorío ensanchado, y que no eran +amigos de su Real Estado aquellos que les maldecian de esta empresa: y +agora entre tanto que vengan á noticia desto destas tierras que agora +nuevamente he descubierto, en que tengo asentado en el ánima que allí es +el Paraiso terrenal, irá el Adelantado con tres navíos bien ataviados +para ello á ver mas adelante, y descubrirán todo lo que pudieren hacia +aquellas partes. Entretanto yo enviaré á vuestras Altezas esta escriptura +y la pintura de la tierra, y acordarán lo que en ello se deba facer, y me +enviarán á mandar, y se cumplirá con ayuda de la Santa Trinidad con toda +diligencia en manera que vuestras Altezas sean servidos y hayan placer. +Deo gracias. + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[154] These were Fray Juan Perez de Marchena, a Franciscan, keeper of the +Convent de la Rabida, and Fray Diejo de Deza, a Dominican, afterwards +Archbishop of Seville. + +[155] A similar gap in the original. + +[156] He did not discover terra firma in the second voyage as he here +says, but imagined the island of Cuba to be terra firma, because +he was unable to explore it fully; nor was it ascertained to be an +island till two years after his death, when, by order of the king, the +Comendador Mayor Nicolas Ovando gave Sebastian de Ocampo a commission to +circumnavigate the island, and he explored the whole coast in the year +1508. (See Herrera, Dec. i, lib. 7, cap. i.) Amongst the number of these +islands, Columbus doubtless included many of those to the south of Cuba, +lying in the part which he called the _Queen’s Gardens_. + +[157] Ceylon. + +[158] These examples quoted by the admiral from ancient history, are +commented upon very learnedly, and at considerable length, by his +historian, Las Casas, in chapters 128 and 129 of his unpublished history. +(Navarrete.) + +[159] Of the year 1498. + +[160] Herrera says (Dec. i, lib. 3, cap. 9) that it was a Portuguese +squadron; but Las Casas (cap. 30) distinctly states it to have been +French. + +[161] Herrera and Don Ferdinand Columbus say that he reached the island +of Puerto Santo on the seventh of June, from which island he sailed +directly for Madeira, and thence to Gomera, which he reached on the +nineteenth, and put to sea again on the twenty-first. + +[162] The commanders of the three ships which the admiral despatched to +Española, were Pedro de Arana, native of Cordova, brother to the mother +of Ferdinand Columbus; Alonzo Sanchez de Carabajal, magistrate of Baeza; +and Juan Antonio Columbus, a relative of the admiral; all of whom were +known to and are spoken of by F. Bartolomé de Las Casas, in chapter 130 +of his unpublished history. (Navarrete.) + +[163] This was on the twenty-seventh of June. He anchored in the island +of Sal, and on the thirtieth proceeded to the island of Santiago, from +whence he put to sea again on the fourth of July. + +[164] The islands took the name from the Cape itself, not from the +verdure which had caused that name to be given to the Cape. The Cape +Verde was discovered by Diniz Dias about 1445: the Cape Verde Islands +were discovered in 1460 by Diogo Gomez, as shown for the first time in my +_Prince Henry the Navigator_, pp. 297-298, and not by Antonio de Nolle in +1457, as incorrectly stated by Cadamosto. + +[165] It was first seen by a mariner of Huelva, a servant of the admiral, +named Alonzo Perez. (Navarrete.) + +[166] It is now called Cape Galeota, and is the most south-eastern point +of the island of Trinidad. + +[167] In all probability deer. + +[168] Coast of Paria. + +[169] Produced by the confluence of the Oronoco with the sea. See Rapin, +_Hist. Phil._, vol. iv, p. 272. + +[170] Point Peña Blanca. + +[171] Point Peña. + +[172] Serpent’s Mouth. + +[173] It is now called Point Alcatraz, or Point Pelican. + +[174] The stars composing the constellation of Ursa Minor. + +[175] A misspelling, not infrequent in those days, for the sacred city +(not island) of Odjein or Ougein in Malwa, whence the Indians reckoned +their first meridian. The change of the name to Arin in Arabic is thus +explained by M. Reinaud in his _Mémoire sur l’Inde_, p. 373. The dj of +the Indians was sometimes rendered z by the Arabs, and thus the Arab +translators wrote the word Ozein; but as in manuscripts the vowels +were often omitted, the mass of readers to whom the name of Odjein was +indifferent, would pronounce it Azin, and as the copyist would sometimes +forget to insert the point which distinguished a z from an r, Azin would +be read Arin. + +[176] Japan and China. + +[177] Arguin, off the west coast of Africa. + +[178] The innermost gulf within the Gulf of Paria. + +[179] A similar gap in the original. In all probability “first meridian” +or some such words, are omitted. + +[180] A similar gap in the original, which would seem to want the words +“Asiatic Turkey.” + +[181] Walafried Strabus, Abbé of Reichenau in Baden. + +[182] Petrus Comestor, who wrote the “Historica Scholastica.” + +[183] The feast of the Assumption. + +[184] Probably six A.M. + +[185] Nine P.M. + +[186] Averrhóes, an Arabian philosopher of the twelfth century. + +[187] This expression is described by the ancient copyist of the letter +as being “badly written”; probably miscopied for “El beato”, “The +blessed.” + +[188] A Scotist of the fourteenth century, surnamed “Doctor illuminatus +et acutus.” + + + + +LETTER + + +_Of the Admiral to the (quondam) nurse[189] of the Prince John, written +near the end of the year 1500._ + +Most virtuous lady: Although it is a novelty for me to complain of +the ill-usage of the world, it is, nevertheless, no novelty for the +world to practise ill-usage. Innumerable are the contests which I have +had with it, and I have resisted all its attacks until now, when I +find, that neither strength nor prudence is of any avail to me: it has +cruelly reduced me to the lowest ebb. Hope in Him who created us all +is my support: His assistance I have always found near at hand. On one +occasion, not long since, when I was extremely depressed, He raised me +with His Divine arm, saying: “O man of little faith, arise, it is I, +be not afraid.”[190] I offered myself with such earnest devotion to the +service of these princes, and I have served them with a fidelity hitherto +unequalled and unheard of. God made me the messenger of the new heaven +and the new earth, of which He spoke in the Apocalypse by St. John, after +having spoken of it by the mouth of Isaiah; and He showed me the spot +where to find it. All proved incredulous; except the Queen my mistress, +to whom the Lord gave the spirit of intelligence and great courage, +and made her the heiress of all, as a dear and well beloved daughter. +I went to take possession of it in her royal name. All sought to cover +the ignorance in which they were sunk, by dwelling on the inconveniences +and expense of the proposed enterprise. Her Highness held the contrary +opinion, and supported it with all her power. Seven years passed away in +deliberations, and nine have been spent in accomplishing things truly +memorable, and worthy of being preserved in the history of man. Never had +such a thing been conceived. + +I have now reached that point, that there is no man so vile but thinks +it his right to insult me. The day will come when the world will reckon +it a virtue to him who has not given his consent to their abuse. If I +had plundered the Indies, even to the country where is the fabled altar +of St. Peter’s, and had given them all to the Moors, they could not have +shown towards me more bitter enmity than they have done in Spain. Who +would believe such things of a country where there has always been so +much nobility? I should much like to clear myself of this affair, if only +it were consistent with etiquette to do so, face to face with my queen. +The support which I have found in our Lord, and in her Highness, made +me persevere, and, in order to relieve somewhat the griefs which death +had occasioned her,[191] I undertook another voyage to the new heavens +and new earth, which had been hitherto concealed; and if these are not +appreciated in Spain, like the other parts of the Indies, it is not at +all wonderful, since it is to my labours that they are indebted for them. +The Holy Spirit encompassed St. Peter, and the rest of the twelve, who +all had conflicts here below; they wrought many works, they suffered +great fatigues, but at last they obtained the victory. I believed that +this voyage to Paria would produce a certain amount of contentment, +because of the pearls and the discovery of gold in the island of +Española. I left orders for the people to fish for pearls, and collect +them together, and made an agreement with them that I should return for +them; and I was given to understand that the supply would be abundant. + +If I have not written respecting this to their Highnesses, it is because +I wished first to render an equally favourable account of the gold; but +it has happened with this as with many other things; I should not have +lost them, and with them my honour, if I had been only occupied about my +own private interests, and had suffered Española to be lost, or even if +they had respected my privileges and the treaties. I say the same with +regard to the gold which I had then collected, and which I have brought +in safety, by Divine grace, after so much loss of life and such excessive +fatigues. + +In the voyage which I made by way of Paria, I found nearly half the +colonists of Española in a state of revolt, and they have made war upon +me until now as if I had been a Moor;[192] while on the other side, I +had to contend with the no less cruel Indians. Then arrived Hojeda,[193] +and he attempted to put the seal to all these disorders; he said that +their Highnesses had sent him, with promises of presents, of immunities, +and treaties; he collected a numerous band, for in the whole island of +Española, there were few men who were not vagabonds, and there were +none who had either wife or children. This Hojeda troubled me much, but +he was obliged to retreat, and at his departure he said, that he would +return with more ships and men, and reported also, that he had left the +queen at the point of death.[194] In the meanwhile, Vincent Yañez came +with four caravels; and there were some tumults and suspicions, but no +further evil. The Indians reported many other caravels to the cannibals, +and in Paria; and afterwards spread the news of the arrival of six other +caravels, commanded by a brother of the alcalde; but this was from pure +malice, and at a time when at length there remained but little hope +that their Highnesses would send any more ships to the Indies, and we +no longer expected them, and when it was said openly that her Highness +(the queen) was dead. At this time, one Adrian attempted a new revolt, +as he had done before;[195] but our Lord did not permit his evil designs +to succeed. I had determined not to inflict punishment on any person, +but his ingratitude obliged me, however regretfully, to abandon this +resolution, I should not have acted otherwise with my own brother, if +he had sought to assassinate me, and to rob me of the lordship which my +sovereigns had given to my keeping. This Adrian, as is now evident, had +sent Don Ferdinand to Xaragua, to assemble some of his partisans, and +had some discussions with the alcalde, which ended in violence, but all +without any good. The alcalde seized him and a part of his band; and in +fact, executed justice without my having ordered it. While they were in +prison, they were expecting a caravel, in which they hoped to embark; but +the news which I told them of what had happened to Hojeda, deprived them +of the hope that he would arrive in this ship. It is now six months that +I have been ready to leave, to bring to their Highnesses the good news of +the gold, and to give up the government of these dissolute people, who +fear neither God nor their king nor queen, but are full of imbecility +and malice. I should have been able to pay every one with six hundred +thousand maravedis, and for this purpose there were four millions and +more of the tithes, without reckoning the third part of the gold. + +Before my departure (from Spain) I have often entreated their Highnesses +to send to these parts, at my expense, some one charged to administer +justice; and since, when I found the alcalde in a state of revolt, I +have besought them afresh to send at least one of their servants with +letters, because I myself have had so strange a character given to me, +that if I were to build churches or hospitals, they would call them +caves for robbers. Their Highnesses provided for this at last, but in +a manner quite unequal to the urgency of the circumstances; however, +let that point rest, since such is their good pleasure. I remained two +years in Spain without being able to obtain anything for myself, or +those who came with me,[196] but this man has gained for himself a full +purse: God knows if all will be employed for his service. Already, to +begin with, there is a revenue for twenty years, which is, according to +man’s calculation, an age; and they gather gold in such abundance, that +there are people who, in four hours, have found the equivalent of five +marks; but I will speak on this subject more fully hereafter. If their +Highnesses would condescend to silence the popular rumours, which have +gained credence among those who know what fatigues I have sustained, it +would be a real charity; for calumny has done me more injury than the +services which I have rendered to their Highnesses, and the care with +which I have preserved their property and their government, have done me +good. By their so doing, I should be re-established in reputation, and +spoken of throughout the universe: for the matter is of a kind which must +every day be more talked of and appreciated. + +In the meanwhile, the commander Bobadilla arrived at St. Domingo,[197] at +which time I was at La Vega, and the Adelantado at Xaragua, where this +Adrian had made his attempt; but by that time everything was quiet, the +land was thriving, and the people at peace. The day after his arrival +he declared himself governor, created magistrates, ordered executions, +published immunities from the collection of gold and from the paying of +tithes; and, in fine, announced a general franchise for twenty years, +which is, as I have said, the calculation of an age. He also gave out +that he was going to pay everyone, although they had not even done the +service which was due up to that day; and he further proclaimed that he +had to send me back loaded with chains, and my brother also (this he +has done);[198] and that neither I, nor any of my family, should ever +return to these lands: and, in addition, he made innumerable unjust and +disgraceful charges against me. All this took place, as I have said, on +the very day after his arrival, at which time I was absent at a distance, +thinking neither of him nor of his coming. Some letters of their +Highnesses, of which he brought a considerable number signed in blank, +he filled up with exaggerated language, and sent round to the alcalde +and his myrmidons, accompanying them with compliments and flattery. To +me he never sent either a letter or a messenger, nor has he done so to +this day. Reflect upon this, madam! what could any man in my situation +think? Could it be that honour and favour were to be conferred on him who +had lent himself to plundering their Highnesses of their sovereignty, and +who had done so much injury and mischief?—Could it be that he who had +defended and preserved their cause through so many dangers, was to be +dragged through the mire? When I heard this, I thought he must be like +Hojeda, or one of the other rebels; but I held my peace, when I learned +for certain, from the friars, that he had been sent by their Highnesses. +I wrote to him, to salute him on his arrival, to let him know that I was +ready to set out to go to court, and that I had put up to sale all that +I possessed. I entreated him not to be in haste on the subject of the +grants; and I assured him that I would shortly yield this, and everything +else connected with the government, implicitly into his charge. I wrote +the same thing to the ecclesiastics, but I received no answer either +from the one or the other. On the contrary, he took a hostile position, +and obliged those who went to his residence to acknowledge him for +governor, as I have been told, for twenty years. As soon as I knew what +he had done with regard to the immunities, I proposed to repair this +great mistake, and I thought he would himself be glad of it; for, without +any reason or necessity, he had bestowed upon vagabonds privileges of +such importance, that they would have been excessive even for men with +wives and children. I published verbally, and in writing, that he could +not make use of his credentials, because mine were of higher authority, +and I showed the grants brought by Juan Aguado. All this I did for the +purpose of gaining time, that their Highnesses might be informed as to +the state of the country, and that they might have opportunity to give +fresh orders upon everything touching their interests. It is useless +to publish such grants in the Indies,—all is in favour of the settlers +who have taken up their abode there, because the best lands are given +up to them; and, at a low estimate, they are worth two hundred thousand +maravedis a head for the four years, at which they are taken, without a +single stroke of the mattock. I should not say so much if these people +were married men; but there are not six among them all, whose purpose +is not to amass all they can, and then decamp with it. It would be well +that people should come from Spain, but that only such should be sent +as are well known, so that the country may be peopled with honest men. +I had agreed with these settlers that they should pay the third of the +gold and of the tithes; and this they not only assented to, but were +very grateful to their Highnesses. I reproached them when I heard they +had afterwards refused it; they expected, however, to deal with me on +the same terms as with the commander, but I would not consent to it. He +meanwhile irritated them against me, saying, that I wished to deprive +them of that which their Highnesses had given them; and strove to make me +appear their enemy, in which he succeeded to the full. He induced them to +write to their Highnesses, that they should send me no more commissioned +as governor (truly I do not desire it any more for myself, or for any +who belong to me, while the people remain unchanged); and to conciliate +them, he ordered inquiries to be made respecting me with reference to +imputed misdeeds, such as were never invented in hell. But God is above, +who with so much wisdom and power rescued Daniel and the three children, +and who, if he please, can rescue me with a similar manifestation of +his power, and to the advancement of his own cause. I should have known +well enough how to find a remedy for the evils which I now describe and +have been describing as having happened to me since I came to the Indies, +if I had had the wish or had thought it decent, to busy myself about my +personal interest; but now I find myself undone, because I have hitherto +maintained the justice and augmented the territorial dominions of their +Highnesses. Now that so much gold is found, these people stop to consider +whether they can obtain the greatest quantity of it by theft, or by +going to the mines. For one woman they give a hundred castellanos,[199] +as for a farm; and this sort of trading is very common, and there are +already a great number of merchants who go in search of girls; there are +at this moment from nine or ten on sale; they fetch a good price, let +their age be what it will. I assert that when I said that the commander +could not confer immunities, I did what he desired, although I told him +that it was to gain time until their Highnesses had received information +respecting the country, and had given their orders as to the regulations +best calculated to advance their interest. I assert that the calumnies +of injurious men have done me more harm, than my services have done me +good: which is a bad example for the present as well as for the future. +I declare solemnly that a great number of men have been to the Indies, +who did not deserve baptism in the eyes of God or men, and who are now +returning thither. The governor has made every one hostile to me; and +it appears, from the manner of his acting, and the plans that he has +adopted, that he was already my enemy, and very virulent against me when +he arrived; and it is said, that he has been at great expense to obtain +this office: but I know nothing about the matter except what I have +heard. I never before heard of any one who was commissioned to make an +inquiry, assembling the rebels, and taking, as evidence against their +governor, wretches without faith, and who are unworthy of unbelief. If +their Highnesses would cause a general inquiry to be made throughout the +land, I assure you they would be astonished, that the island has not +been swallowed up. I believe that you will recollect, that when I was +driven by a tempest into the port of Lisbon (having lost my sails), I was +falsely accused of having put in thither with the intention of giving the +Indies to the sovereign of that country. Since then, their Highnesses +have learned the contrary, and that it was all malice. Although I am an +ignorant man, I do not imagine that any one supposed me so stupid as +not to be aware, that even if the Indies had belonged to me, I could +not support myself without the assistance of some prince. In such case +where should I find better support, or more security against expulsion, +than in the king and queen our sovereigns? who, from nothing, have +raised me to so great an elevation, and who are the greatest princes of +the world, on the land and on the sea. These princes know how I have +served them, and they uphold my privileges and rewards; and if any one +violates them, their Highnesses augment them by ordering great favour to +be shown me, and ordain me many honours, as was shown in the affair of +Juan Aguado. Yes, as I have said, their Highnesses have received some +services from me, and have taken my sons into their household, which +would not have happened with another prince, because where there is no +attachment, all other considerations prove of little weight. If I have +now spoken severely of a malicious slander, it is against my will, for +it is a subject I would not willingly recall even in my dreams. The +governor Bobadilla has maliciously exhibited in open day his character +and conduct in this affair; but I will prove without difficulty, that his +ignorance, his cowardice, and his inordinate cupidity, have frustrated +all his undertakings. I have already said that I wrote to him, as well +as to the monks, and I set out almost alone, all our people being with +the Adelantado and elsewhere, to remove suspicion; when he heard this he +seized Don Diego, and sent him on board a caravel, loaded with irons; +on my arrival he did the same to me; and afterwards to the Adelantado +when he came. I have never spoken with him, and to this day he has not +permitted any one to hold converse with me, and I solemnly declare that +I cannot think for what reason I was made prisoner. His first care was +to take the gold that I had, and that without measuring or weighing it, +although I was absent; he said he would pay those to whom it was owing, +and if I am to believe what has been reported to me, he reserved to +himself the greater part, and sent for strangers to make the bargains. +I had put aside some samples of this gold, some as large as a goose’s +or a hen’s egg, and of various sizes, which a few persons had collected +in a short space of time, that their Highnesses might be gratified and +impressed with the importance of the affair, when they saw a quantity of +large stones full of gold. This gold was the first that, after he had +feathered his own nest (which he was in great haste to do), his malice +suggested to give away, in order that their Highnesses might have a low +opinion of the whole affair: the gold which required melting, diminished +at the fire, and a chain weighing nearly twenty marks disappeared +altogether. I have been yet more concerned respecting this matter of +the gold than even about the affair of the pearls, that I have not been +able to bring them to their Highnesses. In every thing that he thought +could add to my annoyance, the governor has always shown himself ready +to bestir himself. Thus, as I have said, with six hundred thousand +maravedis, I should have paid every one, without injustice to any; and +I had more than four millions of tithes and constabulary dues, without +touching the gold. He made the most absurd gifts, although I believe he +began with himself first; their Highnesses will be able to ascertain +the truth on this subject when they demand the account to be rendered +them, especially if I may assist at the examination. He is continually +saying, that there is a considerable sum owing, while it is only what I +have already reported, and even less. I have been wounded extremely by +the thought, that a man should have been sent out to make inquiry into +my conduct, who knew, that if he sent home a very aggravated account +of the result of his investigation, he would remain at the head of the +government. Would to God, their Highnesses had sent either him or some +other person two years ago, for then I know that I should have had no +cause to fear either scandal or disgrace; they could not then have taken +away my honour, and I could not have been in the position to have lost +it. God is just, and He will in due time make known by whom and how it +has been done. Let them judge me, as a governor who had been sent to +Sicily or some province or city under regular government, and where the +laws could be executed without fear of danger to the public weal or +subjection to any enormous wrong. I ought to be judged as a captain sent +from Spain to the Indies, to conquer a nation numerous and warlike, with +customs and religion altogether different to ours; a people who dwell +in the mountains, without regular habitations for themselves or for +us; and where, by the Divine will, I have subdued another world to the +dominion of the King and Queen, our sovereigns; in consequence of which, +Spain, that used to be called poor, is now the most wealthy of kingdoms. +I ought to be judged as a captain, who for so many years has borne arms, +never quitting them for an instant. I ought to be judged by cavaliers who +have themselves won the meed of victory;[200] by knights of the sword +and not of title deeds; as least, so it would have been among the Greeks +and Romans, or any modern nation in which exists so much nobility as in +Spain; for under any other judgment I receive great injury, because in +the Indies there is neither civil right nor judgment seat. + +Already the road is opened to the gold and pearls, and it may surely +be hoped that precious stones, spices, and a thousand other things, +will also be found. Would to God that it were as certain that I should +suffer no greater wrongs than I have already experienced, as it is that +I would, in the name of our Lord, again undertake my first voyage; and +that I would undertake to go to Arabia Felix as far as Mecca, as I have +said in the letter that I sent to their Highnesses by Antonio de Torres, +in answer to the division of the sea and land between Spain and the +Portuguese; and I would go afterwards to the North Pole, as I have said +and given in writing to the monastery of the Mejorada. + +The tidings of the gold which I said I would give, are, that on +Christmas-day, being greatly afflicted and tormented by the wicked +Spaniards and the Indians, when I was at the point of leaving all to +save my life if possible, our Lord comforted me miraculously, saying to +me, “_Take courage, be not dismayed nor fear, I will provide for all; +the seven years, the term of the gold, are not yet passed; and in this, +as in the rest, I will redress thee._” I learned that same day, that +there were twenty-four leagues of land where they found mines at every +step, which appear now to form but one. Some of the people collected a +hundred and twenty castellanos’ worth in one day, others ninety; and +there have been those who have gathered the equivalent of nearly two +hundred and fifty castellanos. They consider it a good day’s work when +they collect from fifty to seventy, or even from twenty to fifty, and +many continue searching; the mean day’s work is from six to twelve, and +those who get less are very dissatisfied. It appears that these mines, +like all others, do not yield equally every day; the mines are new, and +those who collect their produce inexperienced. According to the judgment +of everybody here, it seems that, if all Spain were to come over, every +individual, however inexpert he might be, would gain the equivalent of +at least one or two castellanos in a day; and so it is up to the present +time. It is certain that any man who has an Indian to work for him, +collects as much, but the management depends upon the Spaniard. See, now, +what discernment was shown by Bobadilla when he gave up everything for +nothing, and four millions of tithes without any reason, and even without +being asked to do so, and without first giving notice to their Highnesses +of his intention; and this is not the only evil which he has caused. I +know, assuredly, that the errors which I may have fallen into, have been +committed without any intention of doing wrong, and I think that their +Highnesses will believe me when I say so; but I know and see that they +show mercy towards those who intentionally do injury to their service. I, +however, feel very certain that the day will come when they will treat me +much better; since, if I have been in error, it has been innocently and +under the force of circumstances, as they will shortly understand beyond +all doubt: I, who am their creature, and whose services and usefulness +they will every day be more willing to acknowledge. They will weigh all +in the balance, even as, according to the Holy Scripture, it will be with +the evil and the good at the day of judgment. If, nevertheless, their +Highnesses ordain me another judge, which I do not expect, and if my +examination is to be holden in the Indies, I humbly beseech them to send +over two conscientious and respectable persons at my expense, and they +would readily acknowledge that, at this time, five marks of gold may be +found in four hours: be it however as it may, it is highly necessary that +their Highnesses should have this matter inquired into. The governor, +on his arrival at St. Domingo, took up his abode in my house, and +appropriated to himself all that was therein. Well and good; perhaps +he was in want of it: but even a pirate does not behave in this manner +towards the merchants that he plunders. That which grieves me most is the +seizure of my papers, of which I have never been able to recover one; and +those that would have been most useful to me in proving my innocence, +are precisely those which he has kept most carefully concealed. Behold +the just and honest inquisitor! But whatever he may have done, they tell +me that he has now bidden good bye to justice and is simply a despot. Our +Lord God retains His power and wisdom as of old; and, above all things, +He punishes injustice and ingratitude. + + +CARTA + +_Del Almirante al ama (que habia sido) del Principe D. Juan, escrita +hacia fines del año 1500._ + +Muy virtuosa Señora: Si mi queja del mundo es nueva, su uso de maltratar +es de muy antiguo. Mil combates me ha dado y á todos resistí fasta agora +que no me aprovechó armas ni avisos. Con crueldad me tiene echado al +fondo. La esperanza de aquel que crio á todos me sostiene: su socorro +fue siempre muy presto. Otra vez, y no de lejos estando yo mas bajo, me +levantó con su brazo divino, diciendo: _ó hombre de poca fe, levantate +que yo soy, no hayas miedo_. Yo vine con amor tan entrañable á servir +á estos Principes, y hé servido de servicio de que jamas se oyó ni +vido. Del nuevo cielo y tierra que decia muestro Señor por S. Juan +en el Apocalipse, despues de dicho por boca de Isaías, me hizo dello +mensagero, y amostró en cual parte. En todos hobo incredulidad, y á la +Reina mi Señor dió dello el espíritu de inteligencia y esfuerzo grande, +y lo hizo de todo heredera como á cara y muy amada hija. La posesion de +todo esto fuí yo á tomar en su Real nombre. La ignorancia en que habian +estado todos quisieron enmendallo traspasando el poco saber á fablar en +inconvenientes y gastos. Su Alteza lo aprobaba al contrario, y lo sostuvo +fasta que pudo. Siete años se pasaron en la platica y nueve ejecutando +cosas muy señaladas y dignas de memoria se pasaron en este tiempo: de +todo no se fizo concepto. Llegué yo y estoy que non ha nadie tan vil que +no piense de ultrajarme. Por virtud se contará en el mundo á quien puede +no consentillo. Si yo robara las Indias ó tierra que san face[201] en +ello de que agora es la fabla del altar de S. Pedro, y las diera á los +moros, no pudieran en España amostrarme mayor enemiga. Quién creyera tal +adonde hobo siempre tanta nobleza? Yo mucho quisiera despedir del negocio +si fuera honesto para con mi Reina: el esfuerzo de nuestro Señor y de +su Alteza fizo que yo continuase, y por aliviarle algo de los enojos +en que á causa de la muerte estaba, cometí viaje nuevo al nuevo cielo +é mundo, que fasta entonces estaba en oculto, y sino es tenido allí en +estima, así como los otros de las Indias, no es maravilla porque salió +á parecer de mi industria. A S. Pedro abrasó el Espíritu Santo y con él +otros doce, y todos combatieron acá, y los trabajos y fatigas fueron +muchas; en fin de todo llevaron la victoria. Este viaje de Paria creí que +apaciguara algo por las perlas y la fallada del oro en la Española. Las +perlas mandé yo ayuntar y pescar á la gente con quien quedó el concierto +de mi vuelta por ellas, y á mi comprender á medida de fanega: si yo non +lo escribí a SS. AA. fue porque así quisiera haber fecho del oro antes. +Esto me salió como otras cosas muchas; no las perdiera ni mi honra si +buscara yo mi bien propio y dejara perder la Española, ó se guardaran +mis previlegios é asientos. Y otro tanto digo del oro que yo tenia agora +junto, que con tantas muertés y trabajos, por virtud divinal, he llegado +á perfecto. Cuando yo fuí á Paria fallé cuasi la mitad de la gente en +la Española alzados, y me han guerreado fasta agora como á moro, y los +indios por otro cabo gravemente. En esto vino Hojeda y probó á echar +el sello, y dijo que sus Altezas lo enviaban con promesas de dádivas y +franquezas y paga: allegó gran cuadrilla, que en toda la Española muy +pocos hay, salvo vagabundos y ninguno con muger y fijos. Este Hojeda me +trabajó harto y fuele necesario de se ir, y dejó dicho que luego seria de +vuelta con mas navíos y gente, y que dejaba la Real persona de la Reina +á la muerte. En esto llegó Viceinte Yañez con cuatro carabelas: hobo +alboroto y sospechas, mas no daño. Los indios dijeron de otras muchas á +los canibales y en Paria, y despues una nueva de seis otras carabelas que +traía un hermano del Alcalde, mas fue con malicia, y esto fue ya á la +postre cuando ya estaba muy rota la esperanza que sus Altezas hobiesen +jamas de enviar navios á las Indias, ni nos esperarlos, y que vulgarmente +decian que su Alteza era muerta. Un Adrian en este tiempo probó alzarse +otra vez como de antes, mas nuestro Señor no quiso que llegase á efecto +su mal propósito. Yo tenia propuesto en mi de no tocar el cabello á +nadie, y á este por su ingratitud con lágrimas no se pudo guardar, así +como yo lo tenia pensado. A mi hermano no hiciera menos si me quisiera +matar y robar el señorío que mi Rey é Reina me tenian dado en guarda. +Este Adrian, segun se muestra, tenia enviado á D. Fernando á Jaragua á +allegar á algunos sus secuaces, y allá hobo debate con el Alcalde, adonde +nació discordia de muerte; mas no llegó á efecto. El Alcalde le prendió +y á parte de su cuadrilla: y el caso era que él los justiciaba sin que +yo lo proveyere: estovieren presos esperando carabela en que se fuesen: +las nuevas de Hojeda que yo dije ficieron perder la esperanza que ya no +venia. Seis meses habia que yo estaba despachado para venir á sus Altezas +con las buenas nuevas del oro y fuir de gobernar gente disoluta que no +teme á Dios ni á su Rey ni Reina, llena de achaques y de malicias. A la +gente acabara yo de pagar con seiscientos mil maravedises: y para ello +habia cuatro cuentos de diezmos é alguno sin el tercio del oro. Antes de +mi partida supliqué tantas veces á sus Altezas que enviasen allá á mi +costa á quien tuviese cargo de la justicia, y despues que fallé alzado +al Alcalde se lo supliqué de nuevo ó por alguna gente, ó al menos algun +criado con cartas, porque mi fama es tal que aunque yo faga iglesias y +hospitales siempre serán dichas espeluncas para latrones. Proveyeron ya +al fin, y fue muy al contrario de lo que la negociacion demandaba: vaya +en buena, hora, pues que es á su grado. Yo estuve allá dos años sin poder +ganar una provision de favor para mí ni por los que allá fuesen, y este +llevó una arca llena: si pararán todas á su servicio Dios lo sabe. Ya por +comienzos hay franquezas por veinte años, que es la edad de un hombre, y +se coge el oro, que hobo persona de cinco marcos en cuatro horas, de que +diré despues mas largo. Si pluguiese á sus Altezas de desfacer un vulgo +de los que saben mis fatigas, que mayor daño me ha hecho el mal decir de +las gentes que no me ha aprovechado el mucho servir y guardar su facienda +y senorío, seria limosna, é yo restituido en mi honra, é se fablaria +dello en todo el mundo, porquel negocio es de calidad que cada dia ha de +ser mas sonada y en alta estima. En esto vino el Comendador Bobadilla á +Santo Domingo, yo estaba en la Vega y el Adelantado en Jaragua, donde +este Adrian habia hecho cabeza, mas ya todo era llano y la tierra rica, y +en paz toda. El segundo dia que llegó se crió Gobernador y fizo oficiales +y ejecuciones, y apregonó franquezas del oro y diezmos, y generalmente de +toda otra cosa por veinte años, que como digo es la edad de un hombre, +y que venia para pagar á todos, bien que no habian servido llenamente +hasta ese dia, y publicó que á mi me habia de enviar en fierros, y á mis +hermanos, así como lo ha fecho, y que nunca yo volveria mas allí ni otro +de mi linage, diciendo de mi mil deshonestidades y descorteses cosas. +Esto todo fue el segundo dia quel llegó, como dije, y estando yo lejos +absente sin saber dello ni de su venida. Unas cartas de sus Altezas +firmadas en blanco, de que el llevaba una cantidad, hinchó y envió al +Alcalde y á su compañía con favores y encomiendas. A mi nunca me envió +carta ni mensagero, ni me ha dado fasta hoy. Piense vuestra merced qué +pensaria quien tuviera mi cargo? honrar y favorecer á quien probó á robar +á sus Altezas el señorío, y ha fecho tanto mal y daño! y arrastrar á +quien con tantos peligros se lo sostuvo? Cuando supe esto, creí que esto +seria como lo de Hojeda, ó uno de los otros: templóme que supe de los +frailes de cierto que sus Altezas lo enviaban. Escrebile yo que su venida +fuese en buena hora, y que yo estaba despachado para ir á la corte, y +fecho almoneda de cuanto yo tenia, y que en esto de las franquezas que no +se acelerase, que esto y el gobierno yo se lo daria luego tan llano como +la palma, y así lo escribí a los religiosos. Ni él ni ellos me dieron +respuesta, antes se puso él en son de guerra, y apremiaba á cuantos allí +iban que le jurasen por Gobernador, dijeronme que por veinte años. Luego +que yo supe de estas franquezas pensé de adobar un yerro tan grande, +y que él seria contento, las cuales dió sin necesidad y causa de cosa +tan gruesa y á gente vagabunda, que fuera demasiado para quien trujera +muger y hijos. Publiqué por palabra y por cartas que él no podia usar +de sus provisiones, porque las mias eran las mas fuertes, y les mostré +las franquezas que llevó Juan Aguado. Todo esto que yo fice era por +dilatar, porque sus Altezas fuesen sabidores del estado de la tierra, y +hobiesen lugar de tornar á mandar en ello lo que fuese su servicio. Tales +franquezas escusado es de las apregonar en las Indias. Los vecinos que +han tomado vecindad es logro, porque se les dan las mejores tierras y á +poco valer valerán docientos mil maravedis al cabo de los cuatro años +que la vecindad se acaba, sin que den una azadonada en ellas. No diria +yo así si los vecinos fuesen casados, mas no hay seis entre todos que no +esten sobre el aviso de ayuntar lo que pudieren y se ir en buena hora. De +Castilla seria bien que fuesen, y aun saber quién y cómo, y se poblase de +gente honrada. Yo tenia asentado con estos vecinos que pagarian el tercio +del oro y los diezmos, y esto á su ruego, y lo recibieron en grande +merced de sus Altezas. Reprendiles cuando yo oí que se dejaban dello, y +esperaban quél conmigo faria otro tanto, mas fue el contrario. Indignólos +contra mí diciendo, que yo les queria quitar lo que sus Altezas les +daban, y trabajo de me los echar acuestas, y lo hizo, y que escribiesen +á sus Altezas que no me enviasen mas al cargo, y así se lo suplico yo +por mí y por toda cosa mia, en cuanto no haya otro pueblo, y me ordenó +él con ellos pesquisas de maldades que al infierno nunca se supo de las +semejantes. Allí está nuestro Señor que escapó á Daniel y á los tres +muchachos con tanto saber y fuerza como tenia, y con tanto aparejo si le +pluguiere como con su gana. Supiera yo remediar todo esto y lo otro que +está dicho y ha pasado despues que estoy en las Indias, si me consintiera +la voluntad á procurar por mi bien propio y me fuera honesto. Mas el +sostener de la justicia y acrecentar el señorío de sus Altezas fasta +agora, me tiene al fondo. Hoy en dia que se falla tanto oro hay division +en que haya mas ganancia, ir robando ó ir á las minas. Por una muger +tambien se fallan cien castellanos como por una labranza, y es mucho en +uso, y ha ya fartos mercaderes que andan buscando muchachas: de nueve á +diez son agora en precio: de todas edades ha de tener un bueno. Digo que +en decir yo que el Comendador no podia dar franquezas que hice yo lo que +él deseaba; bien que yo á él dijese que era para dilatar fasta que sus +Altezas toviesen el aviso de la tierra y tornasen á ver y mandar lo que +fuese su servicio. Digo que la fuerza del maldecir de desconcertados me +ha hecho mas daño que mis servicios fecho provecho: mal ejemplo es por +lo presente y por lo futuro. Fago juramento que cantidad de hombres han +ido á las Indias que no merescian el agua para con Dios y con el mundo, +y agora vuelven allá. Enemistólos á ellos todos conmigo, y él parece, +segun se hobo y segun sus formas, que ya lo venia y bien encendido, ó es +que se dice que ha gastado mucho por venir á este negocio; no se dello +mas de lo que oyo. Yo nunca oí que el pesquisidor allegase los rebeldes y +los tomase por testigos contra aquel que gobierna á ellos y á otros sin +fe, ni dignos della. Si sus Altezas mandasen hacer una pesquisa general +allí vos digo yo que verian por gran maravilla como la isla no sé funde. +Yo creo que se acordará vuestra merced cuando lo tormenta sin velas me +echó en Lisbona, que fuí acusado falsamente que habia ido ya allá al Rey +para darle las Indias. Despues supieron sus Altezas al contrario, y que +todo fue con malicia. Bien que yo sepa poco: no sé quien me tenga por tan +torpe que yo no conozca que aunque las Indias fuesen mias, que yo no me +pudiera sostener sin ayuda de Príncipe. Si esto es así, adónde pudiera +yo tener mejor arrimo y seguridad de no ser echado dellas del todo que +en el Rey é Reina nuestros Señores, que de nada me han puesto en tanta +honra y son los mas altos Príncipes por la mar y por la tierra del mundo? +los cuales tienen que yo les haya servido, é me guardan mis privilegios y +mercedes, y si alguien me los quebranta sus Altezas me los acrescientan +con aventaja, como se vido en lo de Juan Aguado, y me mandar hacer mucha +honra, y como dije ya sus Altezas rescibieron de mí servicios y tienen +mis hijos sus criados, lo que en ninguna manera pudiera esto llegar con +otro Príncipe, porque adonde no hay amor todo lo otro cesa. Dije yo agora +ansi contra un maldecir con malicia y contra mi voluntad, porque es cosa +que ni en sueños debiera allegar á memoria, porque las formas y fechos +del Comendador Bobadilla, con malicia las quiere alumbrar en esto: mas yo +le faré ver con el brazo izquierdo que su poco saber y gran cobardiá con +desordenada cudicia le ha fecho caer en ello. Ya dije como yo le escrebí +y á los frailes, y luego partí así como le dije muy solo, porque toda la +gente estaba con el Adelantado, y tambien por le quitar de sospecha: él +cuando lo supo echó á D. Diego preso en una carabela cargado de fierros, +y á mi en llegando fizo otro tanto, y despues al Adelantado, cuando vino. +Ni le fablé mas á él ni consintió que hasta hoy nadie me haya fablado, +y fago juramento que no puedo pensar por qué sea yo preso. La primera +diligencia que fizo fue á tomar el oro, el cual hobo sin medida ni peso, +é yo absente dijo que queria él pagar dello á la gente, y segun oí para +sí fizo la primera parte, y enviar por resgate resgatadores nuevos. Desto +oro tenia yo apartado ciertas muestras, granos muy gruesos como huevos +como de ánsar, de gallina y de pollas, y de otras muchas fechuras, que +algunas personas tenian cogido en breve espacio, con que se alegrasen sus +Altezas, y por ello comprendiesen el negocio con una cantidad de piedras +grandes llenas de oro. Este fue el primero á se dar con malicia, porque +sus Altezas no tuviesen este negocio en algo fasta quel tenga fecho el +nido de que se dá buena priesa. El oro que está por fundir mengua al +fuego: una cadena que pesaria fasta veinte marcos nunca se ha visto. Yo +he sido muy agraviado en esto del oro mas aun que de las perlas, porque +no las he traido á sus Altezas. El Comendador en todo lo que le pareció +que me dañaria luego fue puesto en obra. Ya dije, con seiscientos mil +maravedises pagara á todos sin robar á nadie y habia mas de cuatro +cuentos de diezmos y alguacilazgo sin tocar en el oro. Hizo unas +larguezas que son de risa, bien que creo que encomenzó en sí la primera +parte: allá lo sabran sus Altezas cuando le mandaren tomar cuenta, en +especial si yo estuviese á ella. El no face sino decir que se debe gran +suma, y es la que yo dije y no tanto. Yo he sido muy mucho agraviado en +que se haya enviado pesquisidor sobre mí, que sepa que si la pesquisa +que él enviare fuere muy grave que él quedará en el gobierno.—Pluguiera +á nuestro Señor que sus Altezas le enviaran á él ó á otro dos años ha, +porque sé que yo fuera ya libre de escándalo y de infamia, y no se me +quitara mi honra ni la perdiera: Dios es justo, y ha de hacer que se +sepa por que y cómo. Allí me juzgan como Gobernador que fue á Cecilia ó +ciudad ó villa puesta en regimiento y adonde las leyes se pueden guardar +por entero sin temor de que se pierda todo, y rescibo grande agravio. +Yo debo ser juzgado como Capitan que fue de España á conquistar fasta +las Indias á gente belicosa y mucha, y de costumbres y seta á nos muy +contraria: los cuales viven por sierras y montes, sin pueblo asentado +ni nosotros; y adonde por voluntad Divina he puesto só el señorio del +Rey é de la Reina nuestros Señores otro mundo; y por donde la España, +que era dicha pobre, es la mas rica. Yo dobo ser juzgado como Capitan +que de tanto tiempo fasta hoy trae las armas á cuestas sin las dejar una +hora, y de Caballeros de conquistas y del uso, y no de letras, salvo si +fuesen de Griegos ó de Romanos, ó de otros modernos de que hay tantos y +tan nobles en España, ca de otra guisa rescibo grande agravio porque en +las Indias no hay pueblo ni asiento. Del oro y perlas ya está abierta la +puerta y cantidad de todo, piedras preciosas y especería, y de otras mil +cosas se pueden esperar firmemente; y nunca mas mal me viniese como con +el nombre de Nuestro Señor le daria el primer viage, así como diera la +negociacion del Arabia feliz fasta la Meca, como yo escribí á sus Altezas +con Antonio de Torres en la respuesta de la reparticion del mar é tierra +con los Portogueses: y despues viniera á lo de polo artico, así coma lo +dije y dí por escripto en el monesterio de la Mejorada. Las nuevas del +oro que yo dije que daria son que dia de Navidad, estando yo muy afligido +guerreado de los malos Cristianos y de Indios, en términos de dejar todo +y escapar si pudiese la vida; me consoló nuestro Señor milagrosamente y +dijo: “_Esfuerza, no desmayes mi temas: yo proveeré en todo; los siete +años del término del oro no son pasados, y en ello y en lo otro te daré +remedio._” Ese dia supe que habia ochenta leguas de tierra, y en todo +cabo dellas minas; el parecer agora es que sea toda una. Algunos han +cogido ciento y veinte castellanos en un dia, otros noventa, y se ha +llegado fasta docientos y cincuenta. De cincuenta fasta setenta, y otros +muchos de veínte fasta cincuenta, es tenido por buen jornal y muchos lo +continuaban: el comun es seis fasta doce, y quien de aquí abaja no es +contento. Parece tambien que estas minas son como las otras que responden +en los dias no igualmente: las minas son nuevas y los cogedores. El +parecer de todos es que aunque vaya allá toda Castilla, que por torpe +que sea la persona, que no abajará de un castellano ó dos cada dia, y +agora es esto así en fresco. Es verdad que el que tiene algun indio coge +esto, mas el negocio consiste en el Cristiano. Ved que discrecion fue +de Bobadilla dar todo por ninguno y cuatro cuentos de diezmos sin causa +ni ser requerido, sin primero lo notificar á sus Altezas; y el daño no +es este solo. Yo sé que mis yerros no han sido con fin de facer mal, y +creo que sus Altezas lo creen así como yo lo digo; y sé y veo que usan de +misericordia con quien maliciosamente los desirve. Yo creo y tengo por +muy cierto que muy mejor y mas piedad harán conmigo que caí en ello con +inocencia y forzosamente, como sabran despues por entero, y el cual soy +su fechura, y mirirán á mis servicíos, y cognoscerán de cada dia que son +muy aventajados. Todo pornan en una balanza, así como nos cuenta la Santa +Escriptura que será el bien con el mal en el dia del juicio. Si todavía +mandan que otro me juzgue, lo cual no espero, y que sea por pesquisa +de las Indias, humilmente les suplico que envien allá dos personas de +consciencia y honrados á mi costa, los cuales fallaran de ligero agora +que se halla el oro cinco marcos en cuatro horas, con esto é sin ello es +muy necesario que lo provean. El Comendador, en llegando á Santo Domingo +se aposentó en mi casa; así como la falló así dió todo por suyo: vaya en +buena hora, quizá lo habia menester: cosario nunca tal usó con mercader. +De mis escripturas tengo yo mayor queja que así me las haya tomado, que +jamas se le pudo sacar una, y aquellas que mas me habian de aprovechar en +mi disculpa esas tenia mas ocultas. Ved que justo y honesto pesquisidor. +Cosa de cuantas él haya hecho me dicen que haya seido con término de +justicia, salvo absolutamente. Dios nuestro Señor está con sus fuerzas y +saber, como solia, y castiga en todo cabo, en especial la ingratitud de +injurias. + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[189] Although Zuñiga says that Doña Maria de Guzman was appointed nurse +by Queen Isabella at the birth of Prince John, it is nevertheless certain +that this letter was addressed by Columbus to Doña Juana de la Torres, a +great favourite of the queen, sister of Antonio de Torres, who was with +the admiral in the second voyage, and who bore the memorial to their +Highnesses. + +[190] This is related by his son Don Ferdinand, in cap. 84 of his +history, and is more amply described in the letter addressed by Columbus +to the sovereigns, describing his fourth voyage. It took place the day +after Christmas day, 1499. + +[191] He refers to the death of Prince John, which occurred in Salamanca, +on the fourth of October 1497. + +[192] After the admiral had discovered the island of Trinidad, he sailed +along the coast of Paria, discovered the island of Margarita, and entered +the harbour of San Domingo the thirtieth of August 1498, where he found +the colony in rebellion, and the Spaniards embroiled in quarrels, both +with each other and with the Indians. + +[193] Alonzo de Hojeda reached Española on the fifth of September 1498. + +[194] Roldan was by this time reconciled to the Admiral, and the +rebellion was allayed, when Hojeda arrived, making great boast of his +favour with bishop Fonseca, Columbus’ enemy, and endeavoured to excite +fresh animosity against him; but he had to leave Española completely. + +[195] Adrian Mogica, who had been one of the rebels with Roldan. + +[196] Columbus returned to Cadiz from his second voyage, on the 11th of +June, 1496. He was well received by the sovereigns, and they gave orders +for preparing the requisites for a third voyage; but the fulfilment of +these orders was delayed by Bishop Fonseca until the 30th of May, 1498. + +[197] Francesco de Bobadilla, commander of the order of Calatrava, +reached San Domingo on the 23rd of August, 1500. + +[198] This expression of the Admiral’s, makes it appear that he wrote +this letter when he was near reaching Cadiz, on the 25th of November, +1500. + +[199] An ancient gold coin, varying in value under different kings. + +[200] The old Spaniards used to give the name of “_caballero de +conquista_,” to each of the conquerors, among whom the conquered lands +were divided. + +[201] There is no sense in this expression, nor as it is given in the +“Codice Colombo Americano”, where it stands thus: “que jaz hase ellas de +que”, etc. Perhaps “hase” is miscopied for “hacia” “towards.” + + + + +FOURTH VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS. + + +_A Letter written by Don Christopher Columbus, Viceroy and Admiral of +the Indies, to the most Christian and mighty Sovereigns, the King and +Queen of Spain, in which are described the events of his voyage, and +the countries, provinces, cities, rivers, and other marvellous matters +therein discovered, as well as the places where gold and other substances +of great richness and value are to be found._ + +Most Serene, and very high and mighty Princes, the King and Queen our +Sovereigns:—My passage from Cadiz to the Canary occupied four days, and +thence to the Indies, from which I wrote, sixteen days. My intention was +to expedite my voyage as much as possible while I had good vessels, good +crews and stores, and because Jamaica was the place to which I was bound. +I wrote this in Dominica. + +Up to the period of my reaching these shores I experienced most +excellent weather, but the night of my arrival came in with a dreadful +tempest, and the same bad weather has continued ever since. On reaching +the island of Española I despatched a packet of letters, by which I +begged as a favour that a ship should be supplied me at my own cost in +lieu of one of those that I had brought with me, and which had become +unseaworthy, and could no longer carry sail. The letters were taken, +and your Highnesses will know if a reply has been given to them. For my +part I was forbidden to go on shore; the hearts of my people failed them +lest I should take them further, and they said that if any danger were +to befall them, they should receive no succour, but, on the contrary, +in all probability have some great affront offered them. Moreover every +man had it in his power to tell me that the new Governor would have the +superintendence of the countries that I might acquire. + +The tempest was terrible throughout the night, all the ships were +separated, and each one driven to the last extremity, without hope of +anything but death; each of them also looked upon the loss of the rest +as a matter of certainty. What man was ever born, not even excepting +Job, who would not have been ready to die of despair at finding himself +as I then was, in anxious fear for my own safety, and that of my son, my +brother, and my friends, and yet refused permission either to land or +to put into harbour on the shores which by God’s mercy I had gained for +Spain with so much toil and danger? + +But to return to the ships: although the tempest had so completely +separated them from me as to leave me single, yet the Lord restored them +to me in his own good time. The ship which we had the greatest fear +for, had put out to sea for safety, and reached the island of Gallega, +having lost her boat and a great part of her provisions, which latter +loss indeed all the ships suffered. The vessel in which I was, though +dreadfully buffeted, was saved by our Lord’s mercy from any injury +whatever; my brother went in the ship that was unsound, and he under God +was the cause of its being saved. With this tempest I struggled on till +I reached Jamaica, and there the sea became calm, but there was a strong +current which carried me as far as the Queen’s Garden without seeing +land. Hence as opportunity afforded I pushed on for terra firma, in spite +of the wind and a fearful contrary current, against which I contended +for sixty days, and after all only made seventy leagues. All this time +I was unable to get into harbour, nor was there any cessation of the +tempest, which was one continuation of rain, thunder, and lightning; +indeed it seemed as if it were the end of the world. I at length +reached the Cape of Gracias a Dios, and after that the Lord granted me +fair wind and tide; this was on the twelfth of September. Eighty-eight +days did this fearful tempest continue, during which I was at sea, and +saw neither sun nor stars; my ships lay exposed, with sails torn, and +anchors, rigging, cables, boats, and a great quantity of provisions lost; +my people were very weak and humbled in spirit, many of them promising +to lead a religious life, and all making vows and promising to perform +pilgrimages, while some of them would frequently go to their messmates +to make confession. Other tempests have been experienced, but never of +so long a duration or so fearful as this: many whom we looked upon as +brave men, on several occasions showed considerable trepidation; but the +distress of my son who was with me grieved me to the soul, and the more +when I considered his tender age, for he was but thirteen years old, +and he enduring so much toil for so long a time. Our Lord, however, gave +him strength even to enable him to encourage the rest, and he worked as +if he had been eighty years at sea, and all this was a consolation to +me. I myself had fallen sick, and was many times at the point of death, +but from a little cabin that I had caused to be constructed on deck, I +directed our course. My brother was in the ship that was in the worst +condition and the most exposed to danger; and my grief on this account +was the greater that I brought him with me against his will. + +Such is my fate, that the twenty years of service through which I have +passed with so much toil and danger, have profited me nothing, and at +this very day I do not possess a roof in Spain that I can call my own; if +I wish to eat or sleep, I have nowhere to go but to the inn or tavern, +and most times lack wherewith to pay the bill. Another anxiety wrung my +very heartstrings, which was the thought of my son Diego, whom I had left +an orphan in Spain, and stripped of the honour and property which were +due to him on my account, although I had looked upon it as a certainty, +that your Majesties, as just and grateful Princes, would restore it to +him in all respects with increase. I reached the land of Cariay, where I +stopped to repair my vessels and take in provisions, as well as to afford +relaxation to the men, who had become very weak. I myself (who, as I said +before, had been several times at the point of death) gained information +respecting the gold mines of which I was in search, in the province of +Ciamba; and two Indians conducted me to Carambaru, where the people (who +go naked) wear golden mirrors round their necks, which they will neither +sell, give, nor part with for any consideration. They named to me many +places on the sea-coast where there were both gold and mines. The last +that they mentioned was Veragua, which was about five-and-twenty leagues +distant from the place where we then were. I started with the intention +of visiting all of them, but when I had reached the middle of my journey +I learned that there were other mines at so short a distance that they +might be reached in two days. I determined on sending to see them. It was +on the eve of St. Simon and St. Jude, which was the day fixed for our +departure; but that night there arose so violent a storm, that we were +forced to go wherever it drove us, and the Indian who was to conduct us +to the mines was with us all the time. As I had found every thing true +that had been told me in the different places which I had visited, I felt +satisfied it would be the same with respect to Ciguare, which according +to their account, is nine days’ journey across the country westward: they +tell me there is a great quantity of gold there, and that the inhabitants +wear coral ornaments on their heads, and very large coral bracelets and +anklets, with which article also they adorn and inlay their seats, boxes, +and tables. They also said that the women there wore necklaces hanging +down to their shoulders. All the people agree in the report I now repeat, +and their account is so favourable that I should be content with the +tithe of the advantages that their description holds out. They are all +likewise acquainted with the pepper-plant. According to the account of +these people, the inhabitants of Ciguare are accustomed to hold fairs and +markets for carrying on their commerce, and they showed me also the mode +and form in which they transact their various exchanges. Others assert +that their ships carry guns, and that the men go clothed and use bows +and arrows, swords, and cuirasses, and that on shore they have horses +which they use in battle, and that they wear rich clothes and have most +excellent houses.[202] They also say that the sea surrounds Ciguare, and +that at ten days’ journey from thence is the river Ganges. These lands +appear to have the same bearings with respect to Veragua, as Tortosa +has to Fontarabia, or Pisa to Venice. When I left Carambaru and reached +the places in its neighbourhood, which I have above-mentioned as being +spoken of by the Indians, I found the customs of the people correspond +with the accounts that had been given of them, except as regarded the +golden mirrors: any man who had one of them would willingly part with it +for three hawks’-bells, although they were equivalent in weight to ten +or fifteen ducats. These people resemble the natives of Española in all +their habits. They have various modes of collecting the gold, none of +which will bear comparison with the plans adopted by the Christians. + +All that I have here stated is from hearsay. This, however, I know, that +in the year ninety-four I sailed twenty-four degrees to the westward in +nine hours, and there can be no mistake upon the subject, because there +was an eclipse; the sun was in Libra and the moon in Aries. What I had +learned by the mouth of these people I already knew in detail from books. +Ptolemy thought that he had satisfactorily corrected Marinus, and yet +this latter appears to have come very near to the truth. Ptolemy places +Catigara at a distance of twelve lines to the west of his meridian,[203] +which he fixes at two degrees and a third above Cape St. Vincent, in +Portugal. Marinus comprises the earth and its limits in fifteen lines, +and the same author describes the Indus in Ethiopia as being more than +four-and-twenty degrees from the equinoctial line, and now that the +Portuguese have sailed there they find it correct. Ptolemy says also that +the most southern land is the first boundary, and that it does not go +lower down than fifteen degrees and a third. The world is but small; out +of seven divisions of it the dry part occupies six, and the seventh only +is covered by water.[204] Experience has shown it, and I have written it +with quotations from the Holy Scripture, in other letters, where I have +treated of the situation of the terrestrial paradise, as approved by Holy +Church; and I say that the world is not so large as vulgar opinion makes +it, and that one degree from the equinoctial line measures fifty-six +miles and two-thirds; and this may be proved to a nicety. But I leave +this subject, which it is not my intention now to treat upon, but simply +to give a narrative of my laborious and painful voyage, although of all +my voyages it is the most honourable and advantageous. I have said that +on the eve of St. Simon and St. Jude I ran before the wind wherever it +took me, without power to resist it; at length I found shelter for ten +days from the roughness of the sea and the tempest overhead, and resolved +not to attempt to go back to the mines, which I regarded as already in +our possession. When I started in pursuance of my voyage it was under +a heavy rain, and reaching the harbour of Bastimentos I put in, though +much against my will. The storm and a rapid current kept me in for +fourteen days, when I again set sail, but not with favourable weather. +After I had made fifteen leagues with great exertions, the wind and the +current drove me back again with great fury, but in again making for +the port which I had quitted, I found on the way another port, which I +named Retrete, where I put in for shelter with as much risk as regret, +the ships being in sad condition, and my crews and myself exceedingly +fatigued. I remained there fifteen days, kept in by stress of weather, +and when I fancied my troubles were at an end, I found them only begun. +It was then that I changed my resolution with respect to proceeding to +the mines, and proposed doing something in the interim, until the weather +should prove more favourable for my voyage. I had already made four +leagues when the storm recommenced, and wearied me to such a degree that +I absolutely knew not what to do; my wound reopened, and for nine days my +life was despaired of. Never was the sea seen so high, so terrific, and +so covered with foam; not only did the wind oppose our proceeding onward, +but it also rendered it highly dangerous to run in for any headland, and +kept me in that sea which seemed to me as a sea of blood, seething like a +cauldron on a mighty fire. Never did the sky look more fearful; during +one day and one night it burned like a furnace, and emitted flashes in +such fashion that each time I looked to see if my masts and my sails +were not destroyed; these flashes came with such alarming fury that we +all thought the ship must have been consumed. All this time the waters +from heaven never ceased, not to say that it rained, for it was like a +repetition of the deluge. The men were at this time so crushed in spirit, +that they longed for death as a deliverance from so many martyrdoms. +Twice already had the ships suffered loss in boats, anchors, and rigging, +and were now lying bare without sails. + +When it pleased our Lord, I returned to Puerto Gordo, where I recruited +my condition as well as I could. I then once more attempted the voyage +towards Veragua, although I was by no means in a fit state to undertake +it. The wind and currents were still contrary. I arrived at nearly the +same spot as before, and there again the wind and currents still opposed +my progress; once more I was compelled to put into harbour, not daring +to encounter the opposition of Saturn[205] with such a boisterous sea, +and on so formidable a coast; for it almost always brings on a tempest +or severe weather. This was on Christmas-day, about the hour of mass. +Thus, after all these fatigues, I had once more to return to the spot +from whence I started; and when the new year had set in, I returned +again to my task: but although I had fine weather for my voyage, the +ships were no longer in a sailing condition, and my people were either +dying or very sick. On the day of the Epiphany, I reached Veragua in a +state of exhaustion; there, by our Lord’s goodness, I found a river and +a safe harbour, although at the entrance there were only ten spans of +water. I succeeded in making an entry, but with great difficulty; and +on the following day the storm recommenced, and had I been still on the +outside at that time, I should have been unable to enter on account of +the bar. It rained without ceasing until the fourteenth of February, so +that I could find no opportunity of penetrating into the interior, nor of +recruiting my condition in any respect whatever; and on the twenty-fourth +of January, when I considered myself in perfect safety, the river +suddenly rose with great violence to a considerable height, breaking my +cables and the supports[206] to which they were fastened, and nearly +carrying away my ships altogether, which certainly appeared to me to be +in greater danger than ever. Our Lord, however, brought a remedy as He +has always done. I do not know if any one else ever suffered greater +trials. + +On the sixth of February, while it was still raining, I sent seventy men +on shore to go into the interior, and, at five leagues’ distance they +found several mines. The Indians who went with them, conducted them to +a very lofty mountain, and thence showing them the country all round, +as far as the eye could reach, told them there was gold in every part, +and that, towards the west, the mines extended twenty days’ journey; +they also recounted the names of the towns and villages where there was +more or less of it. I afterwards learned that the cacique Quibian, who +had lent these Indians, had ordered them to show the distant mines, and +which belonged to an enemy of his; but that in his own territory, one +man might, if he would, collect in ten days as much as a child could +carry. I bring with me some Indians, his servants, who can bear witness +to this fact. The boats went up to the spot where the dwellings of these +people are situated; and, after four hours, my brother returned with +the guides, all of them bringing back gold which they had collected at +that place. The gold must therefore be abundant, and of good quality, +for none of these men had ever seen mines before; very many of them had +never seen pure gold, and most of them were seamen and lads. Having +building materials in abundance, I established a settlement, and made +many presents to Quibian, which is the name they gave to the lord of the +country. I plainly saw that harmony would not last long, for the natives +are of a very rough disposition, and the Spaniards very encroaching; +and, moreover, I had taken possession of land belonging to Quibian. When +he saw what we did, and found the traffic increasing, he resolved upon +burning the houses, and putting us all to death; but his project did not +succeed, for we took him prisoner, together with his wives, his children, +and his servants. His captivity, it is true, lasted but a short time, for +he eluded the custody of a trustworthy man, into whose charge he had +been given, with a guard of men; and his sons escaped from a ship, in +which they had been placed under the special charge of the master. + +In the month of January the mouth of the river was entirely closed up, +and in April the vessels were so eaten with the teredo, that they could +scarcely be kept above water. At this time the river forced a channel for +itself, by which I managed, with great difficulty, to extricate three of +them after I had unloaded them. The boats were then sent back into the +river for water and salt, but the sea became so high and furious, that +it afforded them no chance of exit; upon which the Indians collected +themselves together in great numbers, and made an attack upon the boats, +and at length massacred the men. My brother, and all the rest of our +people, were in a ship which remained inside; I was alone, outside, +upon that dangerous coast, suffering from a severe fever and worn with +fatigue. All hope of escape was gone. I toiled up to the highest part of +the ship, and, with a quivering voice and fast-falling tears, I called +upon your Highnesses’ war-captains from each point of the compass to +come to my succour, but there was no reply. At length, groaning with +exhaustion, I fell asleep, and heard a compassionate voice address me +thus:—“_O fool, and slow to believe and to serve thy God, the God of +all! what did He do more for Moses, or for David his servant, than +He has done for thee? From thine infancy He has kept thee under His +constant and watchful care. When He saw thee arrived at an age which +suited His designs respecting thee, He brought wonderful renown to thy +name throughout all the land. He gave thee for thine own the Indies, +which form so rich a portion of the world, and thou hast divided them +as it pleased thee, for He gave thee power to do so. He gave thee also +the keys of those barriers of the ocean sea which were closed with such +mighty chains; and thou wast obeyed through many lands, and gained an +honourable fame throughout Christendom. What did the Most High do for the +people of Israel, when He brought them out of Egypt? or for David, whom +from a shepherd He made to be king in Judæa? Turn to Him, and acknowledge +thine error—His mercy is infinite. Thine old age shall not prevent thee +from accomplishing any great undertaking. He holds under His sway the +greatest possessions. Abraham had exceeded a hundred years of age when +he begat Isaac; nor was Sarah young. Thou criest out for uncertain help: +answer, who has afflicted thee so much and so often, God or the world? +The privileges promised by God, He never fails in bestowing; nor does +He ever declare, after a service has been rendered Him, that such was +not agreeable with His intention, or that He had regarded the matter in +another light; nor does He inflict suffering, in order to make a show of +His power. His acts answer to His words; and He performs all His promises +with interest. Is this the usual course? Thus I have told you what the +Creator has done for thee, and what He does for all men. Even now He +partially shows thee the reward of so many toils and dangers incurred by +thee in the service of others._” + +I heard all this, as it were, in a trance; but I had no answer to give +in definite words, and could but weep for my errors. He who spoke to +me, whoever he was, concluded by saying,—“_Fear not, but trust; all +these tribulations are recorded on marble, and not without cause._” I +arose as soon as I could; and at the end of nine days there came fine +weather, but not sufficiently so to allow of drawing the vessels out of +the river. I collected the men who were on land, and, in fact, all of +them that I could, because there were not enough to admit of one party +remaining on shore while another stayed on board to work the vessels. I +myself should have remained with my men to defend the buildings I had +constructed, had your Highnesses been cognizant of all the facts; but +the doubt whether any ships would ever reach the spot where we were, as +well as the thought, that while I was asking for succour I might bring +succour to myself, made me decide upon leaving. I departed, in the name +of the Holy Trinity, on Easter night, with the ships rotten, worm-eaten, +and full of holes. One of them I left at Belem, with a supply of +necessaries; I did the same at Belpuerto. I then had only two left, and +they in the same state as the others. I was without boats or provisions, +and in this condition I had to cross seven thousand miles of sea; or, as +an alternative, to die on the passage with my son, my brother, and so +many of my people. Let those who are in the habit of finding fault and +censuring, ask, while they sit in security at home, “Why did you not do +so and so under such circumstances?” I wish they now had this voyage to +make. I verily believe that another journey of another kind awaits them, +if there is any reliance to be placed upon our holy faith. + +On the thirteenth of May I reached the province of Mago,[207] which is +contiguous to that of Cathay, and thence I started for the island of +Española. I sailed two days with a good wind, after which it became +contrary. The route that I followed called forth all my care to avoid the +numerous islands, that I might not be stranded on the shoals that lie +in their neighbourhood. The sea was very tempestuous, and I was driven +backward under bare poles. I anchored at an island, where I lost, at +one stroke, three anchors; and, at midnight, when the weather was such +that the world appeared to be coming to an end, the cables of the other +ship broke, and it came down upon my vessel with such force that it was +a wonder we were not dashed to pieces; the single anchor that remained +to me, was, next to the Lord, our only preservation. After six days, +when the weather became calm, I resumed my journey having already lost +all my tackle; my ships were pierced with worm-holes, like a bee-hive, +and the crew entirely paralysed with fear and in despair. I reached the +island a little beyond the point at which I first arrived at it, and +there I stayed to recover myself from the effects of the storm; but I +afterwards put into a much safer port in the same island. After eight +days I put to sea again, and reached Jamaica by the end of June; but +always beating against contrary winds, and with the ships in the worst +possible condition. With three pumps, and the use of pots and kettles, we +could scarcely with all hands clear the water that came into the ship, +there being no remedy but this for the mischief done by the ship-worm. I +steered in such a manner as to come as near as possible to Española, from +which we were twenty-eight leagues distant, but I afterwards wished I had +not done so, for the other ship which was half under water was obliged +to run in for a port. I determined on keeping the sea in spite of the +weather, and my vessel was on the very point of sinking when our Lord +miraculously brought us upon land. Who will believe what I now write? +I assert that in this letter I have not related one hundredth part of +the wonderful events that occurred in this voyage; those who were with +the Admiral[208] can bear witness to it. If your Highnesses would be +graciously pleased to send to my help a ship of above sixty-four tons, +with two hundred quintals of biscuits and other provisions, there would +then be sufficient to carry me and my crew from Española to Spain. I have +already said that there are not twenty-eight leagues between Jamaica and +Española; and I should not have gone there, even if the ships had been in +a fit condition for so doing, because your Highnesses ordered me not to +land there. God knows if this command has proved of any service. I send +this letter by means of and by the hands of Indians; it will be a miracle +if it reaches its destination. + +This is the account I have to give of my voyage. The men who accompanied +me were a hundred and fifty in number, among whom were many calculated +for pilots and good sailors, but none of them can explain whither I +went nor whence I came. The reason is very simple. I started from a +point above the port of Brazil, and while I was in Española, the storm +prevented me from following my intended route, for I was obliged to go +wherever the wind drove me; at the same time I fell very sick, and there +was no one who had navigated in these parts before. However, after some +days, the wind and sea became tranquil, and the storm was succeeded by +a calm, but accompanied with rapid currents. I put into harbour at an +island called Isla de las Bocas, and then steered for terra firma; but +it is impossible to give a correct account of all our movements, because +I was carried away by the current so many days without seeing land. I +ascertained, however, by the compass and by observation, that I moved +parallel with the coast of terra firma. No one could tell under what +part of the heavens we were, nor at what period I bent my course for +the island of Española. The pilots thought we had come to the island of +St. John, whereas it was the land of Mango, four hundred leagues to the +westward of where they said. Let them answer and say if they know where +Veragua is situated. I assert that they can give no other account than +that they went to lands, where there was an abundance of gold, and this +they can certify surely enough; but they do not know the way to return +thither for such a purpose; they would be obliged to go on a voyage of +discovery as much as if they had never been there before. There is a +mode of reckoning derived from astronomy which is sure and safe, and a +sufficient guide to anyone who understands it. This resembles a prophetic +vision. The Indian vessels do not sail except with the wind abaft, +but this is not because they are badly built or clumsy, but because +the strong currents in those parts, together with the wind, render it +impossible to sail with the bowline,[209] for in one day they would lose +as much way as they might have made in seven; for the same reason I could +make no use of caravels, even though they were Portuguese latteens. This +is the cause that they do not sail unless with a regular breeze, and they +will sometimes stay in harbour waiting for this seven or eight months at +a time; nor is this anything wonderful, for the same very often occurs +in Spain. The nation of which Pope Pius writes[210] has now been found, +judging at least by the situation and other evidences, excepting the +horses with the saddles and poitrels and bridles of gold; but this is not +to be wondered at, for the lands on the sea-coast are only inhabited by +fishermen, and moreover I made no stay there, because I was in haste to +proceed on my voyage. In Cariay and the neighbouring country there are +great enchanters of a very fearful character. They would have given the +world to prevent my remaining there an hour. When I arrived they sent +me immediately two girls very showily dressed; the eldest could not be +more than eleven years of age and the other seven, and both exhibited so +much immodesty, that more could not be expected from public women; they +carried concealed about them a magic powder; when they came I gave them +some articles to dress themselves out with, and directly sent them back +to the shore. I saw here, built on a mountain, a sepulchre as large as a +house, and elaborately sculptured, the body lay uncovered and with the +face downwards; they also spoke to me of other very excellent works of +art. There are many species of animals both small and large, and very +different from those of our country. I had at the time two boars, that +an Irish dog would not dare to face. An archer had wounded an animal +like an ape, except that it was larger, and had a face like a man’s; the +arrow had pierced it from the neck to the tail, which made it so fierce +that they were obliged to disable it by cutting off one of its arms and +a leg; one of the boars grew wild on seeing this and fled; upon which I +ordered the _begare_ (as the inhabitants called him) to be thrown to the +boar, and though the animal was nearly dead, and the arrow had passed +quite through his body, yet he threw his tail round the snout of the +boar, and then holding him firmly, seized him by the nape of the neck +with his remaining hand, as if he were engaged with an enemy. This action +was so novel and so extraordinary, that I have thought it worth while +to describe it here. There is a great variety of animals here, but they +all die of the barra.[211] I saw some very large fowls (the feathers of +which resemble wool), lions, stags, fallow-deer, and birds. + +When we were so harassed with our troubles at sea, some of our men +imagined that we were under the influence of sorcery, and even to this +day entertain the same notion. Some of the people whom I discovered were +cannibals, as was evidenced by the brutality of their countenances. They +say that there are great mines of copper in the country, of which they +make hatchets and other elaborate articles, both cast and soldered; +they also make of it forges, with all the apparatus of the goldsmith, +and crucibles. The inhabitants go clothed; and in that province I saw +some large sheets of cotton very elaborately and cleverly worked, and +others very delicately pencilled in colours. They told me that more +inland towards Cathay they have them interwoven with gold. For want of +an interpreter we were able to learn but very little respecting these +countries, or what they contain. Although the country is very thickly +peopled, yet each nation has a very different language; indeed so much +so, that they can no more understand each other than we understand the +Arabs. I think, however, that this applies to the barbarians on the +sea-coast, and not to the people who live more inland. When I discovered +the Indies, I said that they composed the richest lordship in the world; +I spoke of gold and pearls and precious stones, of spices, and the +traffic that might be carried on in them; and because all these things +were not forthcoming at once I was abused. This punishment causes me to +refrain from relating anything but what the natives tell me. One thing +I can venture upon stating, because there are so many witnesses of it, +viz., that in this land of Veragua I saw more signs of gold in the two +first days than I saw in Española during four years, and that there is +not a more fertile or better cultivated country in all the world, nor +one whose inhabitants are more timid; added to which there is a good +harbour, a beautiful river, and the whole place is capable of being +easily put into a state of defence. All this tends to the security of the +Christians, and the permanency of their sovereignty, while it affords the +hope of great increase and honour to the Christian religion; moreover +the road hither will be as short as that to Española, because there is a +certainty of a fair wind for the passage. Your Highnesses are as much +lords of this country as of Xeres or Toledo, and your ships that may +come here will do so with the same freedom as if they were going to your +own royal palace. From hence they will obtain gold, and whereas if they +should wish to become masters of the products of other lands, they will +have to take them by force, or retire empty-handed, in this country they +will simply have to trust their persons in the hands of a savage. + +I have already explained my reason for refraining to treat of other +subjects respecting which I might speak. I do not state as certain, nor +do I confirm even the sixth part of all that I have said or written, +nor do I pretend to be at the fountain-head of the information. The +Genoese, Venetians, and all other nations that possess pearls, precious +stones, and other articles of value, take them to the ends of the world +to exchange them for gold. Gold is the most precious of all commodities; +gold constitutes treasure, and he who possesses it has all he needs in +this world, as also the means of rescuing souls from purgatory, and +restoring them to the enjoyment of paradise. They say that when one of +the lords of the country of Veragua dies, they bury all the gold he +possessed with his body. There were brought to Solomon at one journey +six hundred and sixty-six quintals of gold, besides what the merchants +and sailors brought, and that which was paid in Arabia. Of this gold he +made two hundred lances and three hundred shields, and the entablature +which was above them was also of gold, and ornamented with precious +stones: many other things he made likewise of gold, and a great number of +vessels of great size, which he enriched with precious stones. This is +related by Josephus in his Chronicle “de Antiquitatibus”; mention is also +made of it in the Chronicles and in the Book of Kings. Josephus thinks +that this gold was found in the Aurea; if it were so, I contend that +these mines of the Aurea are identical with those of Veragua, which, as +I have said before, extends westward twenty days’ journey, at an equal +distance from the Pole and the Line. Solomon bought all of it,—gold, +precious stones, and silver,—but your Majesties need only send to seek +them to have them at your pleasure. David, in his will, left three +thousand quintals of Indian gold to Solomon, to assist in building the +Temple; and, according to Josephus, it came from these lands. Jerusalem +and Mount Sion are to be rebuilt by the hands of Christians, as God has +declared by the mouth of His prophet in the fourteenth Psalm. The Abbé +Joaquim said that he who should do this was to come from Spain; Saint +Jerome showed the holy woman the way to accomplish it; and the emperor +of Cathay has, some time since, sent for wise men to instruct him in +the faith of Christ. Who will offer himself for this work? Should any +one do so, I pledge myself, in the name of God, to convey him safely +thither, provided the Lord permits me to return to Spain. The people who +have sailed with me have passed through incredible toil and danger, and +I beseech your Highnesses, since they are poor, to pay them promptly, +and to be gracious to each of them according to their respective merits; +for I can safely assert, that to my belief they are the bearers of the +best news that ever were carried to Spain. With respect to the gold +which belongs to Quibian, the cacique of Veragua, and other chiefs in +the neighbouring country, although it appears by the accounts we have +received of it to be very abundant, I do not think it would be well or +desirable, on the part of your Highnesses, to take possession of it +in the way of plunder; by fair dealing, scandal and disrepute will be +avoided, and all the gold will thus reach your Highnesses’ treasury +without the loss of a grain. With one month of fair weather I shall +complete my voyage. As I was deficient in ships, I did not persist in +delaying my course; but in everything that concerns your Highnesses’ +service, I trust in Him who made me, and I hope also that my health will +be re-established. I think your Highnesses will remember that I had +intended to build some ships in a new manner, but the shortness of the +time did not permit it. I had certainly foreseen how things would be. I +think more of this opening for commerce, and of the lordship over such +extensive mines, than of all that has been done in the Indies. This is +not a child to be left to the care of a step-mother. + +I never think of Española, and Paria, and the other countries, without +shedding tears. I thought that what had occurred there would have been +an example for others; on the contrary, these settlements are now in a +languid state, although not dead, and the malady is incurable, or at +least very extensive: let him who brought the evil come now and cure +it, if he knows the remedy, or how to apply it; but when a disturbance +is on foot, every one is ready to take the lead. It used to be the +custom to give thanks and promotion to him who placed his person in +jeopardy; but there is no justice in allowing the man who opposed this +undertaking, to enjoy the fruits of it with his children. Those who +left the Indies, avoiding the toils consequent upon the enterprise, +and speaking evil of it and me, have since returned with official +appointments,—such is the case now in Veragua: it is an evil example, and +profitless both as regards the business in which we are embarked, and +as respects the general maintenance of justice. The fear of this, with +other sufficient considerations, which I clearly foresaw, caused me to +beg your Highnesses, previously to my coming to discover these islands +and terra firma, to grant me permission to govern in your royal name. +Your Highnesses granted my request; and it was a privilege and treaty +granted under the royal seal and oath, by which I was nominated viceroy, +and admiral, and governor-general of all: and your Highnesses limited the +extent of my government to a hundred leagues beyond the Azores and Cape +Verde islands, by a line passing from one pole to the other, and gave me +ample power over all that I might discover beyond this line; all which +is more fully described in the official document. + +But the most important affair of all, and that which cries most loudly +for redress, remains inexplicable to this moment. For seven years was +I at your royal court, where every one to whom the enterprise was +mentioned, treated it as ridiculous; but now there is not a man, down to +the very tailors, who does not beg to be allowed to become a discoverer. +There is reason to believe, that they make the voyage only for plunder, +and that they are permitted to do so, to the great disparagement of my +honour, and the detriment of the undertaking itself. It is right to give +God His due,—and to receive that which belongs to one’s self. This is a +just sentiment, and proceeds from just feelings. The lands in this part +of the world, which are now under your Highnesses’ sway, are richer and +more extensive than those of any other Christian power, and yet, after +that I had, by the Divine will, placed them under your high and royal +sovereignty, and was on the point of bringing your majesties into the +receipt of a very great and unexpected revenue; and while I was waiting +for ships, to convey me in safety, and with a heart full of joy, to your +royal presence, victoriously to announce the news of the gold that I +had discovered, I was arrested and thrown, with my two brothers, loaded +with irons, into a ship, stripped, and very ill-treated, without being +allowed any appeal to justice. Who could believe, that a poor foreigner +would have risen against your Highnesses, in such a place, without any +motive or argument on his side; without even the assistance of any other +prince upon which to rely; but on the contrary, amongst your own vassals +and natural subjects, and with my sons staying at your royal court? I was +twenty-eight years old[212] when I came into your Highnesses’ service, +and now I have not a hair upon me that is not grey; my body is infirm, +and all that was left to me, as well as to my brothers, has been taken +away and sold, even to the frock that I wore, to my great dishonour. I +cannot but believe that this was done without your royal permission. +The restitution of my honour, the reparation of my losses, and the +punishment of those who have inflicted them, will redound to the honour +of your royal character; a similar punishment also is due to those who +plundered me of my pearls, and who have brought a disparagement upon +the privileges of my admiralty. Great and unexampled will be the glory +and fame of your Highnesses, if you do this, and the memory of your +Highnesses, as just and grateful sovereigns, will survive as a bright +example to Spain in future ages. The honest devotedness I have always +shown to your majesties’ service, and the so unmerited outrage with which +it has been repaid, will not allow my soul to keep silence, however much +I may wish it: I implore your Highnesses to forgive my complaints. I am +indeed in as ruined a condition as I have related; hitherto I have wept +over others;—may Heaven now have mercy upon me, and may the earth weep +for me. With regard to temporal things, I have not even a blanca for an +offering; and in spiritual things, I have ceased here in the Indies from +observing the prescribed forms of religion. Solitary in my trouble, sick, +and in daily expectation of death, surrounded by millions of hostile +savages full of cruelty, and thus separated from the blessed sacraments +of our holy Church, how will my soul be forgotten if it be separated from +the body in this foreign land? Weep for me, whoever has charity, truth, +and justice! I did not come out on this voyage to gain to myself honour +or wealth; this is a certain fact, for at that time all hope of such a +thing was dead. I do not lie when I say that I went to your Highnesses +with honest purpose of heart, and sincere zeal in your cause. I humbly +beseech your Highnesses, that if it please God to rescue me from this +place, you will graciously sanction my pilgrimage to Rome and other holy +places. May the Holy Trinity protect your Highnesses’ lives, and add to +the prosperity of your exalted position. + +Done in the Indies, in the island of Jamaica, on the seventh of July, in +the year one thousand five hundred and three. + + +CUARTO VIAGE DE COLON. + +_Carta que escribió D. Cristóbal Colon, Virey y Almirante de las Indias, +á los Cristianísimos y muy poderosos Rey y Reina de España, nuestros +Señores, en que les notifica cuanto le ha acontecido en su viage; y las +tierras, provincias, ciudades, rios y otras cosas maravillosas, y donde +hay minas de oro en mucha cantidad, y otras cosas de gran riqueza y +valor._ + +Serenísimos y muy altos y poderosos Príncipes Rey é Reina, nuestros +Señores: De Caliz pasé á Canaria en cuatro dias, y dende á las Indias en +diez y seis dias, donde escribia. Mi intencion era dar prisa á mi viage +en cuanto yo tenia los navíos buenos, la gente y los bastimentos, y que +mi derrota era en el Isla Jamaica; y en la Isla Dominica escribí esto: +fasta allí truje el tiempo á pedir por la boca. Esa noche que alli entré +fué con tormenta y grande, y me persiguió despues siempre. Cuando llegué +sobre la Española invié el envoltorio de cartas, y á pedir por merced un +navío por mis dineros, porque otro que yo llevaba era inavegable y no +sufria velas. Las cartas tomaron, y sabrán si se las dieron la respuesta. +Para mí fué mandarme de parte de ahí, que yo no pasase ni llegase á la +tierra: cayó el corazon á la gente que iba conmigo, por temor de los +llevar yo lejos, diciendo que si algun caso de peligro les viniese que +no serian remediados allí, antes les sería fecha alguna grande afrenta. +Tambien á quien plugo dijo que el Comendador habia de proveer las tierras +que yo ganase. La tormenta era terrible, y en aquella noche me desmembró +los navíos: á cada uno llevó por su cabo sin esperanzas, salvo de +muerte: cada uno de ellos tenia por cierto que los otros eran perdidos. +¿Quién nasció, sin quitar á Job, que no muriera desesperado? que por mi +salvacion y de mi fijo, hermano y amigos me fuese en tal tiempo defendida +la tierra y los puertos que yo, por la voluntad de Dios, gané á España +sudando sangre? E torno á los navíos que así me habia llevado la tormenta +y dejado á mí solo. Deparómelos nuestro Señor cuando le plugo. El navío +Sospechoso habia echado á la mar, por escapar, fasta la isola la Gallega; +perdió la barca, y todos gran parte de los bastimentos: en el que yo +iba, abalumado á maravilla, nuestro Señor le salvó que no hubo daño de +una paja. En el Sospechoso iba mi hermano; y él, despues de Dios, fue +su remedio. E con esta tormenta, así a gatas, me llegué á Jamaica: allí +se mudó de mar alta on calmería y grande corriente, y me llevó fasta +el Jardin de la Reina sin ver tierra. De allí, cuando pude, navegué +á la tierra firme; adonde me salió el viento y corriente terrible al +opósito: combati con ellos sesenta dias, y en fin no le pude ganar mas +de setenta leguas. En todo este tiempo no entré puerto, ni pude, ni me +dejó tormenta del cielo, agua y trombones y relámpagos de continuo, que +parecia el fin del mundo. Llegué al cabo de Gracias á Dios, y de allí +me dió nuestro Señor próspero el viento y corriente. Esto fue á doce de +Setiembre. Ochenta y ocho dias habia que no me habia dejado espantable +tormenta, á tanto que no vide el sol ni estrellas por mar; que á los +navíos tenia yo abiertos, á las velas rotas, y perdidas anclas y jarcia, +cables, con las barcas y muchos bastimentos, la gento muy enferma, y +todos contritos, y muchos con promesa de religion, y no ninguno sin otros +votos y romerías. Muchas veces habian llegado á se confesar los unos +á los otros. Otras tormentas se han visto, mas no durar tanto ni con +tanto espanto. Muchos esmorecieron, harto y hartas veces, que teniamos +por esforzados. El dolor del fijo que yo tenia allí me arrancaba el +ánima, y mas por verle de tan nueva edad de trece años en tanta fatiga, +y durar en ello tanto: nuestro Señor le dió tal esfuerzo que él avivaba +á los otros, y en las obras hacia el como si hubiera navegado ochenta +años, y él me consolaba. Yo habia adolescido y llegado fartas veces á +la muerte. De una camarilla, que yo mandé facer sobre cubierta, mandaba +la via. Mi hermano estaba en el peor navío y mas peligroso. Gran dolor +era mio, y mayor porque lo truje contra su grado; porque por mi dicha, +poco me han aprovechado veinte años de servicio que yo he servido con +tantos trabajos y peligros, que hoy dia no tengo en Castilla una teja; +si quiero comer ó dormir no tengo, salvo al meson ó taberna, y las mas +de las veces falta parar pagar el escote. Otra lastima me arrancaba el +corazon por las espaldas, y era D. Diego mi hijo, que yo dejé en España +tan huérfano y desposesionado de mi honra é hacienda; bien que tenia por +cierto que allá como justos y agradecidos Principes le restituirian con +acrescentamiento en todo. Llegué á tierra de Cariay, adonde me detuve +á remediar los navíos y bastimentos, y dar aliento á la gente, que +venia muy enferma. Yo que, como dije, habia llegado muchas veces á la +muerte, allí supe de las minas del oro de la provincia de Ciamba, que +yo buscaba. Dos indios me llevaron á Carambaru, adonde la gente anda +desnuda y al cuello un espejo de oro, mas no le querian vender ni dar á +trueque. Nombraronme muchos lugares en la costa de la mar, adonde decian +que habia oro y minas; el postrero era Veragua, y lejos de allí obra +de veinte y cinco leguas: partí con intencion de los tentar á todos, y +llegado ya el medio supe que habia minas á dos jornadas de andadura: +acorde de inviarlas á ver vispera de San Simon y Judas, que habia de ser +la partida: en esa noche se levantó tanta mar y viento, que fue necesario +de correr hácia adonde él quiso; é el indio adalid de las minas siempre +conmigo. En todos estos lugares, adonde yo habia estado, fallé verdad +todo lo que yo habia oido: esto me certifico que es así de la provincia +de Ciguare, que segun ellos, es descrita nueve jornadas de andadura por +tierra al Poniente: allí dicen que hay infinito oro, y que traen corales +en las cabezas, manillas á los pies y á los brazos dello, y bien gordas; +y dél, sillas, arcas, y mesas las guarnecen y enforran. Tambien dijeron +que las mugeres de allí traian collares colgados de la cabeza á las +espaldas. En esto que yo dijo, la gente toda de estos lugares conciertan +en ello, y dicen tanto que yo seria contento con el diezmo. Tambien todos +conocieron la pimienta. En Ciguare usan tratar en ferias y mercaderías: +esta gente así lo cuentan, y me amostraban el modo y forma que tienen en +la barata. Otrosi dicen que las naos traen bombardas, arcos y fiechas, +espadas y corazas, y andan vestidos, y en la tierra hay caballos, y usan +la guerra, y traen ricas vestiduras, y tienen buenas cosas. Tambien +dicen que la mar boxa á Ciguare, y de allí á diez jornadas es el rio de +Gangnes. Parece que estas tierras estan con Veragua, como Tortosa con +Fuenterabía, ó Pisa con Venecia. Cuando yo partí de Carambaru y llegué +á esos lugares que dije, fallé la gente en aquel mismo uso, salvo que +los espejos del oro: quien los tenia los daba por tres cascabeles de +gabilan por el uno, bien que pesasan diez ó quince ducados de peso. +En todos sus usos son como los de la Española. El oro cogen con otras +artes, bien que todos son nada con los de los Cristianos. Esto que yo +he dicho es lo que oyo. Lo que yo sé es que el año de noventa y cuatro +navegué en veinte y cuatro grados al Poniente en término de nueve horas, +y no pudo haber yerro porque hubo eclipses: el sol estaba en Libra y la +luna en Ariete. Tambien esto que yo supe por palabra habialo yo sabido +largo por escrito. Tolomeo creyó de haber bien remedado á Marino, y +ahora se falla su escritura bien propincua al cierto. Tolomeo asienta +Catigara á doce lineas lejos de su Occidente, que él asentó sobre el +cabo de San Vicente en Portugal dos grados y un tercio. Marino en quince +líneas constituyó la tierra é términos. Marino en Etiopia escribe al +Indo la línea equinocial mas de veinte y cuatro grados, y ahora que los +Portugueses le navegan le fallan cierto. Tolomeo diz que la tierra mas +austral es el plazo primero, y que no abaja mas de quince grados y un +tercio. E el mundo es poco: el enjuto de ello es seis partes, la séptima +solamente cubierta de agua: la experiencia ya está vista, y la escribí +por otras letras y con adornamiento de la Sacra Escriptura con el sitio +del Paraiso terrenal, que la santa Iglesia aprueba: digo que el mundo no +es tan grande como dice el vulgo, y que un grado de la equinoccial está +cincuenta y seis millas y dos tercios: pero esto se tocará con el dedo. +Dejo esto, por cuanto no es mi propósito de fablar en aquella materia, +salvo de dar cuenta de mi duro y trabajoso viage, bien que él sea el mas +noble y provechoso. Digo que víspera de San Simon y Judas corrí donde el +viento me llevaba, sin poder resistirle. En un puerto excusé diez dias de +gran fortuna de la mar y del cielo: allí acordé de no volver atras á las +minas, y dejelas ya por ganadas. Partí, por seguir mi viage, lloviendo: +llegué á puerto de Bastimentos, adonde entré y no de grado: la tormenta y +gran corriente me entró allí catorce dias; y despues partí, y no con buen +tiempo. Cuando yo hube andado quince leguas forzosamente, me reposó atras +el viento y corriente con furia: volviendo yo al puerto de donde habia +salido fallé en el camino al Retrete, adonde me retruje con harto peligro +y enojo y bien fatigado yo y los navíos y la gente: detúveme allí quince +dias, que así lo quiso el cruel tiempo; y cuando creí de haber acabado +me fallé de comienzo: allí mudé de sentencia de volver á las minas, y +hacer algo fasta que me viniese tiempo para mi viage y marear; y llegado +con cuatro leguas revino la tormenta, y me fatigó tanto á tanto que ya +no sabia de mi parte. Allí se me refrescó del mal la llaga: nueve dias +anduve perdido sin esperanza de vida: ojos nunca vieron la mar tan alta, +fea y hecha espuma. El viento no era para ir adelante, ni daba lugar para +correr hácia algun cabo. Allí me detenia en aquella mar fecha sangre, +herbiendo como caldera por gran fuego. El cielo jamas fue visto tan +espantoso: un dia con la noche ardió como forno: y así echaba la llama +con los rayos, que cada vez miraba yo si me habia llevado los masteles +y velas; venian con tanta furia espantables que todos creiamos que me +habian de fundir los navíos. En todo este tiempo jamas cesó agua del +cielo, y no para decir que llovia, salvo que resegundaba otro diluvio. La +gente estaba ya tan molida que deseaban la muerte para salir de tantos +martirios. Los navíos ya habian perdido dos veces las barcas, anclas, +cuerdas, y estaban abiertos, sin velas. + +Cuando plugo á nuestro Señor volví á Puerto Gordo, adonde reparé lo +mejor que pude. Volví otra vez hácia Veragua para mi viage, aunque yo +no estuviera para ello. Todavía era el viento y corrientes contrarios. +Llegué casi adonde antes, y allí me salió otra vez el viento y corrientes +al encuentro, y volví otra vez al puerto, que no osé esparar la oposicion +de Saturno con mares tan desbaratados en costa brava, porque las mas de +las veces trae tempestad ó fuerte tiempo. Esto fue dia de Navidad en +horas de misa. Volví otra vez adonde yo habia salido con harta fatiga; +y pasado año nuevo torné á la porfia, que aunque me hiciera buen tiempo +para mi viage, ya tenia los navíos innavegables, y la gente muerta y +enferma. Dia de la Epifania llegué á Veragua, ya sin aliento: allí me +deparó nuestro Señor un rio y seguro puerto, bien que á la entrada +no tenia salvo diez palmos de fondo: metíme en él con pena, y el dia +siguiente recordó la fortuna: si me falla fuera, no pudiera entrar á +causa del banco. Llovió sin cesar fasta catorce de Febrero, que nunca +hubo lugar de entrar en la tierra, ni de me remediar en nada: y estando +ya seguro á veinte y cuatro de Enero, de improviso vino el rio muy alto +y fuerte; quebróme las amarras y proeses, y hubo de llevar los navíos, +y cierto los ví en mayor peligro que nunca. Remedió nuestro Señor, como +siempre hizo. No sé si hubo otro con mas martirios. + +A seis de Febrero, lloviendo, invié setenta hombres la tierra adentro; y +á las cinco leguas fallaron muchas minas: los Indios que iban con ellos +los llevaron á un cerro muy alto, y de allí les mostraron hácia toda +parte cuanto los ojos alcanzaban, diciendo que en toda parte habia oro, +y que hácia el Poniente llegaban las minas veinte jornadas, y nombraban +las villas y lugares, y adonde habia de ello mas ó menos. Despues supe +yo que el Quibian que habia dado estos Indios, les habia mandado que +fuesen á mostrar las minas lejos y de otro su contrario; y que adentro +de su pueblo cogian, cuando el queria, un hombre en diez dias una mozada +de oro: los indios sus criados y testigos de esto traigo conmigo. Adonde +él tiene el pueblo llegan las barcas. Volvió mi hermano con esa gente, y +todos con oro que habian cogido en cuatro horas qué fué allá á la estada. +La calidad es grande, porque ninguno de estos jamas habia visto minas, +y los mas oro. Los mas eran gente de la mar, y casí todos grumetes. Yo +tenia mucho aparejo para edificar y muchos bastimentos. Asenté pueblo, +y dí muchas dádivas al Quibian, que así llaman al Señor de la tierra; +y bien sabia que no habia de durar la concordia: ellos muy rústicos y +nuestra gente muy importunos, y me aposesionaba en su término: despues +que él vido las cosas fechas y el tráfago tan vivo acordó de las quemar +y matarnos á todos: muy al reves salió su propósito: quedó preso él, +mugeres y fijos y criados; bien que su prision duró poco: el Quibian +se fuyo á un hombre honrado, á quien se habia entregado con guarda de +hombres; é los hijos se fueron á un Maestre de navío, a quien se dieron +en él á buen recaudo. + +En Enero se habia cerrado la boca del rio. En Abril los navíos estaban +todos comidos de broma, y no los podia sostener sobre agua. En este +tiempo hizo el rio una canal, por donde saqué tres dellos vacios con gran +pena. Las barcas volvieron adentro por la sal y agua. La mar se puso +alta y fea, y no les dejó salir fuera: los Indios fueron muchos y juntos +y las combatieron, y en fin los mataron. Mi hermano y la otra gente +toda estaban en un navío que quedo adentro: yo muy solo de fuera en tan +brava costa, con fuerte fiebre, en tanta fatiga: la esperanza de escapar +era muerta: subi así trabajando lo mas alto, llamando á voz temerosa, +llorando y muy aprisa, los maestros de la guerra de vuestras Altezas, +á todos cuatro los vientos, por socorro; mas nunca me respondieron. +Cansado, me dormecí gimiendo: una voz muy piadosa oí, diciendo: “_¡O +estulto y tardo á creer y servir á tu Dios, Dios de todos! ¿Que hizo él +mas por Moysés ó por David su siervo? Desque nasciste, siempre él tuvo +de tí muy grande cargo. Cuando te vido en edad de que él fue contento, +maravillosamente hizo sonar tu nombre en la tierra. Las Indias, que +son parte del mundo tam ricas, te las dió por tuyas: tu las repartiste +adonde te plugo, y te dió poder para ello. De los atamientos de la mar +océana, que estaban cerrados con cadenas tan fuertes, te dió las llaves; +y fuiste obedescido en tantas tierras, y de los cristianos cobraste tan +honrada fama. ¿Qué hizo el mas Alto [por el] pueblo de Israel cuando le +sacó de Egipto? ¿Ni por David, que de pastor hizo Rey en Judea? Tórnate +á el, y conoce ya tu yerro: su misericordia es infinita: tu vejez no +impedirá á toda cosa grande: muchas heredades tiene él grandísimas. +Abrahan pasaba de cien años cuando engendró á Isaac, ¿ni Sara era moza? +Tú llamas por socorro incierto: responde, ¿quién te ha afligido tanto y +tantas veces, Dios ó el mundo? Los privilegios y promesas que dá Dios, +no las quebranta, ni dice despues de haber recibido el servicio, que su +intencion no era este, y que se entiende de otra manera, ni dá martirios +por dar color á la fuerza: él vá al pie de la letra: todo lo que él +promete cumple con acrescentamiento: ¿esto es uso? Dicho tengo lo que tu +Criador ha fecho por tí y hace con todos. Ahora medio muestra el galardon +áe estos afanes y peligros que has pasado sirviendo á otros._” + +Yo así amortecido oí todo; mas no tuve yo respuesta á palabras tan +ciertas, salvo llorar por mis yerros. Acabó él de fablar, quien quiera +que fuese, diciendo: “_No temas, confia: todas estas tribulaciones estan +escritas en piedra mármol, y no sin causa._” + +Levantéme cuando pude: y al cabo de nueve dias hizo bonanza, mas no +para sacar navíos del rio. Recogí la gente que estaba en tierra, y todo +el resto que puede, porque no bastaban para quedar y para navegar los +navíos. Quedara yo á sostener el pueblo contodos, si vuestras Altezas +supieran de ello. El temor que nunca aportarian allí navíos me determinó +á esto, y la cuenta que cuando se haya de proveer de socorro se proveera +de todo. Partí en nombre de la Santísima Trinidad, la noche de Pascua, +con los navíos podridos, abrumados, todos fechos agujeros. Allí en Belen +dejé uno, y hartas cosas. En Belpuerto hice otro tanto. No me quedaron +salvo dos en el estado de los otros, y sin barcas y bastimentos, por +haber de pasar siete mil millas de mar y de agua, ó morir en la via con +fijo y hermano y tanta gente. Respondan ahora los que suelen tachar y +reprender, diciendo allá de en salvo: ¿por qué no haciades esto allí? +Los quisiera yo en esta jornada. Yo bien creo que otra de otro saber los +aguarda: á nuestra fe es ninguna. Llegué á trece de Mayo en la provincia +de Mago, que parte con aquella del Catayo, y de allí partí para la +Española: navegué dos dias con buen tiempo, y despues fue contrario. +El camino que yo llevaba era para desechar tanto número de islas, por +no me embarazar en los bajos de ellas. La mar brava me hizo fuerza, y +hube volver atras sin velas: surgí á una isla adonde de golpe perdí tres +anclas, y á la media noche, que parecia que el mundo se ensolvia, se +rompieron las amarras al otro navío, y vino sobre mí, que fue maravilla +como no nos acabamos de se hacer rajas: el ancla, de forma que me quedó, +fue ella despues de nuestro Señor, quien me sostuvo. Al cabo de seis +dias que ya era bonanza, volví á mi camino: asi ya perdido del todo +de aparejos y con los navíos horadados de gusanos mas que un panal de +abejas, y la gente tan acobardada y perdida, pasé algo adelante de donde +yo habia llegado denantes: allí me torné á reposar atras la fortuna: paré +en la misma isla en mas seguro puerto: al cabo de ocho dias torné á la +via y llegué á Jamaica en fin de Junio siempre con vientos punteros, y +los navíos en peor estado: con tres bombas, tinas y calderas no podian +con toda la gente vencer el agua que entraba en el navío, ni para este +mal de broma hay otra cura. Cometí el camino para me acercar á lo mas +cercar de la Española, que son veinte y ocho leguas, y no quisiera +haber comenzado. El otro navío corrió á buscar puerto casi anegado. +Yo porfié la vuelta de la mar con tormenta. El navio se me anegó, que +milagrosamente me trujo nuestro Señor á tierra. ¿Quién creyera lo que +yo aquí escribo? Digo que de cien partes no he dicho la una en esta +letra. Los que fueron con el Almirante lo atestigüen. Si place á vuestras +Altezas de me hacer merced de socorro un navío que pase de sesenta y +cuatro, con ducientos quintales de bizcocho y algun otro bastimento, +abastará para me llevar á mí y á esta gente á España de la Española. En +Jamaica ya dije que no hay veinte y ocho leguas á la Española. No fuera +yo, bien que los navíos estuvieran para ello. Ya dije que me fue mandado +de parte de vuestras Altezas que no llegase á alla. Si este mandar ha +aprovechado, Dios lo sabe. Esta carta invio por via y mano de Indios: +grande maravilla será si allá llega. De mi viage digo: que fueron ciento +y cincuenta personas conmigo, en que hay hartos suficientes para pilotos +y grandes marineros: ninguno puede dar razon cierta por donde fuí yo ni +vine: la razon es muy presta. Yo partí de sobre el puerto del Brasil: +en la Española no me dejó la tormenta ir al camino que yo queria: fue +por fuerza correr adonde el viento quiso. En ese dia caí yo muy enfermo: +ninguno habia navegado hácia aquella parte: cesó el viento y mar dende +á ciertos dias, y se mudó la tormenta en calmería y grandes corrientes. +Fuí á aportar á una isla que se dijo de las Bocas, y de allí a Tierra +firme. Ninguno puede dar cuenta verdadera de esto, porque no hay razon +que abaste; porque fue ir con corriente sin ver tierra tanto número de +dias. Seguí la costa de la Tierra firme: esta se asentó con compás y +arte. Ninguno hay que diga debajo cuál parte del cielo ó cuándo yo partí +de ella para venir á la Española. Los pilotos creian venir á parar á la +isla de Sanct-Joan; y fue en tierra de Mango, cuatrocientas leguas mas +al Poniente de adonde decian. Respondan, si saben, adónde es el sitio de +Veragua. Digo que no pueden dar otra razon ni cuenta, salvo que fueron +á unas tierras adonde hay mucho oro, y certificarle; mas para volver á +ella el camino tienen ignoto: seria necesario para ir á ella descubrirla +como de primero. Una cuenta hay y razon de astrología y cierta: quien la +entiende esto le abasta. A vision profética se asemeja esto. Las naos +de las Indias, si no navegan salvo á popa, no es por la mala fechura, +ni por ser fuertes; las grandes corrientes que allí vienen; juntamente +con el viento hacen que nadie porfie con bolina, porque en un dia +perderian lo que hubiesen ganado en siete; ni saco carabela aunque sea +latina portuguesa. Esta razon hace que no naveguen, salvo con colla, +y por esperarle se detienen á las veces seis y ocho meses en puerto; +ni es maravilla, pues que en España muchas veces acaece otro tanto. La +gente de que escribe Papa Pio, segun el sitio y señas, se ha hallado, +mas no los caballos, pretales y frenos de oro, ni es maravilla, porque +allí las tierras de la costa de la mar no reuieren, salvo pescadores, ni +yo me detuve porque andaba á prisa. En Cariay y en essas tierras de su +comarca, son grandes fechiceros y muy medrosos. Dieran el mundo porque +no me detuviera allí una hora. Cuando llegué allí luego me inviaron dos +muchachas muy ataviadas: la mas vieja no seria de once años y la otra de +siete; ambas con tanta desenvoltura que no serian mas unas putas: traian +polvos de hechizos escondidos: en llegando las mandé adornar de nuestras +cosas y las invié luego á tierra: allí vide una sepultura en el monte, +grande como una casa y labrada, y el cuerpo descubierto y mirando en +ella. De otras artes me dijeron y mas excelentes. Animalias menudas y +grandes hay hartas y muy diversas de las nuestras. Dos puercos hube yo en +presente, y un perro de Irlanda no osaba esperarlos. Un ballestero habia +herido una animalia, que se parece á gato paul, salvo que es mucho mas +grande, y el rostro de hombre: teniale atravesado con una saeta desde +los pechos á la cola, y porque era feroz le hubo de cortar un brazo y +una pierna: el puerco en viéndole se le encrespó y se fue huyendo: yo +cuando esto ví mandé echarle _begare_, que así se llama adonde estaba: en +llegando á él, así estando á la muerte y la saeta siempre en el cuerpo, +le echó la cola por el hocico y se la amarró muy fuerte, y con la mano +que le quedaba le arrebató por el copete como á enemigo. El auto tan +nuevo y hermosa montería me hizo escribir esto. De muchas maneras de +animalias se hubo, mas todas mueren de barra. Gallinas muy grandes y la +pluma como lana vide hartas. Leones, ciervos, corzos otro tanto, y así +aves. + +Cuando yo andaba por aquella mar en fatiga en algunos se puso heregía +que estabamos enfechizados, que hoy dia estan en ello. Otra gente fallé +que comian hombres: la desformidad de su gesto lo dice. Allí dicen qué +hay grandes mineros de cobre: hachas de ello, otras cosas labradas, +fundidas, soladas hube, y fraguas con todo su aparejo de platero y +los crisoles. Allí van vestidos; y en aquella provincia vide sábanas +grandes de algodon, labradas de muy sotiles labores; otras píntadas muy +sútilmente á colores con pinceles. Dicen que en la tierra adentro hácia +el Catayo las hay tejidas de oro. De todas estas tierras y de lo que hay +en ellas, falta de lengua, no se saben tan presto. Los pueblos, bien +que sean espesos, cada uno tiene diferenciada lengua, y es en tanto que +no se entienden los unos con los otros, mas que nos con los de Arabia. +Yo creo que esto sea en esta gente salvage de la costa de la mar, mas +no en la tierra dentro. Cuando yo descubrí las Indias dije que eran el +mayor señorío rico que hay en el mundo. Yo dije del oro, perlas, piedras +preciosas, especerías, con los tratos y ferias, y porque no pareció todo +tan presto fuí escandalizado. Este castigo me hace agora que no diga +salvo lo que yo oigo de los naturales de la tierra. De una oso decir, +porque hay tantos testigos, y es que yo vide en esta tierra de Veragua +mayor señal de oro en dos dias primeros que en la Española en cuatro +años, y que las tierras de la comarca no pueden ser mas fermosas, ni +mas labradas, ni la gente mas cobarde, y buen puerto, y fermoso rio, y +defensible al mundo. Todo esto es seguridad de los cristianos y certeza +de señorío, con grande esperanza de la honra y acrescentamiento de la +religion cristiana; y el camino, allí será tan breve como á la Española, +porque ha de ser con viento. Tan señores son vuestras Altezas de esto +como de Jerez ó Toledo: sus navíos que fueren allí van á su casa. De +allí sacarán oro: en otras tierras, para haber de lo que hay en ellas, +conviene que se lo lleven, ó se volverán vacíos; y en la tierra es +necesario que fien sus personas de un salvage. Del otro que yo dejo de +decir, ya dije por qué me encerré: no digo así, ni que yo me afirme en +el tres doble en todo lo que yo haya jamas dicho ni escrito, y que yo +estó a la fuente. Genoveses, Venecianos y toda gente que tenga perlas, +piedras preciosas y otras cosas de valor, todos las llevan hasta el cabo +del mundo para las trocar, convertir en oro: el oro es excelentísimo: +del oro se hace tesoro, y con él, quien lo tiene, hace cuanto quiere +en el mundo, y llega á que echa las animas al paraiso. Los señores de +aquellas tierras de la comarca Veragua cuando mueren entierran el oro +que tienen con el cuerpo, así lo dicen: á Salomon llevaron de un camino +seiscientos y sesenta y seis quintales de oro, allende lo que llevaron +los mercaderes y marineros, y allende lo que se pagó en Arabia. De este +oro fizo doscientas lanzas y trescientos escudos, y fizo el tablado que +habia de estar arriba dellas de oro y adornado de piedras preciosas, y +fizo otras muchas cosas de oro, y vasos muchos y muy grandes y ricos de +piedras preciosas. Josefo en su corónica de Antiquitatibus lo escribe. +En el Paralipomenon y en el libro de los Reyes se cuenta de esto. Josefo +quiere que este oro se hobiese en la Aurea: si así fuese digo que +aquellas minas de la Aurea son unas y se convienen con estas de Veragua, +que como yo dije arriba se alarga al Poniente veinte jornadas, y son en +una distancia lejos del polo y de la línea. Salomon compró todo aquello, +oro, piedras y plata, é allí le pueden mandar á coger si les aplace. +David en su testamento dejó tres mil quintales de oro de las Indías á +Salomon para ayuda de edificar el templo, y segun Josefo era el destas +mismas tierras. Hierusalem y el monte Sion ha de ser reedificado por mano +de cristianos: quien ha de ser, Dios por boca del Profeta en el décimo +cuarto salmo lo dice. El Abad Joaquin dijo que este habia de salir de +España. San Gerónimo á la santa muger le mostró el camino para ello. El +Emperador del Catayo ha dias que mandó sabios que le enseñen en la fé +de Cristo. ¿Quién será que se ofrezca á esto? Si nuestro Señor me lleva +á España, yo me obligo de llevarle, con el nombre de Dios, en salvo. +Esta gente que vino conmigo han pasado increibles peligros y trabajos. +Suplico á V. A., porque son pobres, que les mande pagar luego, y les haga +mercedes á cada uno segun la calidad de la persona, que les certifico +que á mi creer les traen las mejores nuevas que nunca fueron á España. +El oro que tiene el Quibian de Veragua y los otros de la comarca, bien +que segun informacion él sea mucho, no me paresció bien ni servicio de +vuestras Altezas de se le tomar por via de robo: lo buena orden evitará +escándalo y mala fama, y hará que todo ello venga al tesoro, que no quede +un grano. Con un mes de buen tiempo yo acabára todo mi viage: por falta +de los navíos no porfié á esperarle para tornar á ello, y para toda cosa +de su servicio espero en aquel que me hizo, y estaré bueno. Yo creo que +V. A. se acordará que yo queria mandar hacer los navíos de nueva manera: +la brevedad del tiempo no dió lugar á ello, y cierto yo habio caido en lo +que cumplia. Yo tengo en mas esta negociacion y minas con esta escala y +señorio, que todo lo otro que está hecho en las Indias. No es este hijo +para dar á criar á madrastra. De la Española, de Paria y de las otras +tierras no me acuerdo de ellas, que yo no llore: creia yo que el ejemplo +dellas hobiese de ser por estotras al contrario: ellas estan boca á yuso, +bien que no mueren: la enfermedad es incurable, ó muy larga: quien las +llegó á esto venga agora con el remedio si puede ó sabe: al descomponer +cada uno es maestro. Las gracias y acrescentamiento siempre fue uso +de las dar á quien puso su cuerpo á peligro. No es razon que quien ha +sido tan contrario á esta negociacion le goce ni sus fijos. Los que se +fueron de las Indias fuyendo los trabajos y diciendo mal dellas y de mí, +volvieron con cargos: así se ordenaba agora en Veragua: malo ejemplo, y +sin provecho del negocio y para la justicia del mundo: este temor con +otros casos hartos que yo veia claro, me hizo suplicar á V. A. antes que +yo viniese á descubrir esas islas y tierra firme, que me las dejasen +gobernar en su Real nombre: plúgoles: fue por privilegio y asiento, y con +sello y juramento, y me intitularon de Viso-Rey y Almirante y Gobernador +general de todo; y aseñalaron el término sobre las islas de los Azores +cien leguas, y aquellas del Cabo Verde por línea que pasa de polo á +polo, y desto y de todo que mas se descubriese, y me dieron poder largo: +la escritura á mas largamente lo dice. El otro negocio famosísimo está +con los brazos abiertos llamando: extrangero ha sido fasta ahora. Siete +años estuve yo en su Real corte, que á cuantos se fabló de esta empresa +todos á una dijeron que era burla: agora fasta los sastres suplican por +descubrir. Es de creer que van á saltear, y se les otorga, que cobran con +mucho perjuicio de mi honra y tanto daño del negocio. Bueno es de dar á +Dios lo suyo y acetar lo que le pertenece. Esta es justa sentencia, y de +justo. Las tierras que acá obedecen á V. A. son mas que todas las otras +de cristianos y ricas. Despues que yo, por voluntad divina, las hube +puestas debajo de su Real y alto señorío, y en filo para haber grandísima +rénta, de improviso, esperando navíos para venir á su alto conspecto +con victoria y grandes nuevas del oro, muy seguro y alegre, fuí preso +y echado con dos hermanos en un navío, cargados de fierros, desnudo en +cuerpo, con muy mal tratamiento, sin ser llamado ni vencido por justicia: +¿quién creerá que un pobre extrangero se hobiese de alzar en tal lugar +contra V. A. sin causa, ni sin brazo de otro Príncipe, y estando solo +entre sus vasallos y naturales, y teniendo todos mis fijos en su Real +corte? Yo vine á servir de veinte y ocho años, y agora no tengo cabello +en mi persona que no sea cano y el cuerpo enfermo, y gastado cuanto me +quedó de aquellos, y me fue tomado y vendido, y á mis hermanos fasta el +sayo, sin ser oido ni visto, con gran deshonor mio. Es de creer que esto +no se hizo por su Real mandado. La restitucion de mi honra y daños, y el +castigo en quien lo fizo, fará sonar su Real nobleza; y otro tanto en +quien me robó las perlas, y de quien ha fecho daño en ese almirantado. +Grandísima virtud, fama con ejemplo será si hacen esto, y quedará á la +España gloriosa memoria con la de vuestras Altezas de agradecidos y +justos Príncipes. La intencion tan sana que yo siempre tuve al servicio +de vuestras Altezas, y la afrenta tan desigual, no da lugar al anima +que calle, bíen que yo quiera: suplico á vuestras Altezas me perdonen. +Yo estoy tan perdido como dije: yo he llorado fasta aquí á otros: haya +misericordia agora el Cielo, y llore por mi la tierra. En el temporal no +tengo solamente una blanca para el oferta: en el espiritual he parado +aquí en las Indias de la forma que está dicho: aislado en esta pena, +enfermo, aguardando cada dia por la muerte, y cercado de un cuento de +salvages y llenos de crueldad y enemigos nuestros, y tan apartado de +los Santos Sacramentos de la Santa Iglesia, que se olvidará desta anima +si se aparta acá del cuerpo. Llore por mí quien tiene caridad, verdad y +justicia. Yo no vine este viage á navegar por ganar honra ni hacienda: +esto es cierto, porque estaba ya la esperanza de todo en ella muerta. +Yo vine á V. A. con sana intencion y buen zelo, y no miento. Suplico +humildemente á V. A. que si á Dios place de me sacar de aquí, que haya +por bien mi ida á Roma y otras romerías. Cuya vida y alto estado la Santa +Trinidad guarde y acresciente. Fecha en las Indias en la Isla de Jamaica +á siete de Julio de mil quinientos y tres años. + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[202] The word “cosas” has been replaced on conjecture by “casas,” such +being the idea entertained in the Italian translation, republished by +Morelli. + +[203] The “line” of Columbus implies fifteen degrees, or one hour of +longitude; and the twelve lines which describe the distance of Catigara +from the meridian of Ptolemy, equal one hundred and eighty degrees. +Marinus of Tyre, reckoned two hundred and twenty-five degrees to the same +space, which is equivalent to the fifteen lines stated by Columbus. + +[204] Every one will immediately see the incorrectness of this notion, +arising from the belief of Columbus that the country he had discovered +was the east coast of Asia. Instead of the land bearing a proportion +of six-sevenths to the water, the water bears a proportion of about +two-thirds to the land. + +[205] Morelli has given this passage thus: “la opposizion de Saturno con +Marte.” The adjective “desbarados,” however, sufficiently proves this +reading to be incorrect. It would seem that Columbus meant the opposition +of Saturn with the Sun. + +[206] The word _proeses_ or _proizes_, answers to our English word +bollards—or the posts to which cables are fastened. + +[207] Columbus, who now fancies himself in China, by this word “Mago,” +means Mangi, the name given by Marco Polo, whose travels he had read, to +Southern China, while Northern China was Cathay. + +[208] Of course he here speaks of himself. + +[209] Bow-lines are ropes employed to keep the windward edges of +the principal sails steady, and are only used when the wind is so +unfavourable that the sails must be all braced sideways, or close hauled +to the wind. + +[210] In this remarkable notion, Columbus refers to a work of the learned +Æneas Sylvius Piccolomini, entitled _Cosmographia Pape Pii_, printed in +Venice in 1503. It is not paginated, but if the reader will count to the +nineteenth and twentieth pages he will find the following passages: “Post +Sacas ad septentrionem Messagetæ reperiuntur: ... Fæda gens et brutis +simillima apud quam genus mortis optimum judicabatur ut senio confecti +in frusta cœderentur et cum carnibus ovilis promiscue ederentur: eos +qui morbo decederent ut impios abjicientes tamque dignos qui a feris +devorarentur. Equites ac pedites inter eos optimi fuere arcu; gladio; +thorace; ac securi æneâ utentes; aureas zonas; aurea equorum frena ac +pectoralia habentes. Ferri parum apud eos fuit: argento carebant; ære +et auro abundabant: insularum cultores herbarum radices edebant, et +agrestes fructus: ex quibus pocula exprimebant. Vestis erat arborum +cortex: qui paludes inhabitabant piscibus vescebantur: focarum coria e +mari prodeuntium induebant,” etc. From Herodotus we gather an accurate +idea of the situation of the Massagetæ, viz., in the immense plain to +the east of the Caspian and on the east bank of the Jaxaretes. Strabo +corroborates the account of Herodotus as to the repulsive habits of these +old Mongolians. + +[211] This is a malady undefined in any dictionary. + +[212] This is most certainly a mistake; probably thirty-eight was +originally written, which, supposing Columbus to have been born in +1446-7, would bring the date referred to to 1484, when Columbus really +did escape from Portugal into Spain. + + + + +A NARRATIVE + + +_Given by Diego Mendez [in his will] of some events that occurred in the +last voyage of the Admiral Don Christopher Columbus._ + +Diego Mendez, citizen of St. Domingo, in the island of Española, being +in the city of Valladolid, where the Court of their Majesties was at +the time staying, made his will on the sixth day of June, of the year +one thousand five hundred and thirty-six, before Fernando Perez, their +Majesties’ scrivener, and notary public in that their Court, and in all +their Kingdoms and Lordships, the witnesses to the same being Diego de +Arana, Juan Diez Miranda de la Cuadra, Martin de Orduña, Lucas Fernandez, +Alonzo de Angulo, Francisco de Hinojosa and Diego de Aguilar, all +servants of my Lady the Vicequeen of the Indies.[213] And among other +chapters of the said will there is one which runs literally as follows:— + +Clause of the will, Item: The very illustrious gentlemen, the admiral Don +Christopher Columbus, of glorious memory, and his son the admiral Don +Diego Columbus, and his grandson the admiral Don Louis, (whom may God +long preserve), and through them my Lady the Vicequeen, as tutress and +guardian of the latter, are in debt to me, for many and great services +that I have rendered them, in as much as I have spent and worn out the +best part of my life even to its close in their service; especially did +I serve the admiral Don Christopher, going with his Lordship to the +discovery of the islands and terra firma, and often putting myself in +danger of death in order to save his life and the lives of those who +were with him, more particularly when we were shut in at the mouth of +the river Belen or Yebra, through the violence of the sea and the winds +which drove up the sand, and raised such a mountain of it as to close up +the entrance of the port. His Lordship being there greatly afflicted, a +multitude of Indians collected together on shore to burn the ships, and +kill us all, pretending that they were going to make war against other +Indians of the province of Cabrava Aurira, with whom they were at enmity. +Though many of them passed by that part where our ships were lying, +none of the fleet took notice of the matter except myself, who went to +the admiral and said to him, “Sir, these people who have passed by in +order of battle, say that they go to unite themselves with the people +of Veragua, to attack the people of Cobrava Aurira: I do not believe +it, but, on the contrary, I think that they are collected together +to burn our ships and kill all of us,”—as in fact was the case. The +admiral then asked me what were the best means of preventing this, and +I proposed to his Lordship that I should go with a boat along the coast +towards Veragua, to see where the royal court sat. I had not proceeded +on my errand half a league when I found nearly a thousand men of war +with great stores of provisions of all kinds, and I went on shore alone +amongst them, leaving my boat afloat; I then spoke with them, making +them understand me as well as I could, and offered to go with them to +the battle with that armed boat; but this they strongly refused, saying +there was no need of such a thing. After that I returned to the boat, +and remained there in sight of them all that night, so that they could +not go to the ships to burn or destroy them, according to their previous +arrangements, without my seeing them, upon which they changed their plan, +and on that same night they all returned to Veragua. I then went back to +the ships, and related all this to his Lordship, who thought no little +of what I had done, and upon his consulting me as to the best manner +of proceeding so as clearly to ascertain what was the intention of the +people, I offered to go to them with one single companion; and this task +I undertook, though more certain of death than of life in the result. + +After journeying along the beach up to the river of Veragua, I found two +canoes of strange Indians, who related to me more in detail, that these +people were indeed collected together to burn our ships and kill us all, +and that they had forsaken their purpose in consequence of the boat +coming up to the spot, but that they intended to return after two days +to make the attempt once more. I then asked them to carry me in their +canoes to the upper part of the river, offering to remunerate them if +they would do so; but they excused themselves, and advised me by no means +to go, for that both myself and my companion would certainly be killed. +At length, in spite of their advice, I prevailed upon them to take me in +their canoes to the upper part of the river, until I reached the villages +of the Indians, whom I found in order of battle. They, however, would +not, at first, allow me to go to the principal residence of the cacique, +till I pretended that I was come as a surgeon to cure him of a wound +that he had in his leg; then, after I had made them some presents, they +suffered me to proceed to the seat of royalty, which was situated on the +top of a hillock, surmounted by a plain, with a large square surrounded +by three hundred heads of the enemies he had slain in battle. When I +had passed through the square, and reached the royal house, there was a +great clamour of women and children at the gate, who ran into the palace +screaming. Upon this, one of the chief’s sons came out in a high passion, +uttering angry words in his own language; and, laying hands upon me, with +one push he thrust me far away from him. In order to appease him, I told +him that I was come to cure the wound in his father’s leg, and showed +him an ointment that I had brought for that purpose; but he replied, +that on no account whatever should I go in to the place where his father +was. When I saw that I had no chance of appeasing him in that way, I +took out a comb, a pair of scissors, and a mirror, and caused Escobar, +my companion, to comb my hair and then cut it off. When the Indian, and +those who were with him, saw this, they stood in astonishment; upon +which I prevailed on him to suffer his own hair to be combed and cut by +Escobar; I then made him a present of the scissors, with the comb and the +mirror, and thus he became appeased. After this, I begged him to allow +some food to be brought, which was soon done, and we ate and drank in +love and good fellowship, like very good friends. I then left him and +returned to the ships, and related all this to my lord the Admiral, who +was not a little pleased when he heard all these circumstances, and the +things that had happened to me. He ordered a large stock of provisions to +be put into the ships, and into certain straw houses that we had built +there, with a view that I should remain, with some of the men, to examine +and ascertain the secrets of the country. The next morning his lordship +called me to take counsel with me as to what was to be done. My opinion +was that we ought to seize that chief and all his captains; because, +when they were taken, the common people would submit. His lordship was +of the same opinion. I then submitted the stratagem and plan by which +this might be accomplished; and his lordship ordered that the Adelantado, +his brother, and I, accompanied by eighty men, should go to put it into +execution. We went, and our Lord gave us such good fortune, that we took +the cacique and most of his captains, his wives, sons, and grandsons, +with all the princes of his race; but in sending them to the ships, thus +captured, the cacique extricated himself from the too slight grasp of +the man who held him, a circumstance which afterwards caused us much +injury. At this moment it pleased God to cause it to rain very heavily, +occasioning a great flood, by which the mouth of the harbour was opened +and the Admiral enabled to draw out the ships to sea, in order to proceed +to Spain; I, meanwhile, remaining on land as Accountant of his Highness, +with seventy men, and the greater part of the provisions of biscuit, +wine, oil, and vinegar being left with me. + +The Admiral had scarcely got to sea (while I stayed on shore with about +twenty men, for the others had gone to assist the Admiral), when suddenly +more than four hundred natives, armed with cross-bows and arrows, came +down upon me, extending themselves along the face of the mountain; +they then gave a shriek, then another, and another, and these repeated +cries, by the goodness of God, gave me opportunity to prepare for the +engagement. While I was on the shore among the huts which we had built, +and they were collected on the mountain at about the distance of an +arrow’s flight, they began to shoot their arrows and hurl their darts, as +if they had been attacking a bull. The arrows and cross-bow shots came +down thick as hail, and some of the Indians then separated themselves +from the rest, for the purpose of attacking us with clubs; none of them, +however, returned, for with our swords we cut off their arms and legs, +and killed them on the spot; upon which the rest took such fright, that +they fled, after having killed in the contest seven out of twenty of our +men; while, on their side, they lost nine or ten of those who advanced +the most boldly towards us. This contest lasted three long hours, and +our Lord gave us the victory in a marvellous manner, we being so few +and they so numerous. After this fight was over, the captain, Diego +Tristan, came with the boats from the ships to ascend the river, in +order to take in water for the voyage; and, notwithstanding I advised +and warned him not to go, he would not trust me, but, against my wish, +went up the river with two boats and twelve men; upon which the natives +attacked him, and killed him and all the men that he took with him, +except one who escaped by swimming, and from whom we heard the news. The +Indians then took the boats and broke them to pieces, which caused us +great vexation; for the Admiral was at sea with his ships without boats, +while we were on shore deprived of the means of going to him. Besides +this, the Indians came continually to assail us; every instant playing +trumpets and kettle-drums, and uttering loud cries in the belief that +they had conquered us. The only means of defending ourselves against +these people, were two very good brass falconets and plenty of powder +and ball, with which we frightened them so much that they did not dare +approach us. This lasted for the space of four days, during which time +I caused several bags to be made out of the sails of one of the vessels +which we had remaining on shore, and into them I put all our biscuit. I +then took two canoes, and secured them together with sticks across the +tops, and, after loading them with the biscuit, the pipes of wine, and +the oil and vinegar, I fastened them together with a rope, and had them +towed along the sea while it was calm, so that in the seven trips we +contrived to get all of it to the ships, and the people were also carried +over by few at a time. Meanwhile I remained with five men to the last, +and at night I put to sea with the last boatful. The Admiral thought +very highly of this conduct of mine, and did not content himself with +embracing me and kissing me on the cheeks for having performed so great +a service, but asked me to take the captaincy of the ship _Capitana_, +with the government of all the crew, and, in fact, of the entire voyage; +which I accepted in order to oblige him, as it was a service of great +responsibility. + +On the last day of April, in the year fifteen hundred and three, we +left Veragua, with three ships, intending to make our passage homeward +to Spain, but as the ships were all pierced and eaten by the teredo, we +could not keep them above water; we abandoned one of them after we had +proceeded thirty leagues; the two which remained were even in a worse +condition than that,[214] so that all the hands were not sufficient with +the use of pumps and kettles and pans to draw off the water that came +through the holes made by the worms. In this state, with the utmost toil +and danger, we sailed for thirty-five days, thinking to reach Spain, and +at the end of this time we arrived at the lowest point of the island of +Cuba, at the province of Homo, where the city of Trinidad now stands, so +that we were three hundred leagues further from Spain than when we left +Veragua for the purpose of proceeding thither; and this, as I have said, +with the vessels in very bad condition, unfit to encounter the sea, and +our provisions nearly gone. It pleased God that we were enabled to reach +the island of Jamaica, where we drove the two ships on shore, and made of +them two cabins thatched with straw, in which we took up our dwelling, +not however without considerable danger from the natives, who were not +yet subdued, and who might easily set fire to our habitation in the +night, in spite of the greatest watchfulness. It was there that I gave +out the last ration of biscuit and wine; I then took a sword in my hand, +three men only accompanying me, and advanced into the island; for no one +else dared go to seek food for the Admiral and those who were with him. +It pleased God that I found some people who were very gentle and did us +no harm, but received us cheerfully, and gave us food with hearty good +will. I then made a stipulation with the Indians, who lived in a village +called Aguacadiba, and with their cacique, that they should make cassava +bread, and that they should hunt and fish to supply the Admiral every +day with a sufficient quantity of provisions, which they were to bring to +the ships, where I promised there should be a person ready to pay them in +blue beads, combs and knives, hawks’-bells and fish-hooks, and other such +articles which we had with us for that purpose. With this understanding, +I despatched one of the Spaniards whom I had brought with me to the +admiral, in order that he might send a person to pay for the provisions, +and secure their being sent. From thence I went to another village, at +three leagues distance from the former, and made a similar agreement with +the natives and their cacique, and then despatched another Spaniard to +the admiral, begging him to send another person with a similar object to +this village. After this I went further on, and came to a great cacique +named Huareo, living in a place which is now called Melilla, thirteen +leagues from where the ships lay. I was very well received by him; he +gave me plenty to eat, and ordered all his subjects to bring together +in the course of three days a great quantity of provisions, which they +did, and laid them before him, whereupon I paid him for them to his full +satisfaction. I stipulated with him that they should furnish a constant +supply, and engaged that there should be a person appointed to pay them; +having made this arrangement, I sent the other Spaniard to the admiral +with the provisions they had given me, and then begged the cacique to +allow me two Indians to go with me to the extremity of the island, one to +carry the hammock in which I slept, and the other carrying the food. + +In this manner I journeyed eastward to the end of the island, and came +to a cacique who was named Ameyro, with whom I entered into close +friendship. I gave him my name and took his, which amongst these people +is regarded as a pledge of brotherly attachment. I bought of him a very +good canoe, and gave him in exchange an excellent brass helmet that I +carried in a bag, a frock, and one of the two shirts that I had with me; +I then put out to sea in this canoe, in search of the place that I had +left, the cacique having given me six Indians to assist in guiding the +canoe. When I reached the spot to which I had dispatched the provisions, +I found there the Spaniards whom the admiral had sent, and I loaded them +with the victuals that I had brought with me, and went myself to the +admiral, who gave me a very cordial reception. He was not satisfied with +seeing and embracing me, but asked me respecting everything that had +occurred in the voyage, and offered up thanks to God for having delivered +me in safety from so barbarous a people. The men rejoiced greatly at +my arrival, for there was not a loaf left in the ships when I returned +to them with the means of allaying their hunger; this, and every day +after that, the Indians came to the ships loaded with provisions from +the places where I had made the agreements; so that there was enough for +the two hundred and thirty people who were with the admiral. Ten days +after this, the admiral called me aside, and spoke to me of the great +peril he was in, addressing me as follows:—“Diego Mendez, my son, not +one of those whom I have here with me has any idea of the great danger +in which we stand except myself and you; for we are but few in number, +and these wild Indians are numerous and very fickle and capricious: and +whenever they may take it into their heads to come and burn us in our two +ships, which we have made into straw-thatched cabins, they may easily +do so by setting fire to them on the land side, and so destroy us all. +The arrangement that you have made with them for the supply of food, to +which they agreed with such good-will, may soon prove disagreeable to +them; and it would not be surprising if, on the morrow, they were not to +bring us anything at all: in such case we are not in a position to take +it by main force, but shall be compelled to accede to their terms. I have +thought of a remedy, if you consider it advisable; which is, that some +one should go out in the canoe that you have purchased, and make his way +in it to Española, to purchase a vessel with which we may escape from the +extremely dangerous position in which we now are. Tell me your opinion.” +To which I answered:—“My lord, I distinctly see the danger in which we +stand, which is much greater than would be readily imagined. With respect +to the passage from this island to Española in so small a vessel as a +canoe, I look upon it not merely as difficult, but impossible; for I know +not who would venture to encounter so terrific a danger as to cross a +gulf of forty leagues of sea, and amongst islands where the sea is most +impetuous, and scarcely ever at rest.” His lordship did not agree with +the opinion that I expressed, but adduced strong arguments to show that +I was the person to undertake the enterprise. To which I replied:—“My +lord, I have many times put my life in danger to save yours, and the +lives of all those who are with you, and God has marvellously preserved +me: in consequence of this, there have not been wanting murmurers who +have said that your lordship entrusts every honourable undertaking to me, +while there are others amongst them who would perform them as well as I. +My opinion is, therefore, that your lordship would do well to summon all +the men, and lay this business before them, to see if, amongst them all, +there is one who will volunteer to undertake it, which I certainly doubt; +and if all refuse, I will risk my life in your service, as I have done +many times already.” + +On the following day his lordship caused all the men to appear together +before him, and then opened the matter to them in the same manner as +he had done to me. When they heard it they were all silent, until some +said that it was out of the question to speak of such a thing; for it was +impossible, in so small a craft, to cross a boisterous and perilous gulf +of forty leagues’ breadth, and to pass between those two islands, where +very strong vessels had been lost in going to make discoveries, not being +able to encounter the force and fury of the currents. I then arose, and +said:—“My lord, I have but one life, and I am willing to hazard it in +the service of your lordship, and for the welfare of all those who are +here with us; for I trust in God, that in consideration of the motive +which actuates me, he will give me deliverance, as he has already done +on many other occasions.” When the admiral heard my determination, he +arose and embraced me, and, kissing me on the cheek, said,—“Well did I +know that there was no one here but yourself who would dare to undertake +this enterprise: I trust in God, our Lord, that you will come out of it +victoriously, as you have done in the others which you have undertaken.” +On the following day I drew my canoe on to the shore; fixed a false +keel on it, and pitched and greased it; I then nailed some boards upon +the poop and prow, to prevent the sea from coming in, as it was liable +to do from the lowness of the gunwales; I also fixed a mast in it, +set up a sail, and laid in the necessary provisions for myself, one +Spaniard, and six Indians, making eight in all, which was as many as +the canoe would hold. I then bade farewell to his lordship, and all the +others, and proceeded along the coast of Jamaica, up to the extremity +of the island,[215] which was thirty-five leagues from the point whence +we started. Even this distance was not traversed without considerable +toil and danger; for on the passage I was taken prisoner by some Indian +pirates, from whom God delivered me in a marvellous manner. When we had +reached the end of the island, and were remaining there in the hope of +the sea becoming sufficiently calm to allow us to continue our voyage +across it, many of the natives collected together with the determination +of killing me, and seizing the canoe with its contents, and they cast +lots for my life, to see which of them should carry their design into +execution. + +As soon as I became aware of their project, I betook myself secretly to +my canoe, which I had left at three leagues distance from where I then +was, and set sail for the spot where the admiral was staying, and reached +it after an interval of fifteen days from my departure. I related to +him all that had happened, and how God had miraculously rescued me from +the hands of those savages. His lordship was very joyful at my arrival, +and asked me if I would recommence my voyage; I replied that I would, +if I might be allowed to take some men, to be with me at the extremity +of the island until I should find a fair opportunity of putting to sea +to prosecute my voyage. The admiral gave me seventy men, and with them +his brother the Adelantado, to stay with me until I put to sea, and to +remain there for three days after my departure; with this arrangement +I returned to the extremity of the island and waited there four days. +Finding the sea become calm I parted from the rest of the men with much +mutual sorrow; I then commended myself to God and our Lady of Antigua, +and was at sea five days and four nights without laying down the oar from +my hand, but continued steering the canoe while my companions rowed. +It pleased God that at the end of five days I reached the Island of +Española at Cape San Miguel,[216] having been two days without eating or +drinking, for our provisions were exhausted. I brought my canoe up to a +very beautiful part of the coast, to which many of the natives soon came, +and brought with them many articles of food, so that I remained there two +days to take rest. I took six Indians from this place, and leaving those +that I had brought with me, I put off to sea again, moving along the +coast of Española, for it was a hundred and thirty leagues from the spot +where I landed to the city of St. Domingo, where the Governor dwelt, who +was the Commander de Lares. When I had proceeded eighty leagues along the +coast of the island (not without great toil and danger, for that part of +the island was not yet brought into subjugation), I reached the province +of Azoa, which is twenty-four leagues from San Domingo, and there I +learned from the commander Gallego, that the governor was gone out to +subdue the province of Xuragoa, which was at fifty leagues distance. +When I heard this I left my canoe and took the road for Xuragoa,[217] +where I found the governor, who kept me with him seven months, until he +had burned and hanged eighty-four caciques, lords of vassals, and with +them Nacaona, the sovereign mistress of the island, to whom all rendered +service and obedience. When that expedition was finished I went on foot +to San Domingo, a distance of seventy leagues, and waited in expectation +of the arrival of ships from Spain, it being now more than a year since +any had come. In this interval it pleased God that three ships arrived, +one of which I bought, and loaded it with provisions, bread, wine, meat, +hogs, sheep, and fruit, and despatched it to the place where the admiral +was staying, in order that he might come over in it with all his people +to San Domingo, and from thence sail for Spain. I myself went on in +advance with the two other ships, in order to give an account to the king +and queen of all that had occurred in this voyage. + +I think I should now do well to say somewhat of the events which +occurred to the admiral and to his family during the year that they were +left on the island. A few days after my departure the Indians became +refractory, and refused to bring food as they had hitherto done; the +admiral therefore caused all the caciques to be summoned, and expressed +to them his surprise that they should not send food as they were wont to +do, knowing as they did, and as he had already told them, that he had +come there by the command of God. He said that he perceived that God was +angry with them, and that He would that very night give tokens of His +displeasure by signs that He would cause to appear in the heavens; and +as on that night there was to be an almost total eclipse of the moon, he +told them that God caused that appearance to signify His anger against +them for not bringing the food. The Indians, believing him, were very +frightened, and promised that they would always bring him food in future; +and so in fact they did until the arrival of the ship which I had sent +loaded with provisions. The Admiral, and those who were with him, felt +no small joy at the arrival of this ship; and his lordship afterwards +informed me in Spain, that in no part of his life did he ever experience +so joyful a day, for he had never hoped to have left that place alive: +and in that same ship he set sail,[218] and went to San Domingo, and +thence to Spain. + +I have wished thus to give a succinct account of my troubles, and of +my great and important services; which are such as no man in the world +ever rendered to a master, or ever will again; and I do so in order that +my sons may know these facts, and be encouraged to serve faithfully, +and that, at the same time, his lordship may see that he is bound to +make them a handsome return for such services. When his lordship came +to the court, and while he was at Salamanca, confined to his bed with +the gout, and I was left in sole charge of his affairs, endeavouring to +obtain the restitution of his estate and government for his son Diego, I +addressed him thus: “My lord, your lordship knows how much I have done +in your service, and what trouble I am still taking, night and day, in +the management of your affairs; I beseech your lordship to grant me some +recompense for what I have done.” He cheerfully replied that he would +do for me whatever I asked, adding that there was very great reason for +his so doing. I then specified my wish, and begged his lordship to do me +the favour to grant me the office of principal Alguazil of the island +of Española for life; to which his lordship assented most cordially, +saying, that it was but a trifling remuneration for the great services +I had rendered. He also desired me to communicate his wish to his son +Diego, who was very glad to hear of the favour his father had shown me in +appointing me to the said office; and said, that if his father gave it me +with one hand, he, for his part, gave it with both hands. This promise +holds good as much now as it did then; but when, after I had succeeded, +with considerable difficulty, in securing the restitution of the +government of the Indies to my lord the Admiral Don Diego, (his father +being then dead), I asked him for the provision of the said office, his +lordship replied that he had given it to his uncle, the Adelantado, +saying, however, that he would give me another post equivalent to it. I +told him that he ought to make such a proposition to his uncle, and that +he ought to give me that which his father, and he himself, had promised +to me. But he did not do so; and thus I remained without any recompense +for all my services: while my lord, the Adelantado, without having +rendered any service at all, continued in the enjoyment of the dignity +which belonged to me, and reaped the reward of all my exertions. + +When his lordship arrived at the city of San Domingo, he assumed the +reins as governor, and gave the post which he had promised to me, to +Francisco de Garay, a servant of the Adelantado, to hold it for him. This +took place on the tenth day of July of the year fifteen hundred and ten, +and the office was then worth at least a million per annum. My lady, the +Vicequeen, as tutress and guardian of my lord the viceroy, and my lord +the viceroy himself, are really chargeable to me for this loss, and are +debtors to me for it in justice and on the score of conscience. The post +had been given to me by way of recompense, and nothing has been done in +my favour towards the accomplishment of the Admiral’s promise, since the +day in which it was given, to this, the close of my life; if it had been +given to me, I should have been the richest and most honoured man in +the island; whereas, I am now the poorest, and have not even a house of +my own to live in, but am obliged to pay rent for the roof over my head. +As it would be very difficult to refund the revenues which this office +has produced, I will suggest an alternative, which is this: that his +lordship grant the rank of principal Alguazil of the city of San Domingo, +to one of my sons, for his life, and bestow upon the other the rank of +Vice-Admiral in the same city: by the grant of these two offices to my +sons in the manner I have said, and by appointing some one to hold them +on their behalf until they come of age, his lordship will discharge the +conscience of the Admiral his father, and I shall hold myself satisfied, +as duly paid for my services. I shall say nothing further upon the +subject, but leave it to the consciences of their lordships, and let them +do whatever they think proper. + +Item. I leave as executors and administrators of my will here at the +court, the bachelor Estrada and Diego de Arana, together with my lady +the Vicequeen; and I beg his lordship to undertake this charge, and to +direct the others to undertake it likewise. + +_Another clause._ Item. I order that my executors purchase a large +stone, the best that they can find, and place it upon my grave, and that +they write round the edge of it these words: “Here lies the honourable +Chevalier Diego Mendez, who rendered great services to the royal crown +of Spain, in the discovery and conquest of the Indies, in company with +the discoverer of them, the Admiral Don Christopher Columbus, of glorious +memory, and afterwards rendered other great services by himself, with his +own ships, and at his own cost. He died, etc. He asks of your charity a +Paternoster and an Ave Maria.” + +Item. In the middle of the said stone let there be the representation +of a canoe, which is a hollowed tree, such as the Indians use for +navigation; for in such a vessel did I cross three hundred leagues of +sea; and let them engrave above it this word: “Canoa.” + +My dear and beloved sons, children of my very dear and beloved wife Doña +Francisca de Ribera,—may the blessing of God Almighty, Father, Son, and +Holy Ghost, descend upon you, together with my blessing, and protect +you, and make you Catholic Christians, and give you grace always to love +and fear Him. My sons, I earnestly recommend you to cultivate peace and +harmony amongst yourselves, and that you be obliging, and not haughty, +but very humble and courteous towards those with whom you have to do, so +that all may love you. Serve loyally my lord the Admiral, and may his +lordship grant you large recompense, considering who he is himself, and +by what great services I have deserved his favours. Above all I charge +you, my sons, to be very pious, and to hear very devoutly the divine +offices, and in so doing, may the Lord grant you long life. May it please +Him of His infinite goodness, to make you as good as I wish you to be, +and guide you always with His hand. Amen. + +The books which I send to you are as follows: + +_The Art of Well-dying_, by Erasmus; a _Sermon_, of Erasmus, in Spanish; +_Josephus de Bello Judaico_; the _Moral Philosophy_, of Aristotle; the +books called _Lingua Erasmi_; the book of _The Holy Land_;[219] _The +conversations of Erasmus_; _A treatise on the Complaints of Peace_; _A +book of Contemplation of the Passion of our Redeemer_; _A treatise on the +Revenging of the Death of Agamemnon_; and other small tracts. + +I have already told you, my sons, that I leave you these books as +heir-looms under the conditions described above in my will, and I wish +them to be put together with my other documents, which will be found in +the cedar box, at Seville, as I have already said; I wish also the marble +mortar should be placed in it, which is now in the possession of Don +Ferdinand, or of his major-domo. + +I, Diego Mendez, affirm that this document, contained in thirteen sheets, +is my last will and testament, for I have dictated it and caused it to +be written, and have signed it with my name; and by it I revoke and +annul any other will or wills whatever made by me at any other time or +place, and I desire that this only be considered valid. Made in the city +of Valladolid, the nineteenth day of June, in the year of our Redeemer +one thousand five hundred and thirty-six.—DIEGO MENDEZ. And I, the said +Garcia de Vera, scrivener and notary public, was present at all which has +been herein said; and it has all been set down by me by order of the said +lord-lieutenant, and by request of the said Bachelor Estrada, forming the +testament in these twenty-six leaves of folio paper, as is here seen. +I caused it to be written as it was presented and laid before me, and +have kept the original in my possession. And to this effect I have here +placed this my seal (_here was placed the seal_), in testimony of the +truth.—(_Signed_) GARCIA DE VERA. + +_This agrees literally with the clauses copied from a will sealed and +signed by the said scrivener, Garcia de Vera, the original of which is +in the archives of the most excellent the Admiral Duke of Veraguas, from +which I copied it in Madrid on the twenty-eighth day of March, in the +year eighteen hundred and twenty-five.—Thomas Gonzalez._ + +_Note.—The other clauses of this will of Diego Mendez, refer to his +funeral arrangements, and the declaration of debts, due both to him +and by him, in Spain and in the island of Hispaniola, as well as other +matters purely personal, and relating to his family; but they bear no +reference or allusion to the Admiral Columbus, or to his voyages and +discoveries, and therefore have not been copied._ + + +RELACION + +_Hecha por Diego Mendez, de algunos acontecimientos del último viage del +Almirante Don Cristóbal Colon._ + +Diego Mendez, vecino de la ciudad de Santo Domingo de la Isla Española, +hallándose en la villa de Valladolid, donde á la sazon estaba la Corte +de SS. MM., otorgó testamento en seis dias del mes de Junio del año de +mil quinientos treinta y seis, por testimonio de Fernan Perez, escribano +de SS. MM., y su notario público en la su Corte y en todos los sus +Reinos y Señoríos; siendo testigos al otorgamiento Diego de Arana, Juan +Diez Miranda de la Cuadra, Martin de Orduña, Lucas Fernandez, Alonso de +Angulo, Francísco de Hinojosa y Diego de Aguilar, todos criados de la +Señora Vireina de las Indias. Y entre otros capítulos del mencionado +testamento hay uno que á la letra dice así. + +Cláusula del testamento. Item: Los muy ilustres Señores, el Almirante D. +Cristobal Colon, de gloriosa memoria, y su hijo el Almirante D. Diego +Colon, y su nieto el Almirante D. Luis, á quien Dios dé largos dias +de vida, y por ellos la Vireina mi Señora, como su tutriz y curadora, +me son en cargo de muchos y grandes servicios que yo les hice, en que +consumí y gasté todo lo mejor de mi vida hasta acaballa en su servicio; +especialmente serví al gran Almirante D. Cristóbal andando con su Señoria +descubriendo Islas y Tierra firme, en que puse muchas veces mi persona á +péligro de muerte por salvar su vida y de los que con él iban y estaban; +mayormente cuando se nos cerró el puerto del rio de Belen ó Yebra donde +estábamos con la fuerza de las tempestades de la mar y de los vientos +que acarrearon y amontonaron la arena en cantidad con que cegaron la +entrada del puerto. Y estando su Señoria allí muy congojado, juntóse +gran multitud de Indios de la tierra para venir á quemarnos los navios y +matarnos á todos, con color que decian que iban á hacer guerra a otros +Indios de las provincias de Cobrava Aurira con quien tenian guerra: y +como pasaron muchos dellos por aquel puerto en que teniamos nosotros +las naos, ninguno de la armada caia en el negocio sino yo, que fuí al +Almirante y le dije: “Señor, estas gentes que por aquí han pasado en +orden de guerra dicen que se han de juntar con los de Veragoa para ir +contra los de Cobrava Aurira: yo no lo creo sino el contrario, y es que +se juntan para quemarnos los navíos y matarnos á todos,” como de hecho lo +era. Y diciéndome el Almirante cómo se remediaria, yo dije á su Señoría +que saldria con una barca é iría por la costa hácia Veragoa, para ver +donde asentaban el real. Y no hube andado media legua cuando halle al +pie de mil hombres de guerra con muchas vituallas y brevages, y salté en +tierra solo entre ellos, dejando mi barca puesta en flota: y hablé con +ellos segun pude entender, y ofrecíme que queria ir con ellos á la guerra +con aquella barca armada, y ellos se escusaron reciamente diciendo que +no le habian menester: y como yo me volviese á la barca y estuviese allí +á vista dellos toda la noche, vieron que no podian ir á las naos para +quemallas y destruillas, segun tenian acordado, sin que yo lo viese, y +mudaron propósito: y aquella noche se volvieron todos á Veragoa, y yo +me volví á las naos y hice relacion de todo á su Señoría, é no lo tuvo +en poco. Y platicando conmigo sobrello sobre que manera se ternia para +saber claramente el intento de aquella gente, yo me ofrecí de ir allá +con un solo compañero, y lo puse por obra, yendo mas cierto de la muerte +que dela vida: y habiendo caminado por la playa hasta el rio de Veragoa +hallé dos canoas de Indios extrangeros que me contaron muy á la clara +como aquellas gentes iban para quemar las naos y matarnos á todos, y que +lo dejaron de hacer por la barca que allí sobrevino, y questaban todavia +de propósito de volver á hacello dende á dos dias, é yo les rogué que +me llevasen en sus canoas el rio arriba, y que gelo pagaria; y ellos +se escusaban aconsejándome que en ninguna manera fuese, porque fuese +cierto que en llegando me matarian á mí y al compañero que llevaba. E sin +embargo de sus consejos hice que me llevasen en sus canaos el rio arriba +hasta llegar á los pueblos de los Indios, los cuales hallé todos puestos +en orden de guerra, que no me querian dejar ir al asiento principal del +Cacique; y yo fingiendo que le iba á curar como cirujano de una llaga +que tenia en una pierna, y con dádivas que les dí me dejaron ir hasta el +asiento Real, que estaba encima de un cerro llano con una plaza grande, +rodeada de trescientas cabezas de muertos que habian ellos muerto en una +batalla: y como yo hubiese pasado toda la plaza y llegado á la Casa Real +hubo grande alboroto de mugeres y muchachos que estaban á la puerta, que +entraron gritando dentro en el palacio. Y salió de él un hijo del Señor +muy enojado diciendo palabras recias en su lenguage, é puso las manos +en mí y de un empellon me desvió muy lejos de sí: diciéndole yo por +amansarle como iba á curar á su padre de la pierna, y mostrándole cierto +unguento que para ello llevaba, dijo que en ninguna manera habia de +entrar donde estaba su padre. Y visto por mí que por aquella via no podia +amansarle, saqué un peine y unas tijeras y un espejo, y hice que Escobar +mi compañero me peinase y cortase el cabello. Lo cual visto por él y por +los que allí estaban quedaban espantados; y yo entonces hice que Escobar +le peinase á él y le cortase el cabello con las tijeras, y díselas y el +peine y el espejo, y con esto se amansó; y yo pedí que trajesen algo de +comer, y luego lo trajeron, y comimos y bebimos en amor y compaña, y +quedamos amigos; y despedime dél y vine á las naos, y hice relacion de +todo esto al Almirante mi Señor, el cual no poco holgó en saber todas +estas circumstancias y cosas acaecidas por mi; y mandó poner gran recabdo +en las naos y en ciertas casas de paja, que teniamos hechas allí en la +playa con intencion que habia yo de quedar allí con cierta gente para +calar y saber los secretos de la tierra. + +Otro dia de mañana su Señoría me llamó para tomar parecer conmigo +de lo que sobre ello se debia hacer, y fue mi parecer que debiamos +prender aquel Señor y todos sus Capitanes, porque presos aquellos se +sojuzgaria la gente menuda; y su Señoria fue del mismo parecer: é yo di +el ardid y la manera con que se debia hacer, y su Señoría mandó que el +Señor Adelantado, su hermano, y yo con él fuesemos á poner en efecto +lo sobredicho con ochenta hombres. Y fuimos, y diónos Nuestro Señor +tan buena dicha que prendimos el Cacique y los mas de sus Capitanes y +mugeres y hijos y nietos con todos los principales de su generacion; y +enviándolos á las naos ansí presos, soltóse el Cacique al que le llevaba +por su mal recabdo, el cual despues nos hizo mucho daño. En este instante +plugó á Dios que lovíó mucho, y con la gran avenida abriósenos el puerto, +y el Almirante sacó los navíos á la mar para venirse á Castilla, quedando +yo en tierra para haber de quedar en ella por Contador de su Alteza con +setenta hombres, y quedábame allí la mayor parte de los mantenimientos de +bizcocho y vino y aceite y vinagre. + +Acabado de salir el Almirante á la mar, y quedando yo en tierra con obra +de veinte hombres porque los otros se habian salido con el Almirante á +despedir, subitamente sobrevino sobre mi mucha gente de la tierra, que +serian mas de cuatrocientos hombres armados con sus varas y flechas y +tiraderos, y tendierónse por el monte en haz y dieron una grita y otra +y luego otra, con las cuales plugo á Dios me apercibieron á la pelea y +defensa de ellos: y estando yo en la playa entre los bohios que tenia +hechos, y ellos en el monte á trecho de tíro de dardo, comenzaron á +flechar y á garrochar como quien agarrocha toro, y eran las flechas +y tiraderas tantas y tan continuas como granizo; y algunos dellos se +desmandaban para venirnos á dar con las machadasnas; pero ninguno +dellos volvian porque quedaban allí cortados brazos y piernas y muertos +á espada: de lo cual cobraron tanto miedo que se retiraron atras, +habiéndonos muerto siete hombres en la pelea de veinte que eramos, y +de ellos murieron diez ó nueve de los que se venian á nosotros mas +arriscados. Duró esta pelea tres horas grandes, y Nuestro Soñor nos dio +la vitoria milagrosamente, siendo nosotros tan poquitos y ellos tanta +muchedumbre. + +Acabada esta pelea vino de las naos el Capitan Diego Tristan con las +barcas para subir el rio arriba á tomar agua para su viage; y no +embargante que yo le aconsejé y amonesté que no subiese el rio arriba +no me quiso creer, y contra mi grado subió con las dos barcas y doce +hombres el rio arriba, donde le toparon aquella gente y pelearon con +él, y le mataron á él y todos los que llavaba, que no escapó sino uno +á nado que trujo la nueva; y tomaron las barcas y hiciéronlas pedazos, +de que quedamos en gran fatiga, ansí el Almrante en la mar con sus naos +sin barcas como nosotros en tierra sin tener con que poder ir á él. Y á +todo esto no cesaban los Indios de venirnos á cometer cada rato tañiendo +bocinas y atabales, y dando alaridos pensando que nos tenian vencidos. +El remedio contra esta gente que teniamos eran dos tiros falconetes de +fruslera, muy buenos, y mucha pólvora y pelotas con que los ojeábamos +que no osaban llegar á nosotros. Y esto duró por espacio de cuatro dias, +en los cuales yo hice cosar muchos costales de las velas de una nao que +nos quedaba, y en aquellos puse todo el bizcocho que teniamos, y tomé +dos canoas y até la una con la otra parejas, con unos palos atravesados +por encima, y en estos cargué el bizcocho todo en viages, y las pipas +de vino y azeite y vinagre atadas en una guindaleja y á jorno [_sic_, +jorro] por la mar, tirando por ellas las canoas, abonanzando la mar, en +siete caminos que hicieron lo llevaron todo á las naos, y la gente que +conmigo estaba poco á poco la llevaron, é yo quedé con cinco hombres +á la postre siendo de noche, y en la postrera barcada me embarqué: lo +cual el Almirante tuvo á mucho, y no se hartaba de me abrazar y besar en +los carrillos por tan gran servicio como allí le hice, y me rogó tomase +la capitanía de la nao Capitana y el regimiento de toda la gente y del +viage, lo cual yo acepté por le hacer servicio en ello por ser, como era, +cosa de gran trabajo. + +Postrero de Abril de mil quinientos y tres partimos de Veragoa con tres +navíos, pensando venir la vuelta de Castilla: y comō los navíos estaban +todos abujerados y comidos de gusanos no los podiamos tener sobre agua; +y andadas treinta leguas dejamos el uno, quedándonos otros dos peor +acondicionados que aquel, que toda la gente no bastaba con las bombas y +calderas y vasijas á sacar el agua que se nos entraba por los abujeros +de la broma: y de esta manera, no sin grandísimo trabajo y peligro, +pensando venir á Castilla navegamos treinta y cinco dias, y en cabo +dellos llegamos á la isla de Cuba á lo mas bajo della, á la provincia +de Homo, allá donde agora está el pueblo de la Trinidad; de manera que +estábamos mas lejos de Castilla trescientas leguas que cuando partimos +de Veragoa para ir á ella; y como digo los navíos mal acondicionados, +innavegables, y las vituallas que se nos acababan. Plugo á Dios Nuestro +Señor que pudimos llegar á la isla de Jamaica, donde zabordamos los dos +navíos en tierra, y hicimos de ellos dos casas pajizas, en que estabamos +no sin gran peligro de la gente de aquella isla, que no estaba domada ni +conquistada, nos pusiesen fuego de noche, que fácilmente lo podian hacer +por mas que nosotros velabamos. + +Aquí acabé de dar la postrera racion de bizcocho y vino, y tomé una +espada en la mano y tres hombres conmigo, y fuíme por esa isla adelante, +porque ninguno osaba ir á buscar de comer para el Almirante y los que +con él estaban: y plugo á Dios que hallaba la gente tan mansa que no +me hacian mal, antes se holgaban conmigo y me daban de comer de buena +voluntad. Y en un pueblo que se llama Aguacadiba, concerté con los Indios +y Cacique que harian pan cazabe, y que cazarian y pescarian, y que +darian de todas las vituallas al Almirante cierta cuantía cada dia, y lo +llevarian á las naos, con que estuviese allí persona que ge lo pagase +en cuentas azules y peines y cuchillos y cascabeles, y anzuelos y otros +rescates que para ello llevabamos: y con esto concierto despaché uno +de los dos cristianos que conmigo traía al Almirante, para que enviase +persona que tuviese cargo de pagar aquellas vituallas y enviarlas. + +Y de allí fuí á otro pueblo que estaba tres leguas de este y hice el +mismo concierto con el Cacique y Indios, de él, y envié otro cristiano al +Almirante para que enviase allí otra persona al mismo cargo. + +Y de allí pasé adelante y llegué á un gran Cacique que se llamaba +Huareo, donde agora dicen Melilla, que es trece leguas de las naos, del +cual fuí muy bien recebido, que me dió muy bien de comer, y mandó que +todos sus vasallos trajiesen dende á tres dias muchas vituallas, que le +presentaron, é yo ge las pagué de manera que fueron contentos: y concerté +que ordinariamente las traerian, habiendo allí persona que ge las pagase, +y con este concierto envié el otro cristiano con los mantenimientos que +allá me dieron al Almirante, y pedí al Cacique que me diese dos Indios +que fuesen conmigo fasta el cabo de la isla, que el uno me llevaba la +hamaca en que dormia é el otro la comida. Y desta manera caminé hasta el +cabo de la isla, á la parte del Oriente, y llegué á un Cacique que se +llamaba Ameyro, é hice con él amistades de hermandad, y díle mi nombre y +tomé el suyo, que entre ellos se tiene por grande hermandad. Y compréle +una canoa muy buena que él tenia, y díle por ella una bacineta de laton +muy buena que llevaba en la manga y el sayo y una camisa de dos que +llevaba, y embarquéme en aquella canoa, y vine por la mar requiriendo las +estancias que habia dejado con seis Indios que el Cacique me dió para que +me la ayudasen á navegar, y venido á los lugares donde yo habia proveido, +hallé en ellos los cristianos que el Almirante habia enviado, y cargué de +todas las vituallas que les hallé, y fuime al Almirante, del cual fuí muy +bien recebido, que no se hartaba de verme y abrazarme, y preguntar lo que +me habia sucedido en el viage, dando gracias á Dios que me habia llevado +y traido á salvamiento libre de tanta gente salvage. Y como el tiempo que +yo llegué á las naos no habia en ellas un pan que comer, fueron todos +muy alegres con mi venida, porque les maté la hambre en tiempo de tanta +necesidad, y de allí adelante cada dia venian los Indios cargados de +vituallas á las naos de aquellos lugares que yo habia concertado, que +bastaban para doscientas y treinta personas que estaban con el Almirante. +Dende á diez dias el Almirante me llamó á parte y me dijo el gran peligro +en que estaba, diciéndome ansi: “Diego Mendez, hijo: ninguno de cuantos +aquí yo tengo siente el gran peligro en que estamos sino yo y vos, porque +somos muy poquitos, y estos indios salvages son muchos y muy mudables y +antojadizos, y en la hora que se les antojare de venir y quemarnos aquí +donde estamos en estos dos navioa hechos casas pajizas fácilmente pueden +echar fuego dende tierra y abrasarnos aquí á todos: y el concierto que +vos habeis hecho con ellos del traer los mantenimientos que traen de tan +buena gana, mañana se les antojará otra cosa y no nos traerán nada, y +nosotros no somos parte para tomargelo per fuerza si no estar á lo que +ellos quisieren. Yo he pensado un remedio si á vos os parece: que en esta +canoa que comprastes se aventurase alguno á pasar á la Isla Española á +comprar una nao en que pudiesen salir de tan gran peligro como este en +que estamos. Decidme vuestro parecer.” Yo le respondí: “Señor: el peligro +en que estamos bien lo veo, que es muy mayor de lo que se puede pensar. +El pasar desta Isla á la Isla Española en tan poca vasija como es la +canoa, no solamente lo tengo por dificultoso, sino por imposible: porque +haber de atravesar un golfo de cuarenta leguas de mar y entre islas donde +la mar es mas impetuosa y de menos reposo, no sé quien se ose aventurar á +peligro tan notorio”. Su Señoría no me replicó, persuadiendome reciamente +que yo era el que lo habia de hacer, á lo cual yo respondí: “Señor: +muchas veces he puesto mi vida á peligro de muerte por salvar la vuestra +y de todos estos que aqui estan, y nuestro Señor milagrosamente me ha +guardado y la vida; y con todo no han faltado murmuradores que dicen que +vuestra Señoria me acomete á mí todas las cosas de honra, habiendo en la +compañía otros que las harian tan bien como yo: y por tanto paréceme á mí +que vuestra Señoría los haga llamar á todos y los proponga este negocio, +para ver si entre todos ellos habrá alguno que lo quiera emprender, lo +cual yo dudo; y cuando todos se echen de fuera, yo pondré mi vida á +muerte por vuestro servicio, como muchas veces lo he hecho”. + +Luego el dia siguiente su Señoría los hizo juntar á todos delante sí, y +les propuso el negocio de la manera que á mí: é oido, todos enmudecieron, +y algunos dijeron que era por demas platicarse en semejante cosa, porque +era imposible en tan pequeña vasija pasar tan impetuoso y peligroso golfo +de cuarenta leguas como este, entre estas dos islas donde muy recias +naos se habian perdido andando á descubrir, sin poder romper ni forzar +el ímpetu y furia de las corrientes. Entonces yo me levanté y dije: +“Señor: una vida tengo no mas, yo la quiero aventurar por servicio de +vuestra Señoría y por el bien de todos los que aquí estan, porque tengo +esperanza en Dios nuestro Señor que vista la intencion con que yo lo hago +me librará, como otras muchas veces lo ha hecho.” Oida por el Almirante +mi determinacion levantóse y abrazóme y besóme en el carrillo, diciendo: +“Bien sabia yo que no habia aquí ninguno que osase tomar esta empresa +sino vos: esperanza tengo en Dios nuestro Señor saldreis della con +vitoria como de las otras que habeis emprendido.” + +El dia siguiente yo puse mi canoa á monte, y le eché una quilla postiza, +y le dí su brea y sebo, y en la popa y proa clavéle algunas tablas para +defensa de la mar que no se me entrase como hiciera siendo rasa; y +púsele un mástil y su vela, y metí los mantenimientos que pude para mí +y para un cristiano y para seis indios, que éramos ocho personas, y no +cabian mas en la canoa: y despedíme de su Señoría y de todos, y fuime la +costa arriba de la Isla de Jamaica, donde estábamos, que hay dende las +naos hasta el cabo della treinta y cinco leguas, las cuales yo navegué +con gran peligro y trabajo, porque fuí preso en el camino de Indios +salteadores en la mar, de que Dios me libró milagrosamente. Y llegado al +cabo de la isla, estando esperando que la mar se amansase para acometer +mi viage, juntáronse muchos Indios y determinaron de matarme y tomar la +canoa y lo que en ella llevaba; y así juntos jugaron mi vida á la pelota +para ver á cual dellos cabria la ejecucion del negocio. Lo cual sentido +por mí víneme ascondidamente á mi canoa, que tenia tres leguas de allí, +y hícime á la vela y víneme donde estaba el Almirante, habiendo qnince +dias que de allí habia partido: y contele todo lo sucedido, cómo Dios +milagrosamente me habia librado de las manos de aquellos salvages. Su +Señoría fue muy alegre de mi venida, y preguntóme si volveria al viage. +Yo dije que sí, llevando gente que estuviese conmigo en el cabo de la +isla hasta que yo entrase en la mar á proseguir mi viage. Su Señoría me +dió setenta hombres y con ellos á su hermano le Adelantado, que fuesen +y estuviesen conmigo hasta embarcarme, y tres dias despues. Y desta +manera volví al cabo de la isla donde estuve cuatro dias. Viendo que la +mar se amansaba me despedí dellos y ellos de mí, con hartas lágrimas; y +encomendéme á Dios y á nuestra Señora del Antigua, y navegué cinco dias +y cuatro noches que jamas perdí el remo de la mano gobernando la canoa y +los compañeros remando. Plugo á Dios nuestro Señor que en cabo de cinco +dias yo arribé á la Isla Española, al Cabo de S. Miguel, habiendo dos +dias que no comiamos ni bebiamos por no tenello; y entré con mi canoa +en una ribera muy hermosa, donde luego vino mucha gente de la tierra y +trajeron muchas cosas de comer, y estuve allá dos dias descansando. Yo +tomé seis Indios de allí, dejados los que llevaba, y comencé á navegar +por la costa de la Isla Española, que hay dende allí hasta la Cibdad +de Santo Domingo ciento y treinta leguas que yo habia de andar, porque +estaba allí el Gobernador, que era el Comendador de Lares; y habiendo +andado por la costa de la isla ochenta leguas, no sin grandes peligros y +trabajos, porque la isla no estaba conquistada ni allanada, llegué á la +Provincia de Azoa, que es veinte y cuatro leguas antes de Santo Domingo, +y allí supe del Comendador Gallego como el Gobernador era partido á +la Provincia de Xuragoa á allanarla; la cual estaba cincuenta leguas +de allí. Y esto sabido dejé mi canoa y tomé el camino por tierra de +Xuragoa, donde hallé el Gobernador, el cual me detuvo allí siete meses +hasta que hizo quemar y ahorcar ochenta y cuatro Caciques, señores de +vasallos, y con ellos á Nacaona la mayor señora de la isla, á quien todos +ellos obedecian y servian. Y esto acabado vine de pie á tierra de Santo +Domingo, que era setenta leguas de allí, y estuve esperando viniesen naos +de Castilla, que habia mas de un año que no habian venido. Y en este +comedio plugo á Dios que vinieron tres naos, de las cuales yo compré la +una y la cargué de vituallas, de pan y vino y carne y puercos y carneros +y frutas, y la envié adonde estaba el Almirante para en que viniesen él y +toda la gente como vinieron allí á Santo Domingo y de allí á Castilla. E +yo me vine delante en las otras dos naos á hacer relacion al Rey y á la +Reina de todo lo sucedido en aquel viage. + +Paraceme que será bien que se diga algo de lo acaecido al Almirante y +á su familiar en un año que estuvieron perdidos en aquesta isla: y es +que dende á pocos dias que yo me partí los Indios se amotinaron y no +le querian traer de comer como antes; y él los hizo llamar á todos los +Caciques y les digo que se maravillaba dellos en no traerle la comida +como solian, sabiendo como él les habia dicho, que habia venido allí +por mandado de Dios, y que Dios estaba enojado dellos, y que él ge lo +mostraria aquella noche por señales que haria en el cielo; y como aquella +noche era el eclipse de la luna que casi toda se escureció, díjoles que +Dios hacia aquello por enojo que tenia dellos porque no le traian de +comer, y ellos lo creyeron y fueron muy espantados, y prometieron que le +traerian siempre de comer, como de hecho lo hicieron, hasta que llegó la +nao con los mantenimentos que yo envié, de que no pequeño gozo fue en el +Almirante y en todos los que con él estaban: que despues en Castilla me +dijo su Señoría que en toda su vida [nunca?] habia visto tan alegre dia, +y que nunca pensó salir de allí vivo: y en esta nao se embarcó y vino á +Santo Domingo y de allí á Castilla. + +He querido poner aquí esta breve suma de mis trabajos y grandes señalados +servicios, cuales nunca hizo hombre á Señor, ni los hará de aquí adelante +del mundo; y esto á fin que mis hijos lo sepan y se animen á servir, é su +Señoria sepa que es obligado á hacerles muchas mercedes. + +Venido su Señoría á la Corte, y estando en Salamanca en la cama enfermo +de gota, andando yo solo entendiendo en sus negocios y en la restitucion +de su estado y de la gobernacion para su hijo D. Diego, yo le dije ansi: +“Señor: ya vuestra Señoría sabe lo mucho que os he servido y lo mas +que trabajo de noche y de dia en vuestros negocios: suplico á vuestra +Señoria me señale algun galardon para en pago dello:” y él me respondió +alegremente que yo lo señalase y él lo cumpliria, porque era mucha razon. +Y entonces yo le señalé y supliqué á su Señoría me hiciese merced del +oficio del Alguacilazgo mayor de la Isla Española para en toda mi vida: y +su Señoría dijo que de muy buena voluntad, y que era poco para lo mucho +que yo habia servido; y mandóme que lo dijese ansi al Sr. D. Diego, su +hijo, el cual fue muy alegre de la merced á mí hecha de dicho oficio, y +dijo que si su padre me lo daba con una mano, él con dos. Y esto es ansi +la verdad para el siglo que á ellos tiene y á mi espera. + +Habiendo yo acabado, no sin grandes trabajos mios, de negociar la +restitucion de la gobernacion de las Indias al Almirante D. Diego, mi +Señor, siendo su padre fallecido, le pedí la provision del dicho oficio. +Su Señoria me respondió que lo tenia dado al Adelantado su tio; pero que +él me daria otra cosa equivalente á aquella. Yo dije que aquella diese +él á su tio, y á mi me diese lo que su padre y él me habian prometido, +lo cual no se hizo; y yo quedé cargado de servicios sin ningun galardon, +y el Sr. Adelantado, sin haberlo servido, quedó con mi oficio y con el +galardon de todos mis afanes. + +Llegado su Señoría á la Cibdad de Santo Domingo por Gobernador tomó las +varas dió este oficio á Francisco de Garay, criado del Sr. Adelantado, +que lo sirviese por él. Esto fue en diez dias del mes de Julio de mil +quinientas diez años. Valia entonces el oficio á lo menos un cuento de +renta, del cual la Vireina, mi Señora, como tutriz y curadora del Virey, +mi Señor, y él me son en cargo realmente y me lo deben de justicia y _de +foro conscientiæ_, porque me fue hecha la merced de él, y no se cumplió +conmigo dende el dia que se dió al Adelantado hasta el postrero de mis +dias, porque si se me diera yo fuera el mas rico hombre de la isla y mas +honrado; y por no se me dar soy el mas pobre della, tanto que no tengo +una casa en que more sin alquiler. + +Y porque haberseme de pagar lo que el oficio ha rentado seria muy +dificultoso, yo quiero dar un medio y será este: que su Señoría haga +merced del Alguacilazgo mayor de la Cibdad de Santo Domingo á uno de +mis hijos para en toda su vida, y al otro le haga merced de su Teniente +de Almirante en la dicha Cibdad: y con hacer merced destos dos oficios +á mis hijos de la manera que he aquí dicho, y poniéndolos en cabeza de +quien los serva por ellos hasta que sean de edad, su Señoría descargará +la conciencia del Almirante su padre, y yo me satisfaré de la paga que +se me debe de mis servicios: y en esto no diré mes de dejallo en sus +conciencias de sus Señorías, y hagan en ello lo que mejor les pareciere. + +Item: Dejo por mis albaceas y ejecutores deste mi testamento, aquí en +la corte, al Bachiller Estrada y á Diego de Arana, juntamente con la +Vireina, mi Señora, y suplico yo á su Señoría lo acepte y les mande á +ellos lo mismo. + +_Otra cláusula._ Item: Mando que mis albaceas compren una piedra grande, +la mejor que hallaren, y se ponga sobre mi sepultura, y se escriba en +derredor della estas letras: “Aquí yace el honrado caballero Diego Mendez +que sirvió mucho á la Corona Real de España en el descubrimiento y +conquista de las Indias con el Almirante D. Cristobal Colon, de gloriosa +memoria, que las descubrió, y despues por sí con naos suyas á su costa: +falleció, etc. Pido de limosna un Pater noster y una Ave María.” + +Item: En medio de la dicha piedra se haga una canoa, que es un madero +cavado en que los Indios navegan, porque en otra tal navegó trescientas +leguas, y encima pongan unas letras que digan: “Canoa.” + +Caros y amados hijos mios, y de mi muy cara y amada muger Doña +Francisca de Ribera, la bendicion de Dios Todopoderoso, Padre y Hijo +y Espíritu Santo y la mia descienda sobre vos y vos cubra y os haga +catolicos cristianos, y os dé gracia que siempre le ameis y temais. +Hijos: encomiendoos mucho la paz y concordia, y que seais muy conformes +y no soberbios, sino muy humildes y muy amigables á todos los que +contratáredes, porque todos os tengan amor: servid lealmente al Almirante +mi Señor, y su Señoría os hará muchas mercedes por quien él es, y +porque mis grandes servicios lo merecen; y sobre todo os mando, hijos +mios, seais muy devotos y oyais muy devotamente los Oficios Divinos, y +haciéndolo ansi Dios nuestro Señor os dará largos dias de vida. A él +plega por su infinita bondad haceros tan buenos como yo deseo que seais, +y os tenga siempre de su mano. Amen. + +Los libros que de acá os envio son los siguientes: + +Arte de bien morir de Erasmo. Un sermon de Erasmo en romance. Josefo de +Bello Judaico. La Filosofía moral de Aristóteles. Los libros que se dicen +Lingua Erasmi. El libro de la Tierra santa. Los coloquios de Erasmo. Un +tratado de las querellas de la Paz. Un libro de Contemplaciones de la +Pasion de nuestro Redentor. Un tratado de le venganza de la muerte de +Agamenon, y otros tratadillos. + +Ya dije, hijos mios, que estos libros os dejo por mayorazgo, con las +condiciones que estan dichas de suso en el testamento, y quiero que +vayan todos con algunas Escrituras mias, que se hallarán en el arca que +está en Sevilla, que es de cedro, como ya está dicho: pongan tambien en +esta el mortero de mármol que está en poder del Sr. D. Hernando, ó de su +mayordomo. + +Digo yo Diego Mendez que esta Escritura contenida en trece hojas es mi +testamento y postrimera voluntad, porque yo lo ordené é hice escribir, +y lo firmé de mi nombre, y por él revoco y doy por ningunos otros +cualesquier testamentos hechos en cualesquier otros tiempos ó lugar; +y solo este quiero que valga, que es hecho en la villa de Valladolid +en diez y nueve dias del mes de Junio, año de nuestro Redentor de mil +quinientos treinta y seis años. Diego Mendez. E yo el dicho García de +Vera, Escribano Notario público, presente fui á todo lo que dicho es, que +de mi se hace mencion, é por mandado del dicho Sr. Teniente é pedimento +del dicho Bachiller Estrada, este testamento en estas veinte é seis hojas +de papel, pliego entero, como aquí parece, fice escrebir como ante mí se +presentó é abrió, é ansi queda originalmente en mi poder. E por ende fice +aquí este mi signo tal en (_está signado_) testimonio de verdad. García +de Vera. (_Está firmado._) + +_Concuerda literalmente con las cláusulas copiadas de un testimonio +signado y firmado por el expresado Escribano García de Vera, que obra +originalmente en el Archivo del Excmo. Sr. Almirante Duque de Veraguas, +de donde lo copié en Madrid á veinte y cinco dias del mes de Marzo de mil +ochocientos veinte y cinco años.—Tomas Gonzalez._ + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[213] Donna Maria de Toledo, widow of Diego Columbus. + +[214] Possibly the ship they abandoned was inferior in size, or in some +other respect. + +[215] Ferdinand Columbus says that the Indians called this eastern point +of the island Aramaquique, and that it was thirty-four leagues from +Maima, where the admiral was. + +[216] This cape is since called Cape Tiburon. Mendez does not speak of +his arrival at the little island of Naraza, and other places spoken of by +Ferdinand Columbus and Herrera. + +[217] This should be Xaragua. + +[218] On the twenty-eighth of June 1504; he entered the harbour of St. +Domingo on the thirteenth of August, started for Spain on the twelfth of +September, and arrived at San Lucar on Thursday, the seventh of November. + +[219] By B. von Breydenbach.(?) + + +FINIS. + + + + +INDEX. + + + Adda (Marquis d’), his reproduction of the printed text of the first + letter, cxxv + + Adelantado, _see_ Bartholomew Columbus + + Adelphus (John), his connection with St. Dié, lxxxvi + + Ages, a kind of turnip used by the Indians, 63, 68 + + Aguacadiba, village in Jamaica, 223 + + Aguado (Juan), recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, 93 + + Aguja (Punta de la), Needle Point, 125 + + Ailly (Cardinal Pierre d’), his Imago Mundi studied by Columbus, xlv + + Alcatraz (Point), 125 + + Alfragan, the Arab astronomer, his influence on Columbus, xlvii + + Aloes, found in Española, 67 + + Ameyro (The Cacique), his friendship for Diego Mendez, 225 + + Animals in Española, 42 + + —— of Cariay, 200 + + Antillia, supposed island of, xxvi + + Appianus, his Mappe-monde bearing the name of America, lxxxvii + + Arabian expedition to America, xix + + Arana (Diego de), Governor of Española, 12 + + —— (Pedro de), commander of one of the ships sent on by Columbus + to Española in the third voyage, 115 + + Arenal (Point of), 119 + + Arguin, called by Columbus Hargin, 136 + + Arin, Island of, 135 + + Arrows used by the Caribbees, 31 + + Astrolabe rendered useful for seamen, li + + Atlantis, spoken of by Plato, v + + Australia discovered by the Portuguese within one hundred years of + the rounding of Cape Bojador by Prince Henry’s navigators, i + + Avan, a province of Juana, 10 + + Ayala (Pedro de), on the supposed islands in the Atlantic, xxvi + + Ayay, one of the Caribbee Islands, 31 + + Axes made of stone used by the Indians, 68 + + Azoa, Province of Española, 232 + + + Bacon (Roger), his _Opus Majus_ supplied the portion of the _Imago + Mundi_ which is supposed to have inspired Columbus with the + idea of discovering America, xlvii + + Bardson (Heriulf), establishes himself at Heriulfsnes in Greenland, x + + Barrow (Sir John), his account of Cortereal’s expedition, xxvii + + Bastimentos, harbour of, 184 + + Becher (Captain), agrees with Muñoz on the landfall of Columbus, lx + + Behaim (Martin), on the supposed islands in the Atlantic, xxvi; + said to have discovered the Azores, xxx; + the evidence of his globe, xxxi; + in conjunction with Roderigo and Josef, renders the astrolabe + useful for seamen, li + + Belem and Belpuerto, disabled ships left there, 193 + + —— or Yebra, river, 213 + + Beltran, recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, 92 + + Bianco (Andrea), his map, on which is the word “Antillia,” xxvi + + Bibliography, cviii + + Birds’ nests in Española at Christmas, 42 + + Bobadilla (D. Francisco de), his infamous treatment of Columbus, lxxi; + his death, lxxvi + + —— ——, Columbus’s account of his arrival in Española, 159; + his conduct, 160; + arrests Columbus, 167; + seizes his house and papers, 173 + + Bohio discovered, lxiii + + Bohio, a province of Española, 41 + + Bojador (Cape), rounded by Prince Henry’s navigators in 1434, i + + Bonacca, _see_ Guanaga + + Brazil, supposed island of, xxvi + + Bremen (Adam of), makes the earliest allusion (_printed_) to the + colonization of America by the Scandinavians, viii + + Brerewood (Edward), derives the Americans from the Tartars, vi + + Burenquen (Porto Rico), discovered, 39 + + + Cabot (John), his zeal for the discovery of the supposed islands in + the Atlantic, xxvi + + —— (Sebastian), his discovery demonstrated, xxviii + + Cabras, Goat Island, 43 + + Canaanites supposed to have peopled America, vi + + Cannibals, Caribbee, 26, 29 + + —— in Cariay, 201 + + Canoes, 9, 10 + + Caonabó, a chief in Española accused of having burned the Spanish + settlement, 48; + gold mines in Niti belonging to him, 64; + his bad disposition towards the Christians, 77 + + Cape Gracias a Dios, 178 + + Cape Honduras, lxxvii + + Cape Verde Islands discovered by Diego Gomez (see _Life of Prince + Henry the Navigator_), 115, 116 + + Capitana ship, the captaincy given to Diego Mendez, 222 + + Carabajal, Alonzo Sanchez de, commanded one of the ships sent on by + Columbus to Española in the third voyage, 115 + + Caracol, Bay of, in Española, 47 + + Caradoc of Llancarvan’s account of the Welsh expedition, xxi + + Carambaru, golden mirrors worn by the Indians, 180 + + Cariay, Columbus arrives there in his fourth voyage, 180; + enchanters, 199; + sepulchre, 199; + animals, 200; + cannibals, 201; + copper mines, 201; + cotton beautifully worked, 201 + + Caribbee Islands discovered, 25 + + Caseneuve (Guillaume de), his name confounded with that of Columbus, + xxxviii + + Cathay, Northern China, 194 + + Cazadilla, bishop of Ceuta, condemns the proposed enterprise of + Columbus, lii + + Celts supposed to have peopled America, ix + + Ceyre, Cayre or Charis (Dominica), 31; + said to abound in gold, 37, 38 + + Chanca’s (Dr.) letter, iii; + history of, cxxxviii, cxl; + physician to the fleet of Columbus, in his second voyage, his + letter, 19; + mentioned in the memorial of Columbus, 93 + + Chinese supposed to have reached America by the north, vii + + Ciamba, province of, gold mines, 180 + + Cibao, gold mines of, 69 + + Ciguare, dress and customs of the people, 181 + + Cladera (Don Cristóbal) refutes the statements respecting Behaim, xxx + + Cobrava Aurira, province, 214 + + Columbus (Bartholomew) sent by his brother to Henry VII, lvi; + arrested by Bobadilla, 167 + + Columbus (Christopher) derives the idea of explorations to the West + from Prince Henry’s researches into the Atlantic, i; + the importance of his original letters, ii; + the pathos and dignity of his complaints, iii; + the evidence of European adventurers having visited America before + his time, does not detract from his merit, xxxi; + every previous discovery having been accidental, xxxii; + his parentage and date of birth, xxxii, xxxiv; + birthplace, xxxv; + education, xxxv; + his connection with Guillaume de Caseneuve discussed, xxxvii, xlii; + his sojourn in Portugal, where he first receives the inspiration + of his great discovery, his marriage with the daughter of + Perestrello and consequent inheritance of his papers, etc., + xlii, xliii; + the facts and signs which convinced him there was land to the West, + xliii, xliv; + his studies, xlv; + influenced by al Fergani or Alfragan, xlvii; + Marco Polo and Sir John Mandeville, xlviii; + his letter to Toscanelli and the answer, xlix; + his patience in biding his time for application to the King of + Portugal, l; + his letters of 1477 quoted by his son, l; + his audience with the king, li; + his enterprise condemned by the Council, lii; + his unworthy treatment, lii; + and departure, liii; + conjectures respecting his subsequent history, liii; + his visit to the Convent of Rabida, liv; + his various fortune at the Court of Spain, liv, lvii; + sets out on his first great voyage, lvii; + discovers the Island of San Salvador, etc., the true landfall + discussed, lviii-lxiii; + establishes a colony in Hispaniola, lxiii; + his stormy passage home, lxiv; + reception at the Azores, lxiv; + arrives at Lisbon, lxv; + and reaches Spain in safety, lxvi; + his triumph at Barcelona, lxvi; + the Papal bull obtained, lxvii; + his second voyage, lxviii; + and return, lxix; + third voyage, lxix; + his cruel treatment, lxxi, lxxii; + arrives in Spain and is honourably received by the sovereigns, + lxxiii; + his fourth voyage, lxxiv; + and return, lxxix; + his sufferings till death, lxxx; + his first letter addressed to Raphael Sanchez, 1; + discovers San Salvador, Santa Maria de Conception, Fernandina, + Isabella and Juana, 2; + sees another island and names it Española, 3; + takes possession of Española and builds the fortress of Villa de + Navidad, 11; + describes the benefits to be derived from his discoveries, 15, 16; + leaves Cadiz for his second voyage, arrives at the Great Canary, + Gomera, 20; + Ferro, 21; + discovers Dominica and Marigalante, 22; + discovers Guadaloupe, 24; + discovers Montserrat, Santa Maria la Redonda, Santa Maria la + Antigua, and St. Martin, 34; + discovers Santa Cruz and St. Ursula, 38; + discovers Porto Rico, which he names St. John the Baptist, 39; + arrives at Española, 41; + receives a deputation from Guacamari, 44; + finds the settlement destroyed by fire, 51; + goes to visit Guacamari, 54; + selects Port Isabella for the new settlement, builds the City of + Marta, 62; + sends two parties in search of gold mines, 69; + his memorial to the King and Queen of the results of the second + voyage, 72; + refers to Gorbalan and Hojeda for an account of the gold to be + found, 74; + describes the difficulties and dangers to be encountered, 75, 81; + describes the fertility of the country, 81; + asks for supplies, 82, 84; + asks for the confirmation of Antonio de Torres as governor of the + City of Isabella, 92; + recommends to the notice of the King and Queen Messire Pedro + Margarite, Gaspar, Beltran, and Juan Aguado, 92, 93; + also Dr. Chanca, 93; + Coronel, 95; + also Gil Garcia, 96; + complains of the conduct of Juan de Soria, 98; + asks for further assistance and stores, 100, 104; + recommends Villacorta, 105; + his narrative of his third voyage, 108; + his address to the King and Queen, 108, 114; + sails from San Lucar, 114; + discovers Trinidad, 118; + describes Indians in a canoe near the point of Arenal, 119; + violent currents near the Point, 122; + beauty of the country at the Punta de la Aguja, 125; + conjectures respecting the violent currents, 130; + the north star, 133; + form of the earth, 134, 135; + describe the Gulf of Pearls, 139; + his conjectures as to the situation of Paradise, 141, 146; + letter to the nurse of Prince John, 152; + describes his troubles on arriving at Española, 155, 156; + conduct of Hojeda and Vincent Yañez, 156; + of Adrian Mogica and Don Ferdinand, 157; + describes Bobadilla’s arrival, 160; + his arrest by Bobadilla, 167; + his house and papers seized, 173; + letter to the King and Queen on his fourth voyage, 175; + his reception in Española, 176; + dreadful storm, 176, 178; + his distress on account of his son and brother, 178, 179; + arrives at Cariay, hears of gold mines in Ciamba, goes to + Carambaru, 180; + describes the people of Ciguare, 181; + his conjectures with regard to the earth, 183; + reaches the harbour of Bastimentos, 184; + his suffering during an awful tempest, 185; + returns to Puerto Gordo, 186; + reaches Veragua, 187; + finds gold mines, 188; + deceit of the Cacique Quibian, 188; + establishes a settlement, 189; + takes the Cacique prisoner, 189; + describes pathetically his misfortunes on this coast, 190; + his dream, 191, 192; + supposes himself in China, 194; + reaches Jamaica, 195; + repeats the course of his voyage, 196, 197; + describes the enchanters of Cariay, 199; + sculptured sepulchre, 199; + animals, 200; + products, 201; + abundance of gold in Veragua, 202; + conjectures concerning the gold of Solomon, 204; + his distress for the condition of Española and Paria, 206; + his touching complaint of cruel treatment, 209, 211; + his conference with Diego Mendez related by the latter, 226 + + Columbus (Diego), information given by him to Las Casas respecting + his father, xliii; + leaves Lisbon with his father, liii; + his father’s anxiety about him, 179 + + —— (Juan Antonio), commanded one of the ships sent on by Columbus + to Española in the third voyage, 115 + + —— (Ferdinand), on the subject of his father’s parentage and date + of birth, xxxii; + on the subject of Caseneuve, xxxviii; + on the subject of his father’s first thoughts of his great + discovery, xlii; + relates the facts and signs which led him on to the West, xliii; + collects his father’s books and bequeaths them to the Cathedral of + Seville, xlv; + speaks of the influence of Alfragan, xlvii; + quotes a letter of his father’s, l; + his statement that his father went to Spain in 1484, liii + + Copper mines in Cariay, 201 + + Coral ornaments worn by the Indians of Ciguare, 181 + + Cordeiro quoted by Sir John Barrow, xxvii + + Coronel recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, 95 + + Correa (Pedro), brother-in-law of Columbus, confirms his idea of land + to the West, xliii + + Cortereals, the Portuguese explorers, xxvii + + Cosa (Juan de la), his map, lxi, lxii, lxxxix + + Cosmographiæ Introductio, of Waldseemüller, lxxxiv + + Cotton worn by the Indian women, 6; + great quantities in the islands, 15; + found in Guadaloupe, both spun and prepared for spinning, 25; + spun and woven into sheets by the Caribbees, 29; + worn in bands round the knee and ankle by the Caribbee women, 30; + hammock of, 56; + worn by the Indian women, 64; + trees of in Española, 66; + worked in colours and worn by Indians near Point Arenal, 120; + beautifully worked in Cariay, 201 + + Crantor confirms the story told by Plato, v + + Cuba, _see_ Juana + + Cubagua discovered, lxx + + + Dati (Giuliano), his poem, xc, cvii + + Dauphin (Port) in Española, 60 + + De Murr, his evidence on the subject of Behaim, xxxi + + De Guignes, states that the Chinese reached America by the north, + vii; + his opinion on the Arabian expedition, xix + + Deza (Diego de), the faithful friend of Columbus, lv, lxxx + + Documents—Columbus’ letter on the first voyage, 1; + Dr. Chanca’s on the second voyage, 19; + Memorial of Columbus on the second voyage, 72; + letter of Columbus on the third voyage, 108; + his letter to the nurse of Prince John, 152; + his letter on the fourth voyage, 175; + narrative of Diego Mendez, 212 + + Dogs in Española, 42 + + Dominica, Island of, discovered, 22; + described in second voyage, 31; + report of gold there, 37 + + Dragon’s mouth, 139 + + Ducks found in Zuruquia, 13 + + + Editio Princeps of first letter of Columbus, the rival claims + discussed, cxxii, cxxxviii + + Edrisi on the Arabian expedition, xx + + Egyptians supposed to have colonised America, etc., vi + + El Retrete, lxxviii + + Engaño, Point, Española, 41 + + Eric the Red colonises Greenland, x + + Eric, Greenland Bishop, visits Vineland in 1121, xvii + + Escobar, companion of Diego Mendez, 217 + + Escobedo, Rodrigo de, lieutenant to the governor of Española, 12 + + Española (St. Domingo), seen from Juana, 3; + scenery, harbours, vegetation, spices, gold and other metals, 4-5; + inhabitants, 5-9; + great size, 11; + town of Villa de Navidad, 11; + manners and customs, 12-14; + products, 15; + arrival of Columbus on his second voyage, 41; + its division into provinces, 41; + country described, birds and animals, 42-43; + harbour of Monte Cristi, 45; + river Yaque, 45; + Bay of Caracol, 47; + Port Dauphin, 60; + Port Isabella, 62; + city of Marta, 62; + vegetation, 63; + the people, 64; + gold mines, 64; + products, 66-68; + abundance of gold, 69-70; + Columbus finds the colony in a state of revolt when he arrives + there in his third voyage, 155; + Bobadilla’s arrival, 160; + reception of Columbus on his fourth voyage, 176 + + Evangelista discovered, lxviii + + Exuma discovered, lxiii + + + Fernandina (Great Exuma) discovered, 2 + + Fonseca (Juan Rodriguez), Bishop of Badajos, his enmity to Columbus, + lxviii and 156 + + Fortress built at Villa de Navidad, 11-12 + + + Galea, Cape, now Cape Galeota, the south-east point of Trinidad, 118 + + Gallardo (Don Bartolomé), the _Imago Mundi_ not mentioned in his list + of books in the Columbian library, xlvi + + Gallega Island, 177 + + Garcia, land of, 121; + violent currents between it and the I. of Trinidad, 123 + + Garcia (Gil), recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, 96 + + Gardar, a Dane, discovers Iceland in 863, x + + Gaspar recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, 92 + + Genoa, birthplace of Columbus according to his own assertion, xxxv + + Ghillany’s (Dr. F. W.) copy of Martin Behaim’s globe, xxxi + + Gibbs (Mr.) confirms Navarrete on the landfall of Columbus, lviii + + Giocondi (Fra Giovanni) translated Vespucci’s letter into Latin, + lxxxiv + + Globus Mundi, lxxxv + + Gold and other metals in Española, 5, 15; + report of large quantities at Cayre, 37; + ear-rings and necklaces worn by the Indians, 44; + masks sent as presents by Guacamari, 48; + beaten into thin plates by the Indians, 55; + mines at Cibao and Niti, 69; + great quantities found by Gorbalan and Hojeda, 74; + ornaments of, worn by the Indians of Paria, 125; + Indians direct Columbus where to find it, 128; + seizure of, by Bobadilla, 167; + gold mines of Ciamba, 180; + mirrors of, worn by the Indians of Carambaru, 180; + ornaments of worn by the Indians of Ciguare, 181; + mines of Veragua, 188; + abundance of, in Veragua, 202; + of Solomon, 204 + + Gomara on the subject of the Polish pilot, xxix + + Gorbalan, his discovery of gold, 74 + + Greenland discovered and colonised, x + + Grotius (Hugo) describes America as peopled from Norway, ix + + Grüninger (Johann) of Strasburg, his edition of the _Cosmographiæ + Introductio_, lxxxv + + Guacamari sends a deputation to Columbus, 44; + sends his cousin with an account of the destruction of the Spanish + settlement, 48; + receives Melchior and his party, 54; + his interview with Columbus, 56; + his hammock of cotton net-work, 56; + his pretended wound, 58; + his disappearance, 60 + + Guadaloupe, Island of, discovered, 24; + immense waterfall, 25; + deserted houses, 25; + the inhabitants, 27; + their arts, 29; + manners and customs, 30-32 + + Guanaga Island discovered, lxxvii + + Guanahani (San Salvador, now Watling’s Island) discovered, 2, lxi + + Gunnbiorn discovers Greenland in 877, x + + Gutierrez (Pedro), lieutenant to the governor of Española, 12 + + + Hair, various ways of wearing among the Indians, 37 + + Hammocks used in Española, 56 + + Hatchets and axes made of stone, 68 + + —— etc., made of copper in Cariay, 201 + + Hayti, a province of Española, 41 + + Helgason (Adalbrand and Thorwald), Icelandic clergymen and explorers + in 1285, xviii + + Henry VII. willing to accept the services of Columbus, lvi + + Herrera on the signs which led Columbus to the West, xliv; + his map, its evidence on the landfall of Columbus, lx, lxii + + Hispaniola, _see_ Española + + Hojeda (Alonzo de) sent by Columbus to examine gold mines, 74; + causes great trouble to Columbus in Española, 156 + + Homo, province of Cuba, 222 + + Honey found in Española, 5 + + Hornius, his treatise “_De originibus Americanis_,” vi + + Huareo, Cacique, 224 + + Humboldt’s answer to the theory of De Guignes, viii; + his assertion respecting Ortelius, viii; + his opinion on the Arabian expedition, xx; + on the subject of the Polish pilot, xxix-xxx; + on the date of the _Imago Mundi_, xlvi; + on Roger Bacon, xlvii; + on the landfall of Columbus, lviii; + his testimony to the glory of Columbus, lxxxviii + + Hylacomylus, _see_ Waldseemüller + + + Iceland discovered and colonised, x + + Idolatry not practised by the Indians, 8 + + _Imago Mundi_, studied by Columbus, xlv; + dates assigned to the first edition, xlvi + + Indians, their weapons, 6; + their want of courage, 7; + simple, honest and liberal, 7; + not idolaters, 8; + very intelligent, 9; + their canoes, 10; + manners and customs, 13-14; + deserted houses in Guadeloupe found to contain cotton and human + bones, 25; + Caribbee, their characteristics, 29-30; + their customs, 31-32; + dress, 37; + miserable hovels in Española, 52; + their manner of working gold, 55; + join readily with the Christians in their acts of worship, 65; + tools made of stone, 68; + their food, 68; + of Paria, description of, 119, 124; + their houses, food, etc., 126; + dress, 128; + tell Columbus where to find gold, 128; + of Trinidad described, 137; + of Carambaru wear golden mirrors round their necks, 180; + of Ciguare, dress and customs, 181; + of Cariay, enchanters, 199, 201; + of Veragua, 215, 217; + conflict with, 219, 221; + refuse to supply Columbus, but are frightened into obedience by the + prediction of an eclipse, 234 + + Ingolf, a Norwegian, colonises Iceland, x + + Ires (William), native of Galway, one of the men left by Columbus in + Española, 12 + + Iron not known by the Indians, 6 + + Isabella, her sympathy with Columbus, lxxiii; + her death, lxxx + + —— (Saometo or Crooked Island) discovered, 2 + + —— city, river, and port of Española, 62 + + Isle of Pines, _see_ Evangelista + + Isla de las Bocas, 197 + + + Jamaica, letter on the fourth voyage dated from, 211; + Diego Mendez treats with the natives, 223 + + John, King of Portugal, grants an audience to Columbus, li; + calls a council to consider his proposition, li; + yields to the unworthy advice of his enemies, lii + + Josef and Roderigo, with the assistance of Behaim, render the + astrolabe useful for seamen, li; + condemn the proposed enterprise of Columbus, lii + + Juana (Cuba) discovered, 2; + its size, 10; + contained two provinces, 10 + + + Karlsefne (Thorfinn), distinguished early discoverer, xiii + + King’s Garden (The) discovered, lxiii + + Kircher (Athanasius), his conjectures concerning the colonisation of + America, etc., vi + + Klaproth, his answer to the theory of De Guignes, vii + + Kohl, on the Venetian expedition, xxv + + + Lajes (Tallarte de), an Englishman, one of the men left by Columbus + in Española, 12 + + Lambinet on the date of the _Imago Mundi_, xlvi + + Landfall of Columbus discussed, lviii, lxiii + + Las Casas, his evidence respecting Columbus and Perestrello, xliii + + Launoy (Jean de), on the date of the _Imago Mundi_, xlvi + + Leibnitz acknowledges that he had erroneously inserted the name of + “Christophorus” into the letters supposed to refer to Columbus, + xxxvii-xxxviii + + Lescarbot (Marc) derives the Americans from the Canaanites, vi + + Lief, son of Eric the Red, discovers Newfoundland and Nova Scotia in + the year 1000, xi; + also New England, xii + + Li-Yen, Chinese historian quoted by De Guignes, vii + + Lizards, an Indian luxury, 43 + + Lud (Walter), canon of St. Dié, his college and printing press, + lxxxiv + + + Macao (Point), Española, 41 + + Mackenzie (Commander Alexander Slidell) on the route of Columbus, lxii + + Malte Brun on the Arabian expedition, xx + + Manchineal, fruit of, 24 + + Mandeville (Sir John), influence on Columbus, xlviii + + Mangi, name given to Southern China by Marco Polo, 194 + + Maps: by Nicolò Zeno, xxv; + anonymous, xxvi; + by Andrea Bianco, xxvi; + the earliest MS. bearing the name of America, lxxxvii + + _Mappa Mundi_, by Pierre d’Ailly, treats of Alfragan, xlvii + + Mappe-monde, by Appianus, bearing the name of America, lxxxvii + + Marchena (Fray Juan Perez de), his interest in Columbus, liv + + Marco Polo, influence of his work on Columbus, xlviii + + Marcolini (Francesco), his account of the Venetian expedition, xxii + + Margarita, Island, discovered, 156 + + Margarite, Messire Pedro, recommended to the notice of the King and + Queen, 92 + + Margry (M.), his pretension founded on the fondness of Columbus for + the works of Pierre d’Ailly, xlv; + disproved, xlv + + Marigalante (Island of) discovered, 22 + + Marquez (Diego) and his party lost for four days, 27, 28 + + Marta (City of), Española, 62 + + Martin (Andreas), his respectful treatment of Columbus in his + trouble, lxxii + + Martin (Fernam), his correspondence with Toscanelli, xlix + + Masks of gold made by the Indians, 55 + + Mastic found, 15 + + Matenino (Martinique), 14 + + Mayaguana, supposed by Varnhagen to be the landfall of Columbus, lx + + Mayreni, a chief in Española, accused of burning the Spanish + settlement, 48 + + Medici (Lorenzo di Pier Francesco de’), letter to him from Vespucci, + lxxxiii + + Melchior and his party received by Guacamari, 54 + + Melilla, 224 + + Memorial of Columbus on the second voyage, 72 + + Mendez (Diego), extract from his will, iii; + his devotion to Columbus, lxxviii, lxxix; + his narrative, 212; + renders assistance to Columbus at Veragua, 213; + his reception by the Indians, 216; + conflict with, 219; + made captain of the ship _Capitana_, 222; + goes to treat with the natives of Jamaica for food, 223; + goes to Española and purchases a ship for Columbus, 233; + his interview with Columbus and promised reward, 235, 236; + his disappointment, 237; + directions respecting his grave, 239 + + Mendoza, archbishop of Toledo, adopts the cause of Columbus, lv + + Mogica (Adrian), one of the rebels in Española, 157 + + Mona, 41 + + Monte Cristi, harbour in Española, 45 + + Montserrat (Island of), discovered, 34 + + Mundus Novus of Johann Ottmar, lxxxii + + Muñoz, his opinion that Columbus went to Genoa from Lisbon, liii; + his opinion on the landfall of Columbus, lviii + + Mylius (Abraham) supposes America to have been peopled by the Celts, + ix + + + Narrative by Diego Mendez, 212 + + Navarrete on the landfall of Columbus, lviii + + Navidad, villa de, town and fortress in Española, 12 + + New England discovered, xii + + Newfoundland discovered A.D. 1000, xi + + Nightingales and other birds singing in November in Española, 4 + + Niti, gold mines of, 69 + + Norwegians supposed to have peopled America, ix + + Nova Scotia discovered in the year 1000, xi + + + Odjein or Ougein, 135 + + _Opus Majus_ of Roger Bacon supplied the portion of the _Imago + Mundi_ which is supposed to have given Columbus the idea of + discovering America, xlvii + + Oronoco, confluence of the, with the sea, 123 + + Ortelius, _not_ the first to recognize the discovery of America by + the Northmen, viii + + Ottmar (Johann), his _Mundus Novus_, lxxxii + + Otto (Mr.) of New York, his assertion respecting Martin Behaim and + the Azores, xxx + + Ovando (Nicolas de), the governor of St. Domingo after Bobadilla, + lxxiii + + + Palm-trees, very fine in Española, 4, 5 + + Paracelsus, his statement of the peopling of the New World, vi + + Paradise, supposed situation of, 141 + + Paria, coast of, 121 + + Parrots found in deserted houses in Guadaloupe, 25 + + Pearls, Gulf of, 139 + + Pearls, bracelets of, worn by the Indians of Paria, 125; + Columbus leaves orders with the people in Española to fish for + them, 155 + + Pelicans show that land was near, 40 + + Pelican (Point), 125 + + Peña Blanca (Point), 123 + + Pepper plant, known to the people of Ciguare, 181 + + Perestrello (Felipe Moñiz de), wife of Columbus, and daughter of + Bartollomeu Perestrello, xlii + + —— (Bartollomeu), received the commandership of Porto Santo from + Prince Henry, his widow gives up his papers, etc., to Columbus, + xlii, xliii + + Perez (Alonzo), the first to see land in the third voyage, 118 + + Philesius, pseudonym of Ringmann, lxxxiv + + Pilot of the ship _Capitana_ first to see land on the second voyage, + 21 + + Pinzon, his jealousy of Columbus, lxvi + + Plato speaks of an island called Atlantis, v + + Polar star, observations of Columbus on, 133 + + _Pomponius Mela_, edited by Vadianus, lxxxvi, lxxxvii + + Porto Rico, named by Columbus St. John the Baptist, discovered, 39 + + Portuguese expedition to America, xxvii + + Prince Henry originates the researches into the Atlantic which led to + the discoveries of Columbus, i + + Puerto Bello discovered, lxxviii + + Puerto Gordo, 186 + + + Queen’s Gardens discovered, lxviii + + Quibian, the Cacique, attempts to deceive Columbus, 188; + taken prisoner, 189; + advice of Columbus respecting him, 205 + + + Rabida (Convent of Santa Maria de), Columbus’s visit there, liv + + Rafn (Professor), his work _Antiquitates Americanæ_, ix; + his collection of MSS. on the discoveries of the Northmen, and his + inferences, ix, xviii + + Reeds used as Indian weapons, 6 + + René II, Duke of Lorraine, patron of Walter Lud, lxxxiv + + Reptiles eaten by the Indians, 68 + + Rhubarb and other drugs in Española, 15 + + Ringmann (Mathias), his admiration of Vespucci, lxxxiv; + suggests the name of America, lxxxv + + Roderigo and Josef, with the assistance of Behaim, render the + astrolabe useful for seaman, li; + condemn the proposed enterprise of Columbus, lii + + Roldan, the enemy of Columbus, perishes in a storm, lxxvi + + + Sais, priests of, their story of the Island of Atlantis, v + + Sandy Point (Punta del Arenal), 119 + + S. Brandan, supposed island of, xxvi + + St. Catherine discovered, lxiii + + St. Domingo, _see_ Española + + St. Martin (Island of) discovered, 34 + + St. Ursula and the eleven thousand virgins (Islands of) discovered, + 38 + + San Miguel (Cape), 232 + + —— Salvador (Watling’s Island), name given by Columbus to + Guanahani, 2 + + Santa Cruz (Island of) discovered, 38 + + —— Maria la Antigua (Island of) discovered, 34 + + —— Maria de Concepcion (Long Island) discovered, 2 + + —— Maria la Redonda (Island of) discovered, 34 + + Santander (Serna) on the earliest date of the first edition of the + _Imago Mundi_, xlvi + + Scandinavians supposed to have peopled America, viii + + Sepulchre in Cariay, 199 + + Serpent’s mouth, 123, 139 + + Snakes in Española, 42 + + Soderini (Pietro), Vespucci’s schoolfellow, the letter intended for + him, lxxxiv + + Solon, remarkable story related to, v + + Soria (Juan de), the complaint of Columbus respecting his conduct, 98 + + Sousa, Faria y, silent respecting the Cortereals, xxviii; + supposed discovery of Newfoundland, xxviii + + Spice in Española, 5; + trees, 67 + + Spinning and weaving among the Caribbees, 29 + + Sugar canes, 81 + + Sumner (Mr. George), his search in the archives of Aragon and + Barcelona for records of Columbus, lxvi + + Szkolny (John), Polish pilot said to have discovered America in 1476, + xxix + + + Talavera, his opposition to the projects of Columbus, liv + + Tartars supposed to have peopled America, vi + + Terra firma, note on the supposed discovery in the second voyage, 110; + discovered in the third voyage, 121 + + Theopompus, his story relating to the “New World”, iv + + Thorwald, Lief’s brother explores the coast of America, xii + + Toinard (Nicolas), his correction of Leibnitz, xxxviii + + Torfæus (Thormodus), Norwegian historian, relates the discovery of + America by the Northmen, ix + + Torres (Antonio de), Columbus begs the King and Queen to confirm his + appointment as governor of the city of Isabella, 92 + + —— (Doña Juana de la), letter of Columbus to, lxxii, 152 + + Toscanelli (Paolo), his correspondence with Martins and afterwards + with Columbus, xlv, xlviii, xlix + + Trinidad, Island of, 121; + violent currents between it and Garcia, 123; + city of, 222 + + Tristan (Diego) killed by Indians, 220 + + Turk’s Island, supposed landfall of Columbus, lviii + + Turner’s (Sharon) curious surmise respecting Columbus, liii + + Turuqueira and Ayay, probably the two islands which form Guadaloupe, + 31 + + Tychsen’s opinion on the Arabian expedition, xx + + + Vadianus (Joachim) uses the name of America in 1512, lxxxvi + + Varnhagen (Señor de), his opinion on the landfall of Columbus, lx; + proved to be mistaken, lxii; + referred to on the subject of the earliest edition of the first + letter, cxxv, cxxvii + + Venetian expedition to America, xxii + + Veragua, Columbus arrives there in his fourth voyage, 187; + gold mines, 188; + custom with regard to burial of the chiefs, 203 + + Vespucci (Amerigo), his letter addressed to Lorenzo di Pier Francesco + de’ Medici, lxxxii; + the question of his voyage discussed, lxxxiii; + the way in which his name was given to America, lxxxv + + Vicente (Martin), Portuguese pilot, confirms Columbus in his idea of + land to the West, xliii + + Villacorta recommended to the notice of the King and Queen, 105 + + Vineland, New England, xii + + Vitalis (Ordericus) speaks of the country visited by the + Scandinavians, ix + + + Waldseemüller (Martin), his _Cosmographiæ Introductio_, lxxxiv + + Washington Irving on the landfall of Columbus, lviii; + disproved, lxii + + Watling’s Island proved to be the landfall of Columbus, lxi + + Watt (Joachim), _see_ Vadianus + + Welsh expedition to America, xx + + Williams (Dr.) advocates the truth of the Welsh expedition, xxii + + + Xamaná, a province of Española, 41 + + Xuragoa (Xaragua), 232 + + + Yams in Española, 63 + + Yañez (Vincent), helps the disaffected in Española, 156 + + Yaque (River) in Española, 45 + + + Zeno (Nicolò and Antonio), Venetian nobles, their expedition, xxii, + xxiv; + map published by their descendant, xxv + + Zuruquia, ducks found there, 43 + + T. RICHARDS, 37, QUEEN STREET, W.C. + +[Illustration] + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77820 *** |